EASY TO USE Learning Management System Integration Simple McGraw-Hill Campus is a one-stop teaching and learning experience available to use of any learning management system. Campus provides single sign-on to faculty and students for all McGraw-Hill material and technology from within the school website. McGraw-Hill Campus also allows instructors instant access to all supplements and teaching materials for all McGraw-Hill products. Seamless Secure Blackboard users also benefit from McGraw-Hill’s industry-leading integration, providing single sign-on to access all Connect assignments and automatic feeding of assignment results to the Blackboard grade book. POWERFUL REPORTING Connect generates comprehensive reports and graphs that provide instructors with an instant view of the performance of individual students, a specific section, or multiple sections. Since all content is mapped to learning outcomes, Connect reporting is ideal for accreditation or other administrative documentation. Managerial Accounting Fifteenth Edition Ray H. Garrison, D.B.A., CPA Professor Emeritus Brigham Young University Eric W. Noreen, Ph.D., CMA Professor Emeritus University of Washington Peter C. Brewer, Ph.D., CPA Wake Forest University MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING, FIFTEENTH EDITION Published by McGraw-Hill Education, 2 Penn Plaza, New York, NY 10121. Copyright © 2015 by McGraw-Hill Education. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. Previous editions © 2012, 2010, and 2008. No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior written consent of McGraw-Hill Education, including, but not limited to, in any network or other electronic storage or transmission, or broadcast for distance learning. Some ancillaries, including electronic and print components, may not be available to customers outside the United States. This book is printed on acid-free paper. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 DOW/DOW 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 ISBN 978-0-07-802563-1 MHID 0-07-802563-X Senior Vice President, Products & Markets: Kurt L. Strand Vice President, Content Production & Technology Services: Kimberly Meriwether David Director: Tim Vertovec Brand Manager: Donna M. Dillon Executive Director of Development: Ann Torbert Development Editor II: Katie Jones Director of Digital Content: Patricia Plumb Digital Development Editor: Julie Hankins Digital Product Analyst: Xin Lin Senior Marketing Manager: Kathleen Klehr Director, Content Production: Terri Schiesl Content Project Manager: Pat Frederickson Content Project Manager: Rachel Townsend Senior Buyer: Carol A. Bielski Design: Matthew Baldwin Cover Image: ©Getty Images, 2011 Viennamornings Lead Content Licensing Specialist: Keri Johnson Typeface: 10.5/12 Times Roman Compositor: Laserwords Private Limited Printer: R. R. Donnelley Materials from the Certified Management Accountant Examinations, © 2014 by the Institute of Certified Management Accountants, are reprinted and adapted with permission. All credits appearing on page or at the end of the book are considered to be an extension of the copyright page. Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Garrison, Ray H. Managerial accounting / Ray H. Garrison, D.B.A., CPA, Professor Emeritus, Brigham Young University, Eric W. Noreen, Ph.D., CMA, Professor Emeritus, University of Washington, Peter C. Brewer, Ph.D., CPA, Wake Forest University.—Fifteenth Edition. pages cm Includes index. ISBN 978-0-07-802563-1 (alk. paper)—ISBN 0-07-802563-X (alk. paper) 1. Managerial accounting. I. Noreen, Eric W. II. Brewer, Peter C. III. Title. HF5657.4.G37 2015 658.15’11—dc23 2013036157 The Internet addresses listed in the text were accurate at the time of publication. The inclusion of a website does not indicate an endorsement by the authors or McGraw-Hill Education, and McGraw-Hill Education does not guarantee the accuracy of the information presented at these sites. www.mhhe.com Dedication To our families and to our many colleagues who use this book. v About the Authors Ray H. Garrison is emeritus professor of accounting at Brigham Young University, Provo, Utah. He received his BS and MS degrees from Brigham Young University and his DBA degree from Indiana University. As a certified public accountant, Professor Garrison has been involved in management consulting work with both national and regional accounting firms. He has published articles in The Accounting Review, Management Accounting, and other professional journals. Innovation in the classroom has earned Professor Garrison the Karl G. Maeser Distinguished Teaching Award from Brigham Young University. Eric W. Noreen has taught at INSEAD in France and the Hong Kong Institute of Science and Technology and is emeritus professor of accounting at the University of Washington. Currently, he is the Accounting Circle Professor of Accounting, Fox School of Business, Temple University. He received his BA degree from the University of Washington and MBA and PhD degrees from Stanford University. A Certified Management Accountant, he was awarded a Certificate of Distinguished Performance by the Institute of Certified Management Accountants. Professor Noreen has served as associate editor of The Accounting Review and the Journal of Accounting and Economics. He has numerous articles in academic journals including: the Journal of Accounting Research; The Accounting Review; the Journal of Accounting and Economics; Accounting Horizons; Accounting, Organizations and Society; Contemporary Accounting Research; the Journal of Management Accounting Research; and the Review of Accounting Studies. Professor Noreen has won a number of awards from students for his teaching. vi Garrison Noreen Brewer Peter C. Brewer is a Lecturer in the Department of Accountancy at Wake Forest University. Prior to joining the faculty at Wake Forest, he was an accounting professor at Miami University for 19 years. He holds a BS degree in accounting from Penn State University, an MS degree in accounting from the University of Virginia, and a PhD from the University of Tennessee. He has published more than 35 articles in a variety of journals including: Management Accounting Research; the Journal of Information Systems; Cost Management; Strategic Finance; the Journal of Accountancy; Issues in Accounting Education; and the Journal of Business Logistics. Professor Brewer is a member of the editorial board of the Journal of Accounting Education and has served on the editorial board of Issues in Accounting Education. His article “Putting Strategy into the Balanced Scorecard” won the 2003 International Federation of Accountants’ Articles of Merit competition, and his articles “Using Six Sigma to Improve the Finance Function” and “Lean Accounting: What’s It All About?” were awarded the Institute of Management Accountants’ Lybrand Gold and Silver Medals in 2005 and 2006. He has received Miami University’s Richard T. Farmer School of Business Teaching Excellence Award. Prior to joining the faculty at Miami University, Professor Brewer was employed as an auditor for Touche Ross in the firm’s Philadelphia office. He also worked as an internal audit manager for the Board of Pensions of the Presbyterian Church (U.S.A.). Managerial Accounting F if t e e nt h E d i t i on vii Let Garrison be Your Guide Garrison truly is the gold standard of managerial accounting texts. Pamela Rouse, Butler University It is the ‘Bible’ of Managerial Accounting. Mark Motluck, Anderson University Garrison is clearly the best managerial accounting text available. ‘Carleton Donchess, Bridgewater State University’ I am a big fan of this book. I have taught this course with a few other books and this book does the best job tying all the concepts together. When asked I always refer to this book as being superior to the other books that I have used. Christopher O’Byrne, Cuyamaca College viii Garrison For centuries, the lighthouse has provided guidance and safe passage for sailors. Similarly, Garrison/Noreen/Brewer has successfully guided millions of students through managerial accounting, helping them sail smoothly through the course. Decades ago, lighthouses were still being operated manually. In these days of digital transformation, lighthouses are run using automatic lamp changers and other modern devices. In much the same way, Garrison/ Noreen/Brewer has evolved over the years. Today, the Garrison book not only guides students—accounting majors and other business majors alike—safely through the course but is enhanced by a number of powerful new tools to augment student learning and increase student motivation. McGraw-Hill Connect Accounting and the LearnSmart Advantage Suite offer a number of features to facilitate student learning. NEW Intelligent Resource Technology interface for Connect Accounting includes improved answer acceptance for formatting issues, a general journal application that looks and feels more like a general ledger software package, and table entry for select problems so students can complete calculations online. Animated, narrated Interactive Presentations for each learning objective teach the core concepts of the text and animated, narrated Guided Examples connected to practice exercises provide a step-by-step walkthrough of a similar exercise, assisting students when they need it most. The student library within Connect gives students access to additional resources, such as forms for the Applying Excel feature, an electronic version of the textbook, and more. The NEW LearnSmart Advantage Suite, powerful products fueled by the proven McGraw-Hill LearnSmart engine, include additional learning resources in LearnSmart Achieve and the first ever adaptive eBook experience in SmartBook. These products utilize data collected from over 2 million student users and advanced scientific algorithms to ensure that every minute a student spends studying is the most efficient and productive minute possible for that individual student. Just as the lighthouse continues to provide reliable guidance to seafarers, the Garrison/Noreen/Brewer book continues its tradition of helping students sail successfully through managerial accounting by always focusing on three important qualities: relevance, accuracy, and clarity. Noreen Brewer RELEVANCE. Every effort is made to help students relate the concepts in this book to the decisions made by working managers. In the fifteenth edition, the authors have added a new section to Chapter 1 titled Managerial Accounting: Beyond the Numbers, which has expanded coverage of leadership skills with the goal of helping all business students better understand why managerial accounting is relevant to their future careers. New and revised In Business boxes throughout the book link chapter concepts to pertinent real-world examples. Service industry references appear throughout the chapter narrative and end-of-chapter material to provide students with relevant context for the material they are learning. The robust Connect Accounting technology package and the LearnSmart Advantage Suite include new and exciting tools to help keep students engaged in the learning process. For these reasons and many more, a student reading Garrison should never have to ask “Why am I learning this?” Ann K. Brooks, University of New Mexico The authors have done a great job explaining managerial accounting concepts and providing realworld examples that students can relate to. Stephen Benner, Eastern Illinois University ACCURACY. The Garrison book continues to set the standard for accurate and reliable material in its fifteenth edition. With each revision, the authors evaluate the book and its supplements in their entirety, working diligently to ensure that the end-of-chapter material, solutions manual, and test bank are consistent, current, and accurate. CLARITY. Generations of students have praised Garrison for the friendliness and readability of its writing, but that’s just the beginning. In the fifteenth edition, the authors have rewritten various chapters with input and guidance from instructors around the country to ensure that teaching and learning from Garrison remains as easy as it can be. The authors’ steady focus on these three core elements has led to tremendous results. Managerial Accounting has consistently led the market, being used by over two million students and earning a reputation for reliability that other texts aspire to match. Managerial Accounting Garrison does a superior job of introducing Managerial Accounting and necessary management skills. In addition, the textbook discusses the crucial topics of why managerial accounting matters to one’s career, ethics, and social responsibility. It provides simple and clear explanations of the concepts with easy to follow examples. It is ideal for undergraduate and graduate level accounting students. Rong Huang, Baruch College The Garrison [text] is clearly the best written managerial accounting book that I have reviewed. The examples throughout the chapter would enable a student to use this book and learn managerial accounting in an on-line or hybrid class. Edna Mitchell, Polk State College F if t e e nt h E d i t i on ix Garrison’s Managerial Accounting includes pedagogical elements that engage and instruct students without cluttering the pages or interrupting student learning. Garrison’s key pedagogical tools enhance and support students’ understanding of the concepts rather than compete with the narrative for their attention. The Foundational 15 Applying Excel Available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4, LO4–5 NEW to the fifteenth edition of Garrison! Each chapter now contains one Foundational 15 exercise that includes 15 “building-block” questions related to one concise set of data. These exercises can be used for in-class discussion or as homework assignments. They are found before the Exercises and are available in Connect Accounting. The Excel worksheet form that appears below is to be used to recreate the extended example on pages 153–155. Download the workbook containing this form from the Online Learning Center at www.mhhe.com/garrison15e. On the website you will also receive instructions about how to use this worksheet form. Applying Excel This end-of-chapter feature links the power of Excel with managerial accounting concepts by illustrating how Excel functionality can be used to better understand accounting data. Applying Excel goes beyond plugging numbers into a template by providing students with an opportunity to build their own Excel worksheets and formulas. Students are then asked “what if” questions in which they analyze not only how related pieces of accounting data affect each other but why they do. Applying Excel immediately precedes the Exercises in twelve of the fifteen chapters in the book and is also integrated with McGraw-Hill’s Connect ® Accounting, allowing students to practice their skills online with algorithmically generated datasets. You should proceed to the requirements below only after completing your worksheet. Required: 1. Check your worksheet by changing the beginning work in process inventory to 100 units, the units started into production during the period to 2,500 units, and the units in ending work in process inventory to 200 units, keeping all of the other data the same as in the original example. If your worksheet is operating properly, the cost per equivalent unit for materials should now be $152.50 and the cost per equivalent unit for conversion gar2563X_ch04_144-186.indd 160 16/09/13 10:31 PM I like the Foundational 15 and its integration of all the chapter objectives into one problem that can be reviewed in class. Melanie Anderson, Slippery Rock University [Applying Excel is] an excellent way for students to programmatically develop spreadsheet skills without having to be taught spreadsheet techniques by the instructor. A significant associated benefit is that students gain more exposure to the dynamics of accounting information by working with what-if scenarios. Earl Godfrey, Gardner–Webb University x Garrison Noreen Brewer Powerful Pedagogy Opening Vignette CHAPTER 4 Each chapter opens with a Business Focus feature that provides a real-world example for students, allowing them to see how the chapter’s information and insights apply to the world outside the classroom. Learning Objectives alert students to what they should expect as they progress through the chapter. Kathy Crusto-Way, Tarrant County College An excellent text that is especially good for introductory managerial accounting classes because it is organized in a logical topic development flow. Elizabeth Widdison, University of Washington, Seattle Costing the “Quicker-Picker-Upper” BUSINESS FO CUS I like how you engage the reader with the “Business Focus” at the beginning of the chapter. Process Costing If you have ever spilled milk, there is a good chance that you used Bounty paper towels to clean up the mess. Procter & Gamble (P&G) manufactures Bounty in two main processing departments—Paper Making and Paper Converting. In the Paper Making Department, wood pulp is converted into paper and then spooled into 2,000 pound rolls. In the Paper Converting Department, two of the 2,000 pound rolls of paper are simultaneously unwound into a machine that creates a two-ply paper towel that is decorated, perforated, and embossed to create texture. The large sheets of paper towels that emerge from this process are wrapped around a cylindrical cardboard core measuring eight feet in length. Once enough sheets wrap around the core, the eight foot roll is cut into individual rolls of Bounty that are sent down a conveyor to be wrapped, packed, and shipped. In this type of manufacturing environment, costs cannot be readily traced to individual rolls of Bounty; however, given the homogeneous nature of the product, the total costs incurred in the Paper Making Department can be spread uniformly across its output of 2,000 pound rolls of paper. Similarly, the total costs incurred in the Paper Converting Department (including the cost of the 2,000 pound rolls that are transferred in from the Paper Making Department) can be spread uniformly across the number of cases of Bounty produced. P&G uses a similar costing approach for many of its products such as Tide, Crest toothpaste, and Dawn dishwashing liquid. ■ LEARNING OBJECTIVES Source: Conversation with Brad Bays, formerly a Procter & Gamble financial executive. After studying Chapter 4, you should be able to: LO4–1 Record the flow of materials, labor, and overhead through a process costing system. LO4–2 Compute the equivalent units of production using the weightedaverage method. LO4–3 Compute the cost per equivalent unit using the weighted-average method. LO4–4 Assign costs to units using the weighted-average method. LO4–5 Prepare a cost reconciliation report. LO4–6 (Appendix 4A) Compute the equivalent units of production using the FIFO method. LO4–7 (Appendix 4A) Compute the cost per equivalent unit using the FIFO method. LO4–8 (Appendix 4A) Assign costs to units using the FIFO method. LO4–9 (Appendix 4A) Prepare a cost reconciliation report using the FIFO method. LO4–10 (Appendix 4B) Allocate service department costs to operating departments using the direct method. LO4–11 (Appendix 4B) Allocate service department costs to operating departments using the step-down method. 144 gar2563X_ch04_144-186.indd 144 9/17/13 6:21 PM Excellent coverage of the topics. Easy for students to read. Sharon Bell, The University of North Carolina at Pembroke Managerial Accounting F if t e e nt h E d i t i on xi IN BUSINESS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN LABOR RATES AND LABOR COST In Business Boxes The emergence of China as a global competitor has increased the need for managers to understand the difference between labor rates and labor cost. Labor rates reflect the amount paid to employees per hour or month. Labor costs measure the employee compensation paid per unit of output. For example, Tenneco has plants in Shanghai, China, and Litchfield, Michigan, that both manufacture exhaust systems for automobiles. The monthly labor rate per employee at the Shanghai plant ranges from $210–$250, whereas the same figure for the Litchfield plant ranges from $1,880–$4,064. A naïve interpretation of these labor rates would be to automatically assume that the Shanghai plant is the lower labor cost facility. A wiser comparison of the two plants’ labor costs would account for the fact that the Litchfield plant produced 1.4 million exhaust systems in 2005 compared to 400,000 units at the Shanghai plant, while having only 20% more employees than the Shanghai plant. In-depth, clear coverage; interesting updated examples in the “In Business” boxes. Natalie Allen, Texas A&M University Extremely well written with great examples, including the Managerial in Action segments. gar2563X_ch04_144-186.indd 149 Loisanne Kattelman, Weber State University These helpful boxed features offer a glimpse into how real companies use the managerial accounting concepts discussed within the chapter. Each chapter contains from three to fourteen of these current examples. Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships COMPUTING MARGIN OF SAFETY FOR A SMALL BUSINESS 205 IN BUSINESS Sam Calagione owns Dogfish Head Craft Brewery, a microbrewery in Rehobeth Beach, Delaware. He charges distributors as much as $100 per case for his premium beers such as World Wide Stout. The high-priced microbrews bring in $800,000 in operating income on revenue of $7 million. Calagione reports that his raw ingredients and labor costs for one case of World Wide Stout are $30 and $16, respectively. Bottling and packaging costs are $6 per case. Gas and electric costs are about $10 per case. If we assume that World Wide Stout is representative of all Dogfish microbrews, then we can compute the company’s margin of safety in five steps. First, variable cost as a percentage of sales is 62% [($30 1 $16 1 $6 1 $10)/$100]. Second, the contribution margin ratio is 38% (1 2 0.62). Third, Dogfish’s total fixed cost is $1,860,000 [($7,000,000 3 0.38) 2 $800,000]. Fourth, the break-even point in dollar sales is $4,894,737 ($1,860,000/0.38). Fifth, the margin of safety is 16/09/13 10:31 PM $2,105,263 ($7,000,000 2 $4,894,737). Source: Patricia Huang, “Château Dogfish,” Forbes, February 28, 2005, pp. 57–59. Prem Narayan and Bob Luchinni met to discuss the results of Bob’s analysis. Prem: Bob, everything you have shown me is pretty clear. I can see what impact the sales manager’s suggestions would have on our profits. Some of those suggestions are quite good and others are not so good. I am concerned that our margin of safety is only 50 speakers. What can we do to increase this number? Bob: Well, we have to increase total sales or decrease the break-even point or both. Prem: And to decrease the break-even point, we have to either decrease our fixed expenses or increase our unit contribution margin? Bob: Exactly. Prem: And to increase our unit contribution margin, we must either increase our selling price or decrease the variable cost per unit? Bob: Correct. Prem: So what do you suggest? Bob: Well, the analysis doesn’t tell us which of these to do, but it does indicate we have a potential problem here. Prem: If you don’t have any immediate suggestions, I would like to call a general meeting next week to discuss ways we can work on increasing the margin of safety. I think everyone will be concerned about how vulnerable we are to even small downturns in sales. MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING IN ACTION THE WRAP-UP These vignettes depict crossfunctional teams working together in real-life settings, working with the products and services that students recognize from their own Cost Structure and Profit Stability lives. Students are shown step-by-step how accounting concepts are implemented in organizations and how these concepts are applied to solve everyday business problems. First, “The Issue” is introduced through a dialogue; the student then walks through the implementation process; finally, “The Wrap-up” summarizes the big picture. CVP Considerations in Choosing a Cost Structure Cost structure refers to the relative proportion of fixed and variable costs in an organization. Managers often have some latitude in trading off between these two types of costs. For example, fixed investments in automated equipment can reduce variable labor costs. In this section, we discuss the choice of a cost structure. We also introduce the concept of operating leverage. Which cost structure is better—high variable costs and low fixed costs, or the opposite? No single answer to this question is possible; each approach has its advantages. To show what we mean, refer to the following contribution format income statements for two gar2563X_ch05_187-232.indd 205 xii Garrison Managerial Accounting in Action Vignettes Noreen 16/09/13 10:39 PM Brewer Applying Excel End-of-Chapter Material Available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4, LO4–5 Managerial Accounting has earned a reputation for the best end-of-chapter practice material of any text on the market. Our problem and case material continues to conform to AACSB recommendations and makes a great starting point for class discussions and group projects. When Ray Garrison first wrote Managerial Accounting, he started with the endof-chapter material, then wrote the narrative in support of it. This unique approach to textbook authoring not only ensured consistency between the end-of-chapter material and text content but also underscored Garrison’s fundamental belief in the importance of applying theory through practice. It is not enough for students to read, they must also understand. To this day, the guiding principle of that first edition remains, and Garrison’s superior end-of-chapter material continues to provide accurate, current, and relevant practice for students. The Excel worksheet form that appears below is to be used to recreate the extended example on pages 153–155. Download the workbook containing this form from the Online Learning Center at www.mhhe.com/garrison15e. On the website you will also receive instructions about how to use this worksheet form. Exercises All applicable exercises are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. EXERCISE 3–1 Compute the Predetermined Overhead Rate [LO3–1] Harris Fabrics computes its predetermined overhead rate annually on the basis of direct laborhours. At the beginning of the year, it estimated that 20,000 direct labor-hours would be required for the period’s estimated level of production. The company also estimated $94,000 of fixed manufacturing overhead expenses for the coming period and variable manufacturing overhead of $2.00 per direct labor-hour. Harris’s actual manufacturing overhead for the year was $123,900 and its actual total direct labor was 21,000 hours. Required: Compute the company’s predetermined overhead rate for the year. EXERCISE 3–2 Apply Overhead [LO3–2] Luthan Company uses a predetermined overhead rate of $23.40 per direct labor-hour. This predetermined rate was based on a cost formula that estimated $257,400 of total manufacturing overhead for an estimated activity level of 11,000 direct labor-hours. The company incurred actual total manufacturing overhead costs of $249,000 and 10,800 total direct labor hours during the period. labor-hours Required: Determine the amount of manufacturing overhead that would have been applied to all jobs during the period. Problems All applicable problems are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. PROBLEM 4–13 Comprehensive Problem; Second Production Department—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4, LO4–5] Old Country Links Inc. produces sausages in three production departments—Mixing, Casing and Curing, and Packaging. In the Mixing Department, meats are prepared and ground and then mixed with spices. The spiced meat mixture is then transferred to the Casing and Curing Department, where the mixture is force-fed into casings and then hung and cured in climate-controlled smoking chambers. In the Packaging Department, the cured sausages are sorted, packed, and labeled. The company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data for September for the Casing and Curing Department follow: Percent Completed Work in process inventory, September 1 . . . . . . Work in process inventory, September 30 . . . . . Units Mixing Materials 1 1 100% 100% 90% 80% Mixing Materials 80% 70% Cases gar2563X_ch04_144-186.indd 160 Conversion 16/09/13 10:31 PM All applicable cases are available Connect® Accounting. Work in process inventory, September 1 .with . . . .McGraw-Hill’s ........ $1,670 $90 $605 Cost added during September . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gar2563X_ch03_083-143.indd 115 The NEW Foundational 15 end-of-chapter feature provides one set of data and fifteen building-block questions relating to the quantitative topics covered in that particular chapter, allowing the student to work through and gain a practical understanding of the computational material. Conversion $81,460 $6,006 CASE 4–19 Second Department—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4] $42,490 16/09/13 10:25 PM “I think we goofed when we hired that new assistant controller,” said Ruth Scarpino, president of Provost Industries. “Just look at this report that he prepared for last month for the Finishing Department. I can’t understand it.” Finishing Department costs: Work in process inventory, April 1, 450 units; materials 100% complete; conversion 60% complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Costs transferred in during the month from the preceding department, 1,950 units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials cost added during the month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion costs incurred during the month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total departmental costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gar2563X_ch04_144-186.indd 166 The Applying Excel end-of-chapter feature integrates key course concepts and Excel—a software students will encounter in the workplace, whether they go into accounting or any other business major. With Applying Excel, students not only gain practice working with Excel software, they also learn how Excel can be used to present accounting data and how that data is interrelated. For more information on this feature, please see page x. gar2563X_ch04_144-186.indd 170 $ 8,208* 17,940 6,210 13,920 $46,278 Finishing Department costs assigned to: Units completed and transferred to finished goods, 1,800 units at $25.71 per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process inventory, April 30, 600 units; materials 0% complete; conversion 35% complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $46,278 Total departmental costs assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $46,278 0 16/09/13 10:32 PM Strong integration between chapter content and end-ofchapter exercises/problems. Clearly written and wellorganized content. Carleton Donchess, Bridgewater State University Well written, well organized, and good problems to illustrate concepts 16/09/13 10:32 PM Eric Typpo, University of the Pacific Managerial Accounting F if t e e nt h E d i t i on xiii The resources available at the online learning center and through Connect Plus are comprehensive, helpful, and easy to use. Mary Scarborough, Tyler Junior College Clear presentation of material in the chapter with robust support materials through the text website and Connect. Author-Written Supplements Unlike other managerial accounting texts, the book’s authors write all of the major supplements, ensuring a perfect fit between text and supplements. For more information on Managerial Accounting’s supplements package, see page xxiii. • Instructor’s Manual • Test bank • Solutions Manual Utilizing the Icons To reflect our service-based economy, the text is replete with examples from service-based businesses. A helpful icon distinguishes service-related examples in the text. David Krug, Johnson County Community College Business Ethics are of growing importance and the coverage early in the book is commendable. The IFRS icon highlights content that may be affected by the impending change to IFRS and possible convergence between U.S. GAAP and IFRS. Heminigild Mpundu, University of Northern Iowa Ethics assignments and examples serve as a reminder that good conduct is vital in business. Icons call out content that relates to ethical behavior for students. The writing icon denotes problems that require students to use critical thinking as well as writing skills to explain their decisions. xiv Garrison Noreen Brewer New to the Fifteenth Edition Faculty feedback helps us continue to improve Managerial Accounting. In response to reviewer suggestions, the authors have made the following changes to the text: • All chapters have the NEW Foundational 15 end-of-chapter feature. • New In Business boxes have been added throughout to provide relevant and updated real-world examples for use in classroom discussion and to support student understanding of key concepts as they read through a chapter. • The end-of-chapter practice material has been updated throughout. • Several chapters (Chapters 2, 8, and 13) now better highlight the dynamic nature and power of Excel as a tool for managerial accounting. Chapter 1 This chapter has a new section titled Managerial Accounting: Beyond the Numbers. It has expanded coverage of leadership skills and an expanded set of end-of-chapter exercises. Chapter 2 The learning objective pertaining to direct and indirect costs has been moved to the front of the chapter to improve the students’ ability to understand the material. Appendix 2A has been overhauled to simplify the explanation of how to use Microsoft Excel to perform least-squares regression analysis. Chapter 3 This chapter has added Appendix 3A: ActivityBased Absorption Costing; this material was formerly Appendix 7B in the previous edition of the book. Moving this material to Chapter 3 offers instructors greater flexibility when determining how to cover activity-based costing. Chapter 4 Updated with a new In Business box. Chapter 5 The assumptions of CVP analysis have been moved from the end of the chapter to the beginning of the chapter. The target profit analysis and break-even analysis learning objectives have been reversed. Chapter 6 This chapter has added a new learning objective related to calculating companywide and segment break-even points for companies with traceable fixed costs. It has also added a new appendix related to super-variable costing. Chapter 7 This chapter has added a new exhibit and accompanying text to better explain key concepts and terminology within the chapter. Managerial Accounting F if t e e nt h E d i t i on xv Chapter 8 This chapter has been renamed, and we have added new text and an exhibit to help students better understand how and why a master budget is created and how Microsoft Excel can be used to create a financial planning model that answers “what-if” questions. Two new end-of-chapter exercises that enable students to use Microsoft Excel to answer “what-if” questions have also been added. Chapter 9 A discussion of the variance analysis cycle and management by exception has been inserted in the front of this chapter; this material was previously included in the standard costing chapter. In response to customer feedback, we reversed the headings in the flexible budget performance report. The actual results are shown in the far-left column and the planning budget is shown in the far-right column. Chapter 10 In response to customer feedback, we reversed the headings in the general model for standard cost variance analysis. The actual results (AQ 3 AP) are shown in the far-left column and the flexible budget (SQ 3 SP) is shown in the far-right column. Chapter 12 A section illustrating the meaning of a constraint has been added. Also, several new In Business boxes have been created. Chapter 13 The learning objective pertaining to the payback period has been moved to the front of the chapter. A Microsoft Excel-based approach has been adopted for depicting net present value calculations. We have added a discussion of the behavioral implications of the simple rate of return method. Appendix 13C has been completely overhauled so that students can more easily grasp the impact of income taxes on net present value analysis. Chapter 14 This chapter has been updated with new In Business boxes. Chapter 15 This chapter’s learning objectives have all been redefined to emphasize an internal management perspective. Four new ratios have been added to the text to further enrich the students’ learning opportunities. Chapter 11 This chapter has a new Business Focus feature and two new In Business boxes. xvi Garrison Noreen Brewer Learn with Adaptive Technology Each innovative product in the LearnSmart Advantage suite is powered by the proven McGraw-Hill LearnSmart engine that has helped over 2 million student users answer nearly 1.5 billion questions since 2009. All this data has been harnessed to make the LearnSmart Advantage products the most intelligent, reliable, and effective adaptive learning tools that are available to students. With products that span the entire learning process from course preparation to providing the first adaptive reading experience, LearnSmart Advantage is the most widely used and intelligent suite of adaptive study resources available today. This innovative series of adaptive learning products is designed to deliver demonstrable results in boosting grades, increasing course retention, and strengthening memory recall. These powerful products in the LearnSmart Advantage Suite are available with Garrison 15e: LearnSmart An adaptive self-study technology that guarantees students are learning faster, studying more efficiently, and retaining more knowledge. As LearnSmart gets to know each individual student user, it identifies what a student does or does not know, ensuring that the most valuable information is presented to maximize each minute of time spent studying. LearnSmart also pinpoints areas that a student is most likely to forget and encourages periodic review so that knowledge is truly learned and retained. Students who use LearnSmart are 35% more likely to complete their class; 13% more likely to pass their class; and have been proven to improve their performance by a full letter grade. How Does LearnSmart work? A student begins by answering a series of questions related to core concepts and key themes from the selected chapter(s). For each question answered, a student will be asked to provide a confidence rating, acknowledging their level of knowledge. LearnSmart uses this information, in tandem with the answer itself, to improve the individual learning path by adjusting which questions to present, as well as the difficulty of these questions. Throughout the study session, students can monitor their progress by viewing a series of performance reports that reinforce the content they need to study. They can also compare their score to their classmates and other students from around the world. LearnSmart revisits the content a student is struggling with to convert knowledge to long-term memory and improve overall retention of information. SmartBook As the first and only adaptive reading experience, SmartBook is changing the way students read and learn. SmartBook creates a personalized reading experience by highlighting the most important concepts a student needs to learn at that moment in time. The reading experience continuously adapts by highlighting content based on what each student knows and doesn’t know. This ensures that he or she is focused on the content needed to close specific knowledge gaps, while simultaneously promoting long-term learning. Valuable reports provide instructors insight as to how students are progressing through textbook content, and are useful for shaping in-class time or assessment. Managerial Accounting F if t e e nt h E d i t i on xvii How Does SmartBook Work? Each SmartBook contains four components: Preview, Read, Practice, and Recharge. Starting with an initial preview of each chapter and key learning objectives, students read the material and are guided to topics that need the most practice based on their responses to a continuously adapting diagnostic. Read and practice continue until SmartBook directs students to recharge important material they are most likely to forget to ensure concept mastery and retention. LearnSmart Achieve A revolutionary new learning system that combines a continually adaptive learning experience with rich, dynamic resources for student achievement. As a student progresses through LearnSmart Achieve, the program’s continuously adaptive learning path adjusts to deliver just-in-time videos catered to his or her specific needs. FPO How Does LearnSmart Achieve Work? LearnSmart Achieve uses a simple three-phase process to help students achieve academic success: Tune In—Students are asked a sample series of questions related to a specific learning objective to assess their baseline understanding of the content and identify knowledge gaps. Focus—Based on their responses to the Tune In questions, Achieve presents learning resources to teach the concepts that each student struggles with most. Practice—After the Focus phase, Achieve asks students a more in-depth series of questions to confirm their understanding of the key objectives and adjusts accordingly, providing suggested learning resources to assist students in mastering all core concepts. xviii Garrison Noreen Brewer A Market-Leading Book Deserves Market-Leading Technology McGraw-Hill Connect ® Accounting Get Connect Accounting. Get Results. McGraw-Hills Connect Accounting is a digital teaching and learning environment that gives students the means to better connect with their coursework, with their instructors, and with the important concepts that they will need to know for success now and in the future. With Connect Accounting, instructors can deliver assignments, quizzes, and tests easily online. Students can practice important skills at their own pace and on their own schedule. Online Assignments Connect Accounting helps students learn more efficiently by providing feedback and practice material when and where they need it. Connect Accounting grades homework automatically and gives immediate feedback on any questions students may have missed. Intelligent Response Technology (IRT) IRT is a redesigned student interface for our end-of-chapter assessment content. The benefits include improved answer acceptance to reduce students’ frustration with formatting issues (such as rounding). Also, select questions have been redesigned to test students’ knowledge more fully. They now include tables for students to work through rather than requiring that all calculations be done offline. Student Library The Connect Accounting Student Library gives students access to additional resources such as recorded lectures, online practice materials, an eBook, and more. Interactive Presentations Interactive Presentations, assignable by individual learning objective within Connect, teach the core concepts of the text in an animated, narrated, and interactive multimedia format, bringing the key concepts of the course to life–particularly helpful for online courses and for those audio and visual learners who struggle reading the textbook page by page. Guided Examples Guided Examples, embedded within Connect Accounting, provide a narrated, animated, step-by-step walkthrough of select exercises similar to those assigned. These short presentations provide reinforcement when students need it most. The three best things about Connect Accounting are LearnSmart (loved it!), Interactive Presentations, and Guided Examples (students loved them!). Loisanne Kattelman, Weber State University Managerial Accounting F if t e e nt h E d i t i on xix McGraw-Hill Connect Accounting Features Connect Accounting offers a number of powerful tools and features to make managing assignments easier, so faculty can spend more time teaching. Simple Assignment Management and Smart Grading. With Connect Accounting, creating assignments is easier than ever, so you can spend more time teaching and less time managing. • Create and deliver assignments easily with selectable end-of-chapter questions and test bank items. • Go paperless with the eBook and online submission and grading of student assignments. • Have assignments scored automatically, giving students immediate feedback on their work and side-by-side comparisons with correct answers. • Access and review each response; manually change grades or leave comments for students to review. • Reinforce classroom concepts with practice tests and instant quizzes. Instructor Library The Connect Accounting Instructor Library is a repository for additional resources to improve student engagement in and out of class. You can select and use any asset that enhances your lecture. The Connect Accounting Instructor Library includes access to the eBook version of the text, PowerPoint slides, Solutions Manual, Instructor’s Manual, and Test Bank. The Connect Accounting Instructor Library also allows you to upload your own files. Student Reports Connect Accounting keeps instructors informed about how each student, section, and class is performing, allowing for more productive use of lecture and office hours. The progresstracking enables you to: • View scored work immediately and track individual or group performance with assignment and grade reports. • Access an instant view of student or class performance relative to learning objectives. • Collect data and generate reports required by many accreditation organizations, such as AACSB and AICPA. McGraw-Hill Connect Plus Accounting • • • • McGraw-Hill reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student with Connect Plus Accounting, which provides a seamless integration of the eBook and Connect Accounting. Connect Plus Accounting provides all of the Connect Accounting features, as well as: An integrated media-rich eBook, allowing for anytime, anywhere access to the textbook. Media-rich capabilities like embedded audio/visual presentations, highlighting, and note sharing. Dynamic links between the problems or questions you assign to your students and the location in the eBook where the concept is covered. A powerful search function to pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap. For more information about Connect Accounting, go to www.mcgrawhillconnect.com, or contact your local McGraw-Hill sales representative. xx Garrison Noreen Brewer Tegrity Campus: Lectures 24/7 Tegrity Campus, a McGraw-Hill company, provides a service that makes class time available 24/7 by automatically capturing every lecture. With a simple one-click startand-stop process, you capture all computer screens and corresponding audio in a format that is easily searchable, frame by frame. Students can replay any part of any class with easy-to-use browser-based viewing on a PC or Mac, an iPod, or other mobile device. Educators know that the more students can see, hear, and experience class resources, the better they learn. In fact, studies prove it. Tegrity Campus’s unique search feature helps students efficiently find what they need, when they need it, across an entire semester of class recordings. Help turn your students’ study time into learning moments immediately supported by your lecture. With Tegrity Campus, you also increase intent listening and class participation by easing students’ concerns about note-taking. Lecture Capture will make it more likely you will see students’ faces, not the tops of their heads. To learn more about Tegrity, watch a 2-minute Flash demo at http://tegritycampus.mhhe.com. McGraw-Hill Campus McGraw-Hill Campus is a new one-stop teaching and learning experience available to users of any learning management system. This institutional service allows faculty and students to enjoy single sign-on (SSO) access to all McGraw-Hill Higher Education materials, including the award-winning McGraw-Hill Connect platform, directly from within the institution’s website. McGraw-Hill Campus provides faculty with instant access to teaching materials (e.g., eTextbooks, Test Banks, PowerPoint slides, animations, and learning objects), allowing them to browse, search, and use any ancillary content in our vast library. Students enjoy SSO access to a variety of free products (e.g., quizzes, flash cards, and presentations) and subscription-based products (e.g., McGraw-Hill Connect). With McGraw-Hill Campus, faculty and students will never need to create another account to access McGraw-Hill products and services. McGraw-Hill Create McGraw-Hill Create is a new, self-service website that allows instructors to create custom course materials by drawing upon McGraw-Hill’s comprehensive, cross-disciplinary content. Instructors can add their own content quickly and easily and tap into other rights-secured third-party sources as well, then arrange the content in a way that makes the most sense for their course. Instructors can even personalize their book with the course name and information and choose the best format for their students—color print, black-and-white print, or an eBook. Through Create, instructors can select and arrange the content in a way that makes the most sense for their course; combine material from different sources and even upload their own content; choose the best format for their students—print or eBook; and edit and update their course materials as often as they’d like. Begin creating now at www. mcgrawhillcreate.com. CourseSmart Learn Smart. Choose Smart. CourseSmart is a way for faculty to find and review eTextbooks. It’s also a great option for students who are interested in accessing their course materials digitally and saving money. Managerial Accounting F if t e e nt h E d i t i on xxi CourseSmart offers thousands of the most commonly adopted textbooks across hundreds of courses from a wide variety of higher education publishers. It is the only place for faculty to review and compare the full text of a textbook online, providing immediate access without the environmental impact of requesting a print exam copy. With the CourseSmart eTextbook, students can save up to 45 percent off the cost of a print book, reduce their impact on the environment, and access powerful web tools for learning. CourseSmart is an online eTextbook, which means users access and view their textbook online when connected to the Internet. Students can also print sections of the book for maximum portability. CourseSmart eTextbooks are available in one standard online reader with full text search, notes and highlighting, and e-mail tools for sharing notes between classmates. For more information on CourseSmart, go to www.coursesmart.com. McGraw-Hill Customer Experience At McGraw-Hill, we understand that getting the most from new technology can be challenging. That’s why our services don’t stop after you purchase our book. You can email our product specialists 24 hours a day, get product training online, or search our knowledge bank of Frequently Asked Questions on our support website. For our Customer Experience Group, call 800-331-5094 or visit www.mhhe.com/support. One of our Technical Support Analysts will assist you in a timely fashion. You also can take advantage of the “Contact Publisher” link within Connect Accounting. xxii Garrison Noreen Brewer Instructor Supplements Assurance of Learning Ready Many educational institutions today are focused on the notion of assurance of learning, an important element of some accreditation standards. Managerial Accounting, 15e, is designed specifically to support your assurance of learning initiatives with a simple, yet powerful, solution. Each test bank question for Managerial Accounting, 15e, maps to a specific chapter learning outcome/objective listed in the text. You can use our test bank software, EZ Test, to easily query for learning outcomes/objectives that directly relate to the learning objectives for your course. You can then use the reporting features of EZ Test to aggregate student results in similar fashion, making the collection and presentation of assurance of learning data simple and easy. AACSB Statement The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc., is a proud corporate member of AACSB International. Recognizing the importance and value of AACSB accreditation, we have sought to recognize the curricula guidelines detailed in AACSB standards for business accreditation by connecting selected questions in Managerial Accounting, 15e, to the general knowledge and skill guidelines found in the AACSB standards. The statements contained in Managerial Accounting, 15e, are provided only as a guide for the users of this text. The AACSB leaves content coverage and assessment clearly within the realm and control of individual schools, the mission of the school, and the faculty. The AACSB does also charge schools with the obligation of doing assessment against their own content and learning goals. While Managerial Accounting, 15e, and its teaching package make no claim of any specific AACSB qualification or evaluation, we have, within Managerial Accounting, 15e, labeled selected questions according to the six general knowledge and skills areas. The labels or tags within Managerial Accounting, 15e, are as indicated. There are, of course, many more within the test bank, the text, and the teaching package which might be used as a “standard” for your course. However, the labeled questions are suggested for your consideration. Online Learning Center (www.mhhe.com/ garrison15e) The password protected instructor side of the book’s Online Learning Center (OLC) houses all the instructor resources you need to administer your course, including: • Solutions Manual • Instructor’s Manual • Test bank • Instructor PowerPoint slides If you choose to use Connect Accounting with Garrison, you will have access to these same resources via the Instructor Library. EZ Test Online Available on the Instructor’s OLC and within the Connect Instructor Library. McGraw-Hill’s EZ Test Online is a flexible electronic testing program. The program allows instructors to create tests from bookspecific items. It accommodates a wide range of question types, plus instructors may add their own questions and sort questions by format. EZ Test Online can also scramble questions and answers for multiple versions of the same test. Instructor’s Manual McGraw-Hill Connect Accounting McGraw-Hill Connect Accounting offers a number of powerful tools and features to make managing your classroom easier. Connect Accounting with Garrison 15e offers enhanced features and technology to help both you and your students make the most of your time inside and outside the classroom. See page xix for more details. Managerial Accounting Available on the Instructor’s OLC and within the Connect Instructor Library. Extensive chapter-by-chapter lecture notes help with classroom presentations and contain useful suggestions for presenting key concepts and ideas. This manual is coordinated with the PowerPoint slides, making lesson planning even easier. F if t e e nt h E d i t i on xxiii Solutions Manual Available on the Instructor’s OLC and within the Connect Instructor Library. and cases scaled according to difficulty and estimated time for completion. Solutions to the Applying Excel feature are housed in the same location as the Solutions Manual and include the completed Excel forms. This supplement contains completely worked-out solutions to all assignment material. In addition, the manual contains suggested course outlines and a listing of exercises, problems, xxiv Garrison Noreen Brewer Student Supplements McGraw-Hill Connect Accounting McGraw-Hill Connect Accounting helps prepare you for your future by enabling faster learning, more efficient studying, and higher retention of knowledge. See pages xvii and for more details. • Check Figures • Student PowerPoint slides If your instructor chooses to use Connect Accounting in this course, you will have access to these same resources via the Student Library. Online Learning Center Applying Excel www.m hhe. com /gar r i s on1 5 e The Online Learning Center (OLC) follows Managerial Accounting chapter by chapter, offering all kinds of supplementary help for you as you read. The OLC includes the following resources to help you study more efficiently: Forms available on the OLC and in the Connect Student Library. See page xx for more details. Check Figures Available on the OLC and in the Connect Student Library. These provide key answers for selected problems and cases. • Applying Excel Forms • Online Quizzes Managerial Accounting F if t e e nt h E d i t i on xxv Acknowledgments Suggestions have been received from many of our colleagues throughout the world. Each of those who have offered comments and suggestions has our thanks. The efforts of many people are needed to develop and improve a text. Among these people are the reviewers and consultants who point out areas of concern, cite areas of strength, and make recommendations for change. In this regard, the following professors provided feedback that was enormously helpful in preparing the fifteenth edition of Managerial Accounting: Helen Adams, University of Washington Dawn Addington, Central New Mexico Community College Markus Ahrens, St. Louis Community College—Meramec Akinloye Akindayomi, University Of Massachusetts–Dartmouth David Albrecht, Bowling Green State University Natalie Allen, Texas A & M University Vern Allen, Central Florida Community College Shamir Ally, DeSales University Jane Austin, Oklahoma City University John Babich, Kankakee Community College Ibolya Balog, Cedar Crest College Scottie Barty, Northern Kentucky University Eric Bashaw, University of Nevada–Las Vegas Sharon Bell, University of North Carolina–Pembroke Stephen Benner, Eastern Illinois University Scott Berube, University of New Hampshire Kelly Blacker, Mercy College Phillip Blanchard, The University of Arizona Charles Blumer, Saint Charles Community College Alison Jill Brock, Imperial Valley College Ann Brooks, University of New Mexico Rada Brooks, University of California–Berkeley Myra Bruegger, Southeastern Community College Georgia Buckles, Manchester Community College Esther Bunn, Stephen S. Austin State University Laurie Burney, Mississippi State University Marci Butterfield, University of Utah–Salt Lake City Charles Caliendo, University of Minnesota Donald Campbell, Brigham Young University–Idaho Don Campodonico, Notre Dame de Namur University Dana Carpenter, Madison Area Technical College Wanda Causseaux, Valdosta State University David Centers, Grand Valley State University Gayle Chaky, Dutchess Community College Pamela Champeau, University of Wisconsin Whitewater Valerie Chau, Palomar College Star Ciccio, Johnson & Wales University Richard S. Claire, Canada College Robert Clarke, Brigham Young University–Idaho xxvi Garrison Noreen Curtis Clements, Abilene Christian University Darlene Coarts, University of Northern Iowa Carol Coman, California Lutheran University Jackie Conrecode, Florida Gulf Coast University Debora Constable, Georgia Perimeter College Rita Cook, University of Delaware Wendy Coons, University of Maine Michael Cornick, Winthrop University Deb Cosgrove, University of Nebraska–Lincoln Kathy Crusto-Way, Tarrant County College Robin D’Agati, Palm Beach State College, Lake Worth Patricia Davis, Keystone College Kathleen Davisson, University of Denver Nina Doherty, Arkansas Tech University Patricia Doherty, Boston University Carleton Donchess, Bridgewater State University Peter Dorff, Kent State University David Doyon, Southern New Hampshire University Emily Drogt, Grand Valley State University Rita Dufour, Northeast Wisconsin Technical College Barbara Durham, University of Central Florida Dean Edmiston, Emporia State University Barb Eide, University of Wisconsin–Lacrosse Rafik Elias, California State University–Los Angeles Richard F. Emery, Linfield College Ruth Epps, Virginia Commonwealth University John Eubanks, Independence Community College Christopher M. Fairchild, Southeastern University Jack Fatica, Terra Community College Christos Fatouros, Curry College Susan Ferguson, James Madison University Jerry Ferry, University of North Alabama Calvin Fink, Bethune Cookman University Virginia Fullwood, Texas A&M University–Commerce Robert Gannon, Alvernia University Joseph Gerard, University of Wisconsin Whitewater Frank Gersich, Monmouth College Hubert Gill, North Florida Jeff Gillespie, University of Delaware Earl Godfrey, Gardner-Webb University Brewer Nina Goza, Arkansas Tech University Marina Grau, HCC–Northwest College Alfred C. Greenfield, Jr., High Point University Olen Greer, Missouri State University Steve Groves, Ivy Tech Community College of Indiana–Kokomo Ty Handy, Vermont Technical College Michael Haselkorn, Bentley University Susan Hass, Simmons College John Haverty, St. Joseph’s University Candice Heino, Anoka Ramsey Community College Sueann Hely, West Kentucky Community & Technical College David Henderson, College of Charleston Donna Hetzel, Western Michigan University–Kalamazoo Cynthia Hollenbach, University of Denver Peg Horan, Wagner College Rong Huang, Baruch College Steven Huddart, Penn State George Hunt, Stephen F Austin State University Marianne James, California State University, Los Angeles Gene Johnson, Clark College Bill Joyce, Minnesota State University–Mankato Celina Jozsi, University of South Florida Robert L. Kachur, Richard Stockton College of New Jersey Loisanne Kattelman, Weber State University Sue Kattelus, Michigan State University–East Lansing Nancy Kelly, Middlesex Community College Anna Kenner, Brevard Community College Mozaffar Khan, University of Minnesota Shirly Kleiner, Johnson County Community College Bill Knowles, University of New Hampshire Barbara Kren, Marquette University Jerry Kreuze, Western Michigan University David Krug, Johnson County Community College Wikil Kwak, Nebraska Omaha Ron Lazer, University of Houston–Houston Dennis Lopez, University of Texas–San Antonio Don Lucy, Indian River State College Cathy Lumbattis, Southern Illinois University Joseph F. Lupino, St. Mary’s College of California Patrick M. Lynch, Loyola University of New Orleans Suneel Maheshwari, Marshall University Linda Malgeri, Kennesaw State University Carol Mannino, Milwaukee School of Engineering Steven Markoff, Montclair State University Linda Marquis, Northern Kentucky University Melissa Martin, Arizona State University Michele Martinez, Hillsborough Community College Josephine Mathias, Mercer Community College Annie McGowan, Texas A&M University Michael McLain, Hampton University Heidi Meier, Cleveland State University Edna Mitchell, Polk State College Kim Mollberg, Minnesota State University–Moorhead Shirley Montagne, Lyndon State College Andrew Morgret, Christian Brothers University Jennifer Moriarty, Hudson Valley Community College Mark Motluck, Anderson University Heminigild Mpundu, University of Northern Iowa Matt Muller, Adirondack Community College Michael Newman, University of Houston–Houston Christopher O’Byrne, Cuyamaca College Janet O’Tousa, University of Notre Dame Mehmet Ozbilgin, Bernard M. Baruch College Abbie Gail Parham, Georgia Southern Mary Pearson, Southern Utah University Judy Peterson, Monmouth College Yvonne Phang, Bernard M. Baruch College Debbie Pike, Saint Louis University Jo Ann Pinto, Montclair State University Janice Pitera, Broome Community College Matthew Probst, Ivy Tech Community College Laura Prosser, Black Hills State University Herbert Purick, Palm Beach State College–Lake Worth Vasant Raval, Creighton University Margaret Reed, University of Cincinnati Marc B. Robinson, Richard Stockton College of New Jersey David Rogers, Mesa State College Lawrence A. Roman, Cuyahoga Community College Luther Ross, Sr., Central Piedmont Community College Pamela Rouse, Butler University Martin Rudnick, William Paterson University Amal Said, University of Toledo Mary Scarborough, Tyler Junior College Rex Schildhouse, Miramar College Nancy Schrumpf, Parkland College Pamela Schwer, St. Xavier University Vineeta Sharma, Florida International University–Miami Jeffrey Shields, University of Southern Maine Franklin Shuman, Utah State University–Logan Lakshmy Sivaratnam, Kansas City Kansas Community College Talitha Smith, Auburn University–Auburn Diane Stark, Phoenix College Dennis Stovall, Grand Valley State University Gracelyn Stuart-Tuggle, Palm Beach State College– Boca Campus Suzy Summers, Furman University Scott Szilagyi, Fordham University–Bronx Rita Taylor, University of Cincinnati Managerial Accounting F if t e e nt h E d i t i on xxvii Lisa Tekmetarovic, Truman College Teresa Thamer, Brenau University Amanda Thompson-Abbott, Marshall University Jerry Thorne, North Carolina A&T State University Don Trippeer, SUNY College at Oneonta Robin Turner, Rowan-Cabarrus Community College Tracy Campbell Tuttle, San Diego Mesa Community College Eric Typpo, University of the Pacific Suneel Udpa, University of California–Berkeley Michael Van Breda, Southern Methodist University Jayaraman Vijayakumar, Virginia Commonwealth University Ron Vogel, College of Eastern Utah David Vyncke, Scott Community College Terri Walsh, Seminole State College of Florida Lorry Wasserman, University of Portland xxviii Garrison Noreen Richard Watson, University of California–Santa Barbara Victoria Wattigny, Midwestern State University Betsy Wenz, Indiana University–Kokomo Robert Weprin, Lourdes College Gwendolen White, Ball State University Elizabeth Widdison, University of Washington, Seattle Val Williams, Duquesne University Janet Woods, Macon State College John Woodward, Polk State College Jia Wu, University OF Massachusetts–Dartmouth Emily Xu, University of New Hampshire James Yang, Montclair State University Jeff Yu, Southern Methodist University Bert Zarb, Embry-Riddle Aeronautical University Brewer We are grateful for the outstanding support from McGraw-Hill. In particular, we would like to thank Tim Vertovec, Managing Director of Accounting and Business Law; Donna Dillon, Brand Manager; Katie Jones, Development Editor; Kathleen Klehr, Marketing Manager; Pat Plumb, Director of Digital Development; Xin Lin, Digital Product Analyst; Julie Hankins, Digital Development Editor; Pat Frederickson and Rachel Townsend, Content Project Managers; Carol Bielski, Production Supervisor; Matthew Baldwin, Lead Designer; Cathy Tepper, Media Project Manager; and Keri Johnson, Content Licensing Specialist. Thank you to our Digital Contributor, Margaret Shackell-Dowell (Cornell University) for her many contributions to Connect Accounting and LearnSmart Achieve, including Guided Example and Interactive Presentation content development as well as IRT development and review. Thanks also to Patti Lopez (Valencia College) for her efforts as lead subject matter expert on LearnSmart. Thank you to the following individuals who helped develop the ancillary package: Jon A. Booker and Charles W. Caldwell of Tennessee Technological University, Cynthia J. Rooney of the University of New Mexico, and Susan C. Galbreath of Lipscomb University for crafting the Instructor and Student PowerPoint Slides; Jeannie Folk of the College of DuPage for the online quizzes and Guided Example and Interactive Presentation review; and Patti Lopez of Valencia Community College–East, Aileen Ormiston of Mesa Community College, Christine Denison of Iowa State University, Rebecca Lohmann of Southeast Missouri State University, Kathy Crusto-Way of Tarrant County College–Southeast, Stacy Wade of Western Kentucky University, Deb Cosgrove of University of Nebraska–Lincoln, Chuo-Hsuan Lee of SUNY Plattsburgh, Loretta Manktelow of James Madison University, Xiujun Farrier of Tarrant County College–South, Diane Tanner of the University of North Florida, and Laurie Burney of Mississippi State University for piloting development of our adaptive, self-study technology, LearnSmart. Finally, we would like to thank Helen Roybark (Radford University) and Marisa Lester (University at Albany) for working so hard to ensure an error-free fifteenth edition. We are grateful to the Institute of Certified Management Accountants for permission to use questions and/or unofficial answers from past Certificate in Management Accounting (CMA) examinations. Likewise, we thank the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants, the Society of Management Accountants of Canada, and the Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (United Kingdom) for permission to use (or to adapt) selected problems from their examinations. These problems bear the notations CPA, SMA, and CIMA respectively. Ray H. Garrison • Eric Noreen • Peter Brewer Managerial Accounting F if t e e nt h E d i t i on xxix Brief Contents Chapter One Managerial Accounting: An Overview 1 Chapter Two Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts Chapter Three Job-Order Costing Process Costing Chapter Five Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships 144 187 Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management Chapter Seven Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making 286 Chapter Eight Master Budgeting Chapter Nine Flexible Budgets and Performance Analysis Chapter Ten 342 Standard Costs and Variances 392 427 Chapter Eleven Performance Measurement in Decentralized Organizations Chapter Twelve Differential Analysis: The Key to Decision Making Chapter Thirteen Capital Budgeting Decisions Chapter Fourteen Statement of Cash Flows Chapter Fifteen Appendix A Pricing Products and Services Appendix B Profitability Analysis Index 741 743 727 583 634 Financial Statement Analysis Credits xxx 83 Chapter Four Chapter Six 27 675 713 531 477 233 Contents 1 Chapter Chapter Managerial Accounting: An Overview 1 What Is Managerial Accounting? Planning 3 Controlling 3 Decision Making 4 2 Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 27 2 Why Does Managerial Accounting Matter to Your Career? 5 Business Majors 5 Accounting Majors 7 Professional Certification—A Smart Investment Cost Classifications for Assigning Costs to Cost Objects 28 Direct Cost 28 Indirect Cost 29 7 Managerial Accounting: Beyond the Numbers 8 An Ethics Perspective 9 Code of Conduct for Management Accountants 9 A Strategic Management Perspective 11 An Enterprise Risk Management Perspective 12 A Corporate Social Responsibility Perspective 14 A Process Management Perspective 14 A Leadership Perspective 16 Intrinsic Motivation 17 Extrinsic Incentives 17 Cognitive Bias 17 Summary 18 Glossary 18 Questions 19 Exercises 19 Appendix 1A: Corporate Governance 23 Glossary (Appendix 1A) 25 Questions 26 Cost Classifications for Manufacturing Companies 29 Manufacturing Costs 29 Direct Materials 29 Direct Labor 29 Manufacturing Overhead 30 Nonmanufacturing Costs 30 Cost Classifications for Preparing Financial Statements 31 Product Costs 31 Period Costs 31 Prime Cost and Conversion Cost 32 Cost Classifications for Predicting Cost Behavior 33 Variable Cost 33 Fixed Cost 34 The Linearity Assumption and the Relevant Range 35 Mixed Costs 37 The Analysis of Mixed Costs 38 Diagnosing Cost Behavior with a Scattergraph Plot The High-Low Method 40 The Least-Squares Regression Method 42 39 xxxi xxxii Contents Traditional and Contribution Format Income Statements 44 The Traditional Format Income Statement 44 The Contribution Format Income Statement 45 Cost Classifications for Decision Making Differential Cost and Revenue 45 Opportunity Cost and Sunk Cost 46 Manufacturing Overhead Costs 96 Applying Manufacturing Overhead 97 The Concept of a Clearing Account 97 Nonmanufacturing Costs 98 Cost of Goods Manufactured 99 Cost of Goods Sold 99 45 Summary 47 Review Problem 1: Cost Terms 48 Review Problem 2: High-Low Method 49 Glossary 49 Questions 51 Applying Excel 51 The Foundational 15 53 Exercises 53 Problems 59 Cases 65 Appendix 2A: Least-Squares Regression Computations Glossary (Appendix 2A) 69 Exercises and Problems (Appendix 2A) 69 Appendix 2B: Cost of Quality 73 Summary (Appendix 2B) 79 Glossary (Appendix 2B) 79 Exercises and Problems (Appendix 2B) 80 Chapter 3 Job-Order Costing 83 Job-Order Costing—An Overview 84 Job-Order Costing—An Example 85 Measuring Direct Materials Cost 86 Job Cost Sheet 86 Measuring Direct Labor Cost 88 Computing Predetermined Overhead Rates 88 Applying Manufacturing Overhead 89 Manufacturing Overhead—A Closer Look 90 The Need for a Predetermined Rate 90 Choice of an Allocation Base for Overhead Cost Computation of Unit Costs 92 Job-Order Costing—The Flow of Costs 93 The Purchase and Issue of Materials 94 Issue of Direct and Indirect Materials 94 Labor Cost 95 Schedules of Cost of Goods Manufactured and Cost of Goods Sold 102 67 Underapplied and Overapplied Overhead—A Closer Look 104 Computing Underapplied and Overapplied Overhead 104 Disposition of Underapplied or Overapplied Overhead Balances 106 Closed Out to Cost of Goods Sold 106 Allocated between Accounts 106 Which Method Should Be Used for Disposing of Underapplied or Overapplied Overhead? 107 A General Model of Product Cost Flows 107 Multiple Predetermined Overhead Rates 107 Job-Order Costing in Service Companies Summary 109 Review Problem: Job-Order Costing 109 Glossary 112 Questions 112 Applying Excel 113 The Foundational 15 114 Exercises 115 Problems 122 Cases 129 Appendix 3A: Activity-Based Absorption Costing 130 Glossary (Appendix 3A) 133 Exercises and Problems (Appendix 3A) 133 Appendix 3B: The Predetermined Overhead Rate and Capacity 138 Exercises and Problems (Appendix 3B) 140 Chapter 91 108 4 Process Costing 144 Comparison of Job-Order and Process Costing 145 Similarities between Job-Order and Process Costing 145 Differences between Job-Order and Process Costing 145 Contents Cost Flows in Process Costing 146 Processing Departments 146 The Flow of Materials, Labor, and Overhead Costs 147 Materials, Labor, and Overhead Cost Entries 148 Materials Costs 148 Labor Costs 148 Overhead Costs 148 Completing the Cost Flows 149 Equivalent Units of Production 149 Weighted-Average Method 151 Compute and Apply Costs 153 Cost per Equivalent Unit—Weighted-Average Method 154 Applying Costs—Weighted-Average Method 154 Cost Reconciliation Report 155 Operation Costing 156 Summary 156 Review Problem: Process Cost Flows and Costing Units 156 Glossary 159 Questions 159 Applying Excel 160 The Foundational 15 161 Exercises 162 Problems 166 Cases 170 Appendix 4A: FIFO Method 171 Exercises and Problems (Appendix 4A) 176 Appendix 4B: Service Department Allocations 179 Exercises and Problems (Appendix 4B) 182 Chapter 5 Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships 187 The Basics of Cost-Volume-Profit (CVP) Analysis 189 Contribution Margin 189 CVP Relationships in Equation Form 191 CVP Relationships in Graphic Form 192 Preparing the CVP Graph 192 Contribution Margin Ratio (CM Ratio) 194 Some Applications of CVP Concepts 196 Change in Fixed Cost and Sales Volume 197 xxxiii Change in Variable Costs and Sales Volume 198 Change in Fixed Cost, Selling Price, and Sales Volume 198 Change in Variable Cost, Fixed Cost, and Sales Volume 199 Change in Selling Price 200 Break-Even and Target Profit Analysis 200 Break-Even Analysis 200 The Equation Method 201 The Formula Method 201 Break-Even in Dollar Sales 201 Target Profit Analysis 202 The Equation Method 202 The Formula Method 203 Target Profit Analysis in Terms of Dollar Sales The Margin of Safety 204 CVP Considerations in Choosing a Cost Structure Cost Structure and Profit Stability 205 Operating Leverage 207 Structuring Sales Commissions 209 Sales Mix 209 The Definition of Sales Mix 209 Sales Mix and Break-Even Analysis Summary 212 Review Problem: CVP Relationships Glossary 215 Questions 215 Applying Excel 215 The Foundational 15 217 Exercises 218 Problems 223 Cases 230 Chapter 210 212 6 Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management 233 Overview of Variable and Absorption Costing Variable Costing 234 Absorption Costing 234 Selling and Administrative Expense 235 Summary of Differences 235 234 203 205 xxxiv Contents Variable and Absorption Costing—An Example Variable Costing Contribution Format Income Statement 236 Absorption Costing Income Statement 238 236 Reconciliation of Variable Costing with Absorption Costing Income 239 Advantages of Variable Costing and the Contribution Approach 242 Enabling CVP Analysis 242 Explaining Changes in Net Operating Income 243 Supporting Decision Making 243 Segmented Income Statements and the Contribution Approach 244 Traceable and Common Fixed Costs and the Segment Margin 244 Identifying Traceable Fixed Costs 245 Traceable Costs Can Become Common Costs 245 Segmented Income Statements—An Example 246 Levels of Segmented Income Statements 246 Segmented Income Statements—Decision Making and Break-Even Analysis 249 Decision Making 249 Break-Even Analysis 250 Segmented Income Statements—Common Mistakes 251 Omission of Costs 251 Inappropriate Methods for Assigning Traceable Costs among Segments 252 Failure to Trace Costs Directly 252 Inappropriate Allocation Base 252 Arbitrarily Dividing Common Costs among Segments 252 Income Statements—An External Reporting Perspective 253 Companywide Income Statements 253 Segmented Financial Information 253 Summary 254 Review Problem 1: Contrasting Variable and Absorption Costing 255 Review Problem 2: Segmented Income Statements 257 Glossary 258 Questions 259 Applying Excel 259 The Foundational 15 261 Exercises 262 Problems 269 Cases 277 Appendix 6A: Super-Variable Costing 279 Glossary (Appendix 6A) 282 Exercises and Problems (Appendix 6A) 282 Chapter 7 Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making 286 Activity-Based Costing: An Overview 287 Nonmanufacturing Costs and Activity-Based Costing 287 Manufacturing Costs and Activity-Based Costing 288 Cost Pools, Allocation Bases, and Activity-Based Costing 288 Designing an Activity-Based Costing (ABC) System 292 Steps for Implementing Activity-Based Costing 294 Step 1: Define Activities, Activity Cost Pools, and Activity Measures 294 The Mechanics of Activity-Based Costing 295 Step 2: Assign Overhead Costs to Activity Cost Pools 295 Step 3: Calculate Activity Rates 299 Step 4: Assign Overhead Costs to Cost Objects 300 Step 5: Prepare Management Reports 303 Comparison of Traditional and ABC Product Costs 306 Product Margins Computed Using the Traditional Cost System 306 The Differences between ABC and Traditional Product Costs 307 Targeting Process Improvements 310 Activity-Based Costing and External Reports 311 The Limitations of Activity-Based Costing Summary 312 Review Problem: Activity-Based Costing Glossary 314 Questions 315 Applying Excel 315 The Foundational 15 317 312 311 Contents Exercises 318 Problems 326 Appendix 7A: ABC Action Analysis 331 Summary (Appendix 7A) 336 Review Problem: Activity Analysis Report 337 Glossary (Appendix 7A) 338 Exercises and Problems (Appendix 7A) 338 Chapter What Is a Budget 343 Advantages of Budgeting 343 Responsibility Accounting 344 Choosing a Budget Period 344 The Self-Imposed Budget 345 Human Factors in Budgeting 345 346 393 368 394 Flexible Budget Variances 398 Activity Variances 398 Revenue and Spending Variances 399 A Performance Report Combining Activity and Revenue and Spending Variances 401 Performance Reports in Nonprofit Organizations 404 Performance Reports in Cost Centers 404 Flexible Budgets with Multiple Cost Drivers Preparing the Master Budget 348 The Beginning Balance Sheet 350 The Budgeting Assumptions 350 The Sales Budget 352 The Production Budget 353 Inventory Purchases—Merchandising Company 354 The Direct Materials Budget 355 The Direct Labor Budget 356 The Manufacturing Overhead Budget 357 The Ending Finished Goods Inventory Budget 358 The Selling and Administrative Expense Budget 359 The Cash Budget 360 The Budgeted Income Statement 364 The Budgeted Balance Sheet 365 Summary 367 Review Problem: Budget Schedules Glossary 369 Questions 370 Applying Excel 370 The Foundational 15 372 Exercises 372 Problems 379 Cases 389 Flexible Budgets and Performance Analysis 392 Flexible Budgets 394 Characteristics of a Flexible Budget 394 Deficiencies of the Static Planning Budget How a Flexible Budget Works 397 342 The Master Budget: An Overview Seeing the Big Picture 347 9 The Variance Analysis Cycle 8 Master Budgeting Chapter xxxv Some Common Errors 404 406 Summary 408 Review Problem: Variance Analysis Using a Flexible Budget 408 Glossary 410 Questions 410 Applying Excel 410 The Foundational 15 412 Exercises 412 Problems 419 Cases 423 10 Chapter Standard Costs and Variances 427 Standard Costs—Setting the Stage 428 Setting Direct Materials Standards 429 Setting Direct Labor Standards 430 Setting Variable Manufacturing Overhead Standards 430 Using Standards in Flexible Budgets 431 xxxvi Contents A General Model for Standard Cost Variance Analysis 432 Responsibility Accounting 479 Cost, Profit, and Investment Centers 479 Cost Center 479 Profit Center 479 Investment Center 479 Using Standard Costs—Direct Materials Variances 434 The Materials Price Variance 435 The Materials Quantity Variance 436 Using Standard Costs—Direct Labor Variances 437 The Labor Rate Variance 438 The Labor Efficiency Variance 438 Using Standard Costs—Variable Manufacturing Overhead Variances 439 The Variable Manufacturing Overhead Rate and Efficiency Variances 440 An Important Subtlety in the Materials Variances 442 Standard Costs—Managerial Implications 444 Advantages of Standard Costs 444 Potential Problems with Standard Costs 444 Summary 445 Review Problem: Standard Costs 445 Glossary 447 Questions 448 Applying Excel 448 The Foundational 15 450 Exercises 450 Problems 453 Cases 458 Appendix 10A: Predetermined Overhead Rates and Overhead Analysis in a Standard Costing System 459 Glossary (Appendix 10A) 465 Exercises and Problems (Appendix 10A) 465 Appendix 10B: Journal Entries to Record Variances 471 Exercises and Problems (Appendix 10B) 473 Chapter 11 Performance Measurement in Decentralized Organizations 477 Decentralization in Organizations 478 Advantages and Disadvantages of Decentralization 478 Evaluating Investment Center Performance—Return on Investment 479 The Return on Investment (ROI) Formula 480 Net Operating Income and Operating Assets Defined 480 Understanding ROI 480 Criticisms of ROI 482 Residual Income 483 Motivation and Residual Income 485 Divisional Comparison and Residual Income 486 Operating Performance Measures 486 Delivery Cycle Time 487 Throughput (Manufacturing Cycle) Time 487 Manufacturing Cycle Efficiency (MCE) 488 Balanced Scorecard 490 Common Characteristics of Balanced Scorecards 490 A Company’s Strategy and the Balanced Scorecard 493 Tying Compensation to the Balanced Scorecard 495 Summary 496 Review Problem: Return on Investment (ROI) and Residual Income 496 Glossary 497 Questions 497 Applying Excel 498 The Foundational 15 499 Exercises 499 Problems 504 Cases 511 Appendix 11A: Transfer Pricing 512 Review Problem: Transfer Pricing 518 Glossary (Appendix 11A) 519 Exercises and Problems (Appendix 11A) 520 Appendix 11B: Service Department Charges 524 Glossary (Appendix 11B) 528 Exercises and Problems (Appendix 11B) 528 Contents Chapter The Foundational 15 Exercises 561 Problems 569 Cases 577 12 Chapter Capital Budgeting Decisions 536 Adding and Dropping Product Lines and Other Segments 538 An Illustration of Cost Analysis 538 A Comparative Format 540 Beware of Allocated Fixed Costs 540 The Make or Buy Decision 542 Strategic Aspects of the Make or Buy Decision An Example of Make or Buy 543 Opportunity Cost Special Orders 543 545 Utilization of a Constrained Resource 547 What Is a Constraint? 547 Contribution Margin per Unit of the Constrained Resource 548 Managing Constraints 550 The Problem of Multiple Constraints 551 Joint Product Costs and the Contribution Approach 552 The Pitfalls of Allocation 553 Sell or Process Further Decisions 554 Summary 556 Review Problem: Relevant Costs 556 Glossary 557 Questions 558 Applying Excel 558 583 Capital Budgeting—An Overview 584 Typical Capital Budgeting Decisions 584 Cash Flows versus Net Operating Income 584 Typical Cash Outflows 584 Typical Cash Inflows 585 The Time Value of Money 585 The Payback Method 586 Evaluation of the Payback Method 586 An Extended Example of Payback 587 Payback and Uneven Cash Flows 588 545 Activity-Based Costing and Relevant Costs 560 13 Differential Analysis: The Key to Decision Making 531 Cost Concepts for Decision Making 532 Identifying Relevant Costs and Benefits 532 Different Costs for Different Purposes 533 An Example of Identifying Relevant Costs and Benefits 534 Reconciling the Total and Differential Approaches Why Isolate Relevant Costs? 538 xxxvii 555 The Net Present Value Method 589 The Net Present Value Method Illustrated 589 Recovery of the Original Investment 592 An Extended Example of the Net Present Value Method 593 The Internal Rate of Return Method 594 The Internal Rate of Return Method Illustrated 594 Comparison of the Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Methods 596 Expanding the Net Present Value Method Least-Cost Decisions 597 Uncertain Cash Flows An Example 599 596 599 Preference Decisions—The Ranking of Investment Projects 600 Internal Rate of Return Method 600 Net Present Value Method 600 The Simple Rate of Return Method Postaudit of Investment Projects 601 603 xxxviii Contents Summary 604 Review Problem: Comparison of Capital Budgeting Methods 604 Glossary 606 Questions 606 Applying Excel 607 The Foundational 15 608 Exercises 609 Problems 613 Cases 619 Appendix 13A: The Concept of Present Value 621 Review Problem: Basic Present Value Computations 624 Glossary (Appendix 13A) 625 Exercises (Appendix 13A) 626 Appendix 13B: Present Value Tables 627 Appendix 13C: Income Taxes and the Net Present Value Method 629 Summary (Appendix 13C) 631 Exercises and Problems (Appendix 13C) 631 Interpreting the Statement of Cash Flows 651 Consider a Company’s Specific Circumstances 651 Consider the Relationships among Numbers 652 Free Cash Flow 652 Earnings Quality 653 Summary 653 Review Problem 654 Glossary 658 Questions 658 The Foundational 15 658 Exercises 660 Problems 663 Appendix 14A: The Direct Method of Determining the Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities 671 Exercises and Problems (Appendix 14A) 673 15 Chapter 14 Financial Statement Analysis Chapter Statement of Cash Flows 634 The Statement of Cash Flows: Key Concepts 636 Organizing the Statement of Cash Flows 636 Operating Activities: Direct or Indirect Method? 637 The Indirect Method: A Three-Step Process 638 Step 1 638 Step 2 639 Step 3 640 Investing and Financing Activities: Gross Cash Flows 640 Property, Plant, and Equipment 641 Retained Earnings 642 Summary of Key Concepts 643 An Example of a Statement of Cash Flows Operating Activities 646 Step 1 646 Step 2 646 Step 3 647 Investing Activities 647 Financing Activities 648 Seeing the Big Picture 650 644 675 Limitations of Financial Statement Analysis 676 Comparing Financial Data across Companies 676 Looking beyond Ratios 676 Statements in Comparative and Common-Size Form 676 Dollar and Percentage Changes on Statements 677 Common-Size Statements 679 Ratio Analysis—Liquidity 681 Working Capital 681 Current Ratio 682 Acid-Test (Quick) Ratio 682 Ratio Analysis—Asset Management 683 Accounts Receivable Turnover 683 Inventory Turnover 684 Operating Cycle 685 Total Asset Turnover 685 Ratio Analysis—Debt Management Times Interest Earned Ratio 686 Debt-to-Equity Ratio 686 Equity Multiplier 687 686 Contents Ratio Analysis—Profitability 688 Gross Margin Percentage 688 Net Profit Margin Percentage 688 Return on Total Assets 689 Return on Equity 689 Determining the Markup Percentage 719 Problems with the Absorption Costing Approach Target Costing 721 Reasons for Using Target Costing 721 An Example of Target Costing 721 Ratio Analysis—Market Performance 690 Earnings per Share 690 Price-Earnings Ratio 691 Dividend Payout and Yield Ratios 691 The Dividend Payout Ratio 691 The Dividend Yield Ratio 692 Book Value per Share 692 Summary of Ratios and Sources of Comparative Ratio Data 692 Summary 694 Review Problem: Selected Ratios and Financial Leverage 694 Glossary 697 Questions 697 The Foundational 15 697 Exercises 698 Problems 703 Appendix A 714 The Economists’ Approach to Pricing Elasticity of Demand 715 The Profit-Maximizing Price 716 Summary Glossary Questions Exercises Problems 722 722 722 723 724 Appendix B Profitability Analysis Introduction 727 728 Absolute Profitability 728 Relative Profitability 728 Volume Trade-Off Decisions Managerial Implications Pricing Products and Services 713 Introduction xxxix 715 The Absorption Costing Approach to Cost-Plus Pricing 718 Setting a Target Selling Price Using the Absorption Costing Approach 718 Summary 734 Glossary 735 Questions 735 Exercises 735 Problems 736 Cases 739 Credits Index 741 743 731 733 720 This page intentionally left blank CHAPTER 1 Managerial Accounting: An Overview Managerial Accounting: It’s More Than Just Crunching Numbers BUSIN ESS FO CUS “Creating value through values” is the credo of today’s management accountant. It means that management accountants should maintain an unwavering commitment to ethical values while using their knowledge and skills to influence decisions that create value for organizational stakeholders. These skills include managing risks and implementing strategy through planning, budgeting and forecasting, and decision support. Management accountants are strategic business partners who understand the financial and operational sides of the business. They not only report and analyze financial measures, but also nonfinancial measures of process performance and corporate social performance. Think of these responsibilities as profits (financial statements), process (customer focus and satisfaction), people (employee learning and satisfaction), and planet (environmental stewardship). ■ Source: Conversation with Jeff Thomson, president and CEO of the Institute of Management Accountants. 1 2 Chapter 1 his chapter explains why managerial accounting is important to the future careers of all business students. It begins by answering two questions: (1) What is managerial accounting? and (2) Why does managerial accounting matter to your career? It concludes by discussing six topics—ethics, strategic management, enterprise risk management, corporate social responsibility, process management, and leadership—that define the business context for applying the quantitative aspects of managerial accounting. T What Is Managerial Accounting? Many students enrolled in this course will have recently completed an introductory financial accounting course. Financial accounting is concerned with reporting financial information to external parties, such as stockholders, creditors, and regulators. Managerial accounting is concerned with providing information to managers for use within the organization. Exhibit 1–1 summarizes seven key differences between financial and managerial accounting. It recognizes that the fundamental difference between "DDPVOUJOH EXHIBIT 1–1 Comparison of Financial and Managerial Accounting r3FDPSEJOH r&TUJNBUJOH r0SHBOJ[JOH r4VNNBSJ[JOH 'JOBODJBM "DDPVOUJOH 'JOBODJBMBOE 0QFSBUJPOBM%BUB .BOBHFSJBM "DDPVOUJOH r3FQPSUTUPUIPTFPVUTJEF UIFPSHBOJ[BUJPO 0XOFST $SFEJUPST 5BYBVUIPSJUJFT 3FHVMBUPST r3FQPSUTUPNBOBHFSTJOTJEF UIFPSHBOJ[BUJPOGPS 1MBOOJOH $POUSPMMJOH %FDJTJPONBLJOH r&NQIBTJ[FTGJOBODJBM DPOTFRVFODFTPGQBTU BDUJWJUJFT r&NQIBTJ[FTEFDJTJPOT BGGFDUJOHUIFGVUVSF r&NQIBTJ[FTPCKFDUJWJUZBOE WFSJGJBCJMJUZ r&NQIBTJ[FTSFMFWBODF r&NQIBTJ[FTQSFDJTJPO r&NQIBTJ[FTUJNFMJOFTT r&NQIBTJ[FTDPNQBOZXJEF SFQPSUT r.VTUGPMMPX(""1*'34 r&NQIBTJ[FTTFHNFOU SFQPSUT r.BOEBUPSZGPSFYUFSOBMSFQPSUT r/PUNBOEBUPSZ r/FFEOPUGPMMPX(""1*'34 Managerial Accounting: An Overview financial and managerial accounting is that financial accounting serves the needs of those outside the organization, whereas managerial accounting serves the needs of managers employed inside the organization. Because of this fundamental difference in users, financial accounting emphasizes the financial consequences of past activities, objectivity and verifiability, precision, and companywide performance, whereas managerial accounting emphasizes decisions affecting the future, relevance, timeliness, and segment performance. A segment is a part or activity of an organization about which managers would like cost, revenue, or profit data. Examples of business segments include product lines, customer groups (segmented by age, ethnicity, gender, volume of purchases, etc.), geographic territories, divisions, plants, and departments. Finally, financial accounting is mandatory for external reports and it needs to comply with rules, such as generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) and international financial reporting standards (IFRS), whereas managerial accounting is not mandatory and it does not need to comply with externally imposed rules. As mentioned in Exhibit 1–1, managerial accounting helps managers perform three vital activities—planning, controlling, and decision making. Planning involves establishing goals and specifying how to achieve them. Controlling involves gathering feedback to ensure that the plan is being properly executed or modified as circumstances change. Decision making involves selecting a course of action from competing alternatives. Now let’s take a closer look at these three pillars of managerial accounting. Planning Assume that you work for Procter & Gamble (P&G) and that you are in charge of the company’s campus recruiting for all undergraduate business majors. In this example, your planning process would begin by establishing a goal such as: our goal is to recruit the “best and brightest” college graduates. The next stage of the planning process would require specifying how to achieve this goal by answering numerous questions such as: • • • • • • • How many students do we need to hire in total and from each major? What schools do we plan to include in our recruiting efforts? Which of our employees will be involved in each school’s recruiting activities? When will we conduct our interviews? How will we compare students to one another to decide who will be extended job offers? What salary will we offer our new hires? Will the salaries differ by major? How much money can we spend on our recruiting efforts? As you can see, there are many questions that need to be answered as part of the planning process. Plans are often accompanied by a budget. A budget is a detailed plan for the future that is usually expressed in formal quantitative terms. As the head of recruiting at P&G, your budget would include two key components. First, you would have to work with other senior managers inside the company to establish a budgeted amount of total salaries that can be offered to all new hires. Second, you would have to create a budget that quantifies how much you intend to spend on your campus recruiting activities. Controlling Once you established and started implementing P&G’s recruiting plan, you would transition to the control process. This process would involve gathering, evaluating, and responding to feedback to ensure that this year’s recruiting process meets expectations. It would also include evaluating the feedback in search of ways to run a more effective recruiting campaign next year. The control process would involve answering questions such as: • • Did we succeed in hiring the planned number of students within each major and at each school? Did we lose too many exceptional candidates to competitors? 3 4 Chapter 1 • • • • • Did each of our employees involved in the recruiting process perform satisfactorily? Is our method of comparing students to one another working? Did the on-campus and office interviews run smoothly? Did we stay within our budget in terms of total salary commitments to new hires? Did we stay within our budget regarding spending on recruiting activities? As you can see, there are many questions that need to be answered as part of the control process. When answering these questions your goal would be to go beyond simple yes or no answers in search of the underlying reasons why performance exceeded or failed to meet expectations. Part of the control process includes preparing performance reports. A performance report compares budgeted data to actual data in an effort to identify and learn from excellent performance and to identify and eliminate sources of unsatisfactory performance. Performance reports can also be used as one of many inputs to help evaluate and reward employees. Although this example focused on P&G’s campus recruiting efforts, we could have described how planning enables FedEx to deliver packages across the globe overnight, or how it helped Apple develop and market the iPad. We could have discussed how the control process helps Pfizer, Eli Lilly, and Abbott Laboratories ensure that their pharmaceutical drugs are produced in conformance with rigorous quality standards, or how Kroger relies on the control process to keep its grocery shelves stocked. We also could have looked at planning and control failures such as BP’s massive oil spill in the Gulf of Mexico. In short, all managers (and that probably includes you someday) perform planning and controlling activities. Decision Making Perhaps the most basic managerial skill is the ability to make intelligent, data-driven decisions. Broadly speaking, many of those decisions revolve around the following three questions. What should we be selling? Who should we be serving? How should we execute? Exhibit 1–2 provides examples of decisions pertaining to each of these three categories. The left-hand column of Exhibit 1–2 suggests that every company must make decisions related to the products and services that it sells. For example, each year Procter & Gamble must decide how to allocate its marketing budget across 25 brands that each generates over $1 billion in sales as well as other brands that have promising growth potential. Mattel must decide what new toys to introduce to the market. Southwest Airlines must decide what ticket prices to establish for each of its EXHIBIT 1–2 Examples of Decisions What should we be selling? Who should we be serving? How should we execute? What products and services should be the focus of our marketing efforts? Who should be the focus of our marketing efforts? How should we supply our parts and services? What new products and services should we offer? Who should we start serving? How should we expand our capacity? What prices should we charge for our products and services? Who should pay price premiums or receive price discounts? How should we reduce our capacity? What products and services should we discontinue? Who should we stop serving? How should we improve our efficiency and effectiveness? Managerial Accounting: An Overview thousands of flights per day. General Motors must decide whether to discontinue certain models of automobiles. The middle column of Exhibit 1–2 indicates that all companies must make decisions related to the customers that they serve. For example, Sears must decide how to allocate its marketing budget between products that tend to appeal to male versus female customers. FedEx must decide whether to expand its services into new markets across the globe. Hewlett-Packard must decide what price discounts to offer corporate clients that purchase large volumes of its products. A bank must decide whether to discontinue customers that may be unprofitable. The right-hand column of Exhibit 1–2 shows that companies also make decisions related to how they execute. For example, Boeing must decide whether to rely on outside vendors such as Goodrich, Saab, and Rolls-Royce to manufacture many of the parts used to make its airplanes. Cintas must decide whether to expand its laundering and cleaning capacity in a given geographic region by adding square footage to an existing facility or by constructing an entirely new facility. In an economic downturn, a manufacturer might have to decide whether to eliminate one 8-hour shift at three plants or to close one plant. Finally, all companies have to decide among competing improvement opportunities. For example, a company may have to decide whether to implement a new software system, to upgrade a piece of equipment, or to provide extra training to its employees. This portion of the chapter has explained that the three pillars of managerial accounting are planning, controlling, and decision making. This book helps prepare you to become an effective manager by explaining how to make intelligent data-driven decisions, how to create financial plans for the future, and how to continually make progress toward achieving goals by obtaining, evaluating, and responding to feedback. Why Does Managerial Accounting Matter to Your Career? Many students feel anxious about choosing a major because they are unsure if it will provide a fulfilling career. To reduce these anxieties, we recommend deemphasizing what you cannot control about the future; instead focusing on what you can control right now. More specifically, concentrate on answering the following question: What can you do now to prepare for success in an unknown future career? The best answer is to learn skills that will make it easier for you to adapt to an uncertain future. You need to become adaptable! Whether you end up working in the United States or abroad, for a large corporation, a small entrepreneurial company, a nonprofit organization, or a governmental entity, you’ll need to know how to plan for the future, how to make progress toward achieving goals, and how to make intelligent decisions. In other words, managerial accounting skills are useful in just about any career, organization, and industry. If you commit energy to this course, you’ll be making a smart investment in your future—even though you cannot clearly envision it. Next, we will elaborate on this point by explaining how managerial accounting relates to the future careers of business majors and accounting majors. Business Majors Exhibit 1–3 provides examples of how planning, controlling, and decision making affect three majors other than accounting—marketing, supply chain management, and human resource management. The left-hand column of Exhibit 1–3 describes some planning, controlling, and decision-making applications in the marketing profession. For example, marketing managers make planning decisions related to allocating advertising dollars across various communication mediums and to staffing new sales territories. From a control standpoint, they may closely track sales data to see if a budgeted price cut is generating an 5 6 Chapter 1 EXHIBIT 1–3 Relating Managerial Accounting to Three Business Majors Supply Chain Management Human Resource Management How much should we budget for TV, print, and Internet advertising? How many units should we plan to produce next period? How much should we plan to spend for occupational safety training? How many salespeople should we plan to hire to serve a new territory? How much should we budget for next period’s utility expense? How much should we plan to spend on employee recruitment advertising? Did we spend more or less than expected for the units we actually produced? Is our employee retention rate exceeding our goals? Are we accumulating too much inventory during the holiday shopping season? Are we achieving our goal of reducing the number of defective units produced? Are we meeting our goal of completing timely performance appraisals? Should we sell our services as one bundle or sell them separately? Should we transfer production of a component part to an overseas supplier? Should we hire an on-site medical staff to lower our health care costs? Should we sell directly to customers or use a distributor? Should we redesign our manufacturing process to lower inventory levels? Should we hire temporary workers or full-time employees? Marketing Planning Controlling Is the budgeted price cut increasing unit sales as expected? Decision Making anticipated increase in unit sales, or they may study inventory levels during the holiday shopping season so that they can adjust prices as needed to optimize sales. Marketing managers also make many important decisions such as whether to bundle services together and sell them for one price or to sell each service separately. They may also decide whether to sell products directly to the customer or to sell to a distributor, who then sells to the end consumer. The middle column of Exhibit 1–3 states that supply chain managers have to plan how many units to produce to satisfy anticipated customer demand. They also need to budget for operating expenses such as utilities, supplies, and labor costs. In terms of control, they monitor actual spending relative to the budget, and closely watch operational measures such as the number of defects produced relative to the plan. Supply chain managers make numerous decisions, such as deciding whether to transfer production of a component part to an overseas supplier. They also decide whether to invest in redesigning a manufacturing process to reduce inventory levels. The right-hand column of Exhibit 1–3 explains how human resource managers make a variety of planning decisions, such as budgeting how much to spend on occupational safety training and employee recruitment advertising. They monitor feedback related to numerous management concerns, such as employee retention rates and the timely completion of employee performance appraisals. They also help make many important decisions such as whether to hire on-site medical staff in an effort to lower health care costs, and whether to hire temporary workers or full-time employees in an uncertain economy. Managerial Accounting: An Overview 7 For brevity, Exhibit 1–3 does not include all business majors, such as finance, management information systems, and economics. Can you explain how planning, controlling, and decision-making activities would relate to these majors? Accounting Majors Many accounting graduates begin their careers working for public accounting firms that provide a variety of valuable services for their clients. Some of these graduates will build successful and fulfilling careers in the public accounting industry; however, most will leave public accounting at some point to work in other organizations. In fact, the Institute of Management Accountants (IMA) estimates that more than 80% of professional accountants in the United States work in nonpublic accounting environments (www.imanet.org/ about_ima/our_mission.aspx). The public accounting profession has a strong financial accounting orientation. Its most important function is to protect investors and other external parties by assuring them that companies are reporting historical financial results that comply with applicable accounting rules. Managerial accountants also have strong financial accounting skills. For example, they play an important role in helping their organizations design and maintain financial reporting systems that generate reliable financial disclosures. However, the primary role of managerial accountants is to partner with their co-workers within the organization to improve performance. Given the 80% figure mentioned above, if you are an accounting major there is a very high likelihood that your future will involve working for a nonpublic accounting employer. Your employer will expect you to have strong financial accounting skills, but more importantly, it will expect you to help improve organizational performance by applying the planning, controlling, and decision-making skills that are the foundation of managerial accounting. A NETWORKING OPPORTUNITY The Institute of Management Accountants (IMA) is a network of more than 60,000 accounting and finance professionals from over 120 countries. Every year the IMA hosts a student leadership conference that attracts 300 students from over 50 colleges and universities. Guest speakers at past conferences have discussed topics such as leadership, advice for a successful career, how to market yourself in a difficult economy, and excelling in today’s multigenerational workforce. One student who attended the conference said, “I liked that I was able to interact with professionals who are in fields that could be potential career paths for me.” For more information on this worthwhile networking opportunity, contact the IMA at the phone number and website shown below. Source: Conversation with Jodi Ryan, the Institute of Management Accountants’ Director, Education/Corporate Partnerships. (201) 474-1556 or visit its website at www.imanet.org. Professional Certification—A Smart Investment If you plan to become an accounting major, the Certified Management Accountant (CMA) designation is a globally respected credential (sponsored by the IMA) that will increase your credibility, upward mobility, and compensation. Exhibit 1–4 summarizes the topics covered in the two-part CMA exam. For brevity, we are not going to define all the terms included in this exhibit. Its purpose is simply to emphasize that the CMA exam focuses on the planning, controlling, and decision-making skills that are critically important to nonpublic accounting employers. The CMA’s internal management orientation is a complement to the highly respected Certified Public Accountant (CPA) exam that focuses on rule-based compliance—assurance standards, financial accounting standards, business law, and the tax code. Information about becoming a CMA is available on the IMA’s website (www. imanet.org) or by calling 1-800-638-4427. IN BUSINESS 8 Chapter 1 EXHIBIT 1–4 CMA Exam Content Specifications IN BUSINESS Part 1 Financial Planning, Performance, and Control Planning, budgeting, and forecasting Performance management Cost management Internal controls Professional ethics Part 2 Financial Decision Making Financial statement analysis Corporate finance Decision analysis and risk management Investment decisions Professional ethics HOW’S THE PAY? The Institute of Management Accountants has created the following table that allows individuals to estimate what their salary would be as a management accountant. Your Calculation Start with this base amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you are top-level management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OR, if you are entry-level management . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of years in the field _____ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have an advanced degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you hold the CMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you hold the CPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your estimated salary level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADD SUBTRACT TIMES ADD ADD ADD $75,807 $28,000 $25,995 $ 700 $13,873 $11,126 $10,193 $75,807 For example, if you make it to top-level management in 10 years, have an advanced degree and a CMA, your estimated salary would be $135,806 [$75,807 1 $28,000 1 (10 3 700) 1 $13,873 1 $11,126]. Source: Lee Schiffel, David L. Schroeder, and Kenneth A. Smith, “IMA 2011 Salary Survey,” Strategic Finance June 2012, pp. 29–47. Managerial Accounting: Beyond the Numbers Exhibit 1–5 summarizes how each chapter of the book teaches measurement skills that managers use on the job every day. For example, Chapter 8 teaches you the measurement skills that managers use to answer the question—how should I create a financial plan for next year? Chapters 9 and 10 teach you the measurement skills that managers use to answer the question—how well am I performing relative to my plan? Chapter 7 teaches you measurement skills related to product, service, and customer profitability. However, it is vitally important that you also understand managerial accounting involves more than just “crunching numbers.” To be successful, managers must complement their measurement skills with six business management perspectives that “go beyond the numbers” to enable intelligent planning, control, and decision making. Managerial Accounting: An Overview Chapter Number The Key Question from a Manager’s Perspective Chapter 2 What cost classifications do I use for different management purposes? Chapters 3 & 4 What is the value of our ending inventory and cost of goods sold for external reporting purposes? Chapter 5 How will my profits change if I change my selling price, sales volume, or costs? Chapter 6 How should the income statement be presented? Chapter 7 How profitable is each of our products, services, and customers? Chapter 8 How should I create a financial plan for next year? Chapters 9 & 10 How well am I performing relative to my plan? Chapter 11 What performance measures should we monitor to ensure that we achieve our strategic goals? Chapter 12 How do I quantify the profit impact of pursuing one course of action versus another? Chapter 13 How do I make long-term capital investment decisions? Chapter 14 What cash inflows and outflows explain the change in our cash balance? Chapter 15 How can we analyze our financial statements to better understand our performance? An Ethics Perspective Ethical behavior is the lubricant that keeps the economy running. Without that lubricant, the economy would operate much less efficiently—less would be available to consumers, quality would be lower, and prices would be higher. In other words, without fundamental trust in the integrity of business, the economy would operate much less efficiently. Thus, for the good of everyone—including profit-making companies—it is vitally important that business be conducted within an ethical framework that builds and sustains trust. Code of Conduct for Management Accountants The Institute of Management Accountants (IMA) of the United States has adopted an ethical code called the Statement of Ethical Professional Practice that describes in some detail the ethical responsibilities of management accountants. Even though the standards were developed specifically for management accountants, they have much broader application. The standards consist of two parts that are presented in full in Exhibit 1–6 (page 10). The first part provides general guidelines for ethical behavior. In a nutshell, a management accountant has ethical responsibilities in four broad areas: first, to maintain a high level of professional competence; second, to treat sensitive matters with confidentiality; third, to maintain personal integrity; and fourth, to disclose information in a credible fashion. The second part of the standards specifies what should be done if an individual finds evidence of ethical misconduct. The ethical standards provide sound, practical advice for management accountants and managers. Most of the rules in the ethical standards are motivated by a very practical consideration—if these rules were not generally followed in business, then 9 EXHIBIT 1–5 Measurement Skills: A Manager’s Perspective 10 Chapter 1 EXHIBIT 1–6 IMA Statement of Ethical Professional Practice Members of IMA shall behave ethically. A commitment to ethical professional practice includes: overarching principles that express our values, and standards that guide our conduct. PRINCIPLES IMA’s overarching ethical principles include: Honesty, Fairness, Objectivity, and Responsibility. Members shall act in accordance with these principles and shall encourage others within their organizations to adhere to them. STANDARDS A member’s failure to comply with the following standards may result in disciplinary action. I. COMPETENCE Each member has a responsibility to: 1. Maintain an appropriate level of professional expertise by continually developing knowledge and skills. 2. Perform professional duties in accordance with relevant laws, regulations, and technical standards. 3. Provide decision support information and recommendations that are accurate, clear, concise, and timely. 4. Recognize and communicate professional limitations or other constraints that would preclude responsible judgment or successful performance of an activity. II. CONFIDENTIALITY Each member has a responsibility to: 1. Keep information confidential except when disclosure is authorized or legally required. 2. Inform all relevant parties regarding appropriate use of confidential information. Monitor subordinates’ activities to ensure compliance. 3. Refrain from using confidential information for unethical or illegal advantage. III. INTEGRITY Each member has a responsibility to: 1. Mitigate actual conflicts of interest. Regularly communicate with business associates to avoid apparent conflicts of interest. Advise all parties of any potential conflicts. 2. Refrain from engaging in any conduct that would prejudice carrying out duties ethically. 3. Abstain from engaging in or supporting any activity that might discredit the profession. IV. CREDIBILITY Each member has a responsibility to: 1. Communicate information fairly and objectively. 2. Disclose all relevant information that could reasonably be expected to influence an intended user’s understanding of the reports, analyses, or recommendations. 3. Disclose delays or deficiencies in information, timeliness, processing, or internal controls in conformance with organization policy and/or applicable law. RESOLUTION OF ETHICAL CONFLICT In applying the Standards of Ethical Professional Practice, you may encounter problems identifying unethical behavior or resolving an ethical conflict. When faced with ethical issues, you should follow your organization’s established policies on the resolution of such conflict. If these policies do not resolve the ethical conflict, you should consider the following courses of action: 1. Discuss the issue with your immediate supervisor except when it appears that the supervisor is involved. In that case, present the issue to the next level. If you cannot achieve a satisfactory resolution, submit the issue to the next management level. If your immediate superior is the chief executive officer or equivalent, the acceptable reviewing authority may be a group such as the audit committee, executive committee, board of directors, board of trustees, or owners. Contact with levels above the immediate superior should be initiated only with your superior’s knowledge, assuming he or she is not involved. Communication of such problems to authorities or individuals not employed or engaged by the organization is not considered appropriate, unless you believe there is a clear violation of the law. 2. Clarify relevant ethical issues by initiating a confidential discussion with an IMA Ethics Counselor or other impartial advisor to obtain a better understanding of possible courses of action. 3. Consult your own attorney as to legal obligations and rights concerning the ethical conflict. Managerial Accounting: An Overview TOYOTA ENCOUNTERS MAJOR PROBLEMS When Toyota Motor Corporation failed to meet its profit targets, the company set an aggressive goal of reducing the cost of its auto parts by 30%. The quality and safety of the company’s automobiles eventually suffered mightily resulting in recalls, litigation, incentive campaigns, and marketing efforts that analysts estimate will cost the company more than $5 billion. The car maker’s president, Akio Toyoda, blamed his company’s massive quality lapses on an excessive focus on profits and market share. Similarly, Jim Press, Toyota’s former top U.S. executive, said the problems were caused by “financially-oriented pirates who didn’t have the character to maintain a customer-first focus.” Sources: Yoshio Takahashi, “Toyota Accelerates Its Cost-Cutting Efforts,” The Wall Street Journal, December 23, 2009, p. B4; Mariko Sanchanta and Yoshio Takahashi, “Toyota’s Recall May Top $5 Billion,” The Wall Street Journal, March 10, 2010, p. B2; and Norihiko Shirouzu, “Toyoda Rues Excessive Profit Focus,” The Wall Street Journal, March 2, 2010, p. B3. the economy and all of us would suffer. Consider the following specific examples of the consequences of not abiding by the standards: • • • Suppose employees could not be trusted with confidential information. Then top managers would be reluctant to distribute such information within the company and, as a result, decisions would be based on incomplete information and operations would deteriorate. Suppose employees accepted bribes from suppliers. Then contracts would tend to go to the suppliers who pay the highest bribes rather than to the most competent suppliers. Would you like to fly in aircraft whose wings were made by the subcontractor who paid the highest bribe? Would you fly as often? What would happen to the airline industry if its safety record deteriorated due to shoddy workmanship on contracted parts and subassemblies? Suppose the presidents of companies routinely lied in their annual reports and financial statements. If investors could not rely on the basic integrity of a company’s financial statements, they would have little basis for making informed decisions. Suspecting the worst, rational investors would pay less for securities issued by companies and may not be willing to invest at all. As a consequence, companies would have less money for productive investments—leading to slower economic growth, fewer goods and services, and higher prices. Not only is ethical behavior the lubricant for our economy, it is the foundation of managerial accounting. The numbers that managers rely on for planning, control, and decision making are meaningless unless they have been competently, objectively, and honestly gathered, analyzed, and reported. As your career unfolds, you will inevitably face decisions with ethical implications. Before making such decisions, consider performing the following steps. First, define your alternative courses of action. Second, identify all of the parties that will be affected by your decision. Third, define how each course of action will favorably or unfavorably impact each affected party. Once you have a complete understanding of the decision context, seek guidance from external sources such as the IMA Statement of Ethical Professional Practice, the IMA Ethics Helpline at (800) 245-1383, or a trusted confidant. Before executing your decision ask yourself one final question—would I be comfortable disclosing my chosen course of action on the front page of The Wall Street Journal? A Strategic Management Perspective Companies do not succeed by sheer luck; instead, they need to develop a strategy that defines how they intend to succeed in the marketplace. A strategy is a “game plan” that enables a company to attract customers by distinguishing itself from competitors. The focal 11 IN BUSINESS 12 Chapter 1 point of a company’s strategy should be its target customers. A company can only succeed if it creates a reason for its target customers to choose it over a competitor. These reasons, or what are more formally called customer value propositions, are the essence of strategy. Customer value propositions tend to fall into three broad categories—customer intimacy, operational excellence, and product leadership. Companies that adopt a customer intimacy strategy are in essence saying to their customers, “You should choose us because we can customize our products and services to meet your individual needs better than our competitors.” Ritz-Carlton, Nordstrom, and Virtuoso (a premium service travel agency) rely primarily on a customer intimacy value proposition for their success. Companies that pursue the second customer value proposition, called operational excellence, are saying to their target customers, “You should choose us because we deliver products and services faster, more conveniently, and at a lower price than our competitors.” Southwest Airlines, Walmart, and Google are examples of companies that succeed first and foremost because of their operational excellence. Companies pursuing the third customer value proposition, called product leadership, are saying to their target customers, “You should choose us because we offer higher quality products than our competitors.” Apple, Cisco Systems, and W.L. Gore (the creator of GORE-TEX® fabrics) are examples of companies that succeed because of their product leadership.1 The plans managers set forth, the variables they seek to control, and the decisions they make are all influenced by their company’s strategy. For example, Walmart would not make plans to build ultra-expensive clothing boutiques because these plans would conflict with the company’s strategy of operational excellence and “everyday low prices.” Apple would not seek to control its operations by selecting performance measures that focus solely on cost-cutting because those measures would conflict with its product leadership customer value proposition. Finally, it is unlikely that Rolex would decide to implement drastic price reductions for its watches even if a financial analysis indicated that establishing a lower price might boost short-run profits. Rolex would oppose this course of action because it would diminish the luxury brand that forms the foundation of the company’s product leadership customer value proposition. IN BUSINESS A FOUR-YEAR WAITING LIST AT VANILLA BICYCLES Sacha White started Vanilla Bicycles in Portland, Oregon, in 2001. After eight years in business, he had a four-year backlog of customer orders. He limits his annual production to 40–50 bikes per year that sell for an average of $7,000 each. He uses a silver alloy that costs 20 times as much as brass (which is the industry standard) to join titanium tubes together to form a bike frame. White spends three hours taking a buyer’s measurements to determine the exact dimensions of the bike frame. He has resisted expanding production because it would undermine his strategy based on product leadership and customer intimacy. As White said, “If I ended up sacrificing what made Vanilla special just to make more bikes, that wouldn’t be worth it to me.” Source: Christopher Steiner, “Heaven on Wheels,” Forbes, April 13, 2009, p. 75. An Enterprise Risk Management Perspective Every strategy, plan, and decision involves risks. Enterprise risk management is a process used by a company to identify those risks and develop responses to them that enable it to be reasonably assured of meeting its goals. The left-hand column of Exhibit 1–7 provides 12 examples of the types of business risks that companies face. They range from risks that relate to the weather to risks associated with computer hackers, complying 1 These three customer value propositions were defined by Michael Treacy and Fred Wiersema in “Customer Intimacy and Other Value Disciplines,” Harvard Business Review, Volume 71 Issue 1, pp. 84–93. Managerial Accounting: An Overview Examples of Controls to Reduce Business Risks Examples of Business Risks • Intellectual assets being stolen from computer files • • Products harming customers • • Losing market share due to the unforeseen actions of competitors • • Poor weather conditions shutting down operations • • A website malfunctioning • • A supplier strike halting the flow of raw materials • • A poorly designed incentive compensation system causing employees to make bad decisions Financial statements inaccurately reporting the value of inventory • • An employee stealing assets • • An employee accessing unauthorized information • • Inaccurate budget estimates causing excessive or insufficient production Failing to comply with equal employment opportunity laws • • • • • Create firewalls that prohibit computer hackers from corrupting or stealing intellectual property Develop a formal and rigorous new product testing program Develop an approach for legally gathering information about competitors’ plans and practices Develop contingency plans for overcoming weather-related disruptions Thoroughly test the website before going “live” on the Internet Establish a relationship with two companies capable of providing needed raw materials Create a balanced set of performance measures that motivates the desired behavior Count the physical inventory on hand to make sure that it agrees with the accounting records Segregate duties so that the same employee does not have physical custody of an asset and the responsibility of accounting for it Create password-protected barriers that prohibit employees from obtaining information not needed to do their jobs Implement a rigorous budget review process Create a report that tracks key metrics related to compliance with the laws with the law, employee theft, and products harming customers. The right-hand column of Exhibit 1–7 provides an example of a control that could be implemented to help reduce each of the risks mentioned in the left-hand column of the exhibit.2 Although these types of controls cannot completely eliminate risks, they enable companies to proactively manage their risks rather than passively reacting to unfortunate events that have already occurred. In managerial accounting, companies use controls to reduce the risk that their plans will not be achieved. For example, if a company plans to build a new manufacturing facility within a predefined budget and time frame, it will establish and monitor control measures to ensure that the project is concluded on time and within the budget. Risk management is also a critically important aspect of decision making. For example, when a company quantifies the labor cost savings that it can realize by sending jobs overseas, it should complement its financial analysis with a prudent assessment of the accompanying 2 Besides using controls to reduce risks, companies can also chose other risk responses, such as accepting or avoiding a risk. 13 EXHIBIT 1–7 Identifying and Controlling Business Risks 14 Chapter 1 IN BUSINESS MANAGING THE RISK OF A POWER OUTAGE Between January and April of 2010, the United States had 35 major power outages. For business owners, these power outages can be costly. For example, a New York night club called the Smoke Jazz and Supper Club lost an estimated $1,500 in revenue when a power outage shut down its on-line reservation system for one night. George Pauli, the owner of Great Embroidery LLC in Mesa, Arizona, estimates that his company has an average of six power outages every year. Since Pauli’s sewing machines cannot resume exactly where they leave off when abruptly shut down, each power outage costs him $120 in lost inventory. Pauli decided to buy $700 worth of batteries to keep his sewing machines running during power outages. The batteries paid for themselves in less than one year. Source: Sarah E. Needleman, “Lights Out Means Lost Sales,” The Wall Street Journal, July 22, 2010, p. B8. risks. Will the overseas manufacturer use child labor? Will the product’s quality decline, thereby leading to more warranty repairs, customer complaints, and lawsuits? Will the elapsed time from customer order to delivery dramatically increase? Will terminating domestic employees diminish morale within the company and harm perceptions within the community? These are the types of risks that managers should incorporate into their decision-making processes. A Corporate Social Responsibility Perspective Companies are responsible for creating strategies that produce financial results that satisfy stockholders. However, they also have a corporate social responsibility to serve other stakeholders—such as customers, employees, suppliers, communities, and environmental and human rights advocates—whose interests are tied to the company’s performance. Corporate social responsibility (CSR) is a concept whereby organizations consider the needs of all stakeholders when making decisions. CSR extends beyond legal compliance to include voluntary actions that satisfy stakeholder expectations. Numerous companies, such as Procter & Gamble, 3M, Eli Lilly and Company, Starbucks, Microsoft, Genentech, Johnson & Johnson, Baxter International, Abbott Laboratories, KPMG, PNC Bank, Deloitte, Southwest Airlines, and Caterpillar, prominently describe their corporate social performance on their websites. Exhibit 1–8 presents examples of corporate social responsibilities that are of interest to six stakeholder groups.3 If a company fails to meet the needs of these six stakeholder groups it can adversely affect its financial performance. For example, if a company pollutes the environment or fails to provide safe and humane working conditions for its employees, the negative publicity from environmental and human rights activists could cause the company’s customers to defect and its “best and brightest” job candidates to apply elsewhere—both of which are likely to eventually harm financial performance. This explains why in managerial accounting a manager must establish plans, implement controls, and make decisions that consider impacts on all stakeholders. A Process Management Perspective Most companies organize themselves by functional departments, such as the Marketing Department, the Research and Development Department, and the Accounting Department. These departments tend to have a clearly defined “chain of command” that specifies superior and subordinate relationships. However, effective managers understand that business processes, more so than functional departments, serve the needs of a company’s 3 Many of the examples in Exhibit 1–8 were drawn from Terry Leap and Misty L. Loughry, “The Stakeholder-Friendly Firm,” Business Horizons, March/April 2004, pp. 27–32. Managerial Accounting: An Overview Companies should provide customers with: • Safe, high-quality products that are fairly priced. • Competent, courteous, and rapid delivery of products and services. • Full disclosure of product-related risks. • Easy-to-use information systems for shopping and tracking orders. Companies and their suppliers should provide employees with: • Safe and humane working conditions. • Nondiscriminatory treatment and the right to organize and file grievances. • Fair compensation. • Opportunities for training, promotion, and personal development. Companies should provide suppliers with: • Fair contract terms and prompt payments. • Reasonable time to prepare orders. • Hassle-free acceptance of timely and complete deliveries. • Cooperative rather than unilateral actions. Companies should provide communities with: • Payment of fair taxes. • Honest information about plans such as plant closings. • Resources that support charities, schools, and civic activities. • Reasonable access to media sources. Companies should provide stockholders with: • Competent management. • Easy access to complete and accurate financial information. • Full disclosure of enterprise risks. • Honest answers to knowledgeable questions. Companies should provide environmental and human rights advocates with: • Greenhouse gas emissions data. • Recycling and resource conservation data. • Child labor transparency. • Full disclosure of suppliers located in developing countries. GREENPEACE LEVERAGES THE POWER OF SOCIAL MEDIA When Nestlé purchased palm oil from an Indonesian supplier to manufacture Kit-Kat candy bars Greenpeace International used social media to express its disapproval. Greenpeace claimed that the Indonesian company destroyed rainforest to create its palm oil plantation; therefore, Nestlé’s actions were contributing to global warming and endangering orangutans. Greenpeace posted YouTube videos, added comments to Nestlé’s Facebook page, and sent Twitter Tweets to communicate its message to supporters. At one point, the number of fans on Nestlé’s Facebook page grew to 95,000, most of them being protesters. Nestlé terminated its relationship with the supplier, which provided 1.25% of Nestlé’s palm oil needs. A Nestlé spokesperson says the difficulty in responding to social media is to “show that we are listening, which we obviously are, while not getting involved in a shouting match.” Source: Emily Steel, “Nestlé Takes a Beating on Social-Media Sites,” The Wall Street Journal, March 29, 2010, p. B5. most important stakeholders—its customers. A business process is a series of steps that are followed in order to carry out some task in a business. These steps often span departmental boundaries, thereby requiring managers to cooperate across functional departments. The term value chain is often used to describe how an organization’s functional departments interact with one another to form business processes. A value chain, as shown in Exhibit 1–9, consists of the major business functions that add value to a company’s products and services. 15 EXHIBIT 1–8 Examples of Corporate Social Responsibilities IN BUSINESS 16 Chapter 1 EXHIBIT 1–9 Business Functions Making Up the Value Chain Research and Development Product Design Manufacturing Marketing Distribution Customer Service Managers need to understand the value chain to be effective in terms of planning, control, and decision making. For example, if a company’s engineers plan to design a new product, they must communicate with the Manufacturing Department to ensure that the product can actually be produced, the Marketing Department to ensure that customers will buy the product, the Distribution Department to ensure that large volumes of the product can be cost-effectively transported to customers, and the Accounting Department to ensure that the product will increase profits. From a control and decision-making standpoint, managers also need to focus on process excellence instead of functional performance. For example, if the Purchasing Department focuses solely on minimizing the cost of purchased materials, this narrowly focused attempt at cost reduction may lead to greater scrap and rework in the Manufacturing Department, more complaints in the Customer Service Department, and greater challenges in the Marketing Department because dissatisfied customers are turning their attention to competitors. Managers frequently use a process management method known as lean thinking, or what is called Lean Production in the manufacturing sector. Lean Production is a management approach that organizes resources such as people and machines around the flow of business processes and that only produces units in response to customer orders. It is often called just-in-time production (or JIT) because products are only manufactured in response to customer orders and they are completed just-in-time to be shipped to customers. Lean thinking differs from traditional manufacturing methods, which organize work departmentally and encourage departments to maximize their output even if it exceeds customer demand and bloats inventories. Because lean thinking only allows production in response to customer orders, the number of units produced tends to equal the number of units sold, thereby resulting in minimal inventory. The lean approach also results in fewer defects, less wasted effort, and quicker customer response times than traditional production methods. IN BUSINESS LOUIS VUITTON IMPLEMENTS LEAN PRODUCTION Louis Vuitton, headquartered in Paris, France, used lean production to increase its manufacturing capacity without having to build a new factory. It created U-shaped work arrangements for teams of 10 workers, thereby freeing up 10% more floor space in its factories. The company was able to hire 300 more workers without adding any square footage. Louis Vuitton also uses robots and computer programs to reduce wasted leather and the time needed to perform certain tasks. Source: Christina Passariello, “At Vuitton, Growth in Small Batches,” The Wall Street Journal, June 27, 2011, pp. B1 and B10. A Leadership Perspective An organization’s employees bring diverse needs, beliefs, and goals to the workplace. Therefore, an important role for organizational leaders is to unite the behaviors of their fellow employees around two common themes—pursuing strategic goals and making Managerial Accounting: An Overview optimal decisions. To fulfill this responsibility, leaders need to understand how intrinsic motivation, extrinsic incentives, and cognitive bias influence human behavior. Intrinsic Motivation Intrinsic motivation refers to motivation that comes from within us. Stop for a moment and identify the greatest accomplishment of your life. Then ask yourself what motivated you to achieve this goal? In all likelihood, you achieved it because you wanted to, not because someone forced you to do it. In other words, you were intrinsically motivated. Similarly, an organization is more likely to prosper when its employees are intrinsically motivated to pursue its interests. A leader, who employees perceive as credible and respectful of their value to the organization, can increase the extent to which those employees are intrinsically motivated to pursue strategic goals. As your career evolves, to be perceived as a credible leader you’ll need to possess three attributes— technical competence (that spans the value chain), personal integrity (in terms of work ethic and honesty), and strong communication skills (including oral presentation skills and writing skills). To be perceived as a leader who is respectful of your co-workers’ value to the organization, you’ll need to possess three more attributes—strong mentoring skills (to help others realize their potential), strong listening skills (to learn from your co-workers and be responsive to their needs), and personal humility (in terms of deferring recognition to all employees who contribute to the organization’s success). If you possess these six traits, then you’ll have the potential to become a leader who inspires others to readily and energetically channel their efforts toward achieving organizational goals. Extrinsic Incentives Many organizations use extrinsic incentives to highlight important goals and to motivate employees to achieve them. For example, assume a company establishes the goal of reducing the time needed to perform a task by 20%. In addition, assume the company agrees to pay bonus compensation to its employees if they achieve the goal within three months. In this example, the company is using a type of extrinsic incentive known as a bonus to highlight a particular goal and to presumably motivate employees to achieve it. While proponents of extrinsic incentives rightly assert that these types of rewards can have a powerful influence on employee behavior, many critics warn that they can also produce dysfunctional consequences. For example, suppose the employees mentioned above earned their bonuses by achieving the 20% time reduction goal within three months. However, let’s also assume that during those three months the quality of the employees’ output plummeted, thereby causing a spike in the company’s repair costs, product returns, and customer defections. In this instance, did the extrinsic incentive work properly? The answer is yes and no. The bonus system did motivate employees to attain the time reduction goal; however, it also had the unintended consequences of causing employees to neglect product quality, thereby increasing repair costs, product returns, and customer defections. In other words, what may have seemed like a well-intended extrinsic incentive actually produced dysfunctional results for the company. This example highlights an important leadership challenge that you are likely to face someday—designing financial compensation systems that fairly reward employees for their efforts without inadvertently creating extrinsic incentives that motivate them to take actions that harm the company. Cognitive Bias Leaders need to be aware that all people (including themselves) possess cognitive biases, or distorted thought processes, that can adversely affect planning, controlling, and decision making. To illustrate how cognitive bias works, let’s consider the scenario of a television “infomercial” where someone is selling a product with a proclaimed value of $200 for $19.99 if viewers call within the next 30 minutes. Why do you think the seller claims that the product has a $200 value? The seller is relying on a cognitive bias called anchoring bias in an effort to convince viewers that a $180 discount is simply too good to pass up. The “anchor” is the false assertion that the product is actually worth $200. If viewers erroneously attach credibility to this contrived piece of information, their distorted analysis of the situation may cause them to spend $19.99 on an item whose true economic value is much less than that amount. 17 18 Chapter 1 While cognitive biases cannot be eliminated, effective leaders should take two steps to reduce their negative impacts. First, they should acknowledge their own susceptibility to cognitive bias. For example, a leader’s judgment might be clouded by optimism bias (being overly optimistic in assessing the likelihood of future outcomes) or selfenhancement bias (overestimating ones strengths and underestimating ones weaknesses relative to others). Second, they should acknowledge the presence of cognitive bias in others and introduce techniques to minimize their adverse consequences. For example, to reduce the risks of confirmation bias (a bias where people pay greater attention to information that confirms their preconceived notions, while devaluing information that contradicts them) or groupthink bias (a bias where some group members support a course of action solely because other group members do), a leader may routinely appoint independent teams of employees to assess the credibility of recommendations set forth by other individuals and groups. Summary This chapter defined managerial accounting and explained why it is relevant to business and accounting majors. It also discussed six topics—ethics, strategic management, enterprise risk management, corporate social responsibility, process management, and leadership—that define the context for applying the quantitative aspects of managerial accounting. The most important goal of this chapter was to help you understand that managerial accounting matters to your future career regardless of your major. Accounting is the language of business and you’ll need to speak it to communicate effectively with and influence fellow managers. Glossary Budget A detailed plan for the future that is usually expressed in formal quantitative terms. (p. 3) Business process A series of steps that are followed in order to carry out some task in a business. (p. 15) Controlling The process of gathering feedback to ensure that a plan is being properly executed or modified as circumstances change. (p. 3) Corporate social responsibility A concept whereby organizations consider the needs of all stakeholders when making decisions. (p. 14) Decision making Selecting a course of action from competing alternatives. (p. 3) Enterprise risk management A process used by a company to identify its risks and develop responses to them that enable it to be reasonably assured of meeting its goals. (p. 12) Financial accounting The phase of accounting that is concerned with reporting historical financial information to external parties, such as stockholders, creditors, and regulators. (p. 2) Lean Production A management approach that organizes resources such as people and machines around the flow of business processes and that only produces units in response to customer orders. (p. 16) Managerial accounting The phase of accounting that is concerned with providing information to managers for use within the organization. (p. 2) Performance report A report that compares budgeted data to actual data to highlight instances of excellent and unsatisfactory performance. (p. 4) Planning The process of establishing goals and specifying how to achieve them. (p. 3) Segment A part or activity of an organization about which managers would like cost, revenue, or profit data. (p. 3) Strategy A company’s “game plan” for attracting customers by distinguishing itself from competitors. (p. 11) Value chain The major business functions that add value to a company’s products and services, such as research and development, product design, manufacturing, marketing, distribution, and customer service. (p. 15) Managerial Accounting: An Overview 19 Questions 1–1 1–2 1–3 1–4 1–5 1–6 1–7 1–8 1–9 1–10 1–11 1–12 1–13 1–14 1–15 How does managerial accounting differ from financial accounting? Pick any major television network and describe some planning and control activities that its managers would engage in. If you had to decide whether to continue making a component part or to begin buying the part from an overseas supplier, what quantitative and qualitative factors would influence your decision? Why do companies prepare budgets? Why is managerial accounting relevant to business majors and their future careers? Why is managerial accounting relevant to accounting majors and their future careers? Pick any large company and describe its strategy using the framework in the chapter. Why do management accountants need to understand their company’s strategy? Pick any large company and describe three risks that it faces and how it responds to those risks. Provide three examples of how a company’s risks can influence its planning, controlling, and decision-making activities. Pick any large company and explain three ways that it could segment its companywide performance. Locate the website of any company that publishes a corporate social responsibility report (also referred to as a sustainability report). Describe three nonfinancial performance measures included in the report. Why do you think the company publishes this report? Why do companies that implement Lean Production tend to have minimal inventories? Why are leadership skills important to managers? Why is ethical behavior important to business? Multiple-choice questions are provided on the text website at www.mhhe.com/garrison15e. Exercises For this chapter, LearnSmart and Interactive Presentations are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. EXERCISE 1–1 Planning and Control Many companies use budgets for three purposes. First, they use them to plan how to deploy resources to best serve customers. Second, they use them to establish challenging goals, or stretch targets, to motivate employees to strive for exceptional results. Third, they use them to evaluate and reward employees. Assume that you are a sales manager working with your boss to create a sales budget for next year. Once the sales budget is established, it will influence how other departments within the company plan to deploy their resources. For example, the manufacturing manager will plan to produce enough units to meet budgeted unit sales. The sales budget will also be instrumental in determining your pay raise, potential for promotion, and bonus. If actual sales exceed the sales budget, it bodes well for your career. If actual sales are less than budgeted sales, it will diminish your financial compensation and potential for promotion. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Do you think it would be appropriate for your boss to establish the sales budget without any input from you? Why? Do you think the company would be comfortable with allowing you to establish the sales budget without any input from your boss? Why? Assume the company uses its sales budget for only one purpose—planning to deploy resources in a manner that best serves customers. What thoughts would influence your estimate of future sales as well as your boss’s estimate of future sales? Assume the company uses its sales budget for only one purpose—motivating employees to strive for exceptional results. What thoughts would influence your estimate of future sales as well as your boss’s estimate of future sales? Assume the company uses its sales budget for only one purpose—to determine your pay raise, potential for promotion, and bonus. What thoughts would influence your estimate of future sales as well as your boss’s estimate of future sales? Assume the sales budget is used for all three purposes described in questions 3–5. Describe any conflicts or complications that might arise when using the sales budget for these three purposes. 20 Chapter 1 EXERCISE 1–2 Controlling Assume that you work for an airline unloading luggage from airplanes. Your boss has said that, on average, each airplane contains 100 pieces of luggage. Furthermore, your boss has stated that you should be able to unload 100 pieces of luggage from an airplane in 10 minutes. Today an airplane arrived with 150 pieces of luggage and you unloaded all of it in 13 minutes. After finishing with the 150 pieces of luggage, your boss yelled at you for exceeding the 10 minute allowance for unloading luggage from an airplane. Required: How would you feel about being yelled at for taking 13 minutes to unload 150 pieces of luggage? How does this scenario relate to the larger issue of how companies design control systems? EXERCISE 1–3 Decision Making Exhibit 1–2 (see page 4) includes 12 questions related to 12 types of decisions that companies often face. In the chapter, these 12 decisions were discussed within the context of for-profit companies; however, they are also readily applicable to nonprofit organizations. To illustrate this point, assume that you are a senior leader, such as a president, provost, or dean, in a university setting. Required: For each of the 12 decisions in Exhibit 1–2, provide an example of how that type of decision might be applicable to a university setting. EXERCISE 1–4 Ethics and the Manager Richmond, Inc., operates a chain of 44 department stores. Two years ago, the board of directors of Richmond approved a large-scale remodeling of its stores to attract a more upscale clientele. Before finalizing these plans, two stores were remodeled as a test. Linda Perlman, assistant controller, was asked to oversee the financial reporting for these test stores, and she and other management personnel were offered bonuses based on the sales growth and profitability of these stores. While completing the financial reports, Perlman discovered a sizable inventory of outdated goods that should have been discounted for sale or returned to the manufacturer. She discussed the situation with her management colleagues; the consensus was to ignore reporting this inventory as obsolete because reporting it would diminish the financial results and their bonuses. Required: 1. 2. According to the IMA’s Statement of Ethical Professional Practice, would it be ethical for Perlman not to report the inventory as obsolete? Would it be easy for Perlman to take the ethical action in this situation? (CMA, adapted) EXERCISE 1–5 Strategy The table below contains the names of six companies. Required: For each company, categorize its strategy as being focused on customer intimacy, operational excellence, or product leadership. If you wish to improve your understanding of each company’s customer value proposition before completing the exercise, review its most recent annual report. To obtain electronic access to this information, perform an Internet search on each company’s name followed by the words “annual report.” Company 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Deere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FedEx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State Farm Insurance . . . . . . . . . BMW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Amazon.com . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charles Schwab . . . . . . . . . . . . . Strategy ? ? ? ? ? ? EXERCISE 1–6 Enterprise Risk Management The table below refers to seven industries. Required: For each industry, identify one important risk faced by the companies that compete within that industry. Also, describe one control that companies could use to reduce the risk that you have identified. Managerial Accounting: An Overview Industry 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Type of Risk Control to Reduce the Risk Airlines (e.g., Delta Airlines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pharmaceutical drugs (e.g., Merck) . . . . . . . . . . . Package delivery (e.g., United Parcel Service) . . . Banking (e.g., Bank of America) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil & gas (e.g., Exxon Mobil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-commerce (e.g., eBay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automotive (e.g., Toyota) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXERCISE 1–7 Ethics in Business Consumers and attorney generals in more than 40 states accused a prominent nationwide chain of auto repair shops of misleading customers and selling them unnecessary parts and services, from brake jobs to front-end alignments. Lynn Sharpe Paine reported the situation as follows in “Managing for Organizational Integrity,” Harvard Business Review, Volume 72 Issue 3: In the face of declining revenues, shrinking market share, and an increasingly competitive market . . . management attempted to spur performance of its auto centers. . . . The automotive service advisers were given product-specific sales quotas—sell so many springs, shock absorbers, alignments, or brake jobs per shift—and paid a commission based on sales. . . . [F]ailure to meet quotas could lead to a transfer or a reduction in work hours. Some employees spoke of the “pressure, pressure, pressure” to bring in sales. This pressure-cooker atmosphere created conditions under which employees felt that the only way to satisfy top management was by selling products and services to customers that they didn’t really need. Suppose all automotive repair businesses routinely followed the practice of attempting to sell customers unnecessary parts and services. Required: 1. 2. How would this behavior affect customers? How might customers attempt to protect themselves against this behavior? How would this behavior probably affect profits and employment in the automotive service industry? EXERCISE 1–8 Cognitive Bias In the 1970s, one million college-bound students were surveyed and asked to compare themselves to their peers. Some of the key findings of the survey were as follows: a. 70% of the students rated themselves as above average in leadership ability, while only 2% rated themselves as below average in this regard. b. With respect to athletic skills, 60% of the students rated their skills as above the median and only 6% of students rated themselves as below the median. c. 60% of the students rated themselves in the top 10% in terms of their ability to get along with others, while 25% of the students felt that they were in the top 1% in terms of this interpersonal skill. Required: What type of cognitive bias reveals itself in the data mentioned above? How might this cognitive bias adversely influence a manager’s planning, controlling, and decision-making activities? What steps could managers take to reduce the possibility that this cognitive bias would adversely influence their actions? Source: Dan Lovallo and Daniel Kahneman, “Delusions of Success: How Optimism Undermines Executives’ Decisions,” Harvard Business Review, July 2003, pp. 56–63. EXERCISE 1–9 Ethics and Decision Making Assume that you are the chairman of the Department of Accountancy at Mountain State University. One of the accounting professors in your department, Dr. Candler, has been consistently and uniformly regarded by students as an awful teacher for more than 10 years. Other accounting professors within your department have observed Dr. Candler’s classroom teaching and they concur that his teaching skills are very poor. However, Dr. Candler was granted tenure 12 years ago, thereby ensuring him life-long job security at Mountain State University. 21 22 Chapter 1 Much to your surprise, today you received a phone from an accounting professor at Oregon Coastal University. During this phone call you are informed that Oregon Coastal University is on the verge of making a job offer to Dr. Candler. However, before extending the job offer, the faculty at Oregon Coastal wants your input regarding Dr. Candler’s teaching effectiveness while at Mountain State University. Required: How would you respond to the professor from Oregon Coastal University? What would you say about Dr. Candler’s teaching ability? Would you describe your answer to this inquiry as being ethical? Why? EXERCISE 1–10 Corporate Social Responsbility In his book Capitalism and Freedom, economist Milton Friedman wrote on page 133: “There is one and only one social responsibility of business—to use its resources and engage in activities designed to increase its profits so long as it . . . engages in open and free competition, without deception or fraud.” Required: Explain why you agree or disagree with this quote. EXERCISE 1–11 Intrinsic Motivation and Extrinsic Incentives In a Harvard Business Review article titled “Why Incentive Plans Cannot Work,” (Volume 71, Issue 5) author Alfie Kohn wrote: “Research suggests that, by and large, rewards succeed at securing one thing only: temporary compliance. When it comes to producing lasting change in attitudes and behavior, however, rewards, like punishment, are strikingly ineffective. Once the rewards run out, people revert to their old behaviors. . . . Incentives, a version of what psychologists call extrinsic motivators, do not alter the attitudes that underlie our behaviors. They do not create an enduring commitment to any value or action. Rather, incentives merely—and temporarily—change what we do.” Required: 1. 2. 3. Do you agree with this quote? Why? As a manager, how would you seek to motivate your employees? As a manager, would you use financial incentives to compensate your employees? If so, what would be the keys to using them effectively? If not, then how would you compensate your employees? EXERCISE 1–12 Cognitive Bias and Decision Making During World War II, the U.S. military was studying its combat-tested fighter planes to determine the parts of the plane that were most vulnerable to enemy fire. The purpose of the study was to identify the most vulnerable sections of each plane and then take steps to reinforce those sections to improve pilot safety and airplane durability. The data gathered by the U.S. military showed that certain sections of its combat-tested fighter planes were consistently hit more often with enemy fire than other sections of the plane. Required: 1. 2. Would you recommend reinforcing the sections of the plane that were hit most often by enemy fire, or would you reinforce the sections that were hit less frequently by enemy fire? Why? Do you think cognitive bias had the potential to influence the U.S. military’s decision-making process with respect to reinforcing its fighter planes? Source: Jerker Denrell, “Selection Bias and the Perils of Benchmarking,” Harvard Business Review, Volume 83, Issue 4, pp. 114–119. EXERCISE 1–13 Ethics and Decision Making Assume that you just completed a December weekend vacation to a casino within the United States. During your trip you won $10,000 gambling. When the casino exchanged your chips for cash they did not record any personal information, such as your driver’s license number or social security number. Four months later while preparing your tax returns for the prior year, you stop to contemplate the fact that the Internal Revenue Service requires taxpayers to report all gambling winnings on Form 1040. Required: Would you report your gambling winnings to the Internal Revenue Service so that you could pay federal income taxes on those winnings? Do you believe that your actions are ethical? Why? Managerial Accounting: An Overview Appendix 1A: Corporate Governance Effective corporate governance enhances stockholders’ confidence that a company is being run in their best interests rather than in the interests of top managers. Corporate governance is the system by which a company is directed and controlled. If properly implemented, the corporate governance system should provide incentives for the board of directors and top management to pursue objectives that are in the interests of the company’s owners and it should provide for effective monitoring of performance.1 Unfortunately, history has repeatedly shown that unscrupulous top managers, if unchecked, can exploit their power to defraud stockholders. This unpleasant reality became all too clear in 2001 when the fall of Enron kicked off a wave of corporate scandals. These scandals were characterized by financial reporting fraud and misuse of corporate funds at the very highest levels—including CEOs and CFOs. While this was disturbing in itself, it also indicated that the institutions intended to prevent such abuses weren’t working, thus raising fundamental questions about the adequacy of the existing corporate governance system. In an attempt to respond to these concerns, the U.S. Congress passed the most important reform of corporate governance in many decades—The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 was intended to protect the interests of those who invest in publicly traded companies by improving the reliability and accuracy of corporate financial reports and disclosures. We would like to highlight six key aspects of the legislation.2 First, the Act requires that both the CEO and CFO certify in writing that their company’s financial statements and accompanying disclosures fairly represent the results of operations—with possible jail time if a CEO or CFO certifies results that they know are false. This creates very powerful incentives for the CEO and CFO to ensure that the financial statements contain no misrepresentations. Second, the Act established the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board to provide additional oversight over the audit profession. The Act authorizes the Board to conduct investigations, to take disciplinary actions against audit firms, and to enact various standards and rules concerning the preparation of audit reports. Third, the Act places the power to hire, compensate, and terminate the public accounting firm that audits a company’s financial reports in the hands of the audit committee of the board of directors. Previously, management often had the power to hire and fire its auditors. Furthermore, the Act specifies that all members of the audit committee must be independent, meaning that they do not have an affiliation with the company they are overseeing, nor do they receive any consulting or advisory compensation from the company. Fourth, the Act places important restrictions on audit firms. Historically, public accounting firms earned a large part of their profits by providing consulting services to the companies that they audited. This provided the appearance of a lack of independence because a client that was dissatisfied with an auditor’s stance on an accounting issue might threaten to stop using the auditor as a consultant. To avoid this possible conflict of interests, the Act prohibits a public accounting firm from providing a wide variety of nonauditing services to an audit client. Fifth, the Act requires that a company’s annual report contain an internal control report. Internal controls are put in place by management to provide assurance to investors that financial disclosures are reliable. The report must state that it is management’s 1 This definition of corporate governance was adapted from the 2004 report titled OECD Principles of Corporate Governance published by the Organization for Economic Co-Operation and Development. 2 A summary of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 can be obtained at www.soxlaw.com. 23 24 Chapter 1 responsibility to establish and maintain adequate internal controls and it must contain an assessment by management of the effectiveness of its internal control structure. The internal control report is accompanied by an opinion from the company’s audit firm as to whether management has maintained effective internal control over its financial reporting process. Finally, the Act establishes severe penalties of as many as 20 years in prison for altering or destroying any documents that may eventually be used in an official proceeding and as many as 10 years in prison for managers who retaliate against a so-called whistle-blower who goes outside the chain of command to report misconduct. Collectively, these six aspects of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 were intended to help reduce the incidence of fraudulent financial reporting. Internal Control—A Closer Look Internal control is an important concept for all managers to understand and, although you may not be aware of it, it also plays an important role in your personal life. Internal control is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance that objectives are being achieved. For example, one objective for your personal life is to live to a ripe old age. Unfortunately, there are risks that we all encounter that may prohibit us from achieving this objective. For example, we may die prematurely due to a heart attack, a car accident, or a house fire. To reduce the risk of these unfortunate events occurring, we implement controls in our lives. We may exercise regularly and make nutritional food choices to reduce the likelihood of a heart attack. We always wear seat belts and instruct our friends to prohibit us from drinking alcohol and driving a vehicle to reduce the risk of a fatal car crash. We install fire detectors in our homes to reduce the risk of a fatal fire. In short, internal controls are an integral part of our daily lives. A company uses internal controls to provide reasonable assurance that its financial reports are reliable.3 Its financial statements may contain intentional or unintentional errors for three reasons. First, the statements may erroneously exclude some transactions. For example, the income statement may fail to include legitimate expenses. Second, the statements may improperly include some transactions. For example, the income statement may include sales revenue that was not earned during the current period. Third, the statements may include transactions that have been recorded erroneously. For example, an expense or sales transaction may be recorded at the wrong amount. Exhibit 1A–1 describes seven types of internal controls that companies use to reduce the risk that these types of errors will occur. Each item in the exhibit is labeled as a preventive control and/or a detective control. A preventive control deters undesirable events from occurring. A detective control detects undesirable events that have already occurred. Requiring authorizations for certain types of transactions is a preventive control. For example, companies frequently require that a specific senior manager sign all checks above a particular dollar amount to reduce the risk of an inappropriate cash disbursement. Reconciliations are a detective control. If you have ever compared a bank statement to your checkbook to resolve any discrepancies, then you have performed a type of reconciliation known as a bank reconciliation. This is a detective control because you are seeking to identify any mistakes already made by the bank or existing mistakes in your own records. Segregation of duties is a preventive control that separates responsibilities for authorizing transactions, recording transactions, and maintaining custody of the related assets. For example, the same employee should not have the ability to authorize inventory purchases, account for those purchases, and manage the inventory storeroom. Physical safeguards prevent unauthorized employees from having access to assets such as inventories and computer equipment. Performance reviews are a detective control performed 3 Companies also use internal controls to achieve efficient and effective operations and to ensure compliance with applicable laws and regulations. Managerial Accounting: An Overview Type of Control Classification Description Authorizations Preventive Requiring management to formally approve certain types of transactions. Reconciliations Detective Relating data sets to one another to identify and resolve discrepancies. Segregation of duties Preventive Separating responsibilities related to authorizing transactions, recording transactions, and maintaining custody of the related assets. Physical safeguards Preventive Using cameras, locks, and physical barriers to protect assets. Performance reviews Detective Comparing actual performance to various benchmarks to identify unexpected results. Maintaining records Detective Maintaining written and/or electronic evidence to support transactions. Information systems security Preventive/Detective Using controls such as passwords and access logs to ensure appropriate data restrictions. 25 EXHIBIT 1A–1 Types of Internal Controls for Financial Reporting by employees in supervisory positions to ensure that actual results are reasonable when compared to relevant benchmarks. If actual results unexpectedly deviate from expectations, then it triggers further analysis to determine the root cause of the deviation. Companies maintain records to provide evidence that supports each transaction. For example, companies use serially numbered checks so that they can readily track all of their cash disbursements. Finally, companies use passwords (a preventive control) and access logs (a detective control) to restrict electronic data access as appropriate. It is important to understand that internal controls cannot guarantee that objectives will be achieved. For example, a person can regularly exercise and eat healthy foods, but this does not guarantee that they will live to a certain age. Similarly, an effective internal control system can provide reasonable assurance that financial statement disclosures are reliable, but it cannot offer guarantees because even a well-designed internal control system can break down. Furthermore, two or more employees may collude to circumvent the control system. Finally, a company’s senior leaders may manipulate financial results by intentionally overriding prescribed policies and procedures. This reality highlights the importance of having senior leaders (including the chief executive officer, the chief financial officer, and the audit committee of the board of directors) who value the importance of effective internal controls and are committed to creating an ethical “tone at the top” of the organization. Glossary Corporate governance The system by which a company is directed and controlled. (p. 23) Detective control A control that detects undesirable events that have already occurred. (p. 24) Internal control A process designed to provide reasonable assurance that objectives are being achieved. (p. 24) Preventive control A control that deters undesirable events from occurring. (p. 24) Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 A law intended to protect the interests of those who invest in publicly traded companies by improving the reliability and accuracy of corporate financial reports and discloures. (p. 23) 26 Chapter 1 Questions 1A–1 Imagine that you are the head coach of a college sports team. One of your most important objectives is to win as many games as possible. Describe some controls that you would implement to help achieve the objective of winning as many games as possible. 1A–2 Perhaps your most important post-graduation objective is to get a job. Describe some control activities that you would pursue to help achieve this objective. 1A–3 Describe some controls that parents use to keep their homes safe for themselves and their children. 1A–4 Many retail companies experience customer and employee theft (or what is referred to as shrinkage) that equals 1%–2% of their total sales. For a company such as Walmart, this seemingly small percentage of total sales translates to billions of dollars. What types of internal controls might Walmart use to reduce its shrinkage? 1A–5 If you were a restaurant owner, what internal controls would you implement to help maintain control of your cash? 1A–6 As a form of internal control, what documents would you review prior to paying an invoice received from a supplier? 1A–7 What internal controls would you implement to help maintain control of your credit sales and accounts receivable? 1A–8 Why do companies take a physical count of their inventory on hand at least once per year? 1A–9 Why do companies use sequential prenumbering for documents such as checks, sales invoices, and purchase orders? 1A–10 How can an annual budget function as a form of internal control? CHAPTER 2 Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts Lowering Healthcare Costs and Improving Patient Care LEARNING OBJECTIVES BUSI N E SS FO C US After studying Chapter 2, you should be able to: Providence Regional Medical Center’s (PRMC) “single stay” ward is lowering healthcare costs and increasing patient satisfaction. Rather than transporting post-surgical patients to stationary equipment throughout the hospital, a “single stay” ward brings all required equipment to stationary patients. For example, “after heart surgery, cardiac patients remain in one room throughout their recovery, only the gear and staff are in motion. As the patient’s condition stabilizes, the beeping machines of intensive care are removed and physical therapy equipment is added.” The results of this shift in orientation have been impressive. Patient satisfaction scores have skyrocketed and the average length of a patient’s stay in the hospital has declined by more than a day. ■ Source: Catherine Arnst, “Radical Surgery,” Bloomberg Businessweek, January 18, 2010, pp. 40–45. LO2–1 Understand cost classifications used for assigning costs to cost objects: direct costs and indirect costs. LO2–2 Identify and give examples of each of the three basic manufacturing cost categories. LO2–3 Understand cost classifications used to prepare financial statements: product costs and period costs. LO2–4 Understand cost classifications used to predict cost behavior: variable costs, fixed costs, and mixed costs. LO2–5 Analyze a mixed cost using a scattergraph plot and the high-low method. LO2–6 Prepare income statements for a merchandising company using the traditional and contribution formats. LO2–7 Understand cost classifications used in making decisions: differential costs, opportunity costs, and sunk costs. LO2–8 (Appendix 2A) Analyze a mixed cost using a scattergraph plot and the least-squares regression method. LO2–9 (Appendix 2B) Identify the four types of quality costs and explain how they interact. LO2–10 (Appendix 2B) Prepare and interpret a quality cost report. 27 28 Chapter 2 his chapter explains that in managerial accounting the term cost is used in many different ways. The reason is that there are many types of costs, and these costs are classified differently according to the immediate needs of management. For example, managers may want cost data to prepare external financial reports, to prepare planning budgets, or to make decisions. Each different use of cost data demands a different classification and definition of costs. For example, the preparation of external financial reports requires the use of historical cost data, whereas decision making may require predictions about future costs. This notion of different costs for different purposes is a critically important aspect of managerial accounting. Exhibit 2–1 summarizes the cost classifications that will be defined in this chapter, namely cost classifications (1) for assigning costs to cost objects, (2) for manufacturing companies, (3) for preparing financial statements, (4) for predicting cost behavior, and (5) for making decisions. As we begin defining the cost terminology related to each of these cost classifications, please refer back to this exhibit to help improve your understanding of the overall organization of the chapter. T Cost Classifications for Assigning Costs to Cost Objects LO2–1 Understand cost classifications used for assigning costs to cost objects: direct costs and indirect costs. Costs are assigned to cost objects for a variety of purposes including pricing, preparing profitability studies, and controlling spending. A cost object is anything for which cost data are desired—including products, customers, jobs, and organizational subunits. For purposes of assigning costs to cost objects, costs are classified as either direct or indirect. Direct Cost A direct cost is a cost that can be easily and conveniently traced to a specified cost object. For example, if Reebok is assigning costs to its various regional and national sales offices, then the salary of the sales manager in its Tokyo office would be a direct EXHIBIT 2–1 Summary of Cost Classifications Purpose of Cost Classification Cost Classifications Assigning costs to cost objects • • Direct cost (can be easily traced) Indirect cost (cannot be easily traced) Accounting for costs in manufacturing companies • Manufacturing costs • Direct materials • Direct labor • Manufacturing overhead Nonmanufacturing costs • Selling costs • Administrative costs • Preparing financial statements • • Product costs (inventoriable) Period costs (expensed) Predicting cost behavior in response to changes in activity • • • Variable cost (proportional to activity) Fixed cost (constant in total) Mixed cost (has variable and fixed elements) Making decisions • • • Differential cost (differs between alternatives) Sunk cost (should be ignored) Opportunity cost (foregone benefit) Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 29 cost of that office. If a printing company made 10,000 brochures for a specific customer, then the cost of the paper used to make the brochures would be a direct cost of that customer. Indirect Cost An indirect cost is a cost that cannot be easily and conveniently traced to a specified cost object. For example, a Campbell Soup factory may produce dozens of varieties of canned soups. The factory manager’s salary would be an indirect cost of a particular variety such as chicken noodle soup. The reason is that the factory manager’s salary is incurred as a consequence of running the entire factory—it is not incurred to produce any one soup variety. To be traced to a cost object such as a particular product, the cost must be caused by the cost object. The factory manager’s salary is called a common cost of producing the various products of the factory. A common cost is a cost that is incurred to support a number of cost objects but cannot be traced to them individually. A common cost is a type of indirect cost. A particular cost may be direct or indirect, depending on the cost object. While the Campbell Soup factory manager’s salary is an indirect cost of manufacturing chicken noodle soup, it is a direct cost of the manufacturing division. In the first case, the cost object is chicken noodle soup. In the second case, the cost object is the entire manufacturing division. Cost Classifications for Manufacturing Companies Manufacturing companies such as Texas Instruments, Ford, and DuPont separate their costs into two broad categories—manufacturing and nonmanufacturing costs. Manufacturing Costs Most manufacturing companies further separate their manufacturing costs into two direct cost categories, direct materials and direct labor, and one indirect cost category, manufacturing overhead. A discussion of each of these categories follows. Direct Materials The materials that go into the final product are called raw materials. This term is somewhat misleading because it seems to imply unprocessed natural resources like wood pulp or iron ore. Actually, raw materials refer to any materials that are used in the final product; and the finished product of one company can become the raw materials of another company. For example, the plastics produced by Du Pont are a raw material used by Hewlett-Packard in its personal computers. Raw materials may include both direct and indirect materials. Direct materials are those materials that become an integral part of the finished product and whose costs can be conveniently traced to the finished product. This would include, for example, the seats that Airbus purchases from subcontractors to install in its commercial aircraft and the electronic components that Apple uses in its iPhones. Sometimes it isn’t worth the effort to trace the costs of relatively insignificant materials to end products. Such minor items would include the solder used to make electrical connections in a Sony HDTV or the glue used to assemble an Ethan Allen chair. Materials such as solder and glue are called indirect materials and are included as part of manufacturing overhead, which is discussed shortly. Direct Labor Direct labor consists of labor costs that can be easily (i.e., physically and conveniently) traced to individual units of product. Direct labor is sometimes called touch labor because direct labor workers typically touch the product while it is being made. Examples of direct labor include assembly-line workers at Toyota, carpenters LO2–2 Identify and give examples of each of the three basic manufacturing cost categories. 30 Chapter 2 IN BUSINESS FOOD PRICES HIT RECORD HIGHS FOR RESTAURANTS Direct material costs are critically important to restaurants and fast-food chains. In recent years, some food costs have spiked to record highs. For example, unexpected freezing temperatures in the southwestern portion of the United States caused the cost of lettuce to increase 290%. Similarly, the costs of green peppers, tomatoes, and cucumbers jumped 145%, 85%, and 30%, respectively. A large chain such as Subway can withstand these price increases better than smaller competitors because of its buying power and long-term contracts. Source: Anne VanderMey, “Food For Thought,” Fortune, May 9, 2011, p. 12. at the home builder KB Home, and electricians who install equipment on aircraft at Bombardier Learjet. Labor costs that cannot be physically traced to particular products, or that can be traced only at great cost and inconvenience, are termed indirect labor. Just like indirect materials, indirect labor is treated as part of manufacturing overhead. Indirect labor includes the labor costs of janitors, supervisors, materials handlers, and night security guards. Although the efforts of these workers are essential, it would be either impractical or impossible to accurately trace their costs to specific units of product. Hence, such labor costs are treated as indirect labor. Manufacturing Overhead Manufacturing overhead, the third manufacturing cost category, includes all manufacturing costs except direct materials and direct labor. Manufacturing overhead includes items such as indirect materials; indirect labor; maintenance and repairs on production equipment; and heat and light, property taxes, depreciation, and insurance on manufacturing facilities. A company also incurs costs for heat and light, property taxes, insurance, depreciation, and so forth, associated with its selling and administrative functions, but these costs are not included as part of manufacturing overhead. Only those costs associated with operating the factory are included in manufacturing overhead. Various names are used for manufacturing overhead, such as indirect manufacturing cost, factory overhead, and factory burden. All of these terms are synonyms for manufacturing overhead. Nonmanufacturing Costs Nonmanufacturing costs are often divided into two categories: (1) selling costs and (2) administrative costs. Selling costs include all costs that are incurred to secure customer orders and get the finished product to the customer. These costs are sometimes called order-getting and order-filling costs. Examples of selling costs include advertising, shipping, sales travel, sales commissions, sales salaries, and costs of finished goods warehouses. Selling costs can be either direct or indirect costs. For example, the cost of an advertising campaign dedicated to one specific product is a direct cost of that product, whereas the salary of a marketing manager who oversees numerous products is an indirect cost with respect to individual products. Administrative costs include all costs associated with the general management of an organization rather than with manufacturing or selling. Examples of administrative costs include executive compensation, general accounting, secretarial, public relations, and similar costs involved in the overall, general administration of the organization as a whole. Administrative costs can be either direct or indirect costs. For example, the salary of an accounting manager in charge of accounts receivable collections in the East region is a direct cost of that region, whereas the salary of a Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 31 chief financial officer who oversees all of a company’s regions is an indirect cost with respect to individual regions. Nonmanufacturing costs are also often called selling, general, and administrative (SG&A) costs or just selling and administrative costs. Cost Classifications for Preparing Financial Statements When preparing a balance sheet and an income statement, companies need to classify their costs as product costs or period costs. To understand the difference between product costs and period costs, we must first discuss the matching principle from financial accounting. Generally, costs are recognized as expenses on the income statement in the period that benefits from the cost. For example, if a company pays for liability insurance in advance for two years, the entire amount is not considered an expense of the year in which the payment is made. Instead, one-half of the cost would be recognized as an expense each year. The reason is that both years—not just the first year—benefit from the insurance payment. The unexpensed portion of the insurance payment is carried on the balance sheet as an asset called prepaid insurance. The matching principle is based on the accrual concept that costs incurred to generate a particular revenue should be recognized as expenses in the same period that the revenue is recognized. This means that if a cost is incurred to acquire or make something that will eventually be sold, then the cost should be recognized as an expense only when the sale takes place—that is, when the benefit occurs. Such costs are called product costs. Product Costs For financial accounting purposes, product costs include all costs involved in acquiring or making a product. In the case of manufactured goods, these costs consist of direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.1 Product costs “attach” to units of product as the goods are purchased or manufactured, and they remain attached as the goods go into inventory awaiting sale. Product costs are initially assigned to an inventory account on the balance sheet. When the goods are sold, the costs are released from inventory as expenses (typically called cost of goods sold) and matched against sales revenue on the income statement. Because product costs are initially assigned to inventories, they are also known as inventoriable costs. We want to emphasize that product costs are not necessarily recorded as expenses on the income statement in the period in which they are incurred. Rather, as explained above, they are recorded as expenses in the period in which the related products are sold. Period Costs Period costs are all the costs that are not product costs. All selling and administrative expenses are treated as period costs. For example, sales commissions, advertising, executive salaries, public relations, and the rental costs of administrative offices are all period costs. Period costs are not included as part of the cost of either purchased or manufactured goods; instead, period costs are expensed on the income statement in the period in which they are incurred using the usual rules of accrual accounting. Keep in mind that the period in which a cost is incurred is not necessarily the period in which cash changes hands. For example, as discussed earlier, the costs of liability insurance are spread across the periods that benefit from the insurance—regardless of the period in which the insurance premium is paid. 1 For internal management purposes, product costs may exclude some manufacturing costs. For example, see Appendix 3A and the discussion in Chapter 6. LO2–3 Understand cost classifications used to prepare financial statements: product costs and period costs. 32 Chapter 2 Prime Cost and Conversion Cost Two more cost categories are often used in discussions of manufacturing costs—prime cost and conversion cost. Prime cost is the sum of direct materials cost and direct labor cost. Conversion cost is the sum of direct labor cost and manufacturing overhead cost. The term conversion cost is used to describe direct labor and manufacturing overhead because these costs are incurred to convert materials into the finished product. To improve your understanding of these definitions, consider the following scenario: A company has reported the following costs and expenses for the most recent month: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $69,000 $35,000 $14,000 $29,000 $50,000 These costs and expenses can be categorized in a number of ways, including product costs, period costs, conversion costs, and prime costs: Product cost 5 Direct materials 1 Direct labor 1 Manufacturing overhead 5 $69,000 1 $35,000 1 $14,000 5 $118,000 Period cost 5 Selling expenses 1 Administrative expenses 5 $29,000 1 $50,000 5 $79,000 Conversion cost 5 Direct labor 1 Manufacturing overhead 5 $35,000 1 $14,000 5 $49,000 Prime cost 5 Direct materials 1 Direct labor 5 $69,000 1 $35,000 5 $104,000 IN BUSINESS WALMART LOOKS TO REDUCE ITS SHIPPING COSTS Walmart hopes to lower its shipping costs, thereby enabling it to reduce its “everyday low prices.” In years past, suppliers would ship their merchandise to Walmart’s distribution centers, and then Walmart would use its own fleet of trucks to ship goods from its distribution centers to its retail store locations. However, now Walmart wants to assume control of transporting merchandise from its suppliers’ manufacturing facilities to its distribution centers. Walmart believes it can lower these shipping costs by carrying more merchandise per truck and by taking advantage of volume purchase price discounts for fuel. In exchange for assuming these shipping responsibilities, Walmart is seeking price reductions from suppliers that it can pass along, at least in part, to its customers. Source: Chris Burritt, Carol Wolf, and Matthew Boyle, “Why Wal-Mart Wants to Take the Driver’s Seat,” Bloomberg Businessweek, May 31–June 6, 2010, pp. 17–18. Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 33 Cost Classifications for Predicting Cost Behavior It is often necessary to predict how a certain cost will behave in response to a change in activity. For example, a manager at Under Armour may want to estimate the impact a 5 percent increase in sales would have on the company’s total direct materials cost. Cost behavior refers to how a cost reacts to changes in the level of activity. As the activity level rises and falls, a particular cost may rise and fall as well—or it may remain constant. For planning purposes, a manager must be able to anticipate which of these will happen; and if a cost can be expected to change, the manager must be able to estimate how much it will change. To help make such distinctions, costs are often categorized as variable, fixed, or mixed. The relative proportion of each type of cost in an organization is known as its cost structure. For example, an organization might have many fixed costs but few variable or mixed costs. Alternatively, it might have many variable costs but few fixed or mixed costs. LO2–4 Understand cost classifications used to predict cost behavior: variable costs, fixed costs, and mixed costs. Variable Cost A variable cost varies, in total, in direct proportion to changes in the level of activity. Common examples of variable costs include cost of goods sold for a merchandising company, direct materials, direct labor, variable elements of manufacturing overhead, such as indirect materials, supplies, and power, and variable elements of selling and administrative expenses, such as commissions and shipping costs.2 For a cost to be variable, it must be variable with respect to something. That “something” is its activity base. An activity base is a measure of whatever causes the incurrence of a variable cost. An activity base is sometimes referred to as a cost driver. Some of the most common activity bases are direct labor-hours, machine-hours, units produced, and units sold. Other examples of activity bases (cost drivers) include the number of miles driven by salespersons, the number of pounds of laundry cleaned by a hotel, the number of calls handled by technical support staff at a software company, and the number of beds occupied in a hospital. While there are many activity bases within organizations, throughout this textbook, unless stated otherwise, you should assume that the activity base under consideration is the total volume of goods and services provided by the organization. We will specify the activity base only when it is something other than total output. To provide an example of a variable cost, consider Nooksack Expeditions, a small company that provides daylong whitewater rafting excursions on rivers in the North COST DRIVERS IN THE ELECTRONICS INDUSTRY Accenture Ltd. estimates that the U.S. electronics industry spends $13.8 billion annually to rebox, restock, and resell returned products. Conventional wisdom is that customers only return products when they are defective, but the data show that this explanation only accounts for 5% of customer returns. The biggest cost drivers that cause product returns are that customers often inadvertently buy the wrong products and that they cannot understand how to use the products that they have purchased. Television manufacturer Vizio Inc. has started including more information on its packaging to help customers avoid buying the wrong product. Seagate Technologies is replacing thick instruction manuals with simpler guides that make it easier for customers to begin using their products. Source: Christopher Lawton, “The War on Returns,” The Wall Street Journal, May 8, 2008, pp. D1 and D6. 2 Direct labor costs often can be fixed instead of variable for a variety of reasons. For example, in some countries, such as France, Germany, and Japan, labor regulations and cultural norms may limit management’s ability to adjust the labor force in response to changes in activity. In this textbook, always assume that direct labor is a variable cost unless you are explicitly told otherwise. IN BUSINESS 34 Chapter 2 IN BUSINESS FOOD COSTS AT A LUXURY HOTEL The Sporthotel Theresa (http://www.theresa.at/), owned and operated by the Egger family, is a four star hotel located in Zell im Zillertal, Austria. The hotel features access to hiking, skiing, biking, and other activities in the Ziller alps as well as its own fitness facility and spa. Three full meals a day are included in the hotel room charge. Breakfast and lunch are served buffet-style while dinner is a more formal affair with as many as six courses. The chef, Stefan Egger, believes that food costs are roughly proportional to the number of guests staying at the hotel; that is, they are a variable cost. He must order food from suppliers two or three days in advance, but he adjusts his purchases to the number of guests who are currently staying at the hotel and their consumption patterns. In addition, guests make their selections from the dinner menu early in the day, which helps Stefan plan which foodstuffs will be required for dinner. Consequently, he is able to prepare just enough food so that all guests are satisfied and yet waste is held to a minimum. Source: Conversation with Stefan Egger, chef at the Sporthotel Theresa. Cascade Mountains. The company provides all of the necessary equipment and experienced guides, and it serves gourmet meals to its guests. The meals are purchased from a caterer for $30 a person for a daylong excursion. The behavior of this variable cost, on both a per unit and a total basis, is shown below: Number of Guests 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of Meals per Guest Total Cost of Meals $30 $30 $30 $30 $7,500 $15,000 $22,500 $30,000 While total variable costs change as the activity level changes, it is important to note that a variable cost is constant if expressed on a per unit basis. For example, the per unit cost of the meals remains constant at $30 even though the total cost of the meals increases and decreases with activity. The graph on the left-hand side of Exhibit 2–2 illustrates that the total variable cost rises and falls as the activity level rises and falls. At an activity level of 250 guests, the total meal cost is $7,500. At an activity level of 1,000 guests, the total meal cost rises to $30,000. Fixed Cost A fixed cost is a cost that remains constant, in total, regardless of changes in the level of activity. Examples of fixed costs include straight-line depreciation, insurance, property taxes, rent, supervisory salaries, administrative salaries, and advertising. Unlike variable costs, fixed costs are not affected by changes in activity. Consequently, as the activity level rises and falls, total fixed costs remain constant unless influenced by some outside force, such as a landlord increasing your monthly rental expense. To continue the Nooksack Expeditions example, assume the company rents a building for $500 per month to store its equipment. The total amount of rent paid is the same regardless of the number of guests the company takes on its expeditions during any given month. The concept of a fixed cost is shown graphically on the right-hand side of Exhibit 2–2. Because total fixed costs remain constant for large variations in the level of activity, the average fixed cost per unit becomes progressively smaller as the level of activity increases. If Nooksack Expeditions has only 250 guests in a month, the $500 fixed rental cost would amount to an average of $2 per guest. If there are 1,000 guests, the fixed rental cost would average only 50 cents per guest. The table below illustrates Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 35 EXHIBIT 2–2 Variable and Fixed Cost Behavior Total Cost of Meals Total Cost of Renting the Building $30,000 A variable cost increases, in total, in proportion to activity. Total cost of meals $25,000 Fixed costs remain constant in total dollar amount through wide ranges of activity. $20,000 Cost of building rental $15,000 $500 $10,000 $5,000 $0 0 250 500 750 Number of guests $0 1,000 0 250 500 750 Number of guests this aspect of the behavior of fixed costs. Note that as the number of guests increase, the average fixed cost per guest drops. Monthly Rental Cost $500 . . . . . . . . . $500 . . . . . . . . . $500 . . . . . . . . . $500 . . . . . . . . . Number of Guests Average Cost per Guest 250 500 750 1,000 $2.00 $1.00 $0.67 $0.50 As a general rule, we caution against expressing fixed costs on an average per unit basis in internal reports because it creates the false impression that fixed costs are like variable costs and that total fixed costs actually change as the level of activity changes. For planning purposes, fixed costs can be viewed as either committed or discretionary. Committed fixed costs represent organizational investments with a multiyear planning horizon that can’t be significantly reduced even for short periods of time without making fundamental changes. Examples include investments in facilities and equipment, as well as real estate taxes, insurance expenses, and salaries of top management. Even if operations are interrupted or cut back, committed fixed costs remain largely unchanged in the short term because the costs of restoring them later are likely to be far greater than any short-run savings that might be realized. Discretionary fixed costs (often referred to as managed fixed costs) usually arise from annual decisions by management to spend on certain fixed cost items. Examples of discretionary fixed costs include advertising, research, public relations, management development programs, and internships for students. Discretionary fixed costs can be cut for short periods of time with minimal damage to the long-run goals of the organization. The Linearity Assumption and the Relevant Range Management accountants ordinarily assume that costs are strictly linear; that is, the relation between cost on the one hand and activity on the other can be represented by a straight line. Economists point out that many costs are actually curvilinear; that is, the relation between cost and activity is a curve. Nevertheless, even if a cost is not strictly 1,000 36 Chapter 2 EXHIBIT 2–3 Fixed Costs and the Relevant Range Cost $60,000 $40,000 $20,000 0 3,000 6,000 Number of Tests 9,000 linear, it can be approximated within a narrow band of activity known as the relevant range by a straight line. The relevant range is the range of activity within which the assumption that cost behavior is strictly linear is reasonably valid. Outside of the relevant range, a fixed cost may no longer be strictly fixed or a variable cost may not be strictly variable. Managers should always keep in mind that assumptions made about cost behavior may be invalid if activity falls outside of the relevant range. The concept of the relevant range is important in understanding fixed costs. For example, suppose the Mayo Clinic rents a machine for $20,000 per month that tests blood samples for the presence of leukemia cells. Furthermore, suppose that the capacity of the leukemia diagnostic machine is 3,000 tests per month. The assumption that the rent for the diagnostic machine is $20,000 per month is only valid within the relevant range of 0 to 3,000 tests per month. If the Mayo Clinic needed to test 5,000 blood samples per month, then it would need to rent another machine for an additional $20,000 per month. It would be difficult to rent half of a diagnostic machine; therefore, the step pattern depicted in Exhibit 2–3 is typical for such costs. This exhibit shows that the fixed rental expense is $20,000 for a relevant range of 0 to 3,000 tests. The fixed rental expense increases to $40,000 within the relevant range of 3,001 to 6,000 tests. The rental expense increases in discrete steps or increments of 3,000 tests, rather than increasing in a linear fashion per test. This step-oriented cost behavior pattern can also be used to describe other costs, such as some labor costs. For example, salaried employee expenses can be characterized using a step pattern. Salaried employees are paid a fixed amount, such as $40,000 per year, for providing the capacity to work a prespecified amount of time, such as 40 hours per week for 50 weeks a year (5 2,000 hours per year). In this example, the total salaried employee expense is $40,000 within a relevant range of 0 to 2,000 hours of work. The total salaried employee expense increases to $80,000 (or two employees) if the organization’s work requirements expand to a relevant range of 2,001 to 4,000 hours of work. Cost behavior patterns such as salaried employees are often called step-variable costs. Stepvariable costs can often be adjusted quickly as conditions change. Furthermore, the width of the steps for step-variable costs is generally so narrow that these costs can be treated essentially as variable costs for most purposes. The width of the steps for fixed costs, on the other hand, is so wide that these costs should be treated as entirely fixed within the relevant range. Exhibit 2–4 summarizes four key concepts related to variable and fixed costs. Study it carefully before reading further. Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts Behavior of the Cost (within the relevant range) Cost Variable cost Fixed cost In Total Total variable cost increases and decreases in proportion to changes in the activity level. Total fixed cost is not affected by changes in the activity level within the relevant range. Per Unit 37 EXHIBIT 2–4 Summary of Variable and Fixed Cost Behavior Variable cost per unit remains constant. Fixed cost per unit decreases as the activity level rises and increases as the activity level falls. HOW MANY GUIDES? Majestic Ocean Kayaking, of Ucluelet, British Columbia, is owned and operated by Tracy Morben-Eeftink. The company offers a number of guided kayaking excursions ranging from threehour tours of the Ucluelet harbor to six-day kayaking and camping trips in Clayoquot Sound. One of the company’s excursions is a four-day kayaking and camping trip to The Broken Group Islands in the Pacific Rim National Park. Special regulations apply to trips in the park—including a requirement that one certified guide must be assigned for every five guests or fraction thereof. For example, a trip with 12 guests must have at least three certified guides. Guides are not salaried and are paid on a per-day basis. Therefore, the cost to the company of the guides for a trip is a step-variable cost rather than a fixed cost or a strictly variable cost. One guide is needed for 1 to 5 guests, two guides for 6 to 10 guests, three guides for 11 to 15 guests, and so on. Sources: Tracy Morben-Eeftink, owner, Majestic Ocean Kayaking. For more information about the company, see www.oceankayaking.com. Mixed Costs A mixed cost contains both variable and fixed cost elements. Mixed costs are also known as semivariable costs. To continue the Nooksack Expeditions example, the company incurs a mixed cost called fees paid to the state. It includes a license fee of $25,000 per year plus $3 per rafting party paid to the state’s Department of Natural Resources. If the company runs 1,000 rafting parties this year, then the total fees paid to the state would be $28,000, made up of $25,000 in fixed cost plus $3,000 in variable cost. Exhibit 2–5 depicts the behavior of this mixed cost. Even if Nooksack fails to attract any customers, the company will still have to pay the license fee of $25,000. This is why the cost line in Exhibit 2–5 intersects the vertical cost axis at the $25,000 point. For each rafting party the company organizes, the total cost of the state fees will increase by $3. Therefore, the total cost line slopes upward as the variable cost of $3 per party is added to the fixed cost of $25,000 per year. Because the mixed cost in Exhibit 2–5 is represented by a straight line, the following equation for a straight line can be used to express the relationship between a mixed cost and the level of activity: IN BUSINESS 38 Chapter 2 EXHIBIT 2–5 Mixed Cost Behavior Cost of state license fees $30,000 $29,000 Slope = Variable cost per unit of activity $28,000 $27,000 Variable cost element $26,000 $25,000 Intercept = Total fixed cost Fixed cost element $0 0 500 1,000 Number of rafting parties Y 5 a 1 bX In this equation, Y 5 The total mixed cost a 5 The total fixed cost (the vertical intercept of the line) b 5 The variable cost per unit of activity (the slope of the line) X 5 The level of activity Because the variable cost per unit equals the slope of the straight line, the steeper the slope, the higher the variable cost per unit. In the case of the state fees paid by Nooksack Expeditions, the equation is written as follows: Y 5 $25,000 1 $3.00X Total mixed cost Total fixed cost Variable cost per unit of activity Activity level This equation makes it easy to calculate the total mixed cost for any level of activity within the relevant range. For example, suppose that the company expects to organize 800 rafting parties in the next year. The total state fees would be calculated as follows: Y 5 $25,000 1 ($3.00 per rafting party 3 800 rafting parties) 5 $27,400 The Analysis of Mixed Costs Mixed costs are very common. For example, the overall cost of providing X-ray services to patients at the Harvard Medical School Hospital is a mixed cost. The costs of equipment depreciation and radiologists’ and technicians’ salaries are fixed, but the costs of X-ray film, power, and supplies are variable. At Southwest Airlines, maintenance costs Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 39 are a mixed cost. The company incurs fixed costs for renting maintenance facilities and for keeping skilled mechanics on the payroll, but the costs of replacement parts, lubricating oils, tires, and so forth, are variable with respect to how often and how far the company’s aircraft are flown. The fixed portion of a mixed cost represents the minimum cost of having a service ready and available for use. The variable portion represents the cost incurred for actual consumption of the service, thus it varies in proportion to the amount of service actually consumed. Managers can use a variety of methods to estimate the fixed and variable components of a mixed cost such as account analysis, the engineering approach, the high-low method, and least-squares regression analysis. In account analysis, an account is classified as either variable or fixed based on the analyst’s prior knowledge of how the cost in the account behaves. For example, direct materials would be classified as variable and a building lease cost would be classified as fixed because of the nature of those costs. The engineering approach to cost analysis involves a detailed analysis of what cost behavior should be, based on an industrial engineer’s evaluation of the production methods to be used, the materials specifications, labor requirements, equipment usage, production efficiency, power consumption, and so on. The high-low and least-squares regression methods estimate the fixed and variable elements of a mixed cost by analyzing past records of cost and activity data. We will use an example from Brentline Hospital to illustrate the high-low method calculations and to compare the resulting high-low method cost estimates to those obtained using leastsquares regression. Appendix 2A demonstrates how to use Microsoft Excel to perform least-squares regression computations. Diagnosing Cost Behavior with a Scattergraph Plot Assume that Brentline Hospital is interested in predicting future monthly maintenance costs for budgeting purposes. The senior management team believes that maintenance cost is a mixed cost and that the variable portion of this cost is driven by the number of patient-days. Each day a patient is in the hospital counts as one patient-day. The hospital’s chief financial officer gathered the following data for the most recent sevenmonth period: Month January . . . . . . February . . . . . . March . . . . . . . . April . . . . . . . . May . . . . . . . . . June . . . . . . . . . July . . . . . . . . . Activity Level: Patient-Days Maintenance Cost Incurred 5,600 7,100 5,000 6,500 7,300 8,000 6,200 $7,900 $8,500 $7,400 $8,200 $9,100 $9,800 $7,800 The first step in applying the high-low method or the least-squares regression method is to diagnose cost behavior with a scattergraph plot. The scattergraph plot of maintenance costs versus patient-days at Brentline Hospital is shown in Exhibit 2–6. Two things should be noted about this scattergraph: 1. The total maintenance cost, Y, is plotted on the vertical axis. Cost is known as the dependent variable because the amount of cost incurred during a period depends on the level of activity for the period. (That is, as the level of activity increases, total cost will also ordinarily increase.) LO2–5 Analyze a mixed cost using a scattergraph plot and the highlow method. EXHIBIT 2–6 Scattergraph Method of Cost Analysis Chapter 2 $12,000 Plotting the Data Y $10,000 Maintenance cost 40 $8,000 $6,000 $4,000 $2,000 $0 0 2,000 4,000 6,000 Patient-days 8,000 X 10,000 2. The activity, X (patient-days in this case), is plotted on the horizontal axis. Activity is known as the independent variable because it causes variations in the cost. From the scattergraph plot, it is evident that maintenance costs do increase with the number of patient-days in an approximately linear fashion. In other words, the points lie more or less along a straight line that slopes upward and to the right. Cost behavior is considered linear whenever a straight line is a reasonable approximation for the relation between cost and activity. Plotting the data on a scattergraph is an essential diagnostic step that should be performed before performing the high-low method or least-squares regression calculations. If the scattergraph plot reveals linear cost behavior, then it makes sense to perform the high-low or least-squares regression calculations to separate the mixed cost into its variable and fixed components. If the scattergraph plot does not depict linear cost behavior, then it makes no sense to proceed any further in analyzing the data. The High-Low Method Assuming that the scattergraph plot indicates a linear relation between cost and activity, the fixed and variable cost elements of a mixed cost can be estimated using the high-low method or the least-squares regression method. The high-low method is based on the rise-over-run formula for the slope of a straight line. As previously discussed, if the relation between cost and activity can be represented by a straight line, then the slope of the straight line is equal to the variable cost per unit of activity. Consequently, the following formula can be used to estimate the variable cost: Y2 2 Y1 Rise 5 _______ Variable cost 5 Slope of the line 5 ____ Run X2 2 X1 To analyze mixed costs with the high-low method, begin by identifying the period with the lowest level of activity and the period with the highest level of activity. The period with the lowest activity is selected as the first point in the above formula and Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts the period with the highest activity is selected as the second point. Consequently, the formula becomes: Y22 Y1 Cost at the high activity level 2 Cost at the low activity level Variable cost 5 _______ 5 _________________________________________________ X2 2 X1 High activity level 2 Low activity level or Change in cost Variable cost 5 _______________ Change in activity Therefore, when the high-low method is used, the variable cost is estimated by dividing the difference in cost between the high and low levels of activity by the change in activity between those two points. To return to the Brentline Hospital example, using the high-low method, we first identify the periods with the highest and lowest activity—in this case, June and March. We then use the activity and cost data from these two periods to estimate the variable cost component as follows: High activity level (June) . . . . . Low activity level (March) . . . . Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patient-Days Maintenance Cost Incurred 8,000 5,000 3,000 $9,800 7,400 $2,400 Change in cost $2,400 Variable cost 5 _______________ 5 _______________ 5 $0.80 per patient-day Change in activity 3,000 patient-days Having determined that the variable maintenance cost is 80 cents per patient-day, we can now determine the amount of fixed cost. This is done by taking the total cost at either the high or the low activity level and deducting the variable cost element. In the computation below, total cost at the high activity level is used in computing the fixed cost element: Fixed cost element 5 Total cost 2 Variable cost element 5 $9,800 2 ($0.80 per patient-day 3 8,000 patient-days) 5 $3,400 Both the variable and fixed cost elements have now been isolated. The cost of maintenance can be expressed as $3,400 per month plus 80 cents per patient-day or as: Y 5 $3,400 1 $0.80X Total maintenance cost Total patient-days The data used in this illustration are shown graphically in Exhibit 2–7. Notice that a straight line has been drawn through the points corresponding to the low and high levels of activity. In essence, that is what the high-low method does—it draws a straight line through those two points. Sometimes the high and low levels of activity don’t coincide with the high and low amounts of cost. For example, the period that has the highest level of activity may not 41 42 Chapter 2 EXHIBIT 2–7 High-Low Method of Cost Analysis Activity Patient- Maintenance Level Days Cost $12,000 High Low Y Maintenance cost $10,000 8,000 5,000 $9,800 $7,400 Slope = Variable cost: $0.80 per patient-day Point relating to the low activity level $8,000 Point relating to the high activity level $6,000 $4,000 Intercept = Fixed cost: $3,400 $2,000 $0 0 2,000 4,000 6,000 Patient-days 8,000 X 10,000 have the highest amount of cost. Nevertheless, the costs at the highest and lowest levels of activity are always used to analyze a mixed cost under the high-low method. The reason is that the analyst would like to use data that reflect the greatest possible variation in activity. The high-low method is very simple to apply, but it suffers from a major (and sometimes critical) defect—it utilizes only two data points. Generally, two data points are not enough to produce accurate results. Additionally, the periods with the highest and lowest activity tend to be unusual. A cost formula that is estimated solely using data from these unusual periods may misrepresent the true cost behavior during normal periods. Such a distortion is evident in Exhibit 2–7. The straight line should probably be shifted down somewhat so that it is closer to more of the data points. For these reasons, least-squares regression will generally be more accurate than the highlow method. The Least-Squares Regression Method The least-squares regression method, unlike the high-low method, uses all of the data to separate a mixed cost into its fixed and variable components. A regression line of the form Y 5 a 1 bX is fitted to the data, where a represents the total fixed cost and b represents the variable cost per unit of activity. The basic idea underlying the leastsquares regression method is illustrated in Exhibit 2–8 using hypothetical data points. Notice from the exhibit that the deviations from the plotted points to the regression line are measured vertically on the graph. These vertical deviations are called the regression errors. There is nothing mysterious about the least-squares regression method. It simply computes the regression line that minimizes the sum of these squared errors. The formulas that accomplish this are fairly complex and involve numerous calculations, but the principle is simple. Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts Cost Y Actual Y Estimated Y 43 EXHIBIT 2–8 The Concept of Least-Squares Regression Error Regression line Y = a + bX X Level of activity Fortunately, computers are adept at carrying out the computations required by the least-squares regression formulas. The data—the observed values of X and Y—are entered into the computer, and software does the rest. In the case of the Brentline Hospital maintenance cost data, a statistical software package on a personal computer can calculate the following least-squares regression estimates of the total fixed cost (a) and the variable cost per unit of activity (b): a 5 $3,431 b 5 $0.759 Therefore, using the least-squares regression method, the fixed element of the maintenance cost is $3,431 per month and the variable portion is 75.9 cents per patient-day. In terms of the linear equation Y 5 a 1 bX, the cost formula can be written as Y 5 $3,431 1 $0.759X where activity (X) is expressed in patient-days. Appendix 2A discusses how to use Microsoft Excel to perform least-squares regression calculations. For now, you only need to understand that least-squares regression analysis generally provides more accurate cost estimates than the high-low method because, rather than relying on just two data points, it uses all of the data points to fit a line that minimizes the sum of the squared errors. The table below compares Brentline Hospital’s cost estimates using the high-low method and the least-squares regression method: Variable cost estimate per patient-day . . . . . . . Fixed cost estimate per month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Low Method Least-Squares Regression Method $0.800 $3,400 $0.759 $3,431 When Brentline uses the least-squares regression method to create a straight line that minimizes the sum of the squared errors, it results in estimated fixed costs that are $31 higher than the amount derived using the high-low method. It also decreases the slope of the straight line resulting in a lower variable cost estimate of $0.759 per patient-day rather than $0.80 per patient-day as derived using the high-low method. 44 Chapter 2 IN BUSINESS THE ZIPCAR COMES TO COLLEGE CAMPUSES Zipcar is a car sharing service based in Cambridge, Massachusetts. The company serves 13 cities and 120 university campuses. Members pay a $50 annual fee plus $7 an hour to rent a car. They can use their iPhones to rent a car, locate it in the nearest Zipcar parking lot, unlock it using an access code, and drive it off the lot. This mixed cost arrangement is attractive to customers who need a car infrequently and wish to avoid the large cash outlay that comes with buying or leasing a vehicle. Source: Jefferson Graham, “An iPhone Gets Zipcar Drivers on Their Way,” USA Today, September 30, 2009, p. 3B. Traditional and Contribution Format Income Statements LO2–6 Prepare income statements for a merchandising company using the traditional and contribution formats. In this section of the chapter, we discuss how to prepare traditional and contribution format income statements for a merchandising company.3 Merchandising companies do not manufacture the products that they sell to customers. For example, Lowe’s and Home Depot are merchandising companies because they buy finished products from manufacturers and then resell them to end consumers. The Traditional Format Income Statement Traditional income statements are prepared primarily for external reporting purposes. The left-hand side of Exhibit 2–9 shows a traditional income statement format for merchandising companies. This type of income statement organizes costs into two categories—cost of goods sold and selling and administrative expenses. Sales minus cost of goods sold equals the gross margin. The gross margin minus selling and administrative expenses equals net operating income. The cost of goods sold reports the product costs attached to the merchandise sold during the period. The selling and administrative expenses report all period costs that have been expensed as incurred. The cost of goods sold for a merchandising company EXHIBIT 2–9 Comparing Traditional and Contribution Format Income Statements for Merchandising Companies (all numbers are given) Contribution Format Traditional Format Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses: Selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . $12,000 6,000 6,000 $3,100 1,900 5,000 $ 1,000 Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses: Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . Variable selling . . . . . . . . . . . Variable administrative . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses: Fixed selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed administrative . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . $12,000 $6,000 600 400 2,500 1,500 7,000 5,000 4,000 $ 1,000 *For a manufacturing company, the cost of goods sold would include some variable costs, such as direct materials, direct labor, and variable overhead, and some fixed costs, such as fixed manufacturing overhead. Income statement formats for manufacturing companies will be explored in greater detail in a subsequent chapter. 3 Subsequent chapters compare the income statement formats for manufacturing companies. Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 45 can be computed directly by multiplying the number of units sold by their unit cost or indirectly using the equation below: Ending Beginning Cost of 5 1 Purchases 2 merchandise merchandise goods sold inventory inventory For example, let’s assume that the company depicted in Exhibit 2–9 purchased $3,000 of merchandise inventory during the period and had beginning and ending merchandise inventory balances of $7,000 and $4,000, respectively. The equation above could be used to compute the cost of goods sold as follows: Ending Beginning Cost of goods 5 merchandise 1 Purchases 2 merchandise sold inventory inventory 5 $7,000 5 $6,000 1 $3,000 2 $4,000 Although the traditional income statement is useful for external reporting purposes, it has serious limitations when used for internal purposes. It does not distinguish between fixed and variable costs. For example, under the heading “Selling and administrative expenses,” both variable administrative costs ($400) and fixed administrative costs ($1,500) are lumped together ($1,900). Internally, managers need cost data organized by cost behavior to aid in planning, controlling, and decision making. The contribution format income statement has been developed in response to these needs. The Contribution Format Income Statement The crucial distinction between fixed and variable costs is at the heart of the contribution approach to constructing income statements. The unique thing about the contribution approach is that it provides managers with an income statement that clearly distinguishes between fixed and variable costs and therefore aids planning, controlling, and decision making. The right-hand side of Exhibit 2–9 shows a contribution format income statement for merchandising companies. The contribution approach separates costs into fixed and variable categories, first deducting variable expenses from sales to obtain the contribution margin. For a merchandising company, cost of goods sold is a variable cost that gets included in the “Variable expenses” portion of the contribution format income statement. The contribution margin is the amount remaining from sales revenues after variable expenses have been deducted. This amount contributes toward covering fixed expenses and then toward profits for the period. The contribution format income statement is used as an internal planning and decision-making tool. Its emphasis on cost behavior aids cost-volume-profit analysis (such as we shall be doing in a subsequent chapter), management performance appraisals, and budgeting. Moreover, the contribution approach helps managers organize data pertinent to numerous decisions such as product-line analysis, pricing, use of scarce resources, and make or buy analysis. All of these topics are covered in later chapters. Cost Classifications for Decision Making Costs are an important feature of many business decisions. In making decisions, it is essential to have a firm grasp of the concepts differential cost, opportunity cost, and sunk cost. Differential Cost and Revenue Decisions involve choosing between alternatives. In business decisions, each alternative will have costs and benefits that must be compared to the costs and benefits of the other available alternatives. A difference in costs between any two alternatives is known as a LO2–7 Understand cost classifications used in making decisions: differential costs, opportunity costs, and sunk costs. 46 Chapter 2 differential cost. A difference in revenues (usually just sales) between any two alternatives is known as differential revenue. A differential cost is also known as an incremental cost, although technically an incremental cost should refer only to an increase in cost from one alternative to another; decreases in cost should be referred to as decremental costs. Differential cost is a broader term, encompassing both cost increases (incremental costs) and cost decreases (decremental costs) between alternatives. The accountant’s differential cost concept can be compared to the economist’s marginal cost concept. In speaking of changes in cost and revenue, the economist uses the terms marginal cost and marginal revenue. The revenue that can be obtained from selling one more unit of product is called marginal revenue, and the cost involved in producing one more unit of product is called marginal cost. The economist’s marginal concept is basically the same as the accountant’s differential concept applied to a single unit of output. Differential costs can be either fixed or variable. To illustrate, assume that Natural Cosmetics, Inc., is thinking about changing its marketing method from distribution through retailers to distribution by a network of neighborhood sales representatives. Present costs and revenues are compared to projected costs and revenues in the following table: Sales (Variable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold (Variable) . . . . . . . Advertising (Fixed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissions (Variable) . . . . . . . . . . . . Warehouse depreciation (Fixed) . . . . . Other expenses (Fixed) . . . . . . . . . . . . Total expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retailer Distribution (present) Sales Representatives (proposed) Differential Costs and Revenues $700,000 350,000 80,000 0 50,000 60,000 540,000 $160,000 $800,000 400,000 45,000 40,000 80,000 60,000 625,000 $175,000 $100,000 50,000 (35,000) 40,000 30,000 0 85,000 $ 15,000 According to the above analysis, the differential revenue is $100,000 and the differential costs total $85,000, leaving a positive differential net operating income of $15,000 in favor of using sales representatives. In general, only the differences between alternatives are relevant in decisions. Those items that are the same under all alternatives and that are not affected by the decision can be ignored. For example, in the Natural Cosmetics, Inc., example above, the “Other expenses” category, which is $60,000 under both alternatives, can be ignored because it has no effect on the decision. If it were removed from the calculations, the sales representatives would still be preferred by $15,000. This is an extremely important principle in management accounting that we will revisit in later chapters. Opportunity Cost and Sunk Cost Opportunity cost is the potential benefit that is given up when one alternative is selected over another. For example, assume that you have a part-time job while attending college that pays $200 per week. If you spend one week at the beach during spring break without pay, then the $200 in lost wages would be an opportunity cost of taking the week off to be at the beach. Opportunity costs are not usually found in accounting records, but they are costs that must be explicitly considered in every decision a manager makes. Virtually every alternative involves an opportunity cost. A sunk cost is a cost that has already been incurred and that cannot be changed by any decision made now or in the future. Because sunk costs cannot be changed by any decision, they are not differential costs. And because only differential costs are relevant in a decision, sunk costs should always be ignored. Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 47 To illustrate a sunk cost, assume that a company paid $50,000 several years ago for a special-purpose machine. The machine was used to make a product that is now obsolete and is no longer being sold. Even though in hindsight purchasing the machine may have been unwise, the $50,000 cost has already been incurred and cannot be undone. And it would be folly to continue making the obsolete product in a misguided attempt to “recover” the original cost of the machine. In short, the $50,000 originally paid for the machine is a sunk cost that should be ignored in current decisions. THE ECONOMICS OF DRIVING YOUR DREAM CAR IN BUSINESS The costs of buying, insuring, repairing, and garaging ultra-luxury vehicles can be very expensive. For example, the purchase price alone for a new Lamborghini or Bentley can easily exceed $300,000. Thus, Gotham Dream Cars offers an alternative to customers who want to drive ultraluxury cars while avoiding the exorbitant costs of ownership. It sells fractional shares in luxury cars—the minimum price starts at $9,000 for 20 driving-days. George Johnson is a Gotham Dream Cars customer who spent $30,000 for 90 driving-days in two types of ultra-luxury vehicles. He noted that “it’s not worth it to buy one of these cars when you have to fix them.” In essence, Johnson compared the costs of ownership with the rental costs and decided to rent. Source: David Kiley, “My Lamborghini—Today, Anyway,” BusinessWeek, January 14, 2008, p. 17. Summary In this chapter, we have discussed ways in which managers classify costs. How the costs will be used—for assigning costs to cost objects, preparing external reports, predicting cost behavior, or decision making—will dictate how the costs are classified. For purposes of assigning costs to cost objects such as products or departments, costs are classified as direct or indirect. Direct costs can be conveniently traced to cost objects. Indirect costs cannot be conveniently traced to cost objects. For external reporting purposes, costs are classified as either product costs or period costs. Product costs are assigned to inventories and are considered assets until the products are sold. At the point of sale, product costs become cost of goods sold on the income statement. In contrast, period costs are taken directly to the income statement as expenses in the period in which they are incurred. For purposes of predicting how costs will react to changes in activity, costs are classified into three categories—variable, fixed, and mixed. Variable costs, in total, are strictly proportional to activity. The variable cost per unit is constant. Fixed costs, in total, remain the same as the activity level changes within the relevant range. The average fixed cost per unit decreases as the activity level increases. Mixed costs consist of variable and fixed elements and can be expressed in equation form as Y 5 a 1 bX, where X is the activity, Y is the total cost, a is the fixed cost element, and b is the variable cost per unit of activity. If the relation between cost and activity appears to be linear based on a scattergraph plot, then the variable and fixed components of a mixed cost can be estimated using the high-low method, which implicitly draws a straight line through the points of lowest activity and highest activity, or the least-squares regression method, which uses all of the data points to compute a regression line that minimizes the sum of the squares errors. The traditional income statement format is used primarily for external reporting purposes. It organizes costs using product and period cost classifications. The contribution format income statement aids decision making because it organizes costs using variable and fixed cost classifications. For purposes of making decisions, the concepts of differential cost and revenue, opportunity cost, and sunk cost are vitally important. Differential costs and revenues are the costs and revenues that differ between alternatives. Opportunity cost is the benefit that is forgone when one alternative is selected over another. Sunk cost is a cost that occurred in the past and cannot be altered. Differential costs and opportunity costs should be carefully considered in decisions. Sunk costs are always irrelevant in decisions and should be ignored. 48 Chapter 2 Review Problem 1: Cost Terms Many new cost terms have been introduced in this chapter. It will take you some time to learn what each term means and how to properly classify costs in an organization. Consider the following example: Porter Company manufactures furniture, including tables. Selected costs are given below: 1. The tables are made of wood that costs $100 per table. 2. The tables are assembled by workers, at a wage cost of $40 per table. 3. Workers assembling the tables are supervised by a factory supervisor who is paid $38,000 per year. 4. Electrical costs are $2 per machine-hour. Four machine-hours are required to produce a table. 5. The depreciation on the machines used to make the tables totals $10,000 per year. The machines have no resale value and do not wear out through use. 6. The salary of the president of the company is $100,000 per year. 7. The company spends $250,000 per year to advertise its products. 8. Salespersons are paid a commission of $30 for each table sold. 9. Instead of producing the tables, the company could rent its factory space for $50,000 per year. Required: Classify these costs according to the various cost terms used in the chapter. Carefully study the classification of each cost. If you don’t understand why a particular cost is classified the way it is, reread the section of the chapter discussing the particular cost term. The terms variable cost and fixed cost refer to how costs behave with respect to the number of tables produced in a year. Solution to Review Problem 1 Variable Cost 1. Wood used in a table ($100 per table) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Labor cost to assemble a table ($40 per table) . . . . . . . . 3. Salary of the factory supervisor ($38,000 per year) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Cost of electricity to produce tables ($2 per machine-hour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Depreciation of machines used to produce tables ($10,000 per year) . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Salary of the company president ($100,000 per year) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Advertising expense ($250,000 per year) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. Commissions paid to salespersons ($30 per table sold) . . . . . . . . . . 9. Rental income forgone on factory space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed Cost Period (Selling and Administrative) Cost X Direct Materials Direct Labor Manufacturing Overhead Sunk Cost Opportunity Cost X X X X X X X X X Product Cost X X X X X X* X X† *This is a sunk cost because the outlay for the equipment was made in a previous period. † This is an opportunity cost because it represents the potential benefit that is lost or sacrificed as a result of using the factory space to produce tables. Opportunity cost is a special category of cost that is not ordinarily recorded in an organization’s accounting records. To avoid possible confusion with other costs, we will not attempt to classify this cost in any other way except as an opportunity cost. Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 49 Review Problem 2: High-Low Method The administrator of Azalea Hills Hospital would like a cost formula linking the administrative costs involved in admitting patients to the number of patients admitted during a month. The Admitting Department’s costs and the number of patients admitted during the immediately preceding eight months are given in the following table: Month Number of Patients Admitted Admitting Department Costs 1,800 1,900 1,700 1,600 1,500 1,300 1,100 1,500 $14,700 $15,200 $13,700 $14,000 $14,300 $13,100 $12,800 $14,600 May . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . June . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . July . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . August . . . . . . . . . . . . . September . . . . . . . . . . . October . . . . . . . . . . . . . November . . . . . . . . . . . December . . . . . . . . . . . Required: 1. 2. Use the high-low method to estimate the fixed and variable components of admitting costs. Express the fixed and variable components of admitting costs as a cost formula in the form Y 5 a 1 bX. Solution to Review Problem 2 1. The first step in the high-low method is to identify the periods of the lowest and highest activity. Those periods are November (1,100 patients admitted) and June (1,900 patients admitted). The second step is to compute the variable cost per unit using those two data points: Number of Patients Admitted Month Admitting Department Costs High activity level (June) . . . . . . . . . . . . Low activity level (November) . . . . . . . . 1,900 1,100 $15,200 12,800 Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 $ 2,400 Change in cost $2,400 Variable cost 5 _______________ 5 __________________ 5 $3 per patient admitted Change in activity 800 patients admitted The third step is to compute the fixed cost element by deducting the variable cost element from the total cost at either the high or low activity. In the computation below, the high point of activity is used: Fixed cost element 5 Total cost 2 Variable cost element 5 $15,200 2 ($3 per patient admitted 3 1,900 patients admitted) 5 $9,500 2. The cost formula is Y 5 $9,500 1 $3X. Glossary Account analysis A method for analyzing cost behavior in which an account is classified as either variable or fixed based on the analyst’s prior knowledge of how the cost in the account behaves. (p. 39) Activity base A measure of whatever causes the incurrence of a variable cost. For example, the total cost of X-ray film in a hospital will increase as the number of X-rays taken increases. Therefore, the number of X-rays is the activity base that explains the total cost of X-ray film. (p. 33) 50 Chapter 2 Administrative costs All executive, organizational, and clerical costs associated with the general management of an organization rather than with manufacturing or selling. (p. 30) Committed fixed costs Investments in facilities, equipment, and basic organizational structure that can’t be significantly reduced even for short periods of time without making fundamental changes. (p. 35) Common cost A cost that is incurred to support a number of cost objects but that cannot be traced to them individually. For example, the wage cost of the pilot of a 747 airliner is a common cost of all of the passengers on the aircraft. Without the pilot, there would be no flight and no passengers. But no part of the pilot’s wage is caused by any one passenger taking the flight. (p. 29) Contribution approach An income statement format that organizes costs by their behavior. Costs are separated into variable and fixed categories rather than being separated into product and period costs for external reporting purposes. (p. 45) Contribution margin The amount remaining from sales revenues after all variable expenses have been deducted. (p. 45) Conversion cost Direct labor cost plus manufacturing overhead cost. (p. 32) Cost behavior The way in which a cost reacts to changes in the level of activity. (p. 33) Cost object Anything for which cost data are desired. Examples of cost objects are products, customers, jobs, and parts of the organization such as departments or divisions. (p. 28) Cost structure The relative proportion of fixed, variable, and mixed costs in an organization. (p. 33) Dependent variable A variable that responds to some causal factor; total cost is the dependent variable, as represented by the letter Y, in the equation Y 5 a 1 bX. (p. 39) Differential cost A difference in cost between two alternatives. Also see Incremental cost. (p. 46) Differential revenue The difference in revenue between two alternatives. (p. 46) Direct cost A cost that can be easily and conveniently traced to a specified cost object. (p. 28) Direct labor Factory labor costs that can be easily traced to individual units of product. Also called touch labor. (p. 29) Direct materials Materials that become an integral part of a finished product and whose costs can be conveniently traced to it. (p. 29) Discretionary fixed costs Those fixed costs that arise from annual decisions by management to spend on certain fixed cost items, such as advertising and research. (p. 35) Engineering approach A detailed analysis of cost behavior based on an industrial engineer’s evaluation of the inputs that are required to carry out a particular activity and of the prices of those inputs. (p. 39) Fixed cost A cost that remains constant, in total, regardless of changes in the level of activity within the relevant range. If a fixed cost is expressed on a per unit basis, it varies inversely with the level of activity. (p. 34) High-low method A method of separating a mixed cost into its fixed and variable elements by analyzing the change in cost between the high and low activity levels. (p. 40) Incremental cost An increase in cost between two alternatives. Also see Differential cost. (p. 46) Independent variable A variable that acts as a causal factor; activity is the independent variable, as represented by the letter X, in the equation Y 5 a 1 bX. (p. 40) Indirect cost A cost that cannot be easily and conveniently traced to a specified cost object. (p. 29) Indirect labor The labor costs of janitors, supervisors, materials handlers, and other factory workers that cannot be conveniently traced to particular products. (p. 30) Indirect materials Small items of material such as glue and nails that may be an integral part of a finished product, but whose costs cannot be easily or conveniently traced to it. (p. 29) Inventoriable costs Synonym for product costs. (p. 31) Least-squares regression method A method of separating a mixed cost into its fixed and variable elements by fitting a regression line that minimizes the sum of the squared errors. (p. 42) Linear cost behavior Cost behavior is said to be linear whenever a straight line is a reasonable approximation for the relation between cost and activity. (p. 40) Manufacturing overhead All manufacturing costs except direct materials and direct labor. (p. 30) Mixed cost A cost that contains both variable and fixed cost elements. (p. 37) Opportunity cost The potential benefit that is given up when one alternative is selected over another. (p. 46) Period costs Costs that are taken directly to the income statement as expenses in the period in which they are incurred or accrued. (p. 31) Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 51 Prime cost Direct materials cost plus direct labor cost. (p. 32) Product costs All costs that are involved in acquiring or making a product. In the case of manufactured goods, these costs consist of direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead. Also see Inventoriable costs. (p. 31) Raw materials Any materials that go into the final product. (p. 29) Relevant range The range of activity within which assumptions about variable and fixed cost behavior are valid. (p. 36) Selling costs All costs that are incurred to secure customer orders and get the finished product or service into the hands of the customer. (p. 30) Sunk cost A cost that has already been incurred and that cannot be changed by any decision made now or in the future. (p. 46) Variable cost A cost that varies, in total, in direct proportion to changes in the level of activity. A variable cost is constant per unit. (p. 33) Questions 2–1 2–2 2–3 2–4 2–5 2–6 2–7 2–8 2–9 2–10 2–11 2–12 2–13 2–14 2–15 2–16 2–17 What are the three major elements of product costs in a manufacturing company? Define the following: (a) direct materials, (b) indirect materials, (c) direct labor, (d) indirect labor, and (e) manufacturing overhead. Explain the difference between a product cost and a period cost. Distinguish between (a) a variable cost, (b) a fixed cost, and (c) a mixed cost. What effect does an increase in volume have on— a. Unit fixed costs? b. Unit variable costs? c. Total fixed costs? d. Total variable costs? Define the following terms: (a) cost behavior and (b) relevant range. What is meant by an activity base when dealing with variable costs? Give several examples of activity bases. Managers often assume a strictly linear relationship between cost and volume. How can this practice be defended in light of the fact that many costs are curvilinear? Distinguish between discretionary fixed costs and committed fixed costs. Does the concept of the relevant range apply to fixed costs? Explain. What is the major disadvantage of the high-low method? Give the general formula for a mixed cost. Which term represents the variable cost? The fixed cost? What is meant by the term least-squares regression? What is the difference between a contribution format income statement and a traditional format income statement? What is the contribution margin? Define the following terms: differential cost, opportunity cost, and sunk cost. Only variable costs can be differential costs. Do you agree? Explain. Multiple-choice questions are provided on the text website at www.mhhe.com/garrison15e. Applying Excel Available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. The Excel worksheet form that appears on the next page is to be used to recreate Exhibit 2–9 on page 44. Download the workbook containing this form from the Online Learning Center at www. mhhe.com/garrison15e. On the website you will also receive instructions about how to use this worksheet form. LO2–6 52 Chapter 2 Required: 1. 2. Check your worksheet by changing the variable selling cost in the Data area to $900, keeping all of the other data the same as in Exhibit 2–9. If your worksheet is operating properly, the net operating income under the traditional format income statement and under the contribution format income statement should now be $700 and the contribution margin should now be $4,700. If you do not get these answers, find the errors in your worksheet and correct them. How much is the gross margin? Did it change? Why or why not? Suppose that sales are 10% higher as shown below: Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable costs: Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed costs: Fixed selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $13,200 $6,600 $990 $440 $2,500 $1,500 Enter this new data into your worksheet. Make sure that you change all of the data that are different—not just the sales. Print or copy the income statements from your worksheet. What happened to the variable costs and to the fixed costs when sales increased by 10%? Why? Did the contribution margin increase by 10%? Why or why not? Did the net operating income increase by 10%? Why or why not? Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 53 The Foundational 15 Available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. Martinez Company’s relevant range of production is 7,500 units to 12,500 units. When it produces and sells 10,000 units, its unit costs are as follows: LO2–1, LO2–2, LO2–3, LO2–4, LO2–6, LO2–7 Amount Per Unit Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed administrative expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales commissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable administrative expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $6.00 $3.50 $1.50 $4.00 $3.00 $2.00 $1.00 $0.50 Required: 1. For financial accounting purposes, what is the total amount of product costs incurred to make 10,000 units? 2. For financial accounting purposes, what is the total amount of period costs incurred to sell 10,000 units? 3. If 8,000 units are sold, what is the variable cost per unit sold? 4. If 12,500 units are sold, what is the variable cost per unit sold? 5. If 8,000 units are sold, what is the total amount of variable costs related to the units sold? 6. If 12,500 units are sold, what is the total amount of variable costs related to the units sold? 7. If 8,000 units are produced, what is the average fixed manufacturing cost per unit produced? 8. If 12,500 units are produced, what is the average fixed manufacturing cost per unit produced? 9. If 8,000 units are produced, what is the total amount of fixed manufacturing cost incurred to support this level of production? 10. If 12,500 units are produced, what is the total amount of fixed manufacturing cost incurred to support this level of production? 11. If 8,000 units are produced, what is the total amount of manufacturing overhead cost incurred to support this level of production? What is this total amount expressed on a per unit basis? 12. If 12,500 units are produced, what is the total amount of manufacturing overhead cost incurred to support this level of production? What is this total amount expressed on a per unit basis? 13. If the selling price is $22 per unit, what is the contribution margin per unit sold? 14. If 11,000 units are produced, what are the total amounts of direct and indirect manufacturing costs incurred to support this level of production? 15. What total incremental cost will Martinez incur if it increases production from 10,000 to 10,001 units? Exercises All applicable exercises are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. EXERCISE 2–1 Identifying Direct and Indirect Costs [LO2–1] Northwest Hospital is a full-service hospital that provides everything from major surgery and emergency room care to outpatient clinics. Required: For each cost incurred at Northwest Hospital, indicate whether it would most likely be a direct cost or an indirect cost of the specified cost object by placing an X in the appropriate column. 54 Chapter 2 Cost Cost Object Ex. Catered food served to patients 1. The wages of pediatric nurses 2. Prescription drugs 3. Heating the hospital 4. The salary of the head of pediatrics 5. The salary of the head of pediatrics 6. Hospital chaplain’s salary 7. Lab tests by outside contractor 8. Lab tests by outside contractor A particular patient The pediatric department A particular patient The pediatric department The pediatric department A particular pediatric patient A particular patient A particular patient A particular department Direct Cost Indirect Cost X EXERCISE 2–2 Classifying Manufacturing Costs [LO2–2] The PC Works assembles custom computers from components supplied by various manufacturers. The company is very small and its assembly shop and retail sales store are housed in a single facility in a Redmond, Washington, industrial park. Listed below are some of the costs that are incurred at the company. Required: For each cost, indicate whether it would most likely be classified as direct labor, direct materials, manufacturing overhead, selling, or an administrative cost. 1. The cost of a hard drive installed in a computer. 2. The cost of advertising in the Puget Sound Computer User newspaper. 3. The wages of employees who assemble computers from components. 4. Sales commissions paid to the company’s salespeople. 5. The wages of the assembly shop’s supervisor. 6. The wages of the company’s accountant. 7. Depreciation on equipment used to test assembled computers before release to customers. 8. Rent on the facility in the industrial park. EXERCISE 2–3 Classification of Costs as Product or Period Cost [LO2–3] Suppose that you have been given a summer job as an intern at Issac Aircams, a company that manufactures sophisticated spy cameras for remote-controlled military reconnaissance aircraft. The company, which is privately owned, has approached a bank for a loan to help it finance its growth. The bank requires financial statements before approving such a loan. You have been asked to help prepare the financial statements and were given the following list of costs: 1. Depreciation on salespersons’ cars. 2. Rent on equipment used in the factory. 3. Lubricants used for machine maintenance. 4. Salaries of personnel who work in the finished goods warehouse. 5. Soap and paper towels used by factory workers at the end of a shift. 6. Factory supervisors’ salaries. 7. Heat, water, and power consumed in the factory. 8. Materials used for boxing products for shipment overseas. (Units are not normally boxed.) 9. Advertising costs. 10. Workers’ compensation insurance for factory employees. 11. Depreciation on chairs and tables in the factory lunchroom. 12. The wages of the receptionist in the administrative offices. 13. Cost of leasing the corporate jet used by the company’s executives. 14. The cost of renting rooms at a Florida resort for the annual sales conference. 15. The cost of packaging the company’s product. Required: Classify the above costs as either product costs or period costs for the purpose of preparing the financial statements for the bank. EXERCISE 2–4 Fixed and Variable Cost Behavior [LO2–4] Espresso Express operates a number of espresso coffee stands in busy suburban malls. The fixed weekly expense of a coffee stand is $1,200 and the variable cost per cup of coffee served is $0.22. Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts Required: 1. Fill in the following table with your estimates of total costs and cost per cup of coffee at the indicated levels of activity for a coffee stand. Round off the cost of a cup of coffee to the nearest tenth of a cent. Cups of Coffee Served in a Week Fixed cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Average cost per cup of coffee served . . . . . 2. 2,000 2,100 2,200 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? Does the average cost per cup of coffee served increase, decrease, or remain the same as the number of cups of coffee served in a week increases? Explain. EXERCISE 2–5 High-Low Method [LO2–5] The Cheyenne Hotel in Big Sky, Montana, has accumulated records of the total electrical costs of the hotel and the number of occupancy-days over the last year. An occupancy-day represents a room rented out for one day. The hotel’s business is highly seasonal, with peaks occurring during the ski season and in the summer. Month January . . . . . . . . February . . . . . . . March . . . . . . . . . April . . . . . . . . . . May . . . . . . . . . . . June . . . . . . . . . . July . . . . . . . . . . . August . . . . . . . . September . . . . . October . . . . . . . November . . . . . . December . . . . . . Occupancy-Days Electrical Costs 1,736 1,904 2,356 960 360 744 2,108 2,406 840 124 720 1,364 $4,127 $4,207 $5,083 $2,857 $1,871 $2,696 $4,670 $5,148 $2,691 $1,588 $2,454 $3,529 Required: 1. 2. Using the high-low method, estimate the fixed cost of electricity per month and the variable cost of electricity per occupancy-day. Round off the fixed cost to the nearest whole dollar and the variable cost to the nearest whole cent. What other factors other than occupancy-days are likely to affect the variation in electrical costs from month to month? EXERCISE 2–6 Traditional and Contribution Format Income Statements [LO2–6] Cherokee Inc. is a merchandiser that provided the following information: Amount Number of units sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,000 Selling price per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $30 Variable selling expense per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $4 Variable administrative expense per unit . . . . . . . . . $2 Total fixed selling expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $40,000 Total fixed administrative expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . $30,000 Beginning merchandise inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $24,000 Ending merchandise inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $44,000 Merchandise purchases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $180,000 55 56 Chapter 2 Required: 1. 2. Prepare a traditional income statement. Prepare a contribution format income statement. EXERCISE 2–7 Differential, Opportunity, and Sunk Costs [LO2–7] Northwest Hospital is a full-service hospital that provides everything from major surgery and emergency room care to outpatient clinics. The hospital’s Radiology Department is considering replacing an old inefficient X-ray machine with a state-of-the-art digital X-ray machine. The new machine would provide higher quality X-rays in less time and at a lower cost per X-ray. It would also require less power and would use a color laser printer to produce easily readable X-ray images. Instead of investing the funds in the new X-ray machine, the Laboratory Department is lobbying the hospital’s management to buy a new DNA analyzer. Required: For each of the items below, indicate by placing an X in the appropriate column whether it should be considered a differential cost, an opportunity cost, or a sunk cost in the decision to replace the old X-ray machine with a new machine. If none of the categories apply for a particular item, leave all columns blank. Differential Cost Item Ex. Cost of X-ray film used in the old machine 1. Cost of the old X-ray machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. The salary of the head of the Radiology Department . . . . 3. The salary of the head of the Pediatrics Department . . . . 4. Cost of the new color laser printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Rent on the space occupied by Radiology . . . . . . . . . . . 6. The cost of maintaining the old machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Benefits from a new DNA analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. Cost of electricity to run the X-ray machines . . . . . . . . . . Opportunity Cost Sunk Cost X EXERCISE 2–8 Cost Behavior; High-Low Method [LO2–4, LO2–5] Hoi Chong Transport, Ltd., operates a fleet of delivery trucks in Singapore. The company has determined that if a truck is driven 105,000 kilometers during a year, the average operating cost is 11.4 cents per kilometer. If a truck is driven only 70,000 kilometers during a year, the average operating cost increases to 13.4 cents per kilometer. Required: 1. 2. 3. Using the high-low method, estimate the variable and fixed cost elements of the annual cost of the truck operation. Express the variable and fixed costs in the form Y 5 a 1 bX. If a truck were driven 80,000 kilometers during a year, what total cost would you expect to be incurred? EXERCISE 2–9 Cost Terminology for Manufacturers [LO2–2, LO2–3] Arden Company reported the following costs and expenses for the most recent month: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $80,000 $42,000 $19,000 $22,000 $35,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. What is the total amount of product costs? What is the total amount of period costs? What is the total amount of conversion costs? What is the total amount of prime costs? EXERCISE 2–10 Cost Behavior; Contribution Format Income Statement [LO2–4, LO2–6] Harris Company manufactures and sells a single product. A partially completed schedule of the company’s total and per unit costs over the relevant range of 30,000 to 50,000 units produced and sold annually is given below: Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts Units Produced and Sold 30,000 40,000 50,000 Total costs: Variable costs . . . . . Fixed costs . . . . . . . $180,000 300,000 ? ? ? ? Total costs . . . . . . . . . . $480,000 ? ? Cost per unit: Variable cost . . . . . . Fixed cost . . . . . . . . ? ? ? ? ? ? Total cost per unit . . . . ? ? ? Required: 1. 2. Complete the schedule of the company’s total and unit costs above. Assume that the company produces and sells 45,000 units during the year at a selling price of $16 per unit. Prepare a contribution format income statement for the year. EXERCISE 2–11 High-Low Method; Scattergraph Analysis [LO2–4, LO2–5] The following data relating to units shipped and total shipping expense have been assembled by Archer Company, a wholesaler of large, custom-built air-conditioning units for commercial buildings: Month January . . . . . . . . . February . . . . . . . . March . . . . . . . . . . April . . . . . . . . . . . May . . . . . . . . . . . . June . . . . . . . . . . . . July . . . . . . . . . . . . Units Shipped Total Shipping Expense 3 6 4 5 7 8 2 $1,800 $2,300 $1,700 $2,000 $2,300 $2,700 $1,200 Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Prepare a scattergraph using the data given above. Plot cost on the vertical axis and activity on the horizontal axis. Is there an approximately linear relationship between shipping expense and the number of units shipped? Using the high-low method, estimate the cost formula for shipping expense. Draw a straight line through the high and low data points shown in the scattergraph that you prepared in requirement 1. Make sure your line intersects the Y axis. Comment on the accuracy of your high-low estimates assuming a least-squares regression analysis estimated the total fixed costs to be $910.71 per month and the variable cost to be $217.86 per unit. How would the straight line that you drew in requirement 2 differ from a straight line that minimizes the sum of the squared errors? What factors, other than the number of units shipped, are likely to affect the company’s shipping expense? Explain. EXERCISE 2–12 Cost Classification [LO2–2, LO2–3, LO2–4, LO2–7] Wollogong Group Ltd. of New South Wales, Australia, acquired its factory building about 10 years ago. For several years, the company has rented out a small annex attached to the rear of the building. The company has received a rental income of $30,000 per year on this space. The renter’s lease will expire soon, and rather than renewing the lease, the company has decided to use the space itself to manufacture a new product. Direct materials cost for the new product will total $80 per unit. To have a place to store finished units of product, the company will rent a small warehouse nearby. The rental cost will be $500 per month. In addition, the company must rent equipment for use in producing the new product; the rental cost will be $4,000 per month. Workers will be hired to manufacture the new product, with direct labor cost amounting to $60 per unit. The space in the annex will continue to be depreciated on a straight-line basis, as in prior years. This depreciation is $8,000 per year. Advertising costs for the new product will total $50,000 per year. A supervisor will be hired to oversee production; her salary will be $1,500 per month. Electricity for operating machines will be $1.20 per unit. Costs of shipping the new product to customers will be $9 per unit. 57 58 Chapter 2 To provide funds to purchase materials, meet payrolls, and so forth, the company will have to liquidate some temporary investments. These investments are presently yielding a return of about $3,000 per year. Required: Prepare an answer sheet with the following column headings: Period Product Cost Name (Selling and of the Variable Fixed Direct Direct Manufacturing Administrative) Opportunity Sunk Cost Cost Cost Materials Labor Overhead Cost Cost Cost List the different costs associated with the new product decision down the extreme left column (under Name of the Cost). Then place an X under each heading that helps to describe the type of cost involved. There may be X’s under several column headings for a single cost. (For example, a cost may be a fixed cost, a period cost, and a sunk cost; you would place an X under each of these column headings opposite the cost.) EXERCISE 2–13 Traditional and Contribution Format Income Statements [LO2–6] The Alpine House, Inc., is a large retailer of snow skis. The company assembled the information shown below for the quarter ended March 31: Amount Total sales revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling price per pair of skis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling expense per pair of skis . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable administrative expense per pair of skis . . . . . . . Total fixed selling expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total fixed administrative expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beginning merchandise inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending merchandise inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merchandise purchases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $150,000 $750 $50 $10 $20,000 $20,000 $30,000 $40,000 $100,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. Prepare a traditional income statement for the quarter ended March 31. Prepare a contribution format income statement for the quarter ended March 31. What was the contribution toward fixed expenses and profits for each pair of skis sold during the quarter? (State this figure in a single dollar amount per pair of skis.) EXERCISE 2–14 High-Low Method; Predicting Cost [LO2–4, LO2–5] The Lakeshore Hotel’s guest-days of occupancy and custodial supplies expense over the last seven months were: Month March . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . April . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . May . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . June . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . July . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . August . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guest-Days of Occupancy Custodial Supplies Expense 4,000 6,500 8,000 10,500 12,000 9,000 7,500 $7,500 $8,250 $10,500 $12,000 $13,500 $10,750 $9,750 Guest-days is a measure of the overall activity at the hotel. For example, a guest who stays at the hotel for three days is counted as three guest-days. Required: 1. 2. 3. Using the high-low method, estimate a cost formula for custodial supplies expense. Using the cost formula you derived above, what amount of custodial supplies expense would you expect to be incurred at an occupancy level of 11,000 guest-days? Prepare a scattergraph using the data given above. Plot custodial supplies expense on the vertical axis and the number of guest-days occupied on the horizontal axis. Draw a straight line Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 4. 5. 59 through the two data points that correspond to the high and low levels of activity. Make sure your line intersects the Y-axis. Comment on the accuracy of your high-low estimates assuming a least-squares regression analysis estimated the total fixed costs to be $3,973.10 per month and the variable cost to be $0.77 per guest-day. How would the straight line that you drew in requirement 3 differ from a straight line that minimizes the sum of the squared errors? Using the least-squares regression estimates given in requirement 4, what custodial supplies expense would you expect to be incurred at an occupancy level of 11,000 guest-days? EXERCISE 2–15 Classification of Costs as Variable or Fixed and as Product or Period [LO2–3, LO2–4] Below are listed various costs that are found in organizations. 1. Hamburger buns in a Wendy’s outlet. 2. Advertising by a dental office. 3. Apples processed and canned by Del Monte. 4. Shipping canned apples from a Del Monte plant to customers. 5. Insurance on a Bausch & Lomb factory producing contact lenses. 6. Insurance on IBM’s corporate headquarters. 7. Salary of a supervisor overseeing production of printers at Hewlett-Packard. 8. Commissions paid to automobile salespersons. 9. Depreciation of factory lunchroom facilities at a General Electric plant. 10. Steering wheels installed in BMWs. Required: Classify each cost as being either variable or fixed with respect to the number of units produced and sold. Also classify each cost as either a selling and administrative cost or a product cost. Prepare your answer sheet as shown below. Place an X in the appropriate columns to show the proper classification of each cost. Period (Selling and Administrative) Cost Cost Behavior Cost Item Variable Fixed Product Cost Problems All applicable problems are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. PROBLEM 2–16 Cost Behavior; High-Low Method; Contribution Format Income Statement [LO2–4, LO2–5, LO2–6] Morrisey & Brown, Ltd., of Sydney is a merchandising company that is the sole distributor of a product that is increasing in popularity among Australian consumers. The company’s income statements for the three most recent months follow: Morrisey & Brown, Ltd. Income Statements For the Three Months Ended September 30 July August September Sales in units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,000 4,500 5,000 Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $400,000 240,000 $450,000 270,000 $500,000 300,000 Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,000 180,000 200,000 Selling and administrative expenses: Advertising expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Salaries and commissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insurance expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21,000 34,000 78,000 6,000 15,000 21,000 36,000 84,000 6,000 15,000 21,000 38,000 90,000 6,000 15,000 Total selling and administrative expenses Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,000 $ 6,000 162,000 170,000 $ 18,000 $ 30,000 60 Chapter 2 Required: 1. 2. 3. Identify each of the company’s expenses (including cost of goods sold) as either variable, fixed, or mixed. Using the high-low method, separate each mixed expense into variable and fixed elements. State the cost formula for each mixed expense. Redo the company’s income statement at the 5,000-unit level of activity using the contribution format. PROBLEM 2–17 High-Low Method; Predicting Cost [LO2–4, LO2–5] Sawaya Co., Ltd., of Japan is a manufacturing company whose total factory overhead costs fluctuate considerably from year to year according to increases and decreases in the number of direct labor-hours worked in the factory. Total factory overhead costs at high and low levels of activity for recent years are given below: Level of Activity Direct labor-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total factory overhead costs . . . . . . . . Low High 50,000 $14,250,000 75,000 $17,625,000 The factory overhead costs above consist of indirect materials, rent, and maintenance. The company has analyzed these costs at the 50,000-hour level of activity as follows: Indirect materials (variable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rent (fixed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance (mixed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 5,000,000 6,000,000 3,250,000 Total factory overhead costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $14,250,000 To have data available for planning, the company wants to break down the maintenance cost into its variable and fixed cost elements. Required: 1. 2. 3. Estimate how much of the $17,625,000 factory overhead cost at the high level of activity consists of maintenance cost. (Hint: To do this, it may be helpful to first determine how much of the $17,625,000 consists of indirect materials and rent. Think about the behavior of variable and fixed costs!) Using the high-low method, estimate a cost formula for maintenance. What total factory overhead costs would you expect the company to incur at an operating level of 70,000 direct labor-hours? PROBLEM 2–18 Variable and Fixed Costs; Subtleties of Direct and Indirect Costs [LO2–1, LO2–4] Madison Seniors Care Center is a nonprofit organization that provides a variety of health services to the elderly. The center is organized into a number of departments, one of which is the Meals-OnWheels program that delivers hot meals to seniors in their homes on a daily basis. Below are listed a number of costs of the center and the Meals-On-Wheels program. example The cost of groceries used in meal preparation. a. The cost of leasing the Meals-On-Wheels van. b. The cost of incidental supplies such as salt, pepper, napkins, and so on. c. The cost of gasoline consumed by the Meals-On-Wheels van. d. The rent on the facility that houses Madison Seniors Care Center, including the Meals-On-Wheels program. e. The salary of the part-time manager of the Meals-On-Wheels program. f. Depreciation on the kitchen equipment used in the Meals-On-Wheels program. g. The hourly wages of the caregiver who drives the van and delivers the meals. h. The costs of complying with health safety regulations in the kitchen. i. The costs of mailing letters soliciting donations to the Meals-On-Wheels program. Required: For each cost listed above, indicate whether it is a direct or indirect cost of the Meals-On-Wheels program, whether it is a direct or indirect cost of particular seniors served by the program, and Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts whether it is variable or fixed with respect to the number of seniors served. Use the form below for your answer. Item Description Example The cost of groceries used in meal preparation . . . Direct or Indirect Cost of the Mealson-Wheels Program Direct or Indirect Variable or Fixed Cost of Particular with Respect to the Seniors Served Number of Seniors by the Meals-on- Served by the MealsWheels Program on-Wheels Program Direct Direct Indirect X Indirect Variable X Fixed X PROBLEM 2–19 Contribution Format versus Traditional Income Statement [LO2–6] Marwick’s Pianos, Inc., purchases pianos from a large manufacturer and sells them at the retail level. The pianos cost, on the average, $2,450 each from the manufacturer. Marwick’s Pianos, Inc., sells the pianos to its customers at an average price of $3,125 each. The selling and administrative costs that the company incurs in a typical month are presented below: Costs Cost Formula Selling: Advertising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales salaries and commissions . . . . . . Delivery of pianos to customers . . . . . . Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation of sales facilities . . . . . . . . Administrative: Executive salaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clerical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation of office equipment . . . . . . $700 per month $950 per month, plus 8% of sales $30 per piano sold $350 per month $800 per month $2,500 per month $400 per month $1,000 per month, plus $20 per piano sold $300 per month During August, Marwick’s Pianos, Inc., sold and delivered 40 pianos. Required: 1. 2. 3. Prepare an income statement for Marwick’s Pianos, Inc., for August. Use the traditional format, with costs organized by function. Redo (1) above, this time using the contribution format, with costs organized by behavior. Show costs and revenues on both a total and a per unit basis down through contribution margin. Refer to the income statement you prepared in (2) above. Why might it be misleading to show the fixed costs on a per unit basis? PROBLEM 2–20 High-Low Method; Predicting Cost [LO2–4, LO2–5] Nova Company’s total overhead cost at various levels of activity are presented below: Month April . . . . . . . . . . . . . May . . . . . . . . . . . . . . June . . . . . . . . . . . . . . July . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MachineHours Total Overhead Cost 70,000 60,000 80,000 90,000 $198,000 $174,000 $222,000 $246,000 61 62 Chapter 2 Assume that the total overhead cost above consists of utilities, supervisory salaries, and maintenance. The breakdown of these costs at the 60,000 machine-hour level of activity is: Utilities (variable) . . . . . . . . . . . Supervisory salaries (fixed) . . . Maintenance (mixed) . . . . . . . . $ 48,000 21,000 105,000 Total overhead cost . . . . . . . . . $174,000 Nova Company’s management wants to break down the maintenance cost into its variable and fixed cost elements. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Estimate how much of the $246,000 of overhead cost in July was maintenance cost. (Hint: to do this, it may be helpful to first determine how much of the $246,000 consisted of utilities and supervisory salaries. Think about the behavior of variable and fixed costs!) Using the high-low method, estimate a cost formula for maintenance. Express the company’s total overhead cost in the linear equation form Y 5 a 1 bX. What total overhead cost would you expect to be incurred at an activity level of 75,000 machine-hours? PROBLEM 2–21 Cost Classification [LO2–1, LO2–3, LO2–4] Listed below are costs found in various organizations. 1. Property taxes, factory. 2. Boxes used for packaging detergent produced by the company. 3. Salespersons’ commissions. 4. Supervisor’s salary, factory. 5. Depreciation, executive autos. 6. Wages of workers assembling computers. 7. Insurance, finished goods warehouses. 8. Lubricants for production equipment. 9. Advertising costs. 10. Microchips used in producing calculators. 11. Shipping costs on merchandise sold. 12. Magazine subscriptions, factory lunchroom. 13. Thread in a garment factory. 14. Billing costs. 15. Executive life insurance. 16. Ink used in textbook production. 17. Fringe benefits, assembly-line workers. 18. Yarn used in sweater production. 19. Wages of receptionist, executive offices. Required: Prepare an answer sheet with column headings as shown below. For each cost item, indicate whether it would be variable or fixed with respect to the number of units produced and sold; and then whether it would be a selling cost, an administrative cost, or a manufacturing cost. If it is a manufacturing cost, indicate whether it would typically be treated as a direct cost or an indirect cost with respect to units of product. Three sample answers are provided for illustration. Cost Item Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executive salaries . . . . . . . . . . Factory rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable or Fixed V F F Selling Cost Administrative Cost Manufacturing (Product) Cost Direct Indirect X X X Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts PROBLEM 2–22 High-Low and Scattergraph Analysis [LO2–4, LO2–5] Pleasant View Hospital of British Columbia has just hired a new chief administrator who is anxious to employ sound management and planning techniques in the business affairs of the hospital. Accordingly, she has directed her assistant to summarize the cost structure of the various departments so that data will be available for planning purposes. The assistant is unsure how to classify the utilities costs in the Radiology Department because these costs do not exhibit either strictly variable or fixed cost behavior. Utilities costs are very high in the department due to a CAT scanner that draws a large amount of power and is kept running at all times. The scanner can’t be turned off due to the long warm-up period required for its use. When the scanner is used to scan a patient, it consumes an additional burst of power. The assistant has accumulated the following data on utilities costs and use of the scanner since the first of the year. Month January . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . February . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . March . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . April . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . May . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . June . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . July . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . August . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . October . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of Scans Utilities Cost 60 70 90 120 100 130 150 140 110 80 $2,200 $2,600 $2,900 $3,300 $3,000 $3,600 $4,000 $3,600 $3,100 $2,500 The chief administrator has informed her assistant that the utilities cost is probably a mixed cost that will have to be broken down into its variable and fixed cost elements by use of a scattergraph. The assistant feels, however, that if an analysis of this type is necessary, then the high-low method should be used, since it is easier and quicker. The controller has suggested that there may be a better approach. Required: 1. 2. 3. Using the high-low method, estimate a cost formula for utilities. Express the formula in the form Y 5 a 1 bX. (The variable rate should be stated in terms of cost per scan.) Prepare a scattergraph by plotting the number of scans and utility cost on a graph. Draw a straight line though the two data points that correspond to the high and low levels of activity. Make sure your line intersects the Y-axis. Comment on the accuracy of your high-low estimates assuming a least-squares regression analysis estimated the total fixed costs to be $1,170.90 per month and the variable cost to be $18.18 per scan. How would the straight line that you drew in requirement 2 differ from a straight line that minimizes the sum of the squared errors? PROBLEM 2–23 High-Low Method; Contribution Format Income Statement [LO2–5, LO2–6] Milden Company has an exclusive franchise to purchase a product from the manufacturer and distribute it on the retail level. As an aid in planning, the company has decided to start using a contribution format income statement. To have data to prepare such a statement, the company has analyzed its expenses and has developed the following cost formulas: Cost Cost Formula Cost of good sold . . . . . . . . . . . . Advertising expense . . . . . . . . . . Sales commissions . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping expense . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative salaries . . . . . . . . Insurance expense . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation expense . . . . . . . . . $35 per unit sold $210,000 per quarter 6% of sales ? $145,000 per quarter $9,000 per quarter $76,000 per quarter 63 64 Chapter 2 Management has concluded that shipping expense is a mixed cost, containing both variable and fixed cost elements. Units sold and the related shipping expense over the last eight quarters follow: Quarter Year 1: First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Third . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fourth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Year 2: First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Third . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fourth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units Sold Shipping Expense 10,000 16,000 18,000 15,000 $119,000 $175,000 $190,000 $164,000 11,000 17,000 20,000 13,000 $130,000 $185,000 $210,000 $147,000 Milden Company’s president would like a cost formula derived for shipping expense so that a budgeted contribution format income statement can be prepared for the next quarter. Required: 1. 2. Using the high-low method, estimate a cost formula for shipping expense. In the first quarter of Year 3, the company plans to sell 12,000 units at a selling price of $100 per unit. Prepare a contribution format income statement for the quarter. PROBLEM 2–24 Ethics and the Manager [LO2–3] M. K. Gallant is president of Kranbrack Corporation, a company whose stock is traded on a national exchange. In a meeting with investment analysts at the beginning of the year, Gallant had predicted that the company’s earnings would grow by 20% this year. Unfortunately, sales have been less than expected for the year, and Gallant concluded within two weeks of the end of the fiscal year that it would be impossible to ultimately report an increase in earnings as large as predicted unless some drastic action was taken. Accordingly, Gallant has ordered that wherever possible, expenditures should be postponed to the new year—including canceling or postponing orders with suppliers, delaying planned maintenance and training, and cutting back on end-of-year advertising and travel. Additionally, Gallant ordered the company’s controller to carefully scrutinize all costs that are currently classified as period costs and reclassify as many as possible as product costs. The company is expected to have substantial inventories at the end of the year. Required: 1. 2. Why would reclassifying period costs as product costs increase this period’s reported earnings? Do you believe Gallant’s actions are ethical? Why or why not? PROBLEM 2–25 Cost Classification and Cost Behavior [LO2–1, LO2–2, LO2–3, LO2–4] The Dorilane Company specializes in producing a set of wood patio furniture consisting of a table and four chairs. The set enjoys great popularity, and the company has ample orders to keep production going at its full capacity of 2,000 sets per year. Annual cost data at full capacity follow: Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advertising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property taxes, factory building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales commissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insurance, factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation, administrative office equipment . . . . . Lease cost, factory equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indirect materials, factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation, factory building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative office supplies (billing) . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative office salaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct materials used (wood, bolts, etc.) . . . . . . . . . Utilities, factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $118,000 $50,000 $40,000 $3,500 $80,000 $2,500 $4,000 $12,000 $6,000 $10,000 $3,000 $60,000 $94,000 $20,000 Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 65 Required: 1. Prepare an answer sheet with the column headings shown below. Enter each cost item on your answer sheet, placing the dollar amount under the appropriate headings. As examples, this has been done already for the first two items in the list above. Note that each cost item is classified in two ways: first, as variable or fixed with respect to the number of units produced and sold; and second, as a selling and administrative cost or a product cost. (If the item is a product cost, it should also be classified as either direct or indirect as shown.) Fixed Period (Selling or Administrative) Cost $50,000 $50,000 Cost Behavior Cost Item Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . Advertising . . . . . . . . . . Variable Product Cost Direct $118,000 Indirect* $118,000 *To units of product. 2. 3. 4. Total the dollar amounts in each of the columns in (1) above. Compute the average product cost of one patio set. Assume that production drops to only 1,000 sets annually. Would you expect the average product cost per set to increase, decrease, or remain unchanged? Explain. No computations are necessary. Refer to the original data. The president’s brother-in-law has considered making himself a patio set and has priced the necessary materials at a building supply store. The brother-in-law has asked the president if he could purchase a patio set from the Dorilane Company “at cost,” and the president agreed to let him do so. a. Would you expect any disagreement between the two men over the price the brotherin-law should pay? Explain. What price does the president probably have in mind? The brother-in-law? b. Because the company is operating at full capacity, what cost term used in the chapter might be justification for the president to charge the full, regular price to the brother-inlaw and still be selling “at cost”? Cases All applicable cases are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. CASE 2–26 Mixed Cost Analysis and the Relevant Range [LO2–4, LO2–5] The Ramon Company is a manufacturer that is interested in developing a cost formula to estimate the fixed and variable components of its monthly manufacturing overhead costs. The company wishes to use machine-hours as its measure of activity and has gathered the data below for this year and last year: Last Year Month January . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . February . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . March . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . April . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . May . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . June . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . July . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . August . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . October . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . November . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . December . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This Year MachineHours Overhead Costs MachineHours Overhead Costs 21,000 25,000 22,000 23,000 20,500 19,000 14,000 10,000 12,000 17,000 16,000 19,000 $84,000 $99,000 $89,500 $90,000 $81,500 $75,500 $70,500 $64,500 $69,000 $75,000 $71,500 $78,000 21,000 24,000 23,000 22,000 20,000 18,000 12,000 13,000 15,000 17,000 15,000 18,000 $86,000 $93,000 $93,000 $87,000 $80,000 $76,500 $67,500 $71,000 $73,500 $72,500 $71,000 $75,000 66 Chapter 2 The company leases all of its manufacturing equipment. The lease arrangement calls for a flat monthly fee up to 19,500 machine-hours. If the machine-hours used exceeds 19,500, then the fee becomes strictly variable with respect to the total number of machine-hours consumed during the month. Lease expense is a major element of overhead cost. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Using the high-low method, estimate a manufacturing overhead cost formula. Prepare a scattergraph using all of the data for the two-year period. Fit a straight line or lines to the plotted points using a ruler. Describe the cost behavior pattern revealed by your scattergraph plot. Assume a least-squares regression analysis using all of the given data points estimated the total fixed costs to be $40,102 and the variable costs to be $2.13 per machine-hour. Do you have any concerns about the accuracy of the high-low estimates that you have computed or the least-squares regression estimates that have been provided? Assume that the company consumes 22,500 machine-hours during a month. Using the highlow method, estimate the total overhead cost that would be incurred at this level of activity. Be sure to consider only the data points contained in the relevant range of activity when performing your computations. Comment on the accuracy of your high-low estimates assuming a least-squares regression analysis using only the data points in the relevant range of activity estimated the total fixed costs to be $10,090 and the variable costs to be $3.53 per machine-hour. CASE 2–27 Scattergraph Analysis; Selection of an Activity Base [LO2–5] Angora Wraps of Pendleton, Oregon, makes fine sweaters out of pure angora wool. The business is seasonal, with the largest demand during the fall, the winter, and Christmas holidays. The company must increase production each summer to meet estimated demand. The company has been analyzing its costs to determine which costs are fixed and variable for planning purposes. Below are data for the company’s activity and direct labor costs over the last year. Month January . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . February . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . March . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . April . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . May . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . June . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . July . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . August . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . October . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . November . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . December . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thousands of Units Produced Number of Paid Days Direct Labor Cost 98 76 75 80 85 102 52 136 138 132 86 56 20 20 21 22 22 21 19 21 22 23 18 21 $14,162 $12,994 $15,184 $15,038 $15,768 $15,330 $13,724 $14,162 $15,476 $15,476 $12,972 $14,074 The number of workdays varies from month to month due to the number of weekdays, holidays, and days of vacation in the month. The paid days include paid vacations (in July) and paid holidays (in November and December). The number of units produced in a month varies depending on demand and the number of workdays in the month. The company has eight workers who are classified as direct labor. Required: 1. 2. 3. Plot the direct labor cost and units produced on a scattergraph. (Place cost on the vertical axis and units produced on the horizontal axis.) Plot the direct labor cost and number of paid days on a scattergraph. (Place cost on the vertical axis and the number of paid days on the horizontal axis.) Which measure of activity—number of units produced or paid days—should be used as the activity base for explaining direct labor cost? Explain. Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 67 Appendix 2A: Least-Squares Regression Computations The least-squares regression method for estimating a linear relationship is based on the equation for a straight line: Y 5 a 1 bX As explained in the chapter, least-squares regression selects the values for the intercept a and the slope b that minimize the sum of the squared errors. The following formulas, which are derived in statistics and calculus texts, accomplish that objective: n(SXY ) 2 (SX )(SY ) b 5 __________________ n(SX2) 2 (SX )2 (SY ) 2 b(SX ) a 5 ____________ n where: X 5 The level of activity (independent variable) Y 5 The total mixed cost (dependent variable) a 5 The total fixed cost (the vertical intercept of the line) b 5 The variable cost per unit of activity (the slope of the line) n 5 Number of observations S 5 Sum across all n observations Manually performing the calculations required by the formulas is tedious at best. Fortunately, Microsoft® Excel can be used to estimate the intercept (fixed cost) and slope (variable cost per unit) that minimize the sum of the squared errors. Excel also provides a statistic called the R2, which is a measure of “goodness of fit.” The R2 tells us the percentage of the variation in the dependent variable (cost) that is explained by variation in the independent variable (activity). The R2 varies from 0% to 100%, and the higher the percentage, the better. You should always plot the data in a scattergraph, but it is particularly important to check the data visually when the R2 is low. A quick look at the scattergraph can reveal that there is little relation between the cost and the activity or that the relation is something other than a simple straight line. In such cases, additional analysis would be required. To illustrate how Excel can be used to prepare a scattergraph plot and to calculate the intercept a, the slope b, and the R2, we will use the Brentline Hospital data for patientdays and maintenance costs on page 39 (which is recreated in Exhibit 2A–1).1 To prepare a scattergraph plot, begin by highlighting the data in cells B4 through C10. From the Charts group within the Insert tab, select the “Scatter” subgroup and then click on the choice that has no lines connecting the data points. This should produce a scattergraph plot similar to the one shown in Exhibit 2A–2. Notice that the number of patient-days is plotted on the X-axis and the maintenance costs are plotted on the Y-axis.2 The data is approximately linear, so it makes sense to proceed with estimating a regression equation that minimizes the sum of the squared errors. 1 The authors wish to thank Don Schwartz, Professor of Accounting at National University, for providing suggestions that were instrumental in creating this appendix. 2 To insert labels for the X-axis and Y-axis, go to the Layout tab in Excel. Then, within the Labels group, select Axis Titles. LO2–8 Analyze a mixed cost using a scattergraph plot and the leastsquares regression method. 68 Chapter 2 EXHIBIT 2A–1 The Least-Squares Regression Worksheet for Brentline Hospital To determine the intercept a, the slope b, and the R2, begin by right clicking on any data point in the scattergraph plot and selecting “Add Trendline.” This should produce the screen that is shown in Exhibit 2A–3. Notice that under “Trend/Regression Type” you should select “Linear.” Similarly, under “Trendline Name” you should select “Automatic.” Next to the word “Backward” you should input the lowest value for the independent variable, which in this example is 5000 patient-days. Taking this particular step instructs Excel to extend your fitted line until it intersects the Y-axis. Finally, you should check the two boxes at the bottom of Exhibit 2A–3 that say “Display Equation on chart” and “Display R-squared value on chart.” Once you have established these settings, then click “Close.” As shown in Exhibit 2A–4, this will automatically insert a line within the scattergraph plot that minimizes the sum of the squared errors. It will also cause the estimated least-squares regression equation and R2 to be inserted into your scattergraph plot. Instead of depicting the results using the form Y 5 a 1 bX, Excel uses an equivalent form of the equation depicted as Y 5 bX 1 a. In other words, Excel reverses the two terms shown to the right of the equals sign. So, in Exhibit 2A–4, Excel shows a least-squares regression equation of y 5 0.7589x 1 3,430.9. The slope b in this equation of $0.7589 represents the estimated variable maintenance cost per patient-day. The intercept a in this equation of $3,430.90 (or approximately $3,431) represents the estimated fixed monthly maintenance cost. Note that the R2 is approximately 0.90, which is quite good and indicates that 90% of the variation in maintenance costs is explained by the variation in patient-days. EXHIBIT 2A–2 A Scattergraph Plot for Brentline Hospital Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 69 EXHIBIT 2A–3 Trendline Options in Microsoft Excel EXHIBIT 2A–4 Brentline Hospital: Least-Squares Regression Results Glossary (Appendix 2A) R2 A measure of goodness of fit in least-squares regression analysis. It is the percentage of the variation in the dependent variable that is explained by variation in the independent variable. (p. 67) Appendix 2A Exercises and Problems All applicable exercises and problems are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. EXERCISE 2A–1 Least-Squares Regression [LO2–8] Bargain Rental Car offers rental cars in an off-airport location near a major tourist destination in California. Management would like to better understand the behavior of the company’s costs. One of those costs is the cost of washing cars. The company operates its own car wash 70 Chapter 2 facility in which each rental car that is returned is thoroughly cleaned before being released for rental to another customer. Management believes that the costs of operating the car wash should be related to the number of rental returns. Accordingly, the following data have been compiled: Month January . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . February . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . March . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . April . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . May . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . June . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . July . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . August . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . October . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . November . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . December . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rental Returns Car Wash Costs 2,380 2,421 2,586 2,725 2,968 3,281 3,353 3,489 3,057 2,876 2,735 2,983 $10,825 $11,865 $11,332 $12,422 $13,850 $14,419 $14,935 $15,738 $13,563 $11,889 $12,683 $13,796 Required: 1. 2. Prepare a scattergraph plot. (Place car wash costs on the vertical axis and rental returns on the horizontal axis.) Using least-squares regression, estimate the fixed cost and variable cost elements of monthly car wash costs. The fixed cost element should be estimated to the nearest dollar and the variable cost element to the nearest cent. EXERCISE 2A–2 Least-Squares Regression [LO2–4, LO2–8] George Caloz & Frères, located in Grenchen, Switzerland, makes prestige high-end custom watches in small lots. One of the company’s products, a platinum diving watch, goes through an etching process. The company has observed etching costs as follows over the last six weeks: Week 1........... 2........... 3........... 4........... 5........... 6........... Units Total Etching Cost 4 3 8 6 7 2 $ 18 17 25 20 24 16 30 $120 For planning purposes, management would like to know the amount of variable etching cost per unit and the total fixed etching cost per week. Required: 1. 2. 3. Prepare a scattergraph plot. (Place etching costs on the vertical axis and units on the horizontal axis.) Using the least-squares regression method, estimate the variable and fixed elements of etching cost. Express these estimates in the form Y 5 a 1 bX. If the company processes five units next week, what would be the expected total etching cost? PROBLEM 2A–3 Least-Squares Regression; Scattergraph; Comparison of Activity Bases [LO2–4, LO2–8] The Hard Rock Mining Company is developing cost formulas for management planning and decision-making purposes. The company’s cost analyst has concluded that utilities cost is a mixed cost, and he is attempting to find a base with which the cost might be closely correlated. The controller has suggested that tons mined might be a good base to use in developing a cost formula. The Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts production superintendent disagrees; she thinks that direct labor-hours would be a better base. The cost analyst has decided to try both bases and has assembled the following information: Quarter Year 1: First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Third . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fourth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Year 2: First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Third . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fourth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tons Mined Direct Labor-Hours Utilities Cost 15,000 11,000 21,000 12,000 5,000 3,000 4,000 6,000 $50,000 $45,000 $60,000 $75,000 18,000 25,000 30,000 28,000 10,000 9,000 8,000 11,000 $100,000 $105,000 $85,000 $120,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. Using tons mined as the independent variable, prepare a scattergraph that plots tons mined on the horizontal axis and utilities cost on the vertical axis. Determine a cost formula for utilities cost using least-squares regression. Express this cost formula in the form Y 5 a 1 bX. Using direct labor-hours as the independent variable, prepare a scattergraph that plots direct labor-hours on the horizontal axis and utilities cost on the vertical axis. Determine a cost formula for utilities cost using least-squares regression. Express this cost formula in the form Y 5 a 1 bX. Would you recommend that the company use tons mined or direct labor-hours as a base for planning utilities cost? PROBLEM 2A–4 Least-Squares Regression Method; Scattergraph; Cost Behavior [LO2–4, LO2–8] Professor John Morton has just been appointed chairperson of the Finance Department at Westland University. In reviewing the department’s cost records, Professor Morton has found the following total cost associated with Finance 101 over the last several terms: Term Fall, last year . . . . . . . . . . . Winter, last year . . . . . . . . . Summer, last year . . . . . . . Fall, this year . . . . . . . . . . . Winter, this year . . . . . . . . . Number of Sections Offered Total Cost 4 6 2 5 3 $10,000 $14,000 $7,000 $13,000 $9,500 Professor Morton knows that there are some variable costs, such as amounts paid to graduate assistants, associated with the course. He would like to have the variable and fixed costs separated for planning purposes. Required: 1. 2. 3. Prepare a scattergraph plot. (Place total cost on the vertical axis and number of sections offered on the horizontal axis.) Using the least-squares regression method, estimate the variable cost per section and the total fixed cost per term for Finance 101. Express these estimates in the linear equation form Y 5 a 1 bX. Assume that because of the small number of sections offered during the Winter Term this year, Professor Morton will have to offer eight sections of Finance 101 during the Fall Term. Compute the expected total cost for Finance 101. Can you see any problem with using the cost formula from (2) above to derive this total cost figure? Explain. CASE 2A–5 Analysis of Mixed Costs in a Pricing Decision [LO2–4, LO2–8] Maria Chavez owns a catering company that serves food and beverages at parties and business functions. Chavez’s business is seasonal, with a heavy schedule during the summer months and holidays and a lighter schedule at other times. 71 72 Chapter 2 One of the major events Chavez’s customers request is a cocktail party. She offers a standard cocktail party and has estimated the cost per guest as follows: Food and beverages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labor (0.5 hrs. @ $10.00/hr.) . . . . . . . . . Overhead (0.5 hrs. @ $13.98/hr.) . . . . . . $15.00 5.00 6.99 Total cost per guest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $26.99 The standard cocktail party lasts three hours and Chavez hires one worker for every six guests, so that works out to one-half hour of labor per guest. These workers are hired only as needed and are paid only for the hours they actually work. When bidding on cocktail parties, Chavez adds a 15% markup to yield a price of about $31 per guest. She is confident about her estimates of the costs of food and beverages and labor but is not as comfortable with the estimate of overhead cost. The $13.98 overhead cost per labor-hour was determined by dividing total overhead expenses for the last 12 months by total labor-hours for the same period. Monthly data concerning overhead costs and laborhours follow: LaborHours Overhead Expenses January . . . . . . February . . . . . March . . . . . . . . April . . . . . . . . . May . . . . . . . . . June . . . . . . . . July . . . . . . . . . August . . . . . . . September . . . . October . . . . . . November . . . . December . . . . 2,500 2,800 3,000 4,200 4,500 5,500 6,500 7,500 7,000 4,500 3,100 6,500 $ 55,000 59,000 60,000 64,000 67,000 71,000 74,000 77,000 75,000 68,000 62,000 73,000 Total . . . . . . . . . 57,600 $805,000 Month Chavez has received a request to bid on a 180-guest fund-raising cocktail party to be given next month by an important local charity. (The party would last the usual three hours.) She would like to win this contract because the guest list for this charity event includes many prominent individuals that she would like to land as future clients. Maria is confident that these potential customers would be favorably impressed by her company’s services at the charity event. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Prepare a scattergraph plot that puts labor-hours on the X-axis and overhead expenses on the Y-axis. What insights are revealed by your scattergraph? Use the least-squares regression method to estimate the fixed and variable components of overhead expenses. Express these estimates in the form Y 5 a 1 bX. Estimate the contribution to profit of a standard 180-guest cocktail party if Chavez charges her usual price of $31 per guest. (In other words, by how much would her overall profit increase?) How low could Chavez bid for the charity event in terms of a price per guest and still not lose money on the event itself? The individual who is organizing the charity’s fund-raising event has indicated that he has already received a bid under $30 from another catering company. Do you think Chavez should bid below her normal $31 per guest price for the charity event? Why or why not? (CMA, adapted) Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 73 Appendix 2B: Cost of Quality A company may have a product with a high-quality design that uses high-quality components, but if the product is poorly assembled or has other defects, the company will have high warranty repair costs and dissatisfied customers. People who are dissatisfied with a product are unlikely to buy the product again. They often tell others about their bad experiences. This is the worst possible sort of advertising. To prevent such problems, companies expend a great deal of effort to reduce defects. The objective is to have high quality of conformance. Quality of Conformance A product that meets or exceeds its design specifications and is free of defects that mar its appearance or degrade its performance is said to have high quality of conformance. Note that if an economy car is free of defects, it can have a quality of conformance that is just as high as a defect-free luxury car. The purchasers of economy cars cannot expect their cars to be as opulently equipped as luxury cars, but they can and do expect them to be free of defects. Preventing, detecting, and dealing with defects causes costs that are called quality costs or the cost of quality. The use of the term quality cost is confusing to some people. It does not refer to costs such as using a higher-grade leather to make a wallet or using 14K gold instead of gold-plating in jewelry. Instead, the term quality cost refers to all of the costs that are incurred to prevent defects or that result from defects in products. Quality costs can be broken down into four broad groups. Two of these groups— known as prevention costs and appraisal costs—are incurred in an effort to keep defective products from falling into the hands of customers. The other two groups of costs—known as internal failure costs and external failure costs—are incurred because defects occur despite efforts to prevent them. Examples of specific costs involved in each of these four groups are given in Exhibit 2B–1. Several things should be noted about the quality costs shown in the exhibit. First, quality costs don’t relate to just manufacturing; rather, they relate to all the activities in a company from initial research and development (R&D) through customer service. Second, the number of costs associated with quality is very large; total quality cost can be very high unless management gives this area special attention. Finally, the costs in the four groupings are quite different. We will now look at each of these groupings more closely. Prevention Costs Generally, the most effective way to manage quality costs is to avoid having defects in the first place. It is much less costly to prevent a problem from ever happening than it is to find and correct the problem after it has occurred. Prevention costs support activities whose purpose is to reduce the number of defects. Note from Exhibit 2B–1 that prevention costs include activities relating to quality circles and statistical process control. Quality circles consist of small groups of employees that meet on a regular basis to discuss ways to improve quality. Both management and workers are included in these circles. Quality circles are widely used and can be found in manufacturing companies, utilities, health care organizations, banks, and many other organizations. Statistical process control is a technique that is used to detect whether a process is in or out of control. An out-of-control process results in defective units and may be caused by a miscalibrated machine or some other factor. In statistical process control, workers use charts to monitor the quality of units that pass through their workstations. With these charts, workers can quickly spot processes that are out of control and that are creating defects. Problems can be immediately corrected and further defects prevented rather than waiting for an inspector to catch the defects later. Note also from the list of prevention costs in Exhibit 2B–1 that some companies provide technical support to their suppliers as a way of preventing defects. Particularly LO2–9 Identify the four types of quality costs and explain how they interact. 74 EXHIBIT 2B–1 Typical Quality Costs Chapter 2 Prevention Costs Internal Failure Costs Systems development Quality engineering Quality training Quality circles Statistical process control activities Supervision of prevention activities Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting Quality improvement projects Technical support provided to suppliers Audits of the effectiveness of the quality system Net cost of scrap Net cost of spoilage Rework labor and overhead Reinspection of reworked products Retesting of reworked products Downtime caused by quality problems Disposal of defective products Analysis of the cause of defects in production Re-entering data because of keying errors Debugging software errors Appraisal Costs External Failure Costs Test and inspection of incoming materials Test and inspection of in-process goods Final product testing and inspection Supplies used in testing and inspection Supervision of testing and inspection activities Depreciation of test equipment Maintenance of test equipment Plant utilities in the inspection area Field testing and appraisal at customer site Cost of field servicing and handling complaints Warranty repairs and replacements Repairs and replacements beyond the warranty period Product recalls Liability arising from defective products Returns and allowances arising from quality problems Lost sales arising from a reputation for poor quality in just-in-time (JIT) systems, such support to suppliers is vital. In a JIT system, parts are delivered from suppliers just in time and in just the correct quantity to fill customer orders. There are no parts stockpiles. If a defective part is received from a supplier, the part cannot be used and the order for the ultimate customer cannot be filled on time. Hence, every part received from a supplier must be free of defects. Consequently, companies that use JIT often require that their suppliers use sophisticated quality control programs such as statistical process control and that their suppliers certify that they will deliver parts and materials that are free of defects. Appraisal Costs Any defective parts and products should be caught as early as possible in the production process. Appraisal costs, which are sometimes called inspection costs, are incurred to identify defective products before the products are shipped to customers. Unfortunately, performing appraisal activities doesn’t keep defects from happening again, and most managers now realize that maintaining an army of inspectors is a costly (and ineffective) approach to quality control. Therefore, employees are increasingly being asked to be responsible for their own quality control. This approach, along with designing products to be easy to manufacture properly, allows quality to be built into products rather than relying on inspection to get the defects out. Internal Failure Costs Failure costs are incurred when a product fails to conform to its design specifications. Failure costs can be either internal or external. Internal failure costs result from identifying defects before they are shipped to customers. These costs include scrap, rejected Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 75 products, reworking of defective units, and downtime caused by quality problems. In some companies, as little as 10% of the company’s products make it through the production process without rework of some kind. Of course, the more effective a company’s appraisal activities, the greater the chance of catching defects internally and the greater the level of internal failure costs. This is the price that is paid to avoid incurring external failure costs, which can be devastating. External Failure Costs External failure costs result when a defective product is delivered to a customer. As shown in Exhibit 2B–1, external failure costs include warranty repairs and replacements, product recalls, liability arising from legal action against a company, and lost sales arising from a reputation for poor quality. Such costs can decimate profits. In the past, some managers have taken the attitude, “Let’s go ahead and ship everything to customers, and we’ll take care of any problems under the warranty.” This attitude generally results in high external failure costs, customer ill will, and declining market share and profits. Distribution of Quality Costs Quality costs for some companies range between 10% and 20% of total sales, whereas experts say that these costs should be more in the 2% to 4% range. How does a company reduce its total quality cost? The answer lies in how the quality costs are distributed. Refer to the graph in Exhibit 2B–2, which shows total quality costs as a function of the quality of conformance. The graph shows that when the quality of conformance is low, total quality cost is high and that most of this cost consists of costs of internal and external failure. A low quality of conformance means that a high percentage of units are defective and hence the company has high failure costs. However, as a company spends more and more on prevention and appraisal, the percentage of defective units drops. This results in lower internal and external failure costs. Ordinarily, total quality cost drops rapidly as the quality of conformance increases. Thus, a company can reduce its total quality cost by focusing its efforts on prevention and appraisal. The cost savings from reduced defects usually swamp the costs of the additional prevention and appraisal efforts. Costs EXHIBIT 2B–2 Effect of Quality Costs on Quality of Conformance Costs of internal and external failure Total quality cost Costs of prevention and appraisal 0 100 Quality of conformance (percent of output without defects) 76 Chapter 2 The graph in Exhibit 2B–2 has been drawn so that the total quality cost is minimized when the quality of conformance is less than 100%. However, some experts contend that the total quality cost is not minimized until the quality of conformance is 100% and there are no defects. Indeed, many companies have found that the total quality costs seem to keep dropping even when the quality of conformance approaches 100% and defect rates get as low as 1 in a million units. Others argue that total quality cost eventually increases as the quality of conformance increases. However, in most companies this does not seem to happen until the quality of conformance is very close to 100% and defect rates are very close to zero. As a company’s quality program becomes more refined and as its failure costs begin to fall, prevention activities usually become more effective than appraisal activities. Appraisal can only find defects, whereas prevention can eliminate them. The best way to prevent defects from happening is to design processes that reduce the likelihood of defects and to continually monitor processes using statistical process control methods. Quality Cost Reports LO2–10 Prepare and interpret a quality cost report. As an initial step in quality improvement programs, companies often construct a quality cost report that provides an estimate of the financial consequences of the company’s current level of defects. A quality cost report details the prevention costs, appraisal costs, and costs of internal and external failures that arise from the company’s current quality control efforts. Managers are often shocked by the magnitude of these costs. A typical quality cost report is shown in Exhibit 2B–3. Several things should be noted from the data in the exhibit. First, Ventura Company’s quality costs are poorly distributed in both years, with most of the costs due to either internal failure or external failure. The external failure costs are particularly high in Year 1 in comparison to other costs. Second, note that the company increased its spending on prevention and appraisal activities in Year 2. As a result, internal failure costs went up in that year (from $2 million in Year 1 to $3 million in Year 2), but external failure costs dropped sharply (from $5.15 million in Year 1 to only $2 million in Year 2). Because of the increase in appraisal activity in Year 2, more defects were caught inside the company before they were shipped to customers. This resulted in more cost for scrap, rework, and so forth, but saved huge amounts in warranty repairs, warranty replacements, and other external failure costs. Third, note that as a result of greater emphasis on prevention and appraisal, total quality cost decreased in Year 2. As continued emphasis is placed on prevention and appraisal in future years, total quality cost should continue to decrease. That is, future increases in prevention and appraisal costs should be more than offset by decreases in failure costs. Moreover, appraisal costs should also decrease as more effort is placed into prevention. Quality Cost Reports in Graphic Form As a supplement to the quality cost report shown in Exhibit 2B–3, companies frequently prepare quality cost information in graphic form. Graphic presentations include pie charts, bar graphs, trend lines, and so forth. The data for Ventura Company from Exhibit 2B–3 are presented in bar graph form in Exhibit 2B–4. The first bar graph in Exhibit 2B–4 is scaled in terms of dollars of quality cost, and the second is scaled in terms of quality cost as a percentage of sales. In both graphs, the data are “stacked” upward. That is, appraisal costs are stacked on top of prevention costs, internal failure costs are stacked on top of the sum of prevention costs plus appraisal costs, and so forth. The percentage figures in the second graph show that total quality cost equals 18% of sales in Year 1 and 15% of sales in Year 2, the same as reported earlier in Exhibit 2B–3. Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 77 EXHIBIT 2B–3 Quality Cost Report Ventura Company Quality Cost Report For Years 1 and 2 Year 1 Prevention costs: Systems development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supervision of prevention activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality improvement projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total prevention cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appraisal costs: Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reliability testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supervision of testing and inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation of test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total appraisal cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal failure costs: Net cost of scrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rework labor and overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downtime due to defects in quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal of defective products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total internal failure cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External failure costs: Warranty repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allowances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of field servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total external failure cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total quality cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Year 2 Amount Percent* Amount Percent* $ 270,000 130,000 40,000 210,000 650,000 0.54% 0.26% 0.08% 0.42% 1.30% $ 400,000 210,000 70,000 320,000 1,000,000 0.80% 0.42% 0.14% 0.64% 2.00% 560,000 420,000 80,000 140,000 1,200,000 1.12% 0.84% 0.16% 0.28% 2.40% 600,000 580,000 120,000 200,000 1,500,000 1.20% 1.16% 0.24% 0.40% 3.00% 750,000 810,000 100,000 340,000 2,000,000 1.50% 1.62% 0.20% 0.68% 4.00% 900,000 1,430,000 170,000 500,000 3,000,000 1.80% 2.86% 0.34% 1.00% 6.00% 900,000 2,300,000 630,000 1,320,000 5,150,000 $9,000,000 1.80% 4.60% 1.26% 2.64% 10.30% 18.00% 400,000 870,000 130,000 600,000 2,000,000 $7,500,000 0.80% 1.74% 0.26% 1.20% 4.00% 15.00% *As a percentage of total sales. In each year, sales totaled $50,000,000. Data in graphic form help managers to see trends more clearly and to see the magnitude of the various costs in relation to each other. Such graphs are easily prepared using computer graphics and spreadsheet applications. Uses of Quality Cost Information A quality cost report has several uses. First, quality cost information helps managers see the financial significance of defects. Managers usually are not aware of the magnitude of their quality costs because these costs cut across departmental lines and are not normally tracked and accumulated by the cost system. Thus, when first presented with a quality cost report, managers often are surprised by the amount of cost attributable to poor quality. Second, quality cost information helps managers identify the relative importance of the quality problems faced by their companies. For example, the quality cost report may show that scrap is a major quality problem or that the company is incurring huge warranty costs. With this information, managers have a better idea of where to focus their efforts. Third, quality cost information helps managers see whether their quality costs are poorly distributed. In general, quality costs should be distributed more toward prevention and appraisal activities and less toward failures. Chapter 2 EXHIBIT 2B–4 Quality Cost Reports in Graphic Form $10 20 9 18 Quality cost (in millions) 8 7 6 External failure External failure 5 Internal failure 4 3 Internal failure 2 1 0 Appraisal Appraisal 16 14 12 Year Internal failure 8 6 Internal failure 4 Prevention 2 External failure External failure 10 2 Prevention 1 Quality cost as a percentage of sales 78 0 Appraisal Appraisal Prevention 1 Year Prevention 2 Counterbalancing these uses, three limitations of quality cost information should be recognized. First, simply measuring and reporting quality costs does not solve quality problems. Problems can be solved only by taking action. Second, results usually lag behind quality improvement programs. Initially, total quality cost may even increase as quality control systems are designed and installed. Decreases in quality costs may not begin to occur until the quality program has been in effect for some time. And third, the most important quality cost, lost sales arising from customer ill will, is usually omitted from the quality cost report because it is difficult to estimate. Typically, during the initial years of a quality improvement program, the benefits of compiling a quality cost report outweigh the costs and limitations of the reports. As managers gain experience in balancing prevention and appraisal activities, the need for quality cost reports often diminishes. International Aspects of Quality Many of the tools used in quality management today were developed in Japan after World War II. In statistical process control, Japanese companies borrowed heavily from the work of W. Edwards Deming. However, Japanese companies are largely responsible for quality circles, JIT, the idea that quality is everyone’s responsibility, and the emphasis on prevention rather than on inspection. In the 1980s, quality reemerged as a pivotal factor in the market. Many companies now find that it is impossible to effectively compete without a very strong quality program in place. This is particularly true of companies that wish to compete in the European market. The ISO 9000 Standards The International Organization for Standardization (ISO), based in Geneva, Switzerland, has established quality control guidelines known as the ISO 9000 standards. Many companies and organizations in Europe will buy only from ISO 9000-certified suppliers. This means that the suppliers must demonstrate to a certifying agency that: Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts 1. A quality control system is in use, and the system clearly defines an expected level of quality. 2. The system is fully operational and is backed up with detailed documentation of quality control procedures. 3. The intended level of quality is being achieved on a sustained, consistent basis. The key to receiving certification under the ISO 9000 standards is documentation. It’s one thing for a company to say that it has a quality control system in operation, but it’s quite a different thing to be able to document the steps in that system. Under ISO 9000, this documentation must be so detailed and precise that if all the employees in a company were suddenly replaced, the new employees could use the documentation to make the product exactly as it was made by the old employees. Even companies with good quality control systems find that it takes up to two years of painstaking work to develop this detailed documentation. But companies often find that compiling this documentation results in improvements in their quality systems. The ISO 9000 standards have become an international measure of quality. Although the standards were developed to control the quality of goods sold in European countries, they have become widely accepted elsewhere as well. Companies in the United States that export to Europe often expect their own suppliers to comply with ISO 9000 standards because these exporters must document the quality of the materials going into their products as part of their own ISO 9000 certification. The ISO program for certification of quality management programs is not limited to manufacturing companies. The American Institute of Certified Public Accountants was the first professional membership organization in the United States to win recognition under an ISO certification program. Summary (Appendix 2B) Defects cause costs, which can be classified into prevention costs, appraisal costs, internal failure costs, and external failure costs. Prevention costs are incurred to keep defects from happening. Appraisal costs are incurred to ensure that defective products, once made, are not shipped to customers. Internal failure costs are incurred as a consequence of detecting defective products before they are shipped to customers. External failure costs are the consequences (in terms of repairs, servicing, and lost future business) of delivering defective products to customers. Most experts agree that management effort should be focused on preventing defects. Small investments in prevention can lead to dramatic reductions in appraisal costs and costs of internal and external failure. Quality costs are summarized on a quality cost report. This report shows the types of quality costs being incurred and their significance and trends. The report helps managers understand the importance of quality costs, spot problem areas, and assess the way in which the quality costs are distributed. Glossary (Appendix 2B) Appraisal costs Costs that are incurred to identify defective products before the products are shipped to customers. (p. 74) External failure costs Costs that are incurred when a product or service that is defective is delivered to a customer. (p. 75) Internal failure costs Costs that are incurred as a result of identifying defective products before they are shipped to customers. (p. 74) ISO 9000 standards Quality control requirements issued by the International Organization for Standardization that relate to products sold in European countries. (p. 78) Prevention costs Costs that are incurred to keep defects from occurring. (p. 73) 79 80 Chapter 2 Quality circles Small groups of employees that meet on a regular basis to discuss ways of improving quality. (p. 73) Quality cost Costs that are incurred to prevent defective products from falling into the hands of customers or that are incurred as a result of defective units. (p. 73) Quality cost report A report that details prevention costs, appraisal costs, and the costs of internal and external failures. (p. 76) Quality of conformance The degree to which a product or service meets or exceeds its design specifications and is free of defects or other problems that mar its appearance or degrade its performance. (p. 73) Statistical process control A charting technique used to monitor the quality of work being done in a workstation for the purpose of immediately correcting any problems. (p. 73) Appendix 2B Exercises and Problems All applicable exercises and problems are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. EXERCISE 2B–1 Cost of Quality Terms [LO2–9] A number of terms relating to the cost of quality and quality management are listed below: Appraisal costs Quality cost report Quality of conformance Internal failure costs Quality circles Prevention costs External failure costs Quality costs Required: Choose the term or terms that most appropriately complete the following statements. The terms can be used more than once and a blank can hold more than one word. . 1. A product that has a high rate of defects is said to have a low 2. All of the costs associated with preventing and dealing with defects once they occur are . known as , 3. In many companies, small groups of employees, known as meet on a regular basis to discuss ways to improve quality. and in an 4. A company incurs effort to keep defects from occurring. and 5. A company incurs because defects have occurred. 6. Of the four groups of costs associated with quality of conformance, are generally the most damaging to a company. 7. Inspection, testing, and other costs incurred to keep defective products from being shipped to . customers are known as are incurred in an effort to eliminate poor product design, 8. defective manufacturing practices, and the providing of substandard service. 9. The costs relating to defects, rejected products, and downtime caused by quality problems are . known as 10. When a product that is defective in some way is delivered to a customer, are incurred. 11. Over time a company’s total quality costs should decrease if it redistributes its quality costs by and . placing its greatest emphasis on 12. One way to ensure that management is aware of the costs associated with quality is to sum. marize such costs on a EXERCISE 2B–2 Classification of Quality Costs [LO2–9] A number of activities that are a part of a company’s quality control system are listed below: a. b. c. d. e. Product testing. Product recalls. Rework labor and overhead. Quality circles. Downtime caused by defects. f. g. h. i. j. Cost of field servicing. Inspection of goods. Quality engineering. Warranty repairs. Statistical process control. Managerial Accounting and Cost Concepts k. Net cost of scrap. l. Depreciation of test equipment. m. Returns and allowances arising from poor quality. n. Disposal of defective products. o. p. q. r. s. Technical support to suppliers. Systems development. Warranty replacements. Field testing at customer site. Product design. Required: 1. 2. Classify the costs associated with each of these activities into one of the following categories: prevention cost, appraisal cost, internal failure cost, or external failure cost. Which of the four types of costs in (1) above are incurred in an effort to keep poor quality of conformance from occurring? Which of the four types of costs in (1) above are incurred because poor quality of conformance has occurred? PROBLEM 2B–3 Analyzing a Quality Cost Report [LO2–10] Mercury, Inc., produces cell phones at its plant in Texas. In recent years, the company’s market share has been eroded by stiff competition from overseas. Price and product quality are the two key areas in which companies compete in this market. A year ago, the company’s cell phones had been ranked low in product quality in a consumer survey. Shocked by this result, Jorge Gomez, Mercury’s president, initiated a crash effort to improve product quality. Gomez set up a task force to implement a formal quality improvement program. Included on this task force were representatives from the Engineering, Marketing, Customer Service, Production, and Accounting departments. The broad representation was needed because Gomez believed that this was a companywide program and that all employees should share the responsibility for its success. After the first meeting of the task force, Holly Elsoe, manager of the Marketing Department, asked John Tran, production manager, what he thought of the proposed program. Tran replied, “I have reservations. Quality is too abstract to be attaching costs to it and then to be holding you and me responsible for cost improvements. I like to work with goals that I can see and count! I’m nervous about having my annual bonus based on a decrease in quality costs; there are too many variables that we have no control over.” Mercury’s quality improvement program has now been in operation for one year. The company’s most recent quality cost report is shown below. Mercury, Inc. Quality Cost Report (in thousands) Last Year This Year Prevention costs: Machine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . $ 70 Training suppliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Quality circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 $ 120 10 20 Total prevention costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 150 Appraisal costs: Incoming inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Final testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 40 90 Total appraisal costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 130 Internal failure costs: Rework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Scrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 130 70 Total internal failure costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 200 External failure costs: Warranty repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Customer returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 30 80 Total external failure costs . . . . . . . . . . . 410 110 Total quality cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 670 $ 590 Total production cost . . . . . . . . . . . . $4,200 $4,800 81 82 Chapter 2 As they were reviewing the report, Elsoe asked Tran what he now thought of the quality improvement program. Tran replied. “I’m relieved that the new quality improvement program hasn’t hurt our bonuses, but the program has increased the workload in the Production Department. It is true that customer returns are way down, but the cell phones that were returned by customers to retail outlets were rarely sent back to us for rework.” Required: 1. 2. 3. Expand the company’s quality cost report by showing the costs in both years as percentages of both total production cost and total quality cost. Carry all computations to one decimal place. By analyzing the report, determine if Mercury, Inc.’s quality improvement program has been successful. List specific evidence to support your answer. Do you expect the improvement program as it progresses to continue to increase the workload in the Production Department? Jorge Gomez believed that the quality improvement program was essential and that Mercury, Inc., could no longer afford to ignore the importance of product quality. Discuss how Mercury, Inc., could measure the cost of not implementing the quality improvement program. (CMA, adapted) PROBLEM 2B–4 Quality Cost Report [LO2–9, LO2–10] In response to intensive foreign competition, the management of Florex Company has attempted over the past year to improve the quality of its products. A statistical process control system has been installed and other steps have been taken to decrease the amount of warranty and other field costs, which have been trending upward over the past several years. Costs relating to quality and quality control over the last two years are given below: Costs (in thousands) Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation of test equipment . . . . Rework labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Statistical process control . . . . . . . . Cost of field servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplies used in testing . . . . . . . . . . Systems development . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net cost of scrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product recalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal of defective products . . . . . Last Year This Year $750 $420 $210 $1,050 $0 $1,200 $30 $480 $3,600 $630 $810 $2,100 $720 $900 $570 $240 $1,500 $180 $900 $60 $750 $1,050 $1,125 $1,200 $750 $975 Sales have been flat over the past few years, at $75,000,000 per year. A great deal of money has been spent in the effort to upgrade quality, and management is anxious to see whether or not the effort has been effective. Required: 1. 2. 3. Prepare a quality cost report that contains data for both this year and last year. Carry percentage computations to two decimal places. Prepare a bar graph showing the distribution of the various quality costs by category. Prepare a written evaluation to accompany the reports you have prepared in (1) and (2) above. This evaluation should discuss the distribution of quality costs in the company, changes in this distribution that you see taking place, the reasons for changes in costs in the various categories, and any other information that would be of value to management. CHAPTER 3 Job-Order Costing University Tees: Serving Over 150 Campuses Nationwide BUSIN ESS FO CUS LEARNING OBJECTIVES After studying Chapter 3, you should be able to: University Tees was founded in 2003 by two Miami University college students to provide screen-printing, embroidery, and promotional products for fraternities, sororities, and student organizations. Today, the company, which is headquartered in Cleveland, Ohio, employs as many as four Campus Managers on each of over 150 college campuses across America. Accurately calculating the cost of each potential customer order is critically important to University Tees because the company needs to be sure that the sales price exceeds the cost associated with satisfying the order. The costs include the cost of the blank T-shirts themselves, printing costs (which vary depending on the quantity of shirts produced and the number of colors per shirt), screen costs (which also vary depending on the number of colors included in a design), shipping costs, and the artwork needed to create a design. The company also takes into account its competitors’ pricing strategies when developing its own prices. Given its success on college campuses, University Tees has introduced a sister company called On Point Promos to serve for-profit companies and nonprofit organizations. ■ Source: Conversation with Joe Haddad, cofounder of University Tees. LO3–1 Compute a predetermined overhead rate. LO3–2 Apply overhead cost to jobs using a predetermined overhead rate. LO3–3 Compute the total cost and average cost per unit of a job. LO3–4 Understand the flow of costs in a joborder costing system and prepare appropriate journal entries to record costs. LO3–5 Use T-accounts to show the flow of costs in a job-order costing system. LO3–6 Prepare schedules of cost of goods manufactured and cost of goods sold and an income statement. LO3–7 Compute underapplied or overapplied overhead cost and prepare the journal entry to close the balance in Manufacturing Overhead to the appropriate accounts. LO3–8 (Appendix 3A) Use activity-based absorption costing to compute unit product costs. LO3–9 (Appendix 3B) Understand the implications of basing the predetermined overhead rate on activity at capacity rather than on estimated activity for the period. 83 84 Chapter 3 nderstanding how products and services are costed is vital to U managers because the way in which these costs are determined can have a substantial impact on reported profits, as well as on key management decisions. A managerial costing system should provide cost data to help managers plan, control, and make decisions. Nevertheless, external financial reporting and tax reporting requirements often heavily influence how costs are accumulated and summarized on managerial reports. This is true of product costing. In this chapter we use absorption costing to determine product costs. In absorption costing, all manufacturing costs, both fixed and variable, are assigned to units of product—units are said to fully absorb manufacturing costs. Most countries—including the United States—require some form of absorption costing for both external financial reports and for tax reports. In addition, the vast majority of companies throughout the world also use absorption costing in their management reports. Because absorption costing is the most common approach to product costing throughout the world, we discuss it first and then discuss the alternatives in subsequent chapters. Job-Order Costing—An Overview Under absorption costing, product costs include all manufacturing costs. Some manufacturing costs, such as direct materials, can be directly traced to particular products. For example, the cost of the airbags installed in a Toyota Camry can be easily traced to that particular auto. But what about manufacturing costs like factory rent? Such costs do not change from month to month, whereas the number and variety of products made in the factory may vary dramatically from one month to the next. Because these costs remain unchanged from month to month regardless of what products are made, they are clearly not caused by—and cannot be directly traced to—any particular product. Therefore, these types of costs are assigned to products and services by averaging across time and across products. The type of production process influences how this averaging is done. Job-order costing is used in situations where many different products, each with individual and unique features, are produced each period. For example, a Levi Strauss clothing factory would typically make many different types of jeans for both men and women during a month. A particular order might consist of 1,000 boot-cut men’s blue denim jeans, style number A312. This order of 1,000 jeans is called a job. In a job-order costing system, costs are traced and allocated to jobs and then the costs of the job are divided by the number of units in the job to arrive at an average cost per unit. Other examples of situations where job-order costing would be used include large-scale construction projects managed by Bechtel International, commercial aircraft produced by Boeing, greeting cards designed and printed by Hallmark, and airline meals prepared by LSG SkyChefs. All of these examples are characterized by diverse outputs. Each Bechtel project is unique and different from every other—the company may be simultaneously constructing a dam in Nigeria and a bridge in Indonesia. Likewise, each airline orders a different type of meal from LSG SkyChefs’ catering service. Job-order costing is also used extensively in service industries. For example, hospitals, law firms, movie studios, accounting firms, advertising agencies, and repair shops all use a variation of job-order costing to accumulate costs. Although the detailed example of job-order costing provided in the following section deals with a manufacturing company, the same basic concepts and procedures are used by many service organizations. Job-Order Costing 85 IN BUSINESS IS THIS REALLY A JOB? VBT Bicycling Vacations of Bristol, Vermont, offers deluxe bicycling vacations in the United States, Canada, Europe, and other locations throughout the world. For example, the company offers a 10-day tour of the Puglia region of Italy—the “heel of the boot.” The tour price includes international airfare, 10 nights of lodging, most meals, use of a bicycle, and ground transportation as needed. Each tour is led by at least two local tour leaders, one of whom rides with the guests along the tour route. The other tour leader drives a “sag wagon” that carries extra water, snacks, and bicycle repair equipment and is available for a shuttle back to the hotel or up a hill. The sag wagon also transports guests’ luggage from one hotel to another. Each specific tour can be considered a job. For example, Giuliano Astore and Debora Trippetti, two natives of Puglia, led a VBT tour with 17 guests over 10 days in late April. At the end of the tour, Giuliano submitted a report, a sort of job cost sheet, to VBT headquarters. This report detailed the on the ground expenses incurred for this specific tour, including fuel and operating costs for the van, lodging costs for the guests, the costs of meals provided to guests, the costs of snacks, the cost of hiring additional ground transportation as needed, and the wages of the tour leaders. In addition to these costs, some costs are paid directly by VBT in Vermont to vendors. The total cost incurred for the tour is then compared to the total revenue collected from guests to determine the gross profit for the tour. Sources: Giuliano Astore and Gregg Marston, President, VBT Bicycling Vacations. For more information about VBT, see www.vbt.com. Job-Order Costing—An Example To introduce job-order costing, we will follow a specific job as it progresses through the manufacturing process. This job consists of two experimental couplings that Yost Precision Machining has agreed to produce for Loops Unlimited, a manufacturer of roller coasters. Couplings connect the cars on the roller coaster and are a critical component in the performance and safety of the ride. Before we begin our discussion, recall from the previous chapter that companies generally classify manufacturing costs into three broad categories: (1) direct materials, (2) direct labor, and (3) manufacturing overhead. As we study the operation of a job-order costing system, we will see how each of these three types of costs is recorded and accumulated. Yost Precision Machining is a small company in Michigan that specializes in fabricating precision metal parts that are used in a variety of applications ranging from deepsea exploration vehicles to the inertial triggers in automobile air bags. The company’s top managers gather every morning at 8:00 a.m. in the company’s conference room for the daily planning meeting. Attending the meeting this morning are: Jean Yost, the company’s president; David Cheung, the marketing manager; Debbie Turner, the production manager; and Marc White, the company controller. The president opened the meeting: Jean: The production schedule indicates we’ll be starting Job 2B47 today. Isn’t that the special order for experimental couplings, David? David: That’s right. That’s the order from Loops Unlimited for two couplings for their new roller coaster ride for Magic Mountain. Debbie: Why only two couplings? Don’t they need a coupling for every car? David: Yes. But this is a completely new roller coaster. The cars will go faster and will be subjected to more twists, turns, drops, and loops than on any other existing roller coaster. To hold up under these stresses, Loops Unlimited’s engineers completely redesigned the cars and couplings. They want us to make just two of these new couplings for testing purposes. If the design works, then we’ll have the inside track on the order to supply couplings for the whole ride. MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING IN ACTION THE ISSUE 86 Chapter 3 EXHIBIT 3–1 Materials Requisition Form Materials Requistion Number Job Number to Be Charged Department 14873 Date March 2 2B47 Milling Description M46 Housing G7 Connector Quantity 2 4 Unit Cost $124 $103 Total Cost $248 412 $660 Jean: We agreed to take on this initial order at our cost just to get our foot in the door. Marc, will there be any problem documenting our cost so we can get paid? Marc: No problem. The contract with Loops stipulates that they will pay us an amount equal to our cost of goods sold. With our job-order costing system, I can tell you the cost on the day the job is completed. Jean: Good. Is there anything else we should discuss about this job at this time? No? Well then let’s move on to the next item of business. Measuring Direct Materials Cost The blueprints submitted by Loops Unlimited indicate that each experimental coupling will require three parts that are classified as direct materials: two G7 Connectors and one M46 Housing. Since each coupling requires two connectors and one housing, the production of two couplings requires four connectors and two housings. This is a custom product that is being made for the first time, but if this were one of the company’s standard products, it would have an established bill of materials. A bill of materials is a document that lists the type and quantity of each type of direct material needed to complete a unit of product. When an agreement has been reached with the customer concerning the quantities, prices, and shipment date for the order, a production order is issued. The Production Department then prepares a materials requisition form similar to the form in Exhibit 3–1. The materials requisition form is a document that specifies the type and quantity of materials to be drawn from the storeroom and identifies the job that will be charged for the cost of the materials. The form is used to control the flow of materials into production and also for making entries in the accounting records. The Yost Precision Machining materials requisition form in Exhibit 3–1 shows that the company’s Milling Department has requisitioned two M46 Housings and four G7 Connectors for the Loops Unlimited job, which has been designated as Job 2B47. Job Cost Sheet After a production order has been issued, the Accounting Department’s job-order costing software system automatically generates a job cost sheet like the one presented in Exhibit 3–2. A job cost sheet records the materials, labor, and manufacturing overhead costs charged to that job. Job-Order Costing 87 IN BUSINESS SUPPLY AND DEMAND INFLUENCE LUMBER PRICES When the housing market crumbled between 2005 and 2009, lumber mills responded by slashing output by 45%. However, in 2010 many home builders decided to expand speculative construction on the belief that an expiring federal tax credit would entice more customers to purchase new homes. The result of plummeting supply coupled with an uptick in demand was predictable—the price of lumber spiked to $279 per thousand board feet, thereby adding about $1,000 to the price of a typical new home. Pulte Homes told investors that it would attempt to offset the increase in direct materials cost by reducing its labor costs. Home builders use job-order costing systems to accumulate the costs incurred to build each new home. When materials and labor costs fluctuate, job-order costing systems can measure these impacts on each customer’s new home construction costs. Source: Liam Pleven and Lester Aldrich, “Builders Nailed by Lumber Prices,” The Wall Street Journal, February 16, 2010, pp. C1 and C4. After direct materials are issued, the cost of these materials are automatically recorded on the job cost sheet. Note from Exhibit 3–2, for example, that the $660 cost for direct materials shown earlier on the materials requisition form has been charged to Job 2B47 on its job cost sheet. The requisition number 14873 from the materials requisition form appears on the job cost sheet to make it easier to identify the source document for the direct materials charge. EXHIBIT 3–2 Job Cost Sheet JOB COST SHEET March 2 Job Number 2B47 Date Initiated Department Milling Date Completed Item Special order coupling Units Completed For Stock Direct Materials Req. No. Amount 14873 $660 Ticket 843 Cost Summary Direct Materials Direct Labor Manufacturing Overhead Total Product Cost Unit Product Cost Direct Labor Hours Amount 5 $45 Manufacturing Overhead Hours Rate Amount Units Shipped $ $ $ $ $ Date Number Balance 88 Chapter 3 Measuring Direct Labor Cost Direct labor consists of labor charges that are easily traced to a particular job. Labor charges that cannot be easily traced directly to any job are treated as part of manufacturing overhead. As discussed in the previous chapter, this latter category of labor costs is called indirect labor and includes tasks such as maintenance, supervision, and cleanup. Most companies rely on computerized systems to maintain employee time tickets. A completed time ticket is an hour-by-hour summary of the employee’s activities throughout the day. One computerized approach to creating time tickets uses bar codes to capture data. Each employee and each job has a unique bar code. When beginning work on a job, the employee scans three bar codes using a handheld device much like the bar code readers at grocery store checkout stands. The first bar code indicates that a job is being started; the second is the unique bar code on the employee’s identity badge; and the third is the unique bar code of the job itself. This information is fed automatically via an electronic network to a computer that notes the time and records all of the data. When the task is completed, the employee scans a bar code indicating the task is complete, the bar code on his or her identity badge, and the bar code attached to the job. This information is relayed to the computer that again notes the time, and a time ticket, such as the one shown in Exhibit 3–3, is automatically prepared. Because all of the source data is already in computer files, the labor costs can be automatically posted to job cost sheets. For example, Exhibit 3–3 shows $45 of direct labor cost related to Job 2B47. This amount is automatically posted to the job cost sheet shown in Exhibit 3–2. The time ticket in Exhibit 3–3 also shows $9 of indirect labor costs related to performing maintenance. This cost is treated as part of manufacturing overhead and does not get posted on a job cost sheet. LO3–1 Computing Predetermined Overhead Rates Compute a predetermined overhead rate. Recall that product costs include manufacturing overhead as well as direct materials and direct labor. Therefore, manufacturing overhead also needs to be recorded on the job cost sheet. However, assigning manufacturing overhead to a specific job involves some difficulties. There are three reasons for this: 1. Manufacturing overhead is an indirect cost. This means that it is either impossible or difficult to trace these costs to a particular product or job. 2. Manufacturing overhead consists of many different types of costs ranging from the grease used in machines to the annual salary of the production manager. Some of these costs are variable overhead costs because they vary in direct proportion to changes in the level of production (e.g., indirect materials, supplies, and power) and EXHIBIT 3–3 Employee Time Ticket Time Ticket No. 843 Date March 3 Employee Mary Holden Station 4 Started 7:00 12:30 2:30 Totals Ended 12:00 2:30 3:30 Time Completed 5.0 2.0 1.0 8.0 Rate $9 9 9 Amount $45 18 9 $72 Job Number 2B47 2B50 Maintenance Job-Order Costing 89 some are fixed overhead costs because they remain constant as the level of production fluctuates (e.g., heat and light, property taxes, and insurance). 3. Because of the fixed costs in manufacturing overhead, total manufacturing overhead costs tend to remain relatively constant from one period to the next even though the number of units produced can fluctuate widely. Consequently, the average cost per unit will vary from one period to the next. Given these problems, allocation is used to assign overhead costs to products. Allocation is accomplished by selecting an allocation base that is common to all of the company’s products and services. An allocation base is a measure such as direct labor-hours (DLH) or machine-hours (MH) that is used to assign overhead costs to products and services. The most widely used allocation bases in manufacturing are direct labor-hours, direct labor cost, machine-hours, and (where a company has only a single product) units of product. Manufacturing overhead is commonly assigned to products using a predetermined overhead rate. The predetermined overhead rate is computed by dividing the total estimated manufacturing overhead cost for the period by the estimated total amount of the allocation base as follows: Estimated total manufacturing overhead cost Predetermined overhead rate 5 _______________________________ Estimated total amount of the allocation base The predetermined overhead rate is computed before the period begins using a four-step process. The first step is to estimate the total amount of the allocation base (the denominator) that will be required for next period’s estimated level of production. The second step is to estimate the total fixed manufacturing overhead cost for the coming period and the variable manufacturing overhead cost per unit of the allocation base. The third step is to use the cost formula shown below to estimate the total manufacturing overhead cost (the numerator) for the coming period: Y 5 a 1 bX where, Y 5 The estimated total manufacturing overhead cost a 5 The estimated total fixed manufacturing overhead cost b 5 The estimated variable manufacturing overhead cost per unit of the allocation base X 5 The estimated total amount of the allocation base The fourth step is to compute the predetermined overhead rate. Notice, the estimated amount of the allocation base is determined before estimating the total manufacturing overhead cost. This needs to be done because total manufacturing overhead cost includes variable overhead costs that depend on the amount of the allocation base. Applying Manufacturing Overhead To repeat, the predetermined overhead rate is computed before the period begins. The predetermined overhead rate is then used to apply overhead cost to jobs throughout the period. The process of assigning overhead cost to jobs is called overhead application. The formula for determining the amount of overhead cost to apply to a particular job is: Overhead applied to Predetermined Amount of the allocation 5 3 a particular job overhead rate base incurred by the job For example, if the predetermined overhead rate is $8 per direct labor-hour, then $8 of overhead cost is applied to a job for each direct labor-hour incurred on the job. When the allocation base is direct labor-hours, the formula becomes: Actual direct labor-hours Overhead applied to Predetermined _____________________ 5 3 a particular job overhead rate charged to the job LO3–2 Apply overhead cost to jobs using a predetermined overhead rate. 90 Chapter 3 Manufacturing Overhead—A Closer Look To illustrate the steps involved in computing and using a predetermined overhead rate, let’s return to Yost Precision Machining and make the following assumptions. In step one, the company estimated that 40,000 direct labor-hours would be required to support the production planned for the year. In step two, it estimated $220,000 of total fixed manufacturing overhead cost for the coming year and $2.50 of variable manufacturing overhead cost per direct labor-hour. Given these assumptions, in step three the company used the cost formula shown below to estimate its total manufacturing overhead cost for the year: Y 5 a 1 bX Y 5 $220,000 1 ($2.50 per direct labor-hour 3 40,000 direct labor-hours) Y 5 $220,000 1 $100,000 Y 5 $320,000 In step four, Yost Precision Machining computed its predetermined overhead rate for the year of $8 per direct labor-hour as shown below: Estimated total manufacturing overhead cost Predetermined overhead rate 5 _____________________________________ Estimated total amount of the allocation base $320,000 5 _____________________ 40,000 direct labor-hours 5 $8 per direct labor-hour The job cost sheet in Exhibit 3–4 indicates that 27 direct labor-hours (i.e., DLHs) were charged to Job 2B47. Therefore, a total of $216 of manufacturing overhead cost would be applied to the job: Overhead applied to Predetermined Actual direct labor-hours 5 3 Job 2B47 overhead rate charged to Job 2B47 5 $8 per DLH 3 27 DLHs 5 $216 of overhead applied to Job 2B47 This amount of overhead has been entered on the job cost sheet in Exhibit 3–4. Note that this is not the actual amount of overhead caused by the job. Actual overhead costs are not assigned to jobs—if that could be done, the costs would be direct costs, not overhead. The overhead assigned to the job is simply a share of the total overhead that was estimated at the beginning of the year. A normal cost system, which we have been describing, applies overhead to jobs by multiplying a predetermined overhead rate by the actual amount of the allocation base incurred by the jobs. The Need for a Predetermined Rate Instead of using a predetermined rate based on estimates, why not base the overhead rate on the actual total manufacturing overhead cost and the actual total amount of the allocation base incurred on a monthly, quarterly, or annual basis? If an actual rate is computed monthly or quarterly, seasonal factors in overhead costs or in the allocation base can produce fluctuations in the overhead rate. For example, the costs of heating and cooling a factory in Illinois will be highest in the winter and summer months and lowest in the spring and fall. If the overhead rate is recomputed at the end of each month or each quarter based on actual costs and activity, the overhead rate would go up in the winter and summer and down in the spring and fall. As a result, two identical jobs, one completed in the winter and one completed in the spring, would be assigned different manufacturing overhead costs. Many managers believe that such fluctuations in product costs serve Job-Order Costing EXHIBIT 3–4 A Completed Job Cost Sheet JOB COST SHEET Job Number 2B47 Date Initiated March 2 Department Milling Date Completed March 8 Item Special order coupling For Stock Units Completed Direct Materials Req. No. Amount 14873 14875 14912 91 $ 660 506 238 $1,404 Ticket 843 846 850 851 Direct Labor Hours Amount $ 45 5 60 8 21 4 54 10 $180 27 Cost Summary Direct Materials Direct Labor Manufacturing Overhead Total Product Cost Unit Product Cost 2 Manufacturing Overhead Hours Rate Amount 27 $8/DLH $216 Units Shipped $ 1,404 $ 180 $ 216 $ 1,800 $ 900* Date March 8 Number — Balance 2 *$1,800 4 2 units 5 $900 per unit. no useful purpose. To avoid such fluctuations, actual overhead rates could be computed on an annual or less-frequent basis. However, if the overhead rate is computed annually based on the actual costs and activity for the year, the manufacturing overhead assigned to any particular job would not be known until the end of the year. For example, the cost of Job 2B47 at Yost Precision Machining would not be known until the end of the year, even though the job will be completed and shipped to the customer in March. For these reasons, most companies use predetermined overhead rates rather than actual overhead rates in their cost accounting systems. Choice of an Allocation Base for Overhead Cost Ideally, the allocation base in the predetermined overhead rate should drive the overhead cost. A cost driver is a factor, such as machine-hours, beds occupied, computer time, or flight-hours, that causes overhead costs. If the base in the predetermined overhead rate does not “drive” overhead costs, product costs will be distorted. For example, if direct labor-hours is used to allocate overhead, but in reality overhead has little to do with direct labor-hours, then products with high direct labor-hour requirements will be overcosted. Most companies use direct labor-hours or direct labor cost as the allocation base for manufacturing overhead. In the past, direct labor accounted for up to 60% of the cost of many products, with overhead cost making up only a portion of the remainder. This situation has changed for two reasons. First, sophisticated automated equipment has taken over functions that used to be performed by direct labor workers. Because the costs of acquiring and maintaining such equipment are classified as overhead, this increases overhead while decreasing direct labor. Second, products are becoming more 92 Chapter 3 sophisticated and complex and are changed more frequently. This increases the need for highly skilled indirect workers such as engineers. As a result of these two trends, direct labor has decreased relative to overhead as a component of product costs. In companies where direct labor and overhead costs have been moving in opposite directions, it would be difficult to argue that direct labor “drives” overhead costs. Accordingly, managers in some companies use activity-based costing principles to redesign their cost accounting systems. Activity-based costing is designed to more accurately reflect the demands that products, customers, and other cost objects make on overhead resources. The activity-based approach is discussed in more detail in Appendix 3A and in Chapter 7. Although direct labor may not be an appropriate allocation base in some industries, in others it continues to be a significant driver of manufacturing overhead. Indeed, most manufacturing companies in the United States continue to use direct labor as the primary or secondary allocation base for manufacturing overhead. The key point is that the allocation base used by the company should really drive, or cause, overhead costs, and direct labor is not always the most appropriate allocation base. IN BUSINESS REDUCING HEALTH-DAMAGING BEHAVIORS Cianbro is an industrial construction company headquartered in Pittsfield, Maine, whose goal is “To be the healthiest company in America.” It introduced a corporate wellness program to attack employee behaviors that drive up health-care costs. The table below summarizes the number of employees in five health risk categories as of 2003 and 2005. The decreases in the number of employees in these high-risk categories are evidence that the wellness program was effective in helping employees make positive lifestyle changes. This should result in reduced health-care costs for the company. Number of Employees Health Risk Category January 2003 Obesity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High cholesterol . . . . . . . . . Tobacco use . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inactivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High blood pressure . . . . . . . 432 637 384 354 139 March 2005 353 515 274 254 91 Decrease 79 122 110 100 48 Source: Cianbro, WELCOA’s Absolute Advantage Magazine, 2006. LO3–3 Computation of Unit Costs Compute the total cost and average cost per unit of a job. With the application of Yost Precision Machining’s $216 of manufacturing overhead to the job cost sheet in Exhibit 3–4, the job cost sheet is complete except for two final steps. First, the totals for direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead are transferred to the Cost Summary section of the job cost sheet and added together to obtain the total cost for the job.1 Then the total product cost ($1,800) is divided by the number of units (2) to obtain the unit product cost ($900). This unit product cost information is used for valuing unsold units in ending inventory and for determining cost of goods sold. As indicated earlier, this unit product cost is an average cost and should not be interpreted as the cost that would actually be incurred if another unit were produced. The incremental cost of an additional unit is something less than the average unit cost of $900 because much of the actual overhead costs would not change if another unit were produced. 1 Notice, we are assuming that Job 2B47 required direct materials and direct labor beyond the charges shown in Exhibits 3–1 and 3–3. Job-Order Costing In the 8:00 a.m. daily planning meeting on March 9, Jean Yost, the president of Yost Precision Machining, once again drew attention to Job 2B47, the experimental couplings: 93 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING IN ACTION Jean: I see Job 2B47 is completed. Let’s get those couplings shipped immediately to Loops Unlimited so they can get their testing program under way. Marc, how much are we going to bill Loops for those two units? Marc: Because we agreed to sell the experimental couplings at cost, we will be charging Loops Unlimited just $900 a unit. Jean: Fine. Let’s hope the couplings work out and we make some money on the big order later. THE WRAP-UP IN BUSINESS ONE-OF-A-KIND MASTERPIECE In a true job-order costing environment, every job is unique. For example, Purdey manufactures 80–90 shotguns per year with each gun being a specially commissioned one-of-a-kind masterpiece. The prices start at $110,000 because every detail is custom built, engraved, assembled, and polished by a skilled craftsman. The hand engraving can take months to complete and may add as much as $100,000 to the price. The guns are designed to shoot perfectly straight and their value increases over time even with heavy use. One Purdey gun collector said “when I shoot my Purdeys I feel like an orchestra conductor waving my baton.” Source: Eric Arnold, “Aim High,” Forbes, December 28, 2009, p. 86. Job-Order Costing—The Flow of Costs We are now ready to discuss the flow of costs through a job-order costing system. Exhibit 3–5 provides a conceptual overview of these cost flows. It highlights the fact that product costs flow through inventories on the balance sheet and then on to cost of goods sold in the income statement. More specifically, raw materials purchases are recorded in the Raw Materials inventory account. Raw materials include any materials that go into the final product. When raw materials are used in production, their costs are transferred to the Work in Process inventory account as direct materials.2 Work in process consists of units of product that are only partially complete and will require further work before they are ready for sale to the customer. Notice that direct labor costs are added directly to Work in Process—they do not flow through Raw Materials inventory. Manufacturing overhead costs are applied to Work in Process by multiplying the predetermined overhead rate by the actual quantity of the allocation base consumed by each job.3 When goods are completed, their costs are transferred from Work in Process to Finished Goods. Finished goods consist of completed units of product that have not yet been sold to customers. The amount transferred from Work in Process to Finished Goods is referred to as the cost of goods manufactured. The cost of goods manufactured includes the manufacturing costs associated with the goods that were finished during the period. As goods are sold, their costs are transferred from Finished Goods to Cost of Goods Sold. At this point, the various costs required to make the product are finally recorded as an expense. Until that point, these costs are in inventory accounts on the balance sheet. Period costs (or selling and administrative expenses) do not flow through inventories on the balance sheet. They are recorded as expenses on the income statement in the period incurred. 2 Indirect material costs are accounted for as part of manufacturing overhead. For simplicity, Exhibit 3–5 assumes that Cost of Goods Sold does not need to be adjusted as discussed later in the chapter. 3 LO3–4 Understand the flow of costs in a job-order costing system and prepare appropriate journal entries to record costs. 94 Chapter 3 EXHIBIT 3–5 Cost Flows and Classifications in a Manufacturing Company Costs Balance Sheet Product costs Raw materials purchases Raw Materials inventory Direct materials used in production Direct labor Manufacturing overhead Work in Process inventory Goods completed (Cost of Goods Manufactured) Income Statement Cost of Goods Sold Finished Goods inventory Period costs Goods sold Selling and administrative Selling and Administrative Expenses To illustrate the cost flows through a company’s general ledger, we will consider a single month’s activity at Ruger Corporation, a producer of gold and silver commemorative medallions. Ruger Corporation has two jobs in process during April, the first month of its fiscal year. Job A, a special minting of 1,000 gold medallions commemorating the invention of motion pictures, was started during March. By the end of March, $30,000 in manufacturing costs had been recorded for the job. Job B, an order for 10,000 silver medallions commemorating the fall of the Berlin Wall, was started in April. The Purchase and Issue of Materials On April 1, Ruger Corporation had $7,000 in raw materials on hand. During the month, the company purchased on account an additional $60,000 in raw materials. The purchase is recorded in journal entry (1) below: (1) Raw Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,000 Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,000 Remember that Raw Materials is an asset account. Thus, when raw materials are purchased, they are initially recorded as an asset—not as an expense. Issue of Direct and Indirect Materials During April, $52,000 in raw materials were requisitioned from the storeroom for use in production. These raw materials included $50,000 of direct and $2,000 of indirect materials. Entry (2) records issuing the materials to the production departments. (2) Work in Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,000 Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,000 Raw Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,000 Job-Order Costing 95 The materials charged to Work in Process represent direct materials for specific jobs. These costs are also recorded on the appropriate job cost sheets. This point is illustrated in Exhibit 3–6, where $28,000 of the $50,000 in direct materials is charged to Job A’s cost sheet and the remaining $22,000 is charged to Job B’s cost sheet. (In this example, all data are presented in summary form and the job cost sheet is abbreviated.) The $2,000 charged to Manufacturing Overhead in entry (2) represents indirect materials. Observe that the Manufacturing Overhead account is separate from the Work in Process account. The purpose of the Manufacturing Overhead account is to accumulate all manufacturing overhead costs as they are incurred during a period. Before leaving Exhibit 3–6, we need to point out one additional thing. Notice from the exhibit that the job cost sheet for Job A contains a beginning balance of $30,000. We stated earlier that this balance represents the cost of work done during March that has been carried forward to April. Also note that the Work in Process account contains the same $30,000 balance. Thus, the Work in Process account summarizes all of the costs appearing on the job cost sheets of the jobs that are in process. Job A was the only job in process at the beginning of April, so the beginning balance in the Work in Process account equals Job A’s beginning balance of $30,000. Labor Cost In April, the employee time tickets included $60,000 recorded for direct labor and $15,000 for indirect labor. The following entry summarizes these costs: (3) Work in Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,000 Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,000 Salaries and Wages Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,000 Only the direct labor cost of $60,000 is added to the Work in Process account. At the same time that direct labor costs are added to Work in Process, they are also added to the individual job cost sheets, as shown in Exhibit 3–7. During April, $40,000 of direct labor cost was charged to Job A and the remaining $20,000 was charged to Job B. The labor costs charged to Manufacturing Overhead ($15,000) represent the indirect labor costs of the period, such as supervision, janitorial work, and maintenance. EXHIBIT 3–6 Raw Materials Cost Flows Work in Process Raw Materials Bal. 7,000 (2) 52,000 (1) 60,000 Manufacturing Overhead Bal. 30,000 (2) 50,000 Job Cost Sheet Job A Balance. . . . . . . . . . $30,000 Direct materials. . . $28,000 (2) 2,000 Job Cost Sheet Job B Balance. . . . . . . . . . $0 Direct materials. . . $22,000 Indirect materials Materials Requisition Forms $52,000 Direct materials 96 Chapter 3 EXHIBIT 3–7 Labor Cost Flows Salaries and Wages Payable (3) 75,000 Work in Process Manufacturing Overhead (2) 2,000 (3) 15,000 Bal. 30,000 (2) 50,000 (3) 60,000 Job Cost Sheet Job A Balance. . . . . . . . . . $30,000 Direct materials. . . $28,000 Direct labor. . . . . . . $40,000 Job Cost Sheet Job B Balance. . . . . . . . . . $0 Direct materials. . . $22,000 Direct labor. . . . . . . $20,000 Indirect labor Various Time Tickets $75,000 Direct labor Manufacturing Overhead Costs Recall that all manufacturing costs other than direct materials and direct labor are classified as manufacturing overhead costs. These costs are entered directly into the Manufacturing Overhead account as they are incurred. To illustrate, assume that Ruger Corporation incurred the following general factory costs during April: Utilities (heat, water, and power) . . . . . . . . . . . Rent on factory equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous factory overhead costs . . . . . . . Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $21,000 16,000 3,000 $40,000 The following entry records the incurrence of these costs: (4) Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,000 Accounts Payable* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,000 *Accounts such as Cash may also be credited In addition, assume that during April, Ruger Corporation recognized $13,000 in accrued property taxes and that $7,000 in prepaid insurance expired on factory buildings and equipment. The following entry records these items: (5) Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,000 Property Taxes Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,000 Prepaid Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,000 Finally, assume that the company recognized $18,000 in depreciation on factory equipment during April. The following entry records the accrual of this depreciation: (6) Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,000 Accumulated Depreciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,000 Job-Order Costing In short, all actual manufacturing overhead costs are debited to the Manufacturing Overhead account as they are incurred. Applying Manufacturing Overhead Because actual manufacturing costs are charged to the Manufacturing Overhead control account rather than to Work in Process, how are manufacturing overhead costs assigned to Work in Process? The answer is, by means of the predetermined overhead rate. Recall from our discussion earlier in the chapter that a predetermined overhead rate is established at the beginning of each year. The rate is calculated by dividing the estimated total manufacturing overhead cost for the year by the estimated total amount of the allocation base (measured in machine-hours, direct labor-hours, or some other base). The predetermined overhead rate is then used to apply overhead costs to jobs. For example, if machine-hours is the allocation base, overhead cost is applied to each job by multiplying the predetermined overhead rate by the number of machine-hours charged to the job. To illustrate, assume that Ruger Corporation’s predetermined overhead rate is $6 per machine-hour. Also assume that during April, 10,000 machine-hours were worked on Job A and 5,000 machine-hours were worked on Job B (a total of 15,000 machine-hours). Thus, $90,000 in overhead cost ($6 per machine-hour 3 15,000 machine-hours 5 $90,000) would be applied to Work in Process. The following entry records the application of Manufacturing Overhead to Work in Process: (7) Work in Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90,000 Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90,000 The flow of costs through the Manufacturing Overhead account is shown in Exhibit 3–8. The actual overhead costs on the debit side in the Manufacturing Overhead account in Exhibit 3–8 are the costs that were added to the account in entries (2)–(6). Observe that recording these actual overhead costs [entries (2)–(6)] and the application of overhead to Work in Process [entry (7)] represent two separate and entirely distinct processes. The Concept of a Clearing Account The Manufacturing Overhead account operates as a clearing account. As we have noted, actual factory overhead costs are debited to the account as they are incurred throughout the year. When a job is completed (or at the end of an accounting period), overhead cost is applied to the job using the predetermined overhead rate, and Work in Process is debited and Manufacturing Overhead is credited. This sequence of events is illustrated below: Manufacturing Overhead (a clearing account) Actual overhead costs are charged to this account as they are incurred throughout the period. Overhead is applied to Work in Process using the predetermined overhead rate. As we emphasized earlier, the predetermined overhead rate is based entirely on estimates of what the level of activity and overhead costs are expected to be, and it is established before the year begins. As a result, the overhead cost applied during a year will almost certainly turn out to be more or less than the actual overhead cost incurred. For example, notice from Exhibit 3–8 that Ruger Corporation’s actual overhead costs for the period are $5,000 greater than the overhead cost that has been applied to Work in Process, resulting in a $5,000 debit balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account. We will reserve discussion of what to do with this $5,000 balance until later in the chapter. For the moment, we can conclude from Exhibit 3–8 that the cost of a completed job consists of the actual direct materials cost of the job, the actual direct labor cost of the job, and the manufacturing overhead cost applied to the job. Pay particular attention to the following subtle but important point: Actual overhead costs are not charged to jobs; 97 98 EXHIBIT 3–8 The Flow of Costs in Overhead Application Chapter 3 Manufacturing Overhead Work in Process Bal. 30,000 (2) 50,000 (3) 60,000 (7) 90,000 Actual overhead costs Balance Job Cost Sheet Job A Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $30,000 Direct materials. . . . . . . . . . . $28,000 Direct labor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $40,000 Manufacturing overhead. . . $60,000 Total. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $158,000 (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 2,000 (7) 15,000 40,000 20,000 18,000 95,000 5,000 90,000 Applied overhead costs 90,000 Job Cost Sheet Job B Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct materials. . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead. . . Total. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $0 $22,000 $20,000 $30,000 $72,000 Overhead Applied to Work in Process $6 per machine-hour 3 15,000 machine-hours = $90,000 actual overhead costs do not appear on the job cost sheet nor do they appear in the Work in Process account. Only the applied overhead cost, based on the predetermined overhead rate, appears on the job cost sheet and in the Work in Process account. Nonmanufacturing Costs In addition to manufacturing costs, companies also incur selling and administrative costs. These costs should be treated as period expenses and charged directly to the income statement. Nonmanufacturing costs should not go into the Manufacturing Overhead account. To illustrate the correct treatment of nonmanufacturing costs, assume that Ruger Corporation incurred $30,000 in selling and administrative salary costs during April. The following entry summarizes the accrual of those salaries: (8) Salaries Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,000 Salaries and Wages Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,000 Assume that depreciation on office equipment during April was $7,000. The entry is as follows: (9) Depreciation Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accumulated Depreciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,000 7,000 Pay particular attention to the difference between this entry and entry (6) where we recorded depreciation on factory equipment. In journal entry (6), depreciation on factory equipment was debited to Manufacturing Overhead and is therefore a product cost. In journal entry (9) above, depreciation on office equipment is debited to Depreciation Expense. Depreciation on office equipment is a period expense rather than a product cost. Finally, assume that advertising was $42,000 and that other selling and administrative expenses in April totaled $8,000. The following entry records these items: Job-Order Costing (10) Advertising Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,000 Other Selling and Administrative Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8,000 Accounts Payable* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,000 *Other accounts, such as Cash may be credited. The amounts in entries (8) through (10) are recorded directly into expense accounts— they have no effect on product costs. The same will be true of any other selling and administrative expenses incurred during April, including sales commissions, depreciation on sales equipment, rent on office facilities, insurance on office facilities, and related costs. Cost of Goods Manufactured When a job has been completed, the finished output is transferred from the production departments to the finished goods warehouse. By this time, the accounting department will have charged the job with direct materials and direct labor cost, and manufacturing overhead will have been applied using the predetermined overhead rate. A transfer of costs is made within the costing system that parallels the physical transfer of goods to the finished goods warehouse. The costs of the completed job are transferred out of the Work in Process account and into the Finished Goods account. The sum of all amounts transferred between these two accounts represents the cost of goods manufactured for the period. In the case of Ruger Corporation, assume that Job A was completed during April. The following entry transfers the cost of Job A from Work in Process to Finished Goods: (11) Finished Goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,000 Work in Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,000 The $158,000 represents the completed cost of Job A, as shown on the job cost sheet in Exhibit 3–8. Because Job A was the only job completed during April, the $158,000 also represents the cost of goods manufactured for the month. Job B was not completed by the end of the month, so its cost will remain in the Work in Process account and carry over to the next month. If a balance sheet is prepared at the end of April, the cost accumulated thus far on Job B will appear as the asset “Work in Process inventory.” Cost of Goods Sold As finished goods are shipped to customers, their accumulated costs are transferred from the Finished Goods account to the Cost of Goods Sold account. If an entire job is shipped at one time, then the entire cost appearing on the job cost sheet is transferred to the Cost of Goods Sold account. In most cases, however, only a portion of the units involved in a particular job will be immediately sold. In these situations, the unit product cost must be used to determine how much product cost should be removed from Finished Goods and charged to Cost of Goods Sold. For Ruger Corporation, we will assume 750 of the 1,000 gold medallions in Job A were shipped to customers by the end of the month for total sales revenue of $225,000. Because 1,000 units were produced and the total cost of the job from the job cost sheet was $158,000, the unit product cost was $158. The following journal entries would record the sale (all sales were on account): (12) Accounts Receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225,000 Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225,000 (13) Cost of Goods Sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,500 Finished Goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,500 (750 units 3 $158 per unit 5 $118,500) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 100 LO3–5 Use T-accounts to show the flow of costs in a job-order costing system. EXHIBIT 3–9 Summary of Journal Entries— Ruger Corporation Chapter 3 Entry (13) completes the flow of costs through the job-order costing system. To pull the entire Ruger Corporation example together, journal entries (1) through (13) are summarized in Exhibit 3–9. The flow of costs through the accounts is presented in T-account form in Exhibit 3–10. (1) Raw Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,000 (2) Work in Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Raw Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,000 2,000 (3) Work in Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Salaries and Wages Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,000 15,000 (4) Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,000 (5) Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property Taxes Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepaid Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,000 52,000 75,000 40,000 20,000 13,000 7,000 (6) Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accumulated Depreciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,000 (7) Work in Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90,000 (8) Salaries Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Salaries and Wages Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,000 (9) Depreciation Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accumulated Depreciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,000 18,000 90,000 30,000 7,000 (10) Advertising Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Selling and Administrative Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,000 8,000 50,000 (11) Finished Goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,000 Work in Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,000 (12) Accounts Receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225,000 Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225,000 (13) Cost of Goods Sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,500 Finished Goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,500 Job-Order Costing 101 EXHIBIT 3–10 Summary of Cost Flows—Ruger Corporation Accounts Receivable Bal. (12) Accounts Payable XX 225,000 Bal. (1) (4) (10) Prepaid Insurance Bal. XX (5) 7,000 7,000 60,000 15,000 (2) (12) Bal. (3) (8) 52,000 XX 75,000 30,000 Property Taxes Payable Bal. (5) Work in Process (13) 30,000 50,000 60,000 90,000 72,000 (11) 118,500 Salaries Expense (8) 30,000 Depreciation Expense (9) XX 13,000 7,000 Advertising Expense (10) Bal. (2) (3) (7) Bal. 225,000 Cost of Goods Sold Salaries and Wages Payable Raw Materials Bal. (1) Bal. XX 60,000 40,000 50,000 Sales 42,000 158,000 Other Selling and Administrative Expense (10) 8,000 Finished Goods Bal. (11) Bal. 10,000 158,000 49,500 (13) 118,500 Accumulated Depreciation Bal. (6) (9) XX 18,000 7,000 Manufacturing Overhead (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Bal. 2,000 15,000 40,000 20,000 18,000 95,000 5,000 (7) 90,000 90,000 Explanation of entries: (1) Raw materials purchased. (2) Direct and indirect materials issued into production. (3) Direct and indirect factory labor cost incurred. (4) Utilities and other factory costs incurred. (5) Property taxes and insurance incurred on the factory. (6) Depreciation recorded on factory assets. (7) Overhead cost applied to Work in Process. (8) Administrative salaries expense incurred. (9) Depreciation recorded on office equipment. (10) Advertising and other selling and administrative expense incurred. (11) Cost of goods manufactured transferred to finished goods. (12) Sale of Job A recorded. (13) Cost of goods sold recorded for Job A. 102 Chapter 3 Schedules of Cost of Goods Manufactured and Cost of Goods Sold LO3–6 Prepare schedules of cost of goods manufactured and cost of goods sold and an income statement. This section uses the Ruger Corporation example to explain how to prepare schedules of cost of goods manufactured and cost of goods sold as well as an income statement. The schedule of cost of goods manufactured contains three elements of product costs—direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead—and it summarizes the portions of those costs that remain in ending Work in Process inventory and that are transferred out of Work in Process into Finished Goods. The schedule of cost of goods sold also contains three elements of product costs—direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead—and it summarizes the portions of those costs that remain in ending Finished Goods inventory and that are transferred out of Finished Goods into Cost of Goods Sold. Exhibit 3–11 presents Ruger Corporation’s schedules of cost of goods manufactured and cost of goods sold. We want to draw your attention to three equations that are embedded within the schedule of cost of goods manufactured. First, the raw materials used in production are computed using the following equation: Raw materials 5 ________________ Purchases of 2 __________________ Beginning raw 1 ___________ Ending raw materials ________________ used in production materials inventory raw materials inventory For Ruger Corporation, the beginning raw materials inventory of $7,000 plus the purchases of raw materials of $60,000 minus the ending raw materials inventory of $15,000 EXHIBIT 3–11 Schedules of Cost of Goods Manufactured and Cost of Goods Sold Cost of Goods Manufactured Direct materials: Beginning raw materials inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add: Purchases of raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total raw materials available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deduct: Ending raw materials inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Raw materials used in production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deduct: Indirect materials included in manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead applied to work in process . . . . . . Total manufacturing costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add: Beginning work in process inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 7,000 60,000 67,000 15,000 52,000 2,000 Deduct: Ending work in process inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods manufactured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 50,000 60,000 90,000 200,000 30,000 230,000 72,000 $158,000 Cost of Goods Sold Beginning finished goods inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add: Cost of goods manufactured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods available for sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deduct: Ending finished goods inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unadjusted cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add: Underapplied overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusted cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 10,000 158,000 168,000 49,500 118,500 5,000 $123,500 *Note that the underapplied overhead is added to cost of goods sold. If overhead were overapplied, it would be deducted from cost of goods sold. Job-Order Costing equals the raw materials used in production of $52,000. Second, the total manufacturing costs are computed using the following equation: Total Manufacturing manufacturing 5 Direct materials 1 Direct labor 1 overhead applied to costs work in process For Ruger Corporation, the direct materials of $50,000 plus the direct labor of $60,000 plus the manufacturing overhead applied to work in process of $90,000 equals the total manufacturing costs of $200,000. Notice, the direct materials used in production ($50,000) is included in total manufacturing costs instead of raw materials purchases ($60,000). The direct materials used in production will usually differ from the amount of raw material purchases when the raw materials inventory balance changes or indirect materials are withdrawn from raw materials inventory. You should also make a note that this equation includes manufacturing overhead applied to work in process rather than actual manufacturing overhead costs. For Ruger Corporation, its manufacturing overhead applied to work in process of $90,000 is computed by multiplying the predetermined overhead rate of $6 per machine-hour by the actual amount of the allocation base recorded on all jobs, or 15,000 machine-hours. The actual manufacturing overhead costs incurred during the period are not added to the Work in Process account. The third equation included in the schedule of cost of goods manufactured relates to computing the cost of goods manufactured: Cost of goods Beginning work in Ending work in Total 5 1 2 manufactured manufacturing costs process inventory process inventory For Ruger, the total manufacturing costs of $200,000 plus the beginning work in process inventory of $30,000 minus the ending work in process inventory of $72,000 equals the cost of goods manufactured of $158,000. The cost of goods manufactured represents the cost of the goods completed during the period and transferred from Work in Process to Finished Goods. The schedule of cost of goods sold shown in Exhibit 3–11 relies on the following equation to compute the unadjusted cost of goods sold: Unadjusted cost Beginning finished Cost of goods Ending finished 5 1 2 of goods sold goods inventory manufactured goods inventory The beginning finished goods inventory ($10,000) plus the cost of goods manufactured ($158,000) equals the cost of goods available for sale ($168,000). The cost of goods available for sale ($168,000) minus the ending finished goods inventory ($49,500) equals the unadjusted cost of goods sold ($118,500). Finally, the unadjusted cost of goods sold ($118,500) plus the underapplied overhead ($5,000) equals adjusted cost of goods sold ($123,500). The next section of the chapter takes a closer look at why cost of goods sold needs to be adjusted for the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead. Exhibit 3–12 presents Ruger Corporation’s income statement for April. Observe that the cost of goods sold on this statement is carried over from Exhibit 3–11. The selling and administrative expenses (which total $87,000) did not flow through the schedules of cost of goods manufactured and cost of goods sold. Journal entries 8–10 (pages 98–99) show that these items were immediately debited to expense accounts rather than being debited to inventory accounts. 103 104 Chapter 3 EXHIBIT 3–12 Income Statement Ruger Corporation Income Statement For the Month Ending April 30 Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold ($118,500 1 $5,000) . . . . . . . . . Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses: Salaries expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advertising expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $225,000 123,500 101,500 $30,000 7,000 42,000 8,000 87,000 $ 14,500 Underapplied and Overapplied Overhead—A Closer Look LO3–7 Compute underapplied or overapplied overhead cost and prepare the journal entry to close the balance in Manufacturing Overhead to the appropriate accounts. This section explains how to compute underapplied and overapplied overhead and how to dispose of any balance remaining in the Manufacturing Overhead account at the end of a period. Computing Underapplied and Overapplied Overhead Because the predetermined overhead rate is established before the period begins and is based entirely on estimated data, the overhead cost applied to Work in Process will generally differ from the amount of overhead cost actually incurred. In the case of Ruger Corporation, for example, the predetermined overhead rate of $6 per hour was used to apply $90,000 of overhead cost to Work in Process, whereas actual overhead costs for April proved to be $95,000 (see Exhibit 3–8). The difference between the overhead cost applied to Work in Process and the actual overhead costs of a period is called either underapplied or overapplied overhead. For Ruger Corporation, overhead was underapplied by $5,000 because the applied cost ($90,000) was $5,000 less than the actual cost ($95,000). If the situation had been reversed and the company had applied $95,000 in overhead cost to Work in Process while incurring actual overhead costs of only $90,000, then the overhead would have been overapplied. What is the cause of underapplied or overapplied overhead? Basically, the method of applying overhead to jobs using a predetermined overhead rate assumes that actual overhead costs will be proportional to the actual amount of the allocation base incurred during the period. If, for example, the predetermined overhead rate is $6 per machine-hour, then it is assumed that actual overhead costs incurred will be $6 for every machine-hour that is actually worked. There are at least two reasons why this may not be true. First, much of the overhead often consists of fixed costs that do not change as the number of machinehours incurred goes up or down. Second, spending on overhead items may or may not be under control. If individuals who are responsible for overhead costs do a good job, those costs should be less than were expected at the beginning of the period. If they do a poor job, those costs will be more than expected. To illustrate these concepts, suppose that two companies—Turbo Crafters and Black & Howell—have prepared the following estimated data for the coming year: Turbo Crafters Allocation base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimated manufacturing overhead cost (a) . . . . . . . . . Estimated total amount of the allocation base (b) . . . . Predetermined overhead rate (a) 4 (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black & Howell Machine-hours Direct materials cost $300,000 $120,000 75,000 machine-hours $80,000 direct materials cost $4 per machine-hour 150% of direct materials cost Job-Order Costing 105 Note that when the allocation base is dollars (such as direct materials cost in the case of Black & Howell) the predetermined overhead rate is expressed as a percentage of the allocation base. When dollars are divided by dollars, the result is a percentage. Now assume that because of unexpected changes in overhead spending and in demand for the companies’ products, the actual overhead cost and the actual activity recorded during the year in each company are as follows: Turbo Crafters Actual manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual total amount of the allocation base . . . . . . . . . . . . $290,000 68,000 machine-hours Black & Howell $130,000 $90,000 direct materials cost For each company, note that the actual data for both cost and the allocation base differ from the estimates used in computing the predetermined overhead rate. This results in underapplied and overapplied overhead as follows: Turbo Crafters Actual manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead cost applied to Work in Process during the year: Predetermined overhead rate (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual total amount of the allocation base (b) . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead applied (a) 3 (b) . . . . . . . . . . . Underapplied (overapplied) manufacturing overhead . . . . $290,000 Black & Howell $130,000 $4 per machine-hour 150% of direct materials cost 68,000 machine-hours $90,000 direct materials cost $272,000 $135,000 $18,000 $(5,000) For Turbo Crafters, the amount of overhead cost applied to Work in Process ($272,000) is less than the actual overhead cost for the year ($290,000). Therefore, overhead is underapplied. For Black & Howell, the amount of overhead cost applied to Work in Process ($135,000) is greater than the actual overhead cost for the year ($130,000), so overhead is overapplied. A summary of these concepts is presented in Exhibit 3–13. EXHIBIT 3–13 Summary of Overhead Concepts At the beginning of the period: Estimated total manufacturing overhead cost 4 Estimated total amount of the allocation base 5 Predetermined overhead rate During the period: Predetermined overhead rate 3 Actual total amount of the allocation base incurred during the period 5 Total manufacturing overhead applied Total manufacturing overhead applied 5 Underapplied (overapplied) overhead At the end of the period: Actual total manufacturing overhead cost 2 106 Chapter 3 Disposition of Underapplied or Overapplied Overhead Balances If we return to the Ruger Corporation example and look at the Manufacturing Overhead T-account in Exhibit 3–10, you will see that there is a debit balance of $5,000. Remember that debit entries to the account represent actual overhead costs incurred, whereas credit entries represent overhead costs applied to jobs. In this case, the actual overhead costs incurred exceeded the overhead costs applied to jobs by $5,000—hence, the debit balance of $5,000. This may sound familiar. We just discussed in the previous section the fact that the overhead costs incurred ($95,000) exceeded the overhead costs applied ($90,000), and that the difference is called underapplied overhead. These are just two ways of looking at the same thing. If there is a debit balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account of X dollars, then the overhead is underapplied by X dollars. On the other hand, if there is a credit balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account of Y dollars, then the overhead is overapplied by Y dollars. What do we do with the balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account at the end of the accounting period? The underapplied or overapplied balance remaining in the Manufacturing Overhead account at the end of a period is treated in one of two ways: 1. Closed out to Cost of Goods Sold. 2. Allocated among the Work in Process, Finished Goods, and Cost of Goods Sold accounts in proportion to the overhead applied during the current period in ending balances. Closed Out to Cost of Goods Sold Closing out the balance in Manufacturing Overhead to Cost of Goods Sold is simpler than the allocation method. In the Ruger Corporation example, the entry to close the $5,000 of underapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold is: (14) Cost of Goods Sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,000 Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,000 Note that because the Manufacturing Overhead account has a debit balance, Manufacturing Overhead must be credited to close out the account. This has the effect of increasing Cost of Goods Sold for April to $123,500: Unadjusted cost of goods sold [from entry (13)] . . . . . . . Add underapplied overhead [from entry (14)] . . . . . . . . . . Adjusted cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $118,500 5,000 $123,500 After this adjustment has been made, Ruger Corporation’s income statement for April will appear as shown earlier in Exhibit 3–12. Note that this adjustment makes sense. The unadjusted cost of goods sold is based on the amount of manufacturing overhead applied to jobs, not the manufacturing overhead costs actually incurred. Because overhead was underapplied, not enough cost was applied to jobs. Hence, the cost of goods sold was understated. Adding the underapplied overhead to the cost of goods sold corrects this understatement. Allocated between Accounts Allocation of underapplied or overapplied overhead between Work in Process, Finished Goods, and Cost of Goods Sold is more accurate than closing the entire balance into Cost of Goods Sold. This allocation assigns overhead costs to where they would have gone had the estimates included in the predetermined overhead rate matched the actual amounts. Had Ruger Corporation chosen to allocate the underapplied overhead among the inventory accounts and Cost of Goods Sold, it would first be necessary to determine the Job-Order Costing amount of overhead that had been applied during April to each of the accounts. The computations would have been as follows: Overhead applied in work in process inventory, April 30 (Job B) . . . $30,000 33.33% Overhead applied in finished goods inventory, April 30 Job A: ($60,000/1,000 units 5 $60 per unit) 3 250 units . . . . . . . 15,000 16.67% Overhead applied in cost of goods sold, April Job A: ($60,000/1,000 units 5 $60 per unit) 3 750 units . . . . . . . 45,000 50.00% Total overhead applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $90,000 100.00% Based on the above percentages, the underapplied overhead (i.e., the debit balance in Manufacturing Overhead) would be allocated as shown in the following journal entry: Work in Process (33.33% 3 $5,000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,666.50 Finished Goods (16.67% 3 $5,000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833.50 Cost of Goods Sold (50.00% 3 $5,000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,500.00 Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,000.00 Note that the first step in the allocation process was to determine the amount of overhead applied in each of the accounts. For Finished Goods, for example, the total amount of overhead applied to Job A, $60,000, was divided by the total number of units in Job A, 1,000 units, to arrive at the average overhead applied of $60 per unit. Because 250 units from Job A were still in ending finished goods inventory, the amount of overhead applied in the Finished Goods Inventory account was $60 per unit multiplied by 250 units or $15,000 in total. If overhead had been overapplied, the entry above would have been just the reverse, because a credit balance would have existed in the Manufacturing Overhead account. Which Method Should Be Used for Disposing of Underapplied or Overapplied Overhead? The allocation method is generally considered more accurate than simply closing out the underapplied or overapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold. However, the allocation method is more complex. We will always specify which method you are to use in problem assignments. A General Model of Product Cost Flows Exhibit 3–14 presents a T-account model of the flow of costs in a product costing system. This model can be very helpful in understanding how production costs flow through a costing system and finally end up as Cost of Goods Sold on the income statement. Multiple Predetermined Overhead Rates Our discussion in this chapter has assumed that there is a single predetermined overhead rate for an entire factory called a plantwide overhead rate. This is a fairly common practice—particularly in smaller companies. But in larger companies, multiple predetermined overhead rates are often used. In a multiple predetermined overhead rate system each production department may have its own predetermined overhead rate. Such a system, while more complex, is more accurate because it can reflect differences across departments in how overhead costs are incurred. For example, in departments that are relatively labor intensive overhead might be allocated based on direct labor-hours and in departments that are relatively machine intensive overhead might be allocated based on machine-hours. When multiple predetermined overhead rates are used, overhead is applied in each department according to its own overhead rate as jobs proceed through the department. 107 108 Chapter 3 EXHIBIT 3–14 A General Model of Cost Flows Raw Materials Debited for the cost of materials purchased Credited for direct materials added to Work in Process Credited for indirect materials added to Manufacturing Overhead Salaries and Wages Payable Credited for direct labor added to Work in Process Work in Process Debited for the Credited for the cost of direct cost of goods materials, direct manufactured labor, and manufacturing overhead applied Credited for indirect labor added to Manufacturing Overhead Manufacturing Overhead Debited for actual overhead costs incurred Credited for overhead cost applied to Work in Process Underapplied overhead cost Overapplied overhead cost Finished Goods Debited for the cost of goods manufactured Credited for the cost of goods sold Cost of Goods Sold Debited for the cost of goods sold Job-Order Costing in Service Companies Job-order costing is used in service organizations such as law firms, movie studios, hospitals, and repair shops, as well as in manufacturing companies. In a law firm, for example, each client is a “job,” and the costs of that job are accumulated day by day on a job cost sheet as the client’s case is handled by the firm. Legal forms and similar inputs represent the direct materials for the job; the time expended by attorneys is like direct labor; and the costs of secretaries and legal aids, rent, depreciation, and so forth, represent the overhead. In a movie studio such as Columbia Pictures, each film produced by the studio is a “job,” and costs of direct materials (costumes, props, film, etc.) and direct labor (actors, directors, and extras) are charged to each film’s job cost sheet. A share of the studio’s overhead costs, such as utilities, depreciation of equipment, wages of maintenance workers, and so forth, is also charged to each film. In sum, job-order costing is a versatile and widely used costing method that may be encountered in virtually any organization that provides diverse products or services. Job-Order Costing 109 IN BUSINESS COMPUTING JOB COSTS AT FAST WRAP In 2007, Michael Enos founded Fast Wrap, a company that shrink-wraps everything from jet skis and recreation vehicles (RVs) to entire buildings. Today, the company has 64 locations across America and generates more than $6 million in annual sales. The company’s revenues far exceed its direct materials and direct labor costs. For example, Fast Wrap charges customers $400 to wrap a 20-foot boat that requires $25 worth of plastic and $30 worth of labor. Larger jobs are even more profitable. For example, Fast Wrap signed a $250,000 contract to shrink-wrap a 244,000-square-foot hospital under construction in Fontana, California. The materials and labor for this job cost Fast Wrap $44,000. Source: Susan Adams, “It’s a Wrap,” Forbes, March 15, 2010, pp. 36–38. Summary Job-order costing is used in situations where the organization offers many different products or services, such as in furniture manufacturing, hospitals, and legal firms. Materials requisition forms and labor time tickets are used to assign direct materials and direct labor costs to jobs in a job-order costing system. Manufacturing overhead costs are assigned to jobs using a predetermined overhead rate. All of the costs are recorded on a job cost sheet. The predetermined overhead rate is determined before the period begins by dividing the estimated total manufacturing overhead cost for the period by the estimated total amount of the allocation base for the period. The most frequently used allocation bases are direct labor-hours and machine-hours. Overhead is applied to jobs by multiplying the predetermined overhead rate by the actual amount of the allocation base recorded for the job. Because the predetermined overhead rate is based on estimates, the actual overhead cost incurred during a period may be more or less than the amount of overhead cost applied to production. Such a difference is referred to as underapplied or overapplied overhead. The underapplied or overapplied overhead for a period can be either closed out to Cost of Goods Sold or allocated between Work in Process, Finished Goods, and Cost of Goods Sold. When overhead is underapplied, manufacturing overhead costs have been understated and therefore inventories and/ or expenses must be adjusted upwards. When overhead is overapplied, manufacturing overhead costs have been overstated and therefore inventories and/or expenses must be adjusted downwards. Review Problem: Job-Order Costing Hogle Corporation is a manufacturer that uses job-order costing. On January 1, the beginning of its fiscal year, the company’s inventory balances were as follows: Raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finished goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $20,000 $15,000 $30,000 The company applies overhead cost to jobs on the basis of machine-hours worked. For the current year, the company’s predetermined overhead rate was based on a cost formula that estimated $450,000 of total manufacturing overhead for an estimated activity level of 75,000 machinehours. The following transactions were recorded for the year: a. Raw materials were purchased on account, $410,000. b. Raw materials were requisitioned for use in production, $380,000 ($360,000 direct materials and $20,000 indirect materials). c. The following costs were accrued for employee services: direct labor, $75,000; indirect labor, $110,000; sales commissions, $90,000; and administrative salaries, $200,000. d. Sales travel costs were $17,000. e. Utility costs in the factory were $43,000. 110 Chapter 3 f. g. h. i. j. k. Advertising costs were $180,000. Depreciation was recorded for the year, $350,000 (80% relates to factory operations, and 20% relates to selling and administrative activities). Insurance expired during the year, $10,000 (70% relates to factory operations, and the remaining 30% relates to selling and administrative activities). Manufacturing overhead was applied to production. Due to greater than expected demand for its products, the company worked 80,000 machine-hours on all jobs during the year. Goods costing $900,000 to manufacture according to their job cost sheets were completed during the year. Goods were sold on account to customers during the year for a total of $1,500,000. The goods cost $870,000 to manufacture according to their job cost sheets. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions. Post the entries in (1) above to T-accounts (don’t forget to enter the beginning balances in the inventory accounts). Is Manufacturing Overhead underapplied or overapplied for the year? Prepare a journal entry to close any balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account to Cost of Goods Sold. Do not allocate the balance between ending inventories and Cost of Goods Sold. Prepare an income statement for the year. Solution to Review Problem 1. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Raw Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410,000 Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,000 Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,000 Raw Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,000 Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110,000 Sales Commissions Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90,000 Administrative Salaries Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200,000 Salaries and Wages Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales Travel Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,000 Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,000 Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advertising Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,000 Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280,000 Depreciation Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,000 Accumulated Depreciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,000 Insurance Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,000 Prepaid Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The predetermined overhead rate for the year is computed as follows: 410,000 380,000 475,000 17,000 43,000 180,000 350,000 10,000 Estimated total manufacturing overhead cost Predetermined 5 _____________________________________ overhead rate Estimated total amount of the allocation base $450,000 5 ___________________ 75,000 machine-hours 5 $6 per machine-hour Based on the 80,000 machine-hours actually worked during the year, the company applied $480,000 in overhead cost to production: $6 per machine-hour 3 80,000 machinehours 5 $480,000. The following entry records this application of overhead cost: j. k. Work in Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480,000 Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480,000 Finished Goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900,000 Work in Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900,000 Accounts Receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,500,000 Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,500,000 Cost of Goods Sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870,000 Finished Goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870,000 Job-Order Costing 2. Accounts Receivable (k) Manufacturing Overhead 1,500,000 (b) (c) (e) (g) (h) Prepaid Insurance (h) 10,000 20,000 110,000 43,000 280,000 7,000 (i) Sales 480,000 (k) 460,000 480,000 Bal. 20,000 410,000 Bal. 50,000 (b) (k) 15,000 360,000 75,000 480,000 Bal. 30,000 20,000 380,000 Accumulated Depreciation (g) (c) Administrative Salaries Expense Accounts Payable ( j) (a) (d) (e) (f) 900,000 Finished Goods 30,000 900,000 Bal. 60,000 90,000 350,000 (c) 410,000 17,000 43,000 180,000 (k) (c) 200,000 Sales Travel Expense (d) Salaries and Wages Payable Bal. ( j) 870,000 Sales Commissions Expense Work in Process Bal. (b) (c) (i) 1,500,000 Cost of Goods Sold Raw Materials Bal. (a) 111 17,000 Advertising Expense 475,000 (f) 180,000 870,000 Depreciation Expense (g) 70,000 Insurance Expense (h) 3. Manufacturing overhead is overapplied for the year. The entry to close it out to Cost of Goods Sold is as follows: Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of Goods Sold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 20,000 20,000 Hogle Corporation Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31 Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold ($870,000 2 $20,000) . . . . $1,500,000 850,000 Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses: Sales commissions expense . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative salaries expense . . . . . . . . . . Sales travel expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advertising expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insurance expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 90,000 200,000 17,000 180,000 70,000 3,000 560,000 $ 90,000 3,000 112 Chapter 3 Glossary Absorption costing A costing method that includes all manufacturing costs—direct materials, direct labor, and both variable and fixed manufacturing overhead—in the cost of a product. (p. 84) Allocation base A measure of activity such as direct labor-hours or machine-hours that is used to assign costs to cost objects. (p. 89) Bill of materials A document that shows the quantity of each type of direct material required to make a product. (p. 86) Cost driver A factor, such as machine-hours, beds occupied, computer time, or flight-hours, that causes overhead costs. (p. 91) Cost of goods manufactured The manufacturing costs associated with the goods that were finished during the period. (p. 93) Finished goods Units of product that have been completed but not yet sold to customers. (p. 93) Job cost sheet A form that records the materials, labor, and manufacturing overhead costs charged to a job. (p. 86) Job-order costing A costing system used in situations where many different products, jobs, or services are produced each period. (p. 84) Materials requisition form A document that specifies the type and quantity of materials to be drawn from the storeroom and that identifies the job that will be charged for the cost of those materials. (p. 86) Multiple predetermined overhead rates A costing system with multiple overhead cost pools and a different predetermined overhead rate for each cost pool, rather than a single predetermined overhead rate for the entire company. Each production department may be treated as a separate overhead cost pool. (p. 107) Normal cost system A costing system in which overhead costs are applied to a job by multiplying a predetermined overhead rate by the actual amount of the allocation base incurred by the job. (p. 90) Overapplied overhead A credit balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account that occurs when the amount of overhead cost applied to Work in Process exceeds the amount of overhead cost actually incurred during a period. (p. 104) Overhead application The process of charging manufacturing overhead cost to job cost sheets and to the Work in Process account. (p. 89) Plantwide overhead rate A single predetermined overhead rate that is used throughout a plant. (p. 107) Predetermined overhead rate A rate used to charge manufacturing overhead cost to jobs that is established in advance for each period. It is computed by dividing the estimated total manufacturing overhead cost for the period by the estimated total amount of the allocation base for the period. (p. 89) Raw materials Any materials that go into the final product. (p. 93) Schedule of cost of goods manufactured A schedule that contains three elements of product costs—direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead—and that summarizes the portions of those costs that remain in ending Work in Process inventory and that are transferred out of Work in Process into Finished Goods. (p. 102) Schedule of cost of goods sold A schedule that contains three elements of product costs—direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead—and that summarizes the portions of those costs that remain in ending Finished Goods inventory and that are transferred out of Finished Goods into Cost of Goods Sold. (p. 102) Time ticket A document that is used to record the amount of time an employee spends on various activities. (p. 88) Underapplied overhead A debit balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account that occurs when the amount of overhead cost actually incurred exceeds the amount of overhead cost applied to Work in Process during a period. (p. 104) Work in process Units of product that are only partially complete and will require further work before they are ready for sale to the customer. (p. 93) Questions 3–1 3–2 3–3 Why aren’t actual manufacturing overhead costs traced to jobs just as direct materials and direct labor costs are traced to jobs? Explain the four-step process used to compute a predetermined overhead rate. What is the purpose of the job cost sheet in a job-order costing system? Job-Order Costing 3–4 3–5 3–6 3–7 3–8 3–9 3–10 3–11 3–12 3–13 113 Explain why some production costs must be assigned to products through an allocation process. Why do companies use predetermined overhead rates rather than actual manufacturing overhead costs to apply overhead to jobs? What factors should be considered in selecting a base to be used in computing the predetermined overhead rate? If a company fully allocates all of its overhead costs to jobs, does this guarantee that a profit will be earned for the period? What account is credited when overhead cost is applied to Work in Process? Would you expect the amount applied for a period to equal the actual overhead costs of the period? Why or why not? What is underapplied overhead? Overapplied overhead? What disposition is made of these amounts at the end of the period? Provide two reasons why overhead might be underapplied in a given year. What adjustment is made for underapplied overhead on the schedule of cost of goods sold? What adjustment is made for overapplied overhead? What is a plantwide overhead rate? Why are multiple overhead rates, rather than a plantwide overhead rate, used in some companies? What happens to overhead rates based on direct labor when automated equipment replaces direct labor? Multiple-choice questions are provided on the text website at www.mhhe.com/garrison15e. Applying Excel Available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. The Excel worksheet form that appears below is to be used to recreate part of the example on pages 104–105. Download the workbook containing this form from the Online Learning Center at www.mhhe.com/garrison15e. On the website you will also receive instructions about how to use this worksheet form. You should proceed to the requirements below only after completing your worksheet. LO3–1, LO3–4, LO3–7 114 Chapter 3 Required: 1. 2. Check your worksheet by changing the estimated total amount of the allocation base in the Data area to 60,000 machine-hours, keeping all of the other data the same as in the original example. If your worksheet is operating properly, the predetermined overhead rate should now be $5.00 per machine-hour. If you do not get this answer, find the errors in your worksheet and correct them. How much is the underapplied (overapplied) manufacturing overhead? Did it change? Why or why not? Determine the underapplied (overapplied) manufacturing overhead for a different company with the following data: Allocation base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimated manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimated total amount of the allocation base . . . . . . . . . . Actual manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual total amount of the allocation base . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 4. Machine-hours $100,000 50,000 machine-hours $90,000 40,000 machine-hours What happens to the underapplied (overapplied) manufacturing overhead from part (2) if the estimated total amount of the allocation base is changed to 40,000 machine-hours and everything else remains the same? Why is the amount of underapplied (overapplied) manufacturing overhead different from part (2)? Change the estimated total amount of the allocation base back to 50,000 machine-hours so that the data look exactly like they did in part (2). Now change the actual manufacturing overhead cost to $100,000. What is the underapplied (overapplied) manufacturing overhead now? Why is the amount of underapplied (overapplied) manufacturing overhead different from part (2)? The Foundational 15 Available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–3, LO3–4, LO3–5, LO3–6, LO3–7 Sweeten Company had no jobs in progress at the beginning of March and no beginning inventories. It started only two jobs during March—Job P and Job Q. Job P was completed and sold by the end of the March and Job Q was incomplete at the end of the March. The company uses a plantwide predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor-hours. The following additional information is available for the company as a whole and for Jobs P and Q (all data and questions relate to the month of March): Estimated total fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimated variable manufacturing overhead per direct labor-hour . . . . . . . Estimated total direct labor-hours to be worked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total actual manufacturing overhead costs incurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual direct labor-hours worked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. $10,000 $1.00 2,000 $12,500 Job P Job Q $13,000 $21,000 1,400 $8,000 $7,500 500 What is the company’s predetermined overhead rate? How much manufacturing overhead was applied to Job P and Job Q? What is the direct labor hourly wage rate? If Job P includes 20 units, what is its unit product cost? What is the total amount of manufacturing cost assigned to Job Q as of the end of March (including applied overhead)? Assume the ending raw materials inventory is $1,000 and the company does not use any indirect materials. Prepare the journal entries to record raw materials purchases and the issuance of direct materials for use in production. Job-Order Costing 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 115 Assume that the company does not use any indirect labor. Prepare the journal entry to record the direct labor costs added to production. Prepare the journal entry to apply manufacturing overhead costs to production. Assume the ending raw materials inventory is $1,000 and the company does not use any indirect materials. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured. Prepare the journal entry to transfer costs from Work in Process to Finished Goods. Prepare a completed Work in Process T-account including the beginning and ending balances and all debits and credits posted to the account. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods sold. (Stop after computing the unadjusted cost of goods sold.) Prepare the journal entry to transfer costs from Finished Goods to Cost of Goods Sold. What is the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead? Prepare the journal entry to close the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold. Assume that Job P includes 20 units that each sell for $3,000 and that the company’s selling and administrative expenses in March were $14,000. Prepare an absorption costing income statement for March. Exercises All applicable exercises are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. EXERCISE 3–1 Compute the Predetermined Overhead Rate [LO3–1] Harris Fabrics computes its predetermined overhead rate annually on the basis of direct laborhours. At the beginning of the year, it estimated that 20,000 direct labor-hours would be required for the period’s estimated level of production. The company also estimated $94,000 of fixed manufacturing overhead expenses for the coming period and variable manufacturing overhead of $2.00 per direct labor-hour. Harris’s actual manufacturing overhead for the year was $123,900 and its actual total direct labor was 21,000 hours. Required: Compute the company’s predetermined overhead rate for the year. EXERCISE 3–2 Apply Overhead [LO3–2] Luthan Company uses a predetermined overhead rate of $23.40 per direct labor-hour. This predetermined rate was based on a cost formula that estimated $257,400 of total manufacturing overhead for an estimated activity level of 11,000 direct labor-hours. The company incurred actual total manufacturing overhead costs of $249,000 and 10,800 total direct labor-hours during the period. Required: Determine the amount of manufacturing overhead that would have been applied to all jobs during the period. EXERCISE 3–3 Computing Job Costs [LO3–3] Mickley Company’s predetermined overhead rate is $14.00 per direct labor-hour and its direct labor wage rate is $12.00 per hour. The following information pertains to Job A-500: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $230 $108 Required: 1. 2. What is the total manufacturing cost assigned to Job A-500? If Job A-500 consists of 40 units, what is the average cost assigned to each unit included in the job? EXERCISE 3–4 Prepare Journal Entries [LO3–4] Larned Corporation recorded the following transactions for the just completed month. a. $80,000 in raw materials were purchased on account. b. $71,000 in raw materials were requisitioned for use in production. Of this amount, $62,000 was for direct materials and the remainder was for indirect materials. 116 Chapter 3 c. d. Total labor wages of $112,000 were incurred. Of this amount, $101,000 was for direct labor and the remainder was for indirect labor. Additional manufacturing overhead costs of $175,000 were incurred. Required: Record the above transactions in journal entries. EXERCISE 3–5 Prepare T-Accounts [LO3–5, LO3–7] Jurvin Enterprises recorded the following transactions for the just completed month. The company had no beginning inventories. a. $94,000 in raw materials were purchased for cash. b. $89,000 in raw materials were requisitioned for use in production. Of this amount, $78,000 was for direct materials and the remainder was for indirect materials. c. Total labor wages of $132,000 were incurred and paid. Of this amount, $112,000 was for direct labor and the remainder was for indirect labor. d. Additional manufacturing overhead costs of $143,000 were incurred and paid. e. Manufacturing overhead costs of $152,000 were applied to jobs using the company’s predetermined overhead rate. f. All of the jobs in progress at the end of the month were completed and shipped to customers. g. Any underapplied or overapplied overhead for the period was closed out to Cost of Goods Sold. Required: 1. 2. Post the above transactions to T-accounts. Determine the cost of goods sold for the period. EXERCISE 3–6 Schedules of Cost of Goods Manufactured and Cost of Goods Sold [LO3–6] Primare Corporation has provided the following data concerning last month’s manufacturing operations. Purchases of raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indirect materials included in manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead applied to work in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underapplied overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inventories Raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finished goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beginning Ending $12,000 $56,000 $35,000 $18,000 $65,000 $42,000 $30,000 $5,000 $58,000 $87,000 $4,000 Required: 1. 2. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the month. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods sold for the month. EXERCISE 3–7 Underapplied and Overapplied Overhead [LO3–7] Osborn Manufacturing uses a predetermined overhead rate of $18.20 per direct labor-hour. This predetermined rate was based on a cost formula that estimates $218,400 of total manufacturing overhead for an estimated activity level of 12,000 direct labor-hours. The company incurred actual total manufacturing overhead costs of $215,000 and 11,500 total direct labor-hours during the period. Required: 1. 2. Determine the amount of underapplied or overapplied manufacturing overhead for the period. Assuming that the entire amount of the underapplied or overapplied overhead is closed out to Cost of Goods Sold, what would be the effect of the underapplied or overapplied overhead on the company’s gross margin for the period? EXERCISE 3–8 Applying Overhead; Computing Unit Product Cost [LO3–2, LO3–3] A company assigns overhead cost to completed jobs on the basis of 125% of direct labor cost. The job cost sheet for Job 313 shows that $10,000 in direct materials has been used on the job and that $12,000 in direct labor cost has been incurred. A total of 1,000 units were produced in Job 313. Job-Order Costing Required: What is the total manufacturing cost assigned to Job 313? What is the unit product cost for Job 313? EXERCISE 3–9 Journal Entries and T-accounts [LO3–2, LO3–4, LO3–5] The Polaris Company uses a job-order costing system. The following data relate to October, the first month of the company’s fiscal year. a. Raw materials purchased on account, $210,000. b. Raw materials issued to production, $190,000 ($178,000 direct materials and $12,000 indirect materials). c. Direct labor cost incurred, $90,000; indirect labor cost incurred, $110,000. d. Depreciation recorded on factory equipment, $40,000. e. Other manufacturing overhead costs incurred during October, $70,000 (credit Accounts Payable). f. The company applies manufacturing overhead cost to production on the basis of $8 per machine-hour. A total of 30,000 machine-hours were recorded for October. g. Production orders costing $520,000 according to their job cost sheets were completed during October and transferred to Finished Goods. h. Production orders that had cost $480,000 to complete according to their job cost sheets were shipped to customers during the month. These goods were sold on account at 25% above cost. Required: 1. 2. Prepare journal entries to record the information given above. Prepare T-accounts for Manufacturing Overhead and Work in Process. Post the relevant information above to each account. Compute the ending balance in each account, assuming that Work in Process has a beginning balance of $42,000. EXERCISE 3–10 Applying Overhead to a Job [LO3–2] Sigma Corporation applies overhead cost to jobs on the basis of direct labor cost. Job V, which was started and completed during the current period, shows charges of $5,000 for direct materials, $8,000 for direct labor, and $6,000 for overhead on its job cost sheet. Job W, which is still in process at year-end, shows charges of $2,500 for direct materials and $4,000 for direct labor. Required: Should any overhead cost be added to Job W at year-end? If so, how much? Explain. EXERCISE 3–11 Schedules of Cost of Goods Manufactured and Cost of Goods Sold; Income Statement [LO3–6] The following data from the just completed year are taken from the accounting records of Mason Company: Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Raw material purchases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead applied to work in process . . . . . . . . . Actual manufacturing overhead costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inventories Raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finished goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $524,000 $70,000 $118,000 $140,000 $63,000 $90,000 $80,000 Beginning of Year End of Year $7,000 $10,000 $20,000 $15,000 $5,000 $35,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured. Assume all raw materials used in production were direct materials. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods sold. Prepare an income statement. 117 118 Chapter 3 EXERCISE 3–12 Applying Overhead; Cost of Goods Manufactured [LO3–2, LO3–6, LO3–7] The following cost data relate to the manufacturing activities of Chang Company during the just completed year: Manufacturing overhead costs incurred: Indirect materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indirect labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property taxes, factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utilities, factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation, factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insurance, factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 15,000 130,000 8,000 70,000 240,000 10,000 Total actual manufacturing overhead costs incurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $473,000 Other costs incurred: Purchases of raw materials (both direct and indirect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $400,000 $60,000 Inventories: Raw materials, beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Raw materials, ending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process, beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process, ending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $20,000 $30,000 $40,000 $70,000 The company uses a predetermined overhead rate to apply overhead cost to jobs. The rate for the year was $25 per machine-hour. A total of 19,400 machine-hours was recorded for the year. Required: 1. 2. Compute the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead cost for the year. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year. EXERCISE 3–13 Varying Predetermined Overhead Rates [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–3] Kingsport Containers Company makes a single product that is subject to wide seasonal variations in demand. The company uses a job-order costing system and computes predetermined overhead rates on a quarterly basis using the number of units to be produced as the allocation base. Its estimated costs, by quarter, for the coming year are given below: Quarter First Second Third Fourth Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $240,000 128,000 300,000 $120,000 64,000 220,000 $ 60,000 32,000 180,000 $180,000 96,000 ? Total manufacturing costs (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . $668,000 $404,000 $272,000 $ Number of units to be produced (b) . . . . . . . Estimated unit product cost (a) 4 (b) . . . . . . 80,000 $8.35 40,000 $10.10 20,000 $13.60 ? 60,000 ? Management finds the variation in quarterly unit product costs to be confusing and difficult to work with. It has been suggested that the problem lies with manufacturing overhead because it is the largest element of total manufacturing cost. Accordingly, you have been asked to find a more appropriate way of assigning manufacturing overhead cost to units of product. Required: 1. 2. 3. Using the high-low method, estimate the fixed manufacturing overhead cost per quarter and the variable manufacturing overhead cost per unit. Create a cost formula to estimate the total manufacturing overhead cost for the fourth quarter. Compute the total manufacturing cost and unit product cost for the fourth quarter. What is causing the estimated unit product cost to fluctuate from one quarter to the next? How would you recommend stabilizing the company’s unit product cost? Support your answer with computations that adapt the cost formula you created in requirement 1. Job-Order Costing EXERCISE 3–14 Computing Predetermined Overhead Rates and Job Costs [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–3, LO3–7] Moody Corporation uses a job-order costing system with a plantwide overhead rate based on machine-hours. At the beginning of the year, the company made the following estimates: Machine-hours required to support estimated production . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead cost per machine-hour . . . . . . . 100,000 $650,000 $3.00 Required: 1. 2. Compute the predetermined overhead rate. During the year, Job 400 was started and completed. The following information was available with respect to this job: Direct materials requisitioned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine-hours used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. $450 $210 40 Compute the total manufacturing cost assigned to Job 400. During the year, the company worked a total of 146,000 machine-hours on all jobs and incurred actual manufacturing overhead costs of $1,350,000. What is the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead for the year? If this amount were closed out entirely to Cost of Goods Sold would the journal entry increase or decrease net operating income? EXERCISE 3–15 Departmental Overhead Rates [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–3] White Company has two departments, Cutting and Finishing. The company uses a job-order costing system and computes a predetermined overhead rate in each department. The Cutting Department bases its rate on machine-hours, and the Finishing Department bases its rate on direct labor-hours. At the beginning of the year, the company made the following estimates: Department Direct labor-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total fixed manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead per machine-hour . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead per direct labor-hour . . . . . Cutting Finishing 6,000 48,000 $264,000 $2.00 — 30,000 5,000 $366,000 — $4.00 Required: 1. 2. Compute the predetermined overhead rate to be used in each department. Assume that the overhead rates that you computed in (1) above are in effect. The job cost sheet for Job 203, which was started and completed during the year, showed the following: Department Direct labor-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials requisitioned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Cutting Finishing 6 80 $500 $70 20 4 $310 $150 Compute the total manufacturing cost assigned to Job 203. Would you expect substantially different amounts of overhead cost to be assigned to some jobs if the company used a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor-hours, rather than using departmental rates? Explain. No computations are necessary. 119 120 Chapter 3 EXERCISE 3–16 Applying Overhead; Journal Entries; Disposition of Underapplied or Overapplied Overhead [LO3–4, LO3–5, LO3–7] The following information is taken from the accounts of Latta Company. The entries in the T-accounts are summaries of the transactions that affected those accounts during the year. Manufacturing Overhead (a) Bal. 460,000 (b) 390,000 Work in Process Bal. 15,000 260,000 85,000 390,000 70,000 (b) Bal. Finished Goods Bal. (c) 50,000 710,000 Bal. 120,000 (d) (c) 710,000 40,000 Cost of Goods Sold 640,000 (d) 640,000 The overhead that had been applied to production during the year is distributed among the ending balances in the accounts as follows: Work in Process, ending . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finished Goods, ending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of Goods Sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 19,500 58,500 312,000 Overhead applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $390,000 For example, of the $40,000 ending balance in Work in Process, $19,500 was overhead that had been applied during the year. Required: 1. 2. 3. Identify reasons for entries (a) through (d). Assume that the company closes any balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account directly to Cost of Goods Sold. Prepare the necessary journal entry. Assume instead that the company allocates any balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account to the other accounts in proportion to the overhead applied in their ending balances. Prepare the necessary journal entry, with supporting computations. EXERCISE 3–17 Plantwide and Departmental Overhead Rates; Job Costs [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–3] Delph Company uses a job-order costing system and has two manufacturing departments— Molding and Fabrication. The company provided the following estimates at the beginning of the year: Machine-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead per machine-hour . . . Molding Fabrication Total 20,000 $700,000 $3.00 30,000 $210,000 $3.00 50,000 $910,000 During the year, the company had no beginning or ending inventories and it started, completed, and sold only two jobs—Job D-70 and Job C-200. It provided the following information related to those two jobs: Job D-70 Molding Fabrication Total Direct materials cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $375,000 $200,000 14,000 $325,000 $160,000 6,000 $700,000 $360,000 20,000 Job-Order Costing Job C-200 Molding Fabrication Total Direct materials cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $300,000 $175,000 6,000 $250,000 $225,000 24,000 $550,000 $400,000 30,000 Delph had no overapplied or underapplied manufacturing overhead during the year. Required: 1. 2. 3. Assume Delph uses a plantwide overhead rate based on machine-hours. a. Compute the predetermined plantwide overhead rate. b. Compute the total manufacturing costs assigned to Job D-70 and Job C-200. c. If Delph establishes bid prices that are 150% of total manufacturing costs, what bid price would it have established for Job D-70 and Job C-200? d. What is Delph’s cost of goods sold for the year? Assume Delph uses departmental overhead rates based on machine-hours. a. Compute the predetermined departmental overhead rates. b. Compute the total manufacturing costs assigned to Job D-70 and Job C-200. c. If Delph establishes bid prices that are 150% of total manufacturing costs, what bid price would it have established for Job D-70 and Job C-200? d. What is Delph’s cost of goods sold for the year? What managerial insights are revealed by the computations that you performed in this problem? (Hint: Do the cost of goods sold amounts that you computed in requirements 1 and 2 differ from one another? Do the bid prices that you computed in requirements 1 and 2 differ from one another? Why?) EXERCISE 3–18 Applying Overhead; T-accounts; Journal Entries [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–4, LO3–5, LO3–7] Harwood Company uses a job-order costing system. Overhead costs are applied to jobs on the basis of machine-hours. At the beginning of the year, management estimated that 80,000 machinehours would be required for the period’s estimated level of production. The company also estimated $128,000 of fixed manufacturing overhead expenses for the coming period and variable manufacturing overhead of $0.80 per machine-hour. Required: 1. 2. Compute the company’s predetermined overhead rate. Assume that during the year the company works only 75,000 machine-hours and incurs the following costs in the Manufacturing Overhead and Work in Process accounts: Manufacturing Overhead (Maintenance) (Indirect materials) (Indirect labor) (Utilities) (Insurance) (Depreciation) 3. 4. 21,000 8,000 60,000 32,000 7,000 56,000 ? Work in Process (Direct materials) (Direct labor) (Overhead) 710,000 90,000 ? Copy the data in the T-accounts above onto your answer sheet. Compute the amount of overhead cost that would be applied to Work in Process for the year and make the entry in your T-accounts. Compute the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead for the year and show the balance in your Manufacturing Overhead T-account. Prepare a journal entry to close out the balance in this account to Cost of Goods Sold. Explain why the manufacturing overhead was underapplied or overapplied for the year. EXERCISE 3–19 Applying Overhead in a Service Company [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–3] Leeds Architectural Consultants began operations on January 2. The following activity was recorded in the company’s Work in Process account for the first month of operations: Work in Process Costs of subcontracted work Direct staff costs Studio overhead 230,000 75,000 120,000 To completed projects 390,000 121 122 Chapter 3 Leeds Architectural Consultants is a service firm, so the names of the accounts it uses are different from the names used in manufacturing companies. Costs of Subcontracted Work is comparable to Direct Materials; Direct Staff Costs is the same as Direct Labor; Studio Overhead is the same as Manufacturing Overhead; and Completed Projects is the same as Finished Goods. Apart from the difference in terms, the accounting methods used by the company are identical to the methods used by manufacturing companies. Leeds Architectural Consultants uses a job-order costing system and applies studio overhead to Work in Process on the basis of direct staff costs. At the end of January, only one job was still in process. This job (Lexington Gardens Project) had been charged with $6,500 in direct staff costs. Required: 1. 2. Compute the predetermined overhead rate that was in use during January. Complete the following job cost sheet for the partially completed Lexington Gardens Project. Job Cost Sheet—Lexington Gardens Project As of January 31 Costs of subcontracted work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct staff costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Studio overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ ? ? ? Total cost to January 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ ? EXERCISE 3–20 Applying Overhead; Journal Entries; T-accounts [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–3, LO3–4, LO3–5] Dillon Products manufactures various machined parts to customer specifications. The company uses a job-order costing system and applies overhead cost to jobs on the basis of machine-hours. At the beginning of the year, the company used a cost formula to estimate that it would incur $4,800,000 in manufacturing overhead costs at an activity level of 240,000 machine-hours. The company spent the entire month of January working on a large order for 16,000 custommade machined parts. The company had no work in process at the beginning of January. Cost data relating to January follow: a. Raw materials purchased on account, $325,000. b. Raw materials requisitioned for production, $290,000 (80% direct materials and 20% indirect materials). c. Labor cost incurred in the factory, $180,000 (one-third direct labor and two-thirds indirect labor). d. Depreciation recorded on factory equipment, $75,000. e. Other manufacturing overhead costs incurred, $62,000 (credit Accounts Payable). f. Manufacturing overhead cost was applied to production on the basis of 15,000 machine-hours actually worked during the month. g. The completed job was moved into the finished goods warehouse on January 31 to await delivery to the customer. (In computing the dollar amount for this entry, remember that the cost of a completed job consists of direct materials, direct labor, and applied overhead.) Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Prepare journal entries to record items (a) through (f) above [ignore item (g) for the moment]. Prepare T-accounts for Manufacturing Overhead and Work in Process. Post the relevant items from your journal entries to these T-accounts. Prepare a journal entry for item (g) above. Compute the unit product cost that will appear on the job cost sheet. Problems All applicable problems are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. PROBLEM 3–21 T-Account Analysis of Cost Flows [LO3–1, LO3–5, LO3–6, LO3–7] Selected T-accounts of Moore Company are given below for the just completed year: Job-Order Costing Raw Materials Bal. 1/1 Debits 15,000 120,000 Bal. 12/31 Credits Manufacturing Overhead ? Debits 230,000 Bal. 1/1 Direct materials Direct labor Overhead 20,000 90,000 150,000 240,000 Credits 470,000 Debits 185,000 40,000 ? Bal. 12/31 60,000 Bal. 12/31 Credits Cost of Goods Sold ? Debits ? Required: 7. 8. Bal. 1/1 Credits ? Bal. 1/1 Debits 6. ? Factory Wages Payable Finished Goods 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Credits 25,000 Work in Process Bal. 12/31 123 What was the cost of raw materials put into production during the year? How much of the materials in (1) above consisted of indirect materials? How much of the factory labor cost for the year consisted of indirect labor? What was the cost of goods manufactured for the year? What was the cost of goods sold for the year (before considering underapplied or overapplied overhead)? If overhead is applied to production on the basis of direct labor cost, what rate was in effect during the year? Was manufacturing overhead underapplied or overapplied? By how much? Compute the ending balance in the Work in Process inventory account. Assume that this balance consists entirely of goods started during the year. If $8,000 of this balance is direct labor cost, how much of it is direct materials cost? Manufacturing overhead cost? PROBLEM 3–22 Predetermined Overhead Rate; Disposition of Underapplied or Overapplied Overhead [LO3–1, LO3–7] Luzadis Company makes furniture using the latest automated technology. The company uses a job-order costing system and applies manufacturing overhead cost to products on the basis of machine-hours. The following estimates were used in preparing the predetermined overhead rate at the beginning of the year: Machine-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead per computer-hour . . . 75,000 $795,000 $1.40 During the year, a glut of furniture on the market resulted in cutting back production and a buildup of furniture in the company’s warehouse. The company’s cost records revealed the following actual cost and operating data for the year: Machine-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inventories at year-end: Raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process (includes overhead applied of 36,000) . . . . . . . . . . . . Finished goods (includes overhead applied of 180,000) . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold (includes overhead applied of 504,000) . . . . . . . . . . . 60,000 $850,000 $30,000 $100,000 $500,000 $1,400,000 9,000 180,000 4,000 124 Chapter 3 Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Compute the company’s predetermined overhead rate. Compute the underapplied or overapplied overhead. Assume that the company closes any underapplied or overapplied overhead directly to Cost of Goods Sold. Prepare the appropriate journal entry. Assume that the company allocates any underapplied or overapplied overhead to Work in Process, Finished Goods, and Cost of Goods Sold on the basis of the amount of overhead applied that remains in each account at the end of the year. Prepare the journal entry to show the allocation for the year. How much higher or lower will net operating income be if the underapplied or overapplied overhead is allocated rather than closed directly to Cost of Goods Sold? PROBLEM 3–23 Schedules of Cost of Goods Manufactured and Cost of Goods Sold; Income Statement [LO3–6] Superior Company provided the following account balances for the year ended December 31 (all raw materials are used in production as direct materials): Selling expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purchases of raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead applied to work in process . . . . . . . . . . Total actual manufacturing overhead costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $140,000 $290,000 ? $100,000 $285,000 $270,000 Inventory balances at the beginning and end of the year were as follows: Beginning of Year Raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finished goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $40,000 ? $50,000 End of Year $10,000 $35,000 ? The total manufacturing costs for the year were $683,000; the cost of goods available for sale totaled $740,000; the unadjusted cost of goods sold totaled $660,000; and the net operating income was $30,000. The company’s overapplied or underapplied overhead is closed entirely to Cost of Goods Sold. Required: Prepare schedules of cost of goods manufactured and cost of goods sold and an income statement. (Hint: Prepare the income statement and schedule of cost of goods sold first followed by the schedule of cost of goods manufactured.) PROBLEM 3–24 Multiple Departments; Applying Overhead [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–3, LO3–7] High Desert Potteryworks makes a variety of pottery products that it sells to retailers such as Home Depot. The company uses a job-order costing system in which predetermined overhead rates are used to apply manufacturing overhead cost to jobs. The predetermined overhead rate in the Molding Department is based on machine-hours, and the rate in the Painting Department is based on direct labor-hours. At the beginning of the year, the company’s management made the following estimates: Department Direct labor-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct materials cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead per machine-hour . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead per direct labor-hour . . . . . Molding Painting 12,000 70,000 $510,000 $130,000 $497,000 $1.50 – 60,000 8,000 $650,000 $420,000 $615,000 – $2.00 Job-Order Costing Job 205 was started on August 1 and completed on August 10. The company’s cost records show the following information concerning the job: Department Molding Painting 30 110 $470 $325 84 20 $332 $588 Direct labor-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials placed into production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Compute the predetermined overhead rate used during the year in the Molding Department. Compute the rate used in the Painting Department. Compute the total overhead cost applied to Job 205. What would be the total cost recorded for Job 205? If the job contained 50 units, what would be the unit product cost? At the end of the year, the records of High Desert Potteryworks revealed the following actual cost and operating data for all jobs worked on during the year: Department Direct labor-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct materials cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Molding Painting 10,000 65,000 $430,000 $108,000 $570,000 62,000 9,000 $680,000 $436,000 $750,000 What was the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead in each department at the end of the year? PROBLEM 3–25 Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured; Overhead Analysis [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–3, LO3–6, LO3–7] Gitano Products operates a job-order costing system and applies overhead cost to jobs on the basis of direct materials used in production (not on the basis of raw materials purchased). Its predetermined overhead rate was based on a cost formula that estimated $800,000 of manufacturing overhead for an estimated allocation base of $500,000 direct material dollars to be used in production. The company has provided the following data for the just completed year: Purchase of raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead costs: Indirect labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rent, building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Raw Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finished Goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $510,000 $ 90,000 $170,000 $ 48,000 $260,000 $ 95,000 $ 7,000 $180,000 Beginning Ending $ 20,000 $150,000 $260,000 $ 80,000 $ 70,000 $400,000 125 126 Chapter 3 Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. a. Compute the predetermined overhead rate for the year. b. Compute the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead for the year. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year. Assume all raw materials are used in production as direct materials. Compute the unadjusted cost of goods sold for the year. (Do not include any underapplied or overapplied overhead in your cost of goods sold figure.) What options are available for disposing of underapplied or overapplied overhead? Job 215 was started and completed during the year. What price would have been charged to the customer if the job required $8,500 in direct materials and $2,700 in direct labor cost and the company priced its jobs at 25% above the job’s cost according to the accounting system? Direct materials made up $24,000 of the $70,000 ending Work in Process inventory balance. Supply the information missing below: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . $24,000 ? ? Work in process inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . $70,000 PROBLEM 3–26 Journal Entries; T-Accounts; Financial Statements [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–3, LO3–4, LO3–5, LO3–6, LO3–7] Froya Fabrikker A/S of Bergen, Norway, is a small company that manufactures specialty heavy equipment for use in North Sea oil fields. The company uses a job-order costing system and applies manufacturing overhead cost to jobs on the basis of direct labor-hours. Its predetermined overhead rate was based on a cost formula that estimated $360,000 of manufacturing overhead for an estimated allocation base of 900 direct labor-hours. The following transactions took place during the year (all purchases and services were acquired on account): a. Raw materials were purchased for use in production, $200,000. b. Raw materials were requisitioned for use in production (all direct materials), $185,000. c. Utility bills were incurred, $70,000 (90% related to factory operations, and the remainder related to selling and administrative activities). d. Salary and wage costs were incurred: Direct labor (975 hours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indirect labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative salaries . . . . . . $230,000 $90,000 $110,000 e. f. g. Maintenance costs were incurred in the factory, $54,000. Advertising costs were incurred, $136,000. Depreciation was recorded for the year, $95,000 (80% related to factory equipment, and the remainder related to selling and administrative equipment). h. Rental cost incurred on buildings, $120,000 (85% related to factory operations, and the remainder related to selling and administrative facilities). i. Manufacturing overhead cost was applied to jobs, $ ? . j. Cost of goods manufactured for the year, $770,000. k. Sales for the year (all on account) totaled $1,200,000. These goods cost $800,000 according to their job cost sheets. The balances in the inventory accounts at the beginning of the year were: Raw Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finished Goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $30,000 $21,000 $60,000 Required: 1. 2. Prepare journal entries to record the preceding data. Post your entries to T-accounts. (Don’t forget to enter the beginning inventory balances above.) Determine the ending balances in the inventory accounts and in the Manufacturing Overhead account. Job-Order Costing 3. 4. 5. 6. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured. Prepare a journal entry to close any balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account to Cost of Goods Sold. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods sold. Prepare an income statement for the year. Job 412 was one of the many jobs started and completed during the year. The job required $8,000 in direct materials and 39 hours of direct labor time at a total direct labor cost of $9,200. The job contained only four units. If the company bills at a price 60% above the unit product cost on the job cost sheet, what price per unit would have been charged to the customer? PROBLEM 3–27 Comprehensive Problem [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–4, LO3–5, LO3–7] Gold Nest Company of Guandong, China, is a family-owned enterprise that makes birdcages for the South China market. The company sells its birdcages through an extensive network of street vendors who receive commissions on their sales. All of the company’s transactions with customers, employees, and suppliers are conducted in cash; there is no credit. The company uses a job-order costing system in which overhead is applied to jobs on the basis of direct labor cost. Its predetermined overhead rate is based on a cost formula that estimated $330,000 of manufacturing overhead for an estimated activity level of $200,000 direct labor dollars. At the beginning of the year, the inventory balances were as follows: Raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finished goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a. b. c. During the year, the following transactions were completed: Raw materials purchased for cash, $275,000. Raw materials requisitioned for use in production, $280,000 (materials costing $220,000 were charged directly to jobs; the remaining materials were indirect). Costs for employee services were incurred as follows: Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indirect labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales commissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative salaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . d. e. f. g. h. i. j. $25,000 $10,000 $40,000 $180,000 $72,000 $63,000 $90,000 Rent for the year was $18,000 ($13,000 of this amount related to factory operations, and the remainder related to selling and administrative activities). Utility costs incurred in the factory, $57,000. Advertising costs incurred, $140,000. Depreciation recorded on equipment, $100,000. ($88,000 of this amount was on equipment used in factory operations; the remaining $12,000 was on equipment used in selling and administrative activities.) Manufacturing overhead cost was applied to jobs, $ ? . Goods that had cost $675,000 to manufacture according to their job cost sheets were completed. Sales for the year totaled $1,250,000. The total cost to manufacture these goods according to their job cost sheets was $700,000. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions for the year. Prepare T-accounts for inventories, Manufacturing Overhead, and Cost of Goods Sold. Post relevant data from your journal entries to these T-accounts (don’t forget to enter the beginning balances in your inventory accounts). Compute an ending balance in each account. Is Manufacturing Overhead underapplied or overapplied for the year? Prepare a journal entry to close any balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account to Cost of Goods Sold. Prepare an income statement for the year. (Do not prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured; all of the information needed for the income statement is available in the journal entries and T-accounts you have prepared.) 127 128 Chapter 3 PROBLEM 3–28 Cost Flows; T-Accounts; Income Statement [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–5, LO3–6, LO3–7] Supreme Videos, Inc., produces short musical videos for sale to retail outlets. The company’s balance sheet accounts as of January 1, the beginning of its fiscal year, are given below. Supreme Videos, Inc. Balance Sheet January 1 Assets Current assets: Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accounts receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inventories: Raw materials (film, costumes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Videos in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finished videos awaiting sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 63,000 102,000 $ 30,000 45,000 81,000 156,000 Prepaid insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,000 Total current assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Studio and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Less accumulated depreciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330,000 730,000 210,000 Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520,000 $850,000 Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity Accounts payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capital stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $420,000 Retained earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,000 Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity . . . . . . . . . . . . . $160,000 690,000 $850,000 Because the videos differ in length and in complexity of production, the company uses a joborder costing system to determine the cost of each video produced. Studio (manufacturing) overhead is charged to videos on the basis of camera-hours of activity. The company’s predetermined overhead rate for the year is based on a cost formula that estimated $280,000 in manufacturing overhead for an estimated allocation base of 7,000 camera-hours. The following transactions were recorded for the year: a. Film, costumes, and similar raw materials purchased on account, $185,000. b. Film, costumes, and other raw materials issued to production, $200,000 (85% of this material was considered direct to the videos in production, and the other 15% was considered indirect). c. Utility costs incurred in the production studio, $72,000. d. Depreciation recorded on the studio, cameras, and other equipment, $84,000. Three-fourths of this depreciation related to actual production of the videos, and the remainder related to equipment used in marketing and administration. e. Advertising expense incurred, $130,000. f. Costs for salaries and wages were incurred as follows: Direct labor (actors and directors) . . . . . . . . . . . Indirect labor (carpenters to build sets, costume designers, and so forth) . . . . . . . . . . Administrative salaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g. h. i. j. k. $82,000 $110,000 $95,000 Prepaid insurance expired during the year, $7,000 (80% related to production of videos, and 20% related to marketing and administrative activities). Miscellaneous marketing and administrative expenses incurred, $8,600. Studio (manufacturing) overhead was applied to videos in production. The company recorded 7,250 camera-hours of activity during the year. Videos that cost $550,000 to produce according to their job cost sheets were transferred to the finished videos warehouse to await sale and shipment. Sales for the year totaled $925,000 and were all on account. The total cost to produce these videos according to their job cost sheets was $600,000. Job-Order Costing 129 l. Collections from customers during the year totaled $850,000. m. Payments to suppliers on account during the year, $500,000; payments to employees for salaries and wages, $285,000. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Prepare a T-account for each account on the company’s balance sheet and enter the beginning balances. Record the transactions directly into the T-accounts. Prepare new T-accounts as needed. Key your entries to the letters (a) through (m) above. Compute the ending balance in each account. Is the Studio (manufacturing) Overhead account underapplied or overapplied for the year? Make an entry in the T-accounts to close any balance in the Studio Overhead account to Cost of Goods Sold. Prepare an income statement for the year. (Do not prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured; all of the information needed for the income statement is available in the T-accounts.) Cases All applicable cases are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. CASE 3–29 Ethics and the Manager [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–7] Terri Ronsin had recently been transferred to the Home Security Systems Division of National Home Products. Shortly after taking over her new position as divisional controller, she was asked to develop the division’s predetermined overhead rate for the upcoming year. The accuracy of the rate is important because it is used throughout the year and any overapplied or underapplied overhead is closed out to Cost of Goods Sold at the end of the year. National Home Products uses direct labor-hours in all of its divisions as the allocation base for manufacturing overhead. To compute the predetermined overhead rate, Terri divided her estimate of the total manufacturing overhead for the coming year by the production manager’s estimate of the total direct labor-hours for the coming year. She took her computations to the division’s general manager for approval but was quite surprised when he suggested a modification in the base. Her conversation with the general manager of the Home Security Systems Division, Harry Irving, went like this: Ronsin: Here are my calculations for next year’s predetermined overhead rate. If you approve, we can enter the rate into the computer on January 1 and be up and running in the job-order costing system right away this year. Irving: Thanks for coming up with the calculations so quickly, and they look just fine. There is, however, one slight modification I would like to see. Your estimate of the total direct labor-hours for the year is 440,000 hours. How about cutting that to about 420,000 hours? Ronsin: I don’t know if I can do that. The production manager says she will need about 440,000 direct labor-hours to meet the sales projections for the year. Besides, there are going to be over 430,000 direct labor-hours during the current year and sales are projected to be higher next year. Irving: Teri, I know all of that. I would still like to reduce the direct labor-hours in the base to something like 420,000 hours. You probably don’t know that I had an agreement with your predecessor as divisional controller to shave 5% or so off the estimated direct labor-hours every year. That way, we kept a reserve that usually resulted in a big boost to net operating income at the end of the fiscal year in December. We called it our Christmas bonus. Corporate headquarters always seemed as pleased as punch that we could pull off such a miracle at the end of the year. This system has worked well for many years, and I don’t want to change it now. Required: 1. 2. Explain how shaving 5% off the estimated direct labor-hours in the base for the predetermined overhead rate usually results in a big boost in net operating income at the end of the fiscal year. Should Terri Ronsin go along with the general manager’s request to reduce the direct laborhours in the predetermined overhead rate computation to 420,000 direct labor-hours? CASE 3–30 Plantwide versus Departmental Overhead Rates; Underapplied or Overapplied Overhead [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–3, LO3–7] “Blast it!” said David Wilson, president of Teledex Company. “We’ve just lost the bid on the Koopers job by $2,000. It seems we’re either too high to get the job or too low to make any money on half the jobs we bid.” 130 Chapter 3 Teledex Company manufactures products to customers’ specifications and operates a joborder costing system. Manufacturing overhead cost is applied to jobs on the basis of direct labor cost. The following estimates were made at the beginning of the year: Department Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . Fabricating Machining Assembly Total Plant $200,000 $350,000 $100,000 $400,000 $300,000 $90,000 $600,000 $840,000 Jobs require varying amounts of work in the three departments. The Koopers job, for example, would have required manufacturing costs in the three departments as follows: Department Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . Fabricating Machining Assembly Total Plant $3,000 $2,800 ? $200 $500 ? $1,400 $6,200 ? $4,600 $9,500 ? The company uses a plantwide overhead rate to apply manufacturing overhead cost to jobs. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Assuming use of a plantwide overhead rate: a. Compute the rate for the current year. b. Determine the amount of manufacturing overhead cost that would have been applied to the Koopers job. Suppose that instead of using a plantwide overhead rate, the company had used a separate predetermined overhead rate in each department. Under these conditions: a. Compute the rate for each department for the current year. b. Determine the amount of manufacturing overhead cost that would have been applied to the Koopers job. Explain the difference between the manufacturing overhead that would have been applied to the Koopers job using the plantwide rate in question 1 (b) and using the departmental rates in question 2 (b). Assume that it is customary in the industry to bid jobs at 150% of total manufacturing cost (direct materials, direct labor, and applied overhead). What was the company’s bid price on the Koopers job? What would the bid price have been if departmental overhead rates had been used to apply overhead cost? At the end of the year, the company assembled the following actual cost data relating to all jobs worked on during the year. Department Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . Fabricating Machining Assembly Total Plant $190,000 $210,000 $360,000 $16,000 $108,000 $420,000 $114,000 $262,000 $84,000 $320,000 $580,000 $864,000 Compute the underapplied or overapplied overhead for the year (a) assuming that a plantwide overhead rate is used, and (b) assuming that departmental overhead rates are used. Appendix 3A: Activity-Based Absorption Costing LO3–8 Use activity-based absorption costing to compute unit product costs. Chapter 3 described how manufacturing companies use traditional absorption costing systems to calculate unit product costs for the purpose of valuing inventories and determining cost of goods sold for external financial reports. In this appendix, we contrast traditional absorption costing with an alternative approach called activity-based absorption costing. Activity-based absorption costing assigns all manufacturing overhead costs to products based on the activities performed to make those products. An activity is an event that Job-Order Costing 131 causes the consumption of manufacturing overhead resources. Rather than relying on plantwide or departmental cost pools, the activity-based approach accumulates each activity’s overhead costs in activity cost pools. An activity cost pool is a “bucket” in which costs are accumulated that relate to a single activity. Each activity cost pool has one activity measure. An activity measure is an allocation base that is used as the denominator for an activity cost pool. The costs accumulated in the numerator of an activity cost pool divided by the quantity of the activity measure in its denominator equals what is called an activity rate. An activity rate is used to assign costs from an activity cost pool to products. Activity-based absorption costing differs from traditional absorption costing in two ways. First, the activity-based approach uses more cost pools than a traditional approach. Second, the activity-based approach includes some activities and activity measures that do not relate to the volume of units produced, whereas the traditional approach relies exclusively on allocation bases that are driven by the volume of production. For example, the activity-based approach may include batch-level activities. A batch-level activity is performed each time a batch is handled or processed, regardless of how many units are in the batch. Batch-level activities include tasks such as placing purchase orders, setting up equipment, and transporting batches of component parts. Costs at the batch level depend on the number of batches processed rather than the number of units produced. The activity-based approach may also include product-level activities. A product-level activity relates to specific products and typically must be carried out regardless of how many batches are run or units of product are produced and sold. Product-level activities include tasks such as designing a product and making engineering design changes to a product. Costs at the product-level depend on the number of products supported rather than the number of batches run or the number of units of product produced and sold. To illustrate the differences between traditional and activity-based absorption costing, we’ll use an example focused on Maxtar Industries, a manufacturer of high-quality smoker/barbecue units. The company has two product lines—Premium and Standard. The company has traditionally applied manufacturing overhead costs to these products using a plantwide predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor-hours. Exhibit 3A–1 details how the unit product costs of the two product lines are computed using the company’s Basic Data Total estimated manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . Total estimated direct labor-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Premium Direct materials per unit . . . . . . Direct labor per unit . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor-hours per unit . . . . Units produced . . . . . . . . . . . . . $40.00 $24.00 2.0 DLHs 50,000 units $1,520,000 400,000 DLHs Standard $30.00 $18.00 1.5 DLHs 200,000 units Computation of the Predetermined Overhead Rate Total estimated manufacturing overhead Total estimated amount of the allocation base $1,520,000 5 $3.80 per DLH 5 400,000 DLHs Predetermined overhead rate 5 Traditional Unit Product Costs Premium Standard Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead (2.0 DLHs 3 $3.80 per DLH; 1.5 DLHs 3 $3.80 per DLH) . . . . . . . . $40.00 24.00 $30.00 18.00 7.60 5.70 Unit product cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $71.60 $53.70 EXHIBIT 3A–1 Maxtar Industries’ Traditional Costing System 132 Chapter 3 traditional costing system. The unit product cost of the Premium product line is $71.60 and the unit product cost of the Standard product line is $53.70 according to this traditional costing system. Maxtar Industries has recently experimented with an activity-based absorption costing system that has three activity cost pools: (1) supporting direct labor; (2) setting up machines; and (3) parts administration. The top of Exhibit 3A–2 displays basic data concerning these activity cost pools. Note that the total estimated overhead cost in these three costs pools, $1,520,000, agrees with the total estimated overhead cost in the company’s EXHIBIT 3A–2 Maxtar Industries’ Activity-Based Absorption Costing System Basic Data Activity Cost Pools and Activity Measures Estimated Overhead Cost Premium Standard Supporting direct labor (DLHs) . . . . . . Setting up machines (setups) . . . . . . . Parts administration (part types) . . . . . $ 800,000 480,000 240,000 100,000 600 140 Total manufacturing overhead cost . . . $1,520,000 Expected Activity 300,000 200 60 Total 400,000 800 200 Computation of Activity Rates Activity Cost Pools (a) Estimated Overhead Cost (b) Total Expected Activity (a) 4 (b) Activity Rate Supporting direct labor . . . Setting up machines . . . . . Parts administration . . . . . $800,000 $480,000 $240,000 400,000 DLHs 800 setups 200 part types $2 per DLH $600 per setup $1,200 per part type Assigning Overhead Costs to Products Overhead Cost for the Premium Product (a) Activity Cost Pools Activity Rate Supporting direct labor . . . Setting up machines . . . . . Parts administration . . . . . $2 per DLH $600 per setup $1,200 per part type (b) Activity (a) 3 (b) ABC Cost 100,000 DLHs 600 setups 140 part types $200,000 360,000 168,000 Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $728,000 Overhead Cost for the Standard Product (a) Activity Cost Pools Activity Rate Supporting direct labor . . Setting up machines . . . . Parts administration . . . . $2 per DLH $600 per setup $1,200 per part type (b) Activity (a) 3 (b) ABC Cost 300,000 DLHs 200 setups 60 part types $600,000 120,000 72,000 Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $792,000 Activity-Based Absorption Costing Product Costs Premium Standard Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead ($728,000 4 50,000 units; $792,000 4 200,000 units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $40.00 24.00 $30.00 18.00 14.56 3.96 Unit product cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $78.56 $51.96 Job-Order Costing traditional costing system. The company’s activity-based approach simply provides an alternative way to allocate the company’s manufacturing overhead across the two products. The activity rates for the three activity cost pools are computed in the second table in Exhibit 3A–2. For example, the total cost in the “setting up machines” activity cost pool, $480,000, is divided by the total activity associated with that cost pool, 800 setups, to determine the activity rate of $600 per setup. The activity rates are used to allocate overhead costs to the two products in the third table in Exhibit 3A–2. For example, the activity rate for the “setting up machines” activity cost pool, $600 per setup, is multiplied by the Premium product line’s 600 setups to determine the $360,000 machine setup cost allocated to the Premium product line. The table at the bottom of Exhibit 3A–2 displays the overhead costs per unit and the activity-based unit product costs. The overhead cost per unit is determined by dividing the total overhead cost by the number of units produced. For example, the Premium product line’s total overhead cost of $728,000 is divided by 50,000 units to determine the $14.56 overhead cost per unit. Note that the unit product costs differ from those computed using the company’s traditional costing system in Exhibit 3A–1. Because the activity-based approach contains both a batch-level (setting up machines) and a product-level (parts administration) activity cost pool, the unit product costs under the activity-based approach follow the usual pattern in which overhead costs are shifted from the high-volume to the low-volume product. The unit product cost of the Standard product line, the high-volume product, has gone down from $53.70 under the traditional costing system to $51.96 under activity-based costing. In contrast, the unit product cost of the Premium product line, the low-volume product, has increased from $71.60 under the traditional costing system to $78.56 under activitybased costing. Instead of using direct labor-hours (which moves in tandem with the volume of the production) to assign all manufacturing overhead costs to products, the activity-based approach uses a batch-level activity measure and a product-level activity measure to assign the batch-level and product-level activity cost pools to the two products. Glossary (Appendix 3A) Activity An event that causes the consumption of manufacturing overhead resources. (p. 130) Activity-based absorption costing A costing method that assigns all manufacturing overhead costs to products based on the activities performed to make those products. (p. 130) Activity cost pool A “bucket” in which costs are accumulated that relate to a single activity. (p. 131) Activity measure An allocation base that is used as the denominator for an activity cost pool. (p. 131) Batch-level activity An activity that is performed each time a batch is handled or processed, regardless of how many units are in the batch. The amount of resources consumed depends on the number of batches run rather than on the number of units in the batch. (p. 131) Product-level activity An activity that relates to specific products and typically must be carried out regardless of how many batches are run or units of product are produced and sold. (p. 131) Appendix 3A Exercises and Problems All applicable exercises and problems are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. EXERCISE 3A–1 Activity-Based Absorption Costing [LO3–8] Fogerty Company makes two products, titanium Hubs and Sprockets. Data regarding the two products follow: Hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sprockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Labor-Hours per Unit Annual Production 0.80 0.40 10,000 units 40,000 units 133 134 Chapter 3 Additional information about the company follows: a. Hubs require $32 in direct materials per unit, and Sprockets require $18. b. The direct labor wage rate is $15 per hour. c. Hubs are more complex to manufacture than Sprockets and they require special processing. d. The company’s activity-based absorption costing system has the following activity cost pools: Activity Cost Pool (and Activity Measure) Machine setups (number of setups) . . . . . . . . Special processing (machine-hours) . . . . . . . General factory (Direct labor-hours) . . . . . . . . Expected Activity Estimated Overhead Cost Hubs Sprockets Total $72,000 $200,000 $816,000 100 5,000 8,000 300 0 16,000 400 5,000 24,000 Required: 1. 2. Compute the activity rate for each activity cost pool. Compute the unit product cost for Hubs and Sprockets using activity-based absorption costing. EXERCISE 3A–2 Activity-Based Absorption Costing as an Alternative to Traditional Product Costing [LO3–8] Harrison Company makes two products and uses a traditional costing system in which a single plantwide predetermined overhead rate is computed based on direct labor-hours. Data for the two products for the upcoming year follow: Direct materials cost per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor cost per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor-hours per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of units produced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rascon Parcel $13.00 $6.00 0.40 20,000 $22.00 $3.00 0.20 80,000 These products are customized to some degree for specific customers. Required: 1. 2. The company’s manufacturing overhead costs for the year are expected to be $576,000. Using the company’s traditional costing system, compute the unit product costs for the two products. Management is considering an activity-based absorption costing system in which half of the overhead would continue to be allocated on the basis of direct labor-hours and half would be allocated on the basis of engineering design time. This time is expected to be distributed as follows during the upcoming year: Engineering design time (in hours) . . . . . . . . . 3. Rascon Parcel Total 3,000 3,000 6,000 Compute the unit product costs for the two products using the proposed activity-based absorption costing system. Explain why the product costs differ between the two systems. EXERCISE 3A–3 Activity-Based Absorption Costing as an Alternative to Traditional Product Costing [LO3–8] Stillicum Corporation makes ultra light-weight backpacking tents. Data concerning the company’s two product lines appear below: Direct materials per unit . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor-hours per unit . . . . . . . . . Estimated annual production . . . . . . . Deluxe Standard $72.00 $12.00 1.0 DLHs 10,000 units $53.00 $9.60 0.8 DLHs 50,000 units Job-Order Costing The company has a traditional costing system in which manufacturing overhead is applied to units based on direct labor-hours. Data concerning manufacturing overhead and direct labor-hours for the upcoming year appear below: Estimated total manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . Estimated total direct labor-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . $325,000 50,000 DLHs Required: 1. 2. Determine the unit product costs of the Deluxe and Standard products under the company’s traditional costing system. The company is considering replacing its traditional costing system with an activity-based absorption costing system that would have the following three activity cost pools: Expected Activity Estimated Overhead Cost Deluxe Standard Total Supporting direct labor (direct labor-hours) . . . . Batch setups (setups) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety testing (tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $200,000 75,000 50,000 10,000 200 30 40,000 100 70 50,000 300 100 Total manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . . . $325,000 Activity Cost Pools and Activity Measures Determine the unit product costs of the Deluxe and Standard products under the activity-based absorption costing system. PROBLEM 3A–4 Activity-Based Absorption Costing as an Alternative to Traditional Product Costing [LO3–8] Ellix Company manufactures two models of ultra-high fidelity speakers, the X200 model and the X99 model. Data regarding the two products follow: Product X200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Labor-Hours Annual Production Total Direct Labor-Hours 1.8 DLHs per unit 0.9 DLHs per unit 5,000 units 30,000 units 9,000 DLHs 27,000 DLHs 36,000 DLHs Additional information about the company follows: a. Model X200 requires $72 in direct materials per unit, and model X99 requires $50. b. The direct labor rate is $10 per hour. c. The company has always used direct labor-hours as the base for applying manufacturing overhead cost to products. d. Model X200 is more complex to manufacture than model X99 and requires the use of special equipment. e. Because of the special work required in (d) above, the company is considering the use of activity-based absorption costing to apply manufacturing overhead cost to products. Three activity cost pools have been identified as follows: Activity Cost Pool Machine setups . . . . . . . . . Special processing . . . . . . General factory . . . . . . . . . Estimated Total Activity Activity Measure Estimated Total Cost X200 X99 Total Number of setups Machine-hours Direct labor-hours $ 360,000 180,000 1,260,000 50 12,000 9,000 100 0 27,000 150 12,000 36,000 $1,800,000 135 136 Chapter 3 Required: 1. 2 3. Assume that the company continues to use direct labor-hours as the base for applying overhead cost to products. a. Compute the predetermined overhead rate. b. Compute the unit product cost of each model. Assume that the company decides to use activity-based absorption costing to apply overhead cost to products. a. Compute the activity rate for each activity cost pool and determine the amount of overhead cost that would be applied to each model using the activity-based approach. b. Compute the unit product cost of each model. Explain why overhead cost shifted from the high-volume model to the low-volume model under the activity-based approach. PROBLEM 3A–5 Activity-Based Absorption Costing as an Alternative to Traditional Product Costing [LO3–8] Siegel Company manufactures a product that is available in both a deluxe model and a regular model. The company has manufactured the regular model for years. The deluxe model was introduced several years ago to tap a new segment of the market. Since introduction of the deluxe model, the company’s profits have steadily declined and management has become increasingly concerned about the accuracy of its costing system. Sales of the deluxe model have been increasing rapidly. Manufacturing overhead is assigned to products on the basis of direct labor-hours. For the current year, the company has estimated that it will incur $900,000 in manufacturing overhead cost and produce 5,000 units of the deluxe model and 40,000 units of the regular model. The deluxe model requires two hours of direct labor time per unit, and the regular model requires one hour. Material and labor costs per unit are as follows: Model Deluxe Regular $40 $14 $25 $7 Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required: 1. 2. Using direct labor-hours as the base for assigning overhead cost to products, compute the predetermined overhead rate. Using this rate and other data from the problem, determine the unit product cost of each model. Management is considering using activity-based absorption costing to apply manufacturing overhead cost to products. The activity-based system would have the following four activity cost pools: Activity Cost Pool Purchasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scrap/rework . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity Measure Estimated Overhead Cost Purchase orders issued Machine-hours Scrap/rework orders issued Number of shipments $204,000 182,000 379,000 135,000 $900,000 Expected Activity Activity Measure Deluxe Regular Total Purchase orders issued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scrap/rework orders issued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of shipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 20,000 1,000 250 400 15,000 1,000 650 600 35,000 2,000 900 Determine the predetermined overhead rate for each of the four activity cost pools. Job-Order Costing 3. 4. Using the predetermined overhead rates you computed in part (2), do the following: a. Compute the total amount of manufacturing overhead cost that would be applied to each model using the activity-based absorption costing system. After these totals have been computed, determine the amount of manufacturing overhead cost per unit of each model. b. Compute the unit product cost of each model (direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead). From the data you have developed in parts (1) through (3), identify factors that may account for the company’s declining profits. CASE 3A–6 Activity-Based Absorption Costing and Pricing [LO3–8] Java Source, Inc. (JSI), is a processor and distributor of a variety of blends of coffee. The company buys coffee beans from around the world and roasts, blends, and packages them for resale. JSI offers a large variety of different coffees that it sells to gourmet shops in one-pound bags. The major cost of the coffee is raw materials. However, the company’s predominantly automated roasting, blending, and packing processes require a substantial amount of manufacturing overhead. The company uses relatively little direct labor. Some of JSI’s coffees are very popular and sell in large volumes, while a few of the newer blends sell in very low volumes. JSI prices its coffees at manufacturing cost plus a markup of 25%, with some adjustments made to keep the company’s prices competitive. For the coming year, JSI’s budget includes estimated manufacturing overhead cost of $2,200,000. JSI assigns manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of direct labor-hours. The expected direct labor cost totals $600,000, which represents 50,000 hours of direct labor time. Based on the sales budget and expected raw materials costs, the company will purchase and use $5,000,000 of raw materials (mostly coffee beans) during the year. The expected costs for direct materials and direct labor for one-pound bags of two of the company’s coffee products appear below. Kenya Dark Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor (0.02 hours per bag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viet Select $4.50 $0.24 $2.90 $0.24 JSI’s controller believes that the company’s traditional costing system may be providing misleading cost information. To determine whether or not this is correct, the controller has prepared an analysis of the year’s expected manufacturing overhead costs, as shown in the following table: Activity Cost Pool Purchasing . . . . . . . . . . . . Material handling . . . . . . . Quality control . . . . . . . . . Roasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity Measure Expected Activity for the Year Expected Cost for the Year Purchase orders Number of setups Number of batches Roasting hours Blending hours Packaging hours 2,000 orders 1,000 setups 500 batches 95,000 roasting hours 32,000 blending hours 24,000 packaging hours $ 560,000 193,000 90,000 1,045,000 192,000 120,000 Total manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . $2,200,000 Data regarding the expected production of Kenya Dark and Viet Select coffee are presented below. Expected sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Batch size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purchase order size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roasting time per 100 pounds . . . . . . Blending time per 100 pounds . . . . . . Packaging time per 100 pounds . . . . . Kenya Dark Viet Select 80,000 pounds 5,000 pounds 2 per batch 20,000 pounds 1.5 roasting hours 0.5 blending hours 0.3 packaging hours 4,000 pounds 500 pounds 2 per batch 500 pounds 1.5 roasting hours 0.5 blending hours 0.3 packaging hours 137 138 Chapter 3 Required: 1. 2. 3. Using direct labor-hours as the base for assigning manufacturing overhead cost to products, do the following: a. Determine the predetermined overhead rate that will be used during the year. b. Determine the unit product cost of one pound of the Kenya Dark coffee and one pound of the Viet Select coffee. Using activity-based absorption costing as the basis for assigning manufacturing overhead cost to products, do the following: a. Determine the total amount of manufacturing overhead cost assigned to the Kenya Dark coffee and to the Viet Select coffee for the year. b. Using the data developed in (2a) above, compute the amount of manufacturing overhead cost per pound of the Kenya Dark coffee and the Viet Select coffee. Round all computations to the nearest whole cent. c. Determine the unit product cost of one pound of the Kenya Dark coffee and one pound of the Viet Select coffee. Write a brief memo to the president of JSI explaining what you have found in (1) and (2) above and discussing the implications to the company of using direct labor as the base for assigning manufacturing overhead cost to products. (CMA, adapted) Appendix 3B: The Predetermined Overhead Rate and Capacity LO3–9 Understand the implications of basing the predetermined overhead rate on activity at capacity rather than on estimated activity for the period. Companies typically base their predetermined overhead rates on the estimated, or budgeted, amount of the allocation base for the upcoming period. This is the method that is used in the chapter, but it is a practice that is often criticized based on the accounting for fixed manufacturing overhead costs.1 As we shall see, the critics argue that, in general, too much fixed manufacturing overhead cost is applied to products. To focus on this issue, we will make two simplifying assumptions in this appendix: (1) we will consider only fixed manufacturing overhead; and (2) we will assume that the actual fixed manufacturing overhead at the end of the period is the same as the estimated, or budgeted, fixed manufacturing overhead at the beginning of the period. Neither of these assumptions is entirely realistic. Ordinarily, some manufacturing overhead is variable and even fixed costs can differ from what was expected at the beginning of the period, but making those assumptions enables us to focus on the primary issues the critics raise. An example will help us to understand the controversy. Prahad Corporation manufactures music CDs for local recording studios. The company’s CD duplicating machine is capable of producing a new CD every 10 seconds from a master CD. The company leases the CD duplicating machine for $180,000 per year, and this is the company’s only manufacturing overhead cost. With allowances for setups and maintenance, the machine is theoretically capable of producing up to 900,000 CDs per year. However, due to weak retail sales of CDs, the company’s commercial customers are unlikely to order more than 600,000 CDs next year. The company uses machine time as the allocation base for applying manufacturing overhead to CDs. These data are summarized below: Prahad Corporation Data Total manufacturing overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . Allocation base—machine time per CD . . . . . . Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Budgeted output for next year . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 $180,000 per year 10 seconds per CD 900,000 CDs per year 600,000 CDs Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 151: Inventory Costs and International Accounting Standard 2: Inventories require allocating fixed manufacturing overhead costs to products based on normal capacity. Normal capacity reflects the level of output expected to be produced over numerous periods under normal circumstances. This definition mirrors the language used in this book that refers to basing the predetermined overhead rate on the estimated, or budgeted, amount of the allocation base for the upcoming period. Job-Order Costing If Prahad follows common practice and computes its predetermined overhead rate using estimated or budgeted figures, then its predetermined overhead rate for next year would be $0.03 per second of machine time computed as follows: Predetermined _____________________________________ Estimated total manufacturing overhead cost overhead rate 5 Estimated total amount of the allocation base $180,000 5 _____________________________ 600,000 CDs 3 10 seconds per CD 5 $0.03 per second Because each CD requires 10 seconds of machine time, each CD will be charged for $0.30 of overhead cost. Critics charge that there are two problems with this procedure. First, if predetermined overhead rates are based on budgeted activity and overhead includes significant fixed costs, then the unit product costs will fluctuate depending on the budgeted level of activity for the period. For example, if the budgeted output for the year was only 300,000 CDs, the predetermined overhead rate would be $0.06 per second of machine time or $0.60 per CD rather than $0.30 per CD. In general, if budgeted output falls, the overhead cost per unit will increase; it will appear that the CDs cost more to make. Managers may then be tempted to increase prices at the worst possible time—just as demand is falling. Second, critics charge that under the traditional approach, products are charged for resources that they don’t use. When the fixed costs of capacity are spread over estimated activity, the units that are produced must shoulder the costs of unused capacity. That is why the applied overhead cost per unit increases as the level of activity falls. The critics argue that products should be charged only for the capacity that they use; they should not be charged for the capacity they don’t use. This can be accomplished by basing the predetermined overhead rate on capacity as follows: Estimated total manufacturing overhead cost at capacity Predetermined overhead 5 ______________________________________________ rate based on capacity Estimated total amount of the allocation base at capacity $180,000 5 _____________________________ 900,000 CDs 3 10 seconds per CD 5 $0.02 per second It is important to realize that the numerator in this predetermined overhead rate is the estimated total manufacturing overhead cost at capacity. In general, the numerator in a predetermined overhead rate is the estimated total manufacturing overhead cost for the level of activity in the denominator. Ordinarily, the estimated total manufacturing overhead cost at capacity will be larger than the estimated total manufacturing overhead cost at the estimated level of activity. The estimated level of activity in this case was 600,000 CDs (or 6 million seconds of machine time), whereas capacity is 900,000 CDs (or 9 million seconds of machine time). The estimated total manufacturing overhead cost at 600,000 CDs was $180,000. This also happens to be the estimated total manufacturing overhead cost at 900,000 CDs, but that only happens because we have assumed that the manufacturing overhead is entirely fixed. If manufacturing overhead contained any variable element, the total manufacturing overhead would be larger at 900,000 CDs than at 600,000 CDs and, in that case, the predetermined overhead rate should reflect that fact. At any rate, returning to the computation of the predetermined overhead rate based on capacity, the predetermined overhead rate is $0.02 per second and so the overhead cost applied to each CD would be $0.20. This charge is constant and would not be affected by the level of activity during a period. If output falls, the charge would still be $0.20 per CD. This method will almost certainly result in underapplied overhead. If actual output at Prahad Corporation is 600,000 CDs, then only $120,000 of overhead cost would be applied to products ($0.20 per CD 3 600,000 CDs). Because the actual overhead cost is $180,000, overhead would be underapplied by $60,000. Because we are assuming that 139 140 Chapter 3 manufacturing overhead is entirely fixed and that actual manufacturing overhead equals the manufacturing overhead as estimated at the beginning of the year, the underapplied overhead represents the cost of unused capacity. In other words, if there had been no unused capacity, there would have been no underapplied overhead. The critics suggest that the underapplied overhead that results from unused capacity should be separately disclosed on the income statement as the Cost of Unused Capacity—a period expense. Disclosing this cost as a lump sum of $60,000 on the income statement, rather than burying it in Cost of Goods Sold or ending inventories, makes it much more visible to managers. An example of such an income statement appears below: Prahad Corporation Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31 Sales1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,200,000 1,080,000 Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other expenses: Cost of unused capacity3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses4 . . . . . 120,000 Net operating loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $60,000 90,000 150,000 $ (30,000) 1 Assume sales of 600,000 CDs at $2 per CD. Assume the unit product cost of the CDs is $1.80, including $0.20 for manufacturing overhead. 3 See the calculations in the text on the prior page. Underapplied overhead is $60,000. 4 Assume selling and administrative expenses total $90,000. 2 Appendix 3B: Exercises and Problems All applicable exercises and problems are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. EXERCISE 3B–1 Overhead Rate Based on Capacity [LO3–9] Wixis Cabinets makes custom wooden cabinets for high-end stereo systems from specialty woods. The company uses a job-order costing system. The capacity of the plant is determined by the capacity of its constraint, which is time on the automated bandsaw that makes finely beveled cuts in wood according to the preprogrammed specifications of each cabinet. The bandsaw can operate up to 180 hours per month. The estimated total manufacturing overhead at capacity is $14,760 per month. The company bases its predetermined overhead rate on capacity, so its predetermined overhead rate is $82 per hour of bandsaw use. The results of a recent month’s operations appear below: Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beginning inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor (all variable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead incurred . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expense . . . . . . . . . Actual hours of bandsaw use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $43,740 $0 $0 $5,350 $8,860 $14,220 $8,180 150 Required: 1. 2. Prepare an income statement following the example in Appendix 3B in which any underapplied overhead is directly recorded on the income statement as an expense. Why is overhead ordinarily underapplied when the predetermined overhead rate is based on capacity? Job-Order Costing EXERCISE 3B–2 Overhead Rates and Capacity Issues [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–7, LO3–9] Security Pension Services helps clients to set up and administer pension plans that are in compliance with tax laws and regulatory requirements. The firm uses a job-order costing system in which overhead is applied to clients’ accounts on the basis of professional staff hours charged to the accounts. Data concerning two recent years appear below: Estimated professional staff hours to be charged to clients’ accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimated overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Professional staff hours available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2012 2013 4,600 $310,500 6,000 4,500 $310,500 6,000 “Professional staff hours available” is a measure of the capacity of the firm. Any hours available that are not charged to clients’ accounts represent unused capacity. All of the firm’s overhead is fixed. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Marta Brinksi is an established client whose pension plan was set up many years ago. In both 2012 and 2013, only 2.5 hours of professional staff time were charged to Ms. Brinksi’s account. If the company bases its predetermined overhead rate on the estimated overhead cost and the estimated professional staff hours to be charged to clients, how much overhead cost would have been applied to Ms. Brinksi’s account in 2012? In 2013? Suppose that the company bases its predetermined overhead rate on the estimated overhead cost and the estimated professional staff hours to be charged to clients as in (1) above. Also suppose that the actual professional staff hours charged to clients’ accounts and the actual overhead costs turn out to be exactly as estimated in both years. By how much would the overhead be underapplied or overapplied in 2012? In 2013? Refer back to the data concerning Ms. Brinksi in (1) above. If the company bases its predetermined overhead rate on the professional staff hours available, how much overhead cost would have been applied to Ms. Brinksi’s account in 2012? In 2013? Suppose that the company bases its predetermined overhead rate on the professional staff hours available as in (3) above. Also suppose that the actual professional staff hours charged to clients’ accounts and the actual overhead costs turn out to be exactly as estimated in both years. By how much would the overhead be underapplied or overapplied in 2012? In 2013? PROBLEM 3B–3 Predetermined Overhead Rate and Capacity [LO3–1, LO3–2, LO3–7, LO3–9] Platinum Tracks, Inc., is a small audio recording studio located in Los Angeles. The company handles work for advertising agencies—primarily for radio ads—and has a few singers and bands as clients. Platinum Tracks handles all aspects of recording from editing to making a digital master from which CDs can be copied. The competition in the audio recording industry in Los Angeles has always been tough, but it has been getting even tougher over the last several years. The studio has been losing customers to newer studios that are equipped with more up-to-date equipment and that are able to offer very attractive prices and excellent service. Summary data concerning the last two years of operations follow: Estimated hours of studio service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimated studio overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual hours of studio service provided . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual studio overhead cost incurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hours of studio service at capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2012 2013 1,000 $160,000 750 $160,000 1,600 800 $160,000 500 $160,000 1,600 The company applies studio overhead to recording jobs on the basis of the hours of studio service provided. For example, 40 hours of studio time were required to record, edit, and master the Verde Baja music CD for a local Latino band. All of the studio overhead is fixed, and the actual overhead cost incurred was exactly as estimated at the beginning of the year in both 2012 and 2013. Required: 1. Platinum Tracks computes its predetermined overhead rate at the beginning of each year based on the estimated studio overhead and the estimated hours of studio service for the year. How much overhead would have been applied to the Verde Baja job if it had been done in 2012? In 2013? By how much would overhead have been underapplied or overapplied in 2012? In 2013? 141 142 Chapter 3 2. 3. 4. The president of Platinum Tracks has heard that some companies in the industry have changed to a system of computing the predetermined overhead rate at the beginning of each year based on the hours of studio service that could be provided at capacity. He would like to know what effect this method would have on job costs. How much overhead would have been applied using this method to the Verde Baja job if it had been done in 2012? In 2013? By how much would overhead have been underapplied or overapplied in 2012 using this method? In 2013? How would you interpret the underapplied or overapplied overhead that results from using studio hours at capacity to compute the predetermined overhead rate? What fundamental business problem is Platinum Tracks facing? Which method of computing the predetermined overhead rate is likely to be more helpful in facing this problem? Explain. CASE 3B–4 Ethics; Predetermined Overhead Rate and Capacity [LO3–2, LO3–7, LO3–9] Pat Miranda, the new controller of Vault Hard Drives, Inc., has just returned from a seminar on the choice of the activity level in the predetermined overhead rate. Even though the subject did not sound exciting at first, she found that there were some important ideas presented that should get a hearing at her company. After returning from the seminar, she arranged a meeting with the production manager, J. Stevens, and the assistant production manager, Marvin Washington. Pat: I ran across an idea that I wanted to check out with both of you. It’s about the way we compute predetermined overhead rates. J.: We’re all ears. Pat: We compute the predetermined overhead rate by dividing the estimated total factory overhead for the coming year, which is all a fixed cost, by the estimated total units produced for the coming year. Marvin: We’ve been doing that as long as I’ve been with the company. J.: And it has been done that way at every other company I’ve worked at, except at most places they divide by direct labor-hours. Pat: We use units because it is simpler and we basically make one product with minor variations. But, there’s another way to do it. Instead of basing the overhead rate on the estimated total units produced for the coming year, we could base it on the total units produced at capacity. Marvin: Oh, the Marketing Department will love that. It will drop the costs on all of our products. They’ll go wild over there cutting prices. Pat: That is a worry, but I wanted to talk to both of you first before going over to Marketing. J.: Aren’t you always going to have a lot of underapplied overhead? Pat: That’s correct, but let me show you how we would handle it. Here’s an example based on our budget for next year. Budgeted (estimated) production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Budgeted sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling price . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total manufacturing overhead cost (all fixed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative and selling expenses (all fixed) . . . . . . . . . . . . Beginning inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,000 units 160,000 units 200,000 units $60 per unit $15 per unit $4,000,000 $2,700,000 $0 Traditional Approach to Computation of the Predetermined Overhead Rate Estimated total manufacturing overhead cost, $4,000,000 ______________________________________________ Estimated total units produced, 160,000 5 $25 per unit Budgeted Income Statement Revenue (160,000 units 3 $60 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold: Variable manufacturing (160,000 units 3 $15 per unit) . . . . . Manufacturing overhead applied (160,000 units 3 $25 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $9,600,000 $2,400,000 4,000,000 6,400,000 Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,200,000 2,700,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 500,000 Job-Order Costing New Approach to Computation of the Predetermined Overhead Rate Using Capacity in the Denominator Estimated total manufacturing overhead cost at capacity, $4,000,000 _______________________________________________________ 5 $20 per unit Total units at capacity, 200,000 Budgeted Income Statement Revenue (160,000 units 3 $60 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold: Variable manufacturing (160,000 units 3 $15 per unit) . . . Manufacturing overhead applied (160,000 units 3 $20 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $9,600,000 $2,400,000 3,200,000 5,600,000 Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of unused capacity [(200,000 units 2 160,000 units) 3 $20 per unit] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,000,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 500,000 800,000 2,700,000 J.: Whoa!! I don’t think I like the looks of that “Cost of unused capacity.” If that thing shows up on the income statement, someone from headquarters is likely to come down here looking for some people to lay off. Marvin: I’m worried about something else too. What happens when sales are not up to expectations? Can we pull the “hat trick”? Pat: I’m sorry, I don’t understand. J.: Marvin’s talking about something that happens fairly regularly. When sales are down and profits look like they are going to be lower than the president told the owners they were going to be, the president comes down here and asks us to deliver some more profits. Marvin: And we pull them out of our hat. J.: Yeah, we just increase production until we get the profits we want. Pat: I still don’t understand. You mean you increase sales? J.: Nope, we increase production. We’re the production managers, not the sales managers. Pat: I get it. Because you have produced more, the sales force has more units it can sell. J.: Nope, the marketing people don’t do a thing. We just build inventories and that does the trick. Required: In all of the questions below, assume that the predetermined overhead rate under the traditional method is $25 per unit, and under the new method it is $20 per unit. Also assume that under the traditional method any underapplied or overapplied overhead is taken directly to the income statement as an adjustment to Cost of Goods Sold. 1. Suppose actual production is 160,000 units. Compute the net operating incomes that would be realized under the traditional and new methods if actual sales are 150,000 units and everything else turns out as expected. 2. How many units would have to be produced under each of the methods in order to realize the budgeted net operating income of $500,000 if actual sales are 150,000 units and everything else turns out as expected? 3. What effect does the new method based on capacity have on the volatility of net operating income? 4. Will the “hat trick” be easier or harder to perform if the new method based on capacity is used? 5. Do you think the “hat trick” is ethical? 143 CHAPTER 4 Process Costing Costing the “Quicker-Picker-Upper” BUSIN ESS FO CUS If you have ever spilled milk, there is a good chance that you used Bounty paper towels to clean up the mess. Procter & Gamble (P&G) manufactures Bounty in two main processing departments—Paper Making and Paper Converting. In the Paper Making Department, wood pulp is converted into paper and then spooled into 2,000 pound rolls. In the Paper Converting Department, two of the 2,000 pound rolls of paper are simultaneously unwound into a machine that creates a two-ply paper towel that is decorated, perforated, and embossed to create texture. The large sheets of paper towels that emerge from this process are wrapped around a cylindrical cardboard core measuring eight feet in length. Once enough sheets wrap around the core, the eight foot roll is cut into individual rolls of Bounty that are sent down a conveyor to be wrapped, packed, and shipped. In this type of manufacturing environment, costs cannot be readily traced to individual rolls of Bounty; however, given the homogeneous nature of the product, the total costs incurred in the Paper Making Department can be spread uniformly across its output of 2,000 pound rolls of paper. Similarly, the total costs incurred in the Paper Converting Department (including the cost of the 2,000 pound rolls that are transferred in from the Paper Making Department) can be spread uniformly across the number of cases of Bounty produced. P&G uses a similar costing approach for many of its products such as Tide, Crest toothpaste, and Dawn dishwashing liquid. ■ LEARNING OBJECTIVES Source: Conversation with Brad Bays, formerly a Procter & Gamble financial executive. 144 After studying Chapter 4, you should be able to: LO4–1 Record the flow of materials, labor, and overhead through a process costing system. LO4–2 Compute the equivalent units of production using the weightedaverage method. LO4–3 Compute the cost per equivalent unit using the weighted-average method. LO4–4 Assign costs to units using the weighted-average method. LO4–5 Prepare a cost reconciliation report. LO4–6 (Appendix 4A) Compute the equivalent units of production using the FIFO method. LO4–7 (Appendix 4A) Compute the cost per equivalent unit using the FIFO method. LO4–8 (Appendix 4A) Assign costs to units using the FIFO method. LO4–9 (Appendix 4A) Prepare a cost reconciliation report using the FIFO method. LO4–10 (Appendix 4B) Allocate service department costs to operating departments using the direct method. LO4–11 (Appendix 4B) Allocate service department costs to operating departments using the step-down method. Process Costing ob-order costing and process costing are two common methods for determining unit product costs. As explained in the previous chapter, job-order costing is used when many different jobs or products are worked on each period. Examples of industries that use job-order costing include furniture manufacturing, special-order printing, shipbuilding, and many types of service organizations. By contrast, process costing is used most commonly in industries that convert raw materials into homogeneous (i.e., uniform) products, such as bricks, soda, or paper, on a continuous basis. Examples of companies that would use process costing include Reynolds Consumer Products (aluminum ingots), Scott Paper (paper towels), General Mills (flour), ExxonMobil (gasoline and lubricating oils), Coppertone (sunscreens), and Kellogg’s (breakfast cereals). In addition, process costing is sometimes used in companies with assembly operations. A form of process costing may also be used in utilities that produce gas, water, and electricity. Our purpose in this chapter is to explain how product costing works in a process costing system. J Comparison of Job-Order and Process Costing In some ways process costing is very similar to job-order costing, and in some ways it is very different. In this section, we focus on these similarities and differences to provide a foundation for the detailed discussion of process costing that follows. Similarities between Job-Order and Process Costing Much of what you learned in the previous chapter about costing and cost flows applies equally well to process costing in this chapter. We are not throwing out all that we have learned about costing and starting from “scratch” with a whole new system. The similarities between job-order and process costing can be summarized as follows: 1. Both systems have the same basic purposes—to assign material, labor, and manufacturing overhead costs to products and to provide a mechanism for computing unit product costs. 2. Both systems use the same basic manufacturing accounts, including Manufacturing Overhead, Raw Materials, Work in Process, and Finished Goods. 3. The flow of costs through the manufacturing accounts is basically the same in both systems. As can be seen from this comparison, much of the knowledge that you have already acquired about costing is applicable to a process costing system. Our task now is to refine and extend your knowledge to process costing. Differences between Job-Order and Process Costing There are three differences between job-order and process costing. First, process costing is used when a company produces a continuous flow of units that are indistinguishable from one another. Job-order costing is used when a company produces many different jobs that have unique production requirements. Second, under process costing, it makes no sense to try to identify materials, labor, and overhead costs with a particular customer order (as we did with job-order costing) because each order is just one of many that are filled from a continuous flow of virtually identical units from the production line. Accordingly, process costing accumulates costs by department (rather than by order) and assigns these costs uniformly to all units that pass through the department during a period. Job cost sheets (which we used for job-order costing) are not used to accumulate costs. Third, process costing systems compute 145 146 Chapter 4 EXHIBIT 4–1 Differences between Job-Order and Process Costing Job-Order Costing Process Costing 1. Many different jobs are worked on during each period, with each job having different production requirements. 2. Costs are accumulated by individual job. 3. Unit costs are computed by job on the job cost sheet. 1. A single product is produced either on a continuous basis or for long periods of time. All units of product are identical. 2. Costs are accumulated by department. 3. Unit costs are computed by department. unit costs by department. This differs from job-order costing where unit costs are computed by job on the job cost sheet. Exhibit 4–1 summarizes the differences just described. Cost Flows in Process Costing Before going through a detailed example of process costing, it will be helpful to see how, in a general way, manufacturing costs flow through a process costing system. Processing Departments A processing department is an organizational unit where work is performed on a product and where materials, labor, or overhead costs are added to the product. For example, a Nalley’s potato chip factory might have three processing departments—one for preparing potatoes, one for cooking, and one for inspecting and packaging. A brick factory might have two processing departments—one for mixing and molding clay into brick form and one for firing the molded brick. Some products and services may go through a number of processing departments, while others may go through only one or two. Regardless of the number of processing departments, they all have two essential features. First, the activity in the processing department is performed uniformly on all of the units passing through it. Second, the output of the processing department is homogeneous; in other words, all of the units produced are identical. Products in a process costing environment, such as bricks or potato chips, typically flow in sequence from one department to another as in Exhibit 4–2. EXHIBIT 4–2 Sequential Processing Departments Processing costs Basic raw material inputs (potatoes) Processing Department (potato preparation) Processing costs Partially completed goods (prepared potatoes) Processing Department (cooking) Processing costs Partially completed goods (cooked potato chips) Processing Department (inspecting and packing) Finished goods (packaged potato chips) Process Costing 147 IN BUSINESS MONKS MAKE A LIVING SELLING BEER The Trappist monks of St. Sixtus monastery in Belgium have been brewing beer since 1839. Customers must make an appointment with the monastery to buy a maximum of two 24-bottle cases per month. The scarce and highly prized beer sells for more than $15 per 11-ounce bottle. The monk’s brewing ingredients include water, malt, hops, sugar, and yeast. The sequential steps of the beer-making process include grinding and crushing the malt grain, brewing by adding water to the crushed malt, filtering to separate a liquid called wort from undissolved grain particles, boiling to sterilize the wort (including adding sugar to increase the density of the wort), fermentation by adding yeast to convert sugar into alcohol and carbon dioxide, storage where the beer is aged for at least three weeks, and bottling where more sugar and yeast are added to enable two weeks of additional fermentation in the bottle. Unlike growth-oriented for-profit companies, the monastery has not expanded its production capacity since 1946, seeking instead to sell just enough beer to sustain the monks’ modest lifestyle. Source: John W. Miller, “Trappist Command: Thou Shalt Not Buy Too Much of Our Beer,” The Wall Street Journal, November 29, 2007, pp. A1 and A14. The Flow of Materials, Labor, and Overhead Costs Cost accumulation is simpler in a process costing system than in a job-order costing system. In a process costing system, instead of having to trace costs to hundreds of different jobs, costs are traced to only a few processing departments. A T-account model of materials, labor, and overhead cost flows in a process costing system is shown in Exhibit 4–3. Several key points should be noted from this exhibit. First, note that a separate Work in Process account is maintained for each processing department. EXHIBIT 4–3 T-Account Model of Process Costing Flows Raw Materials Wages Payable Manufacturing Overhead Work in Process— Department A XXX Work in Process— Department B XXX XXX Finished Goods XXX Cost of Goods Sold XXX 148 Chapter 4 In contrast, in a job-order costing system the entire company may have only one Work in Process account. Second, note that the completed production of the first processing department (Department A in the exhibit) is transferred to the Work in Process account of the second processing department (Department B). After further work in Department B, the completed units are then transferred to Finished Goods. (In Exhibit 4–3, we show only two processing departments, but a company can have many processing departments.) Finally, note that materials, labor, and overhead costs can be added in any processing department—not just the first. Costs in Department B’s Work in Process account consist of the materials, labor, and overhead costs incurred in Department B plus the costs attached to partially completed units transferred in from Department A (called transferred-in costs). Materials, Labor, and Overhead Cost Entries LO4–1 Record the flow of materials, labor, and overhead through a process costing system. To complete our discussion of cost flows in a process costing system, in this section we show journal entries relating to materials, labor, and overhead costs at Megan’s Classic Cream Soda, a company that has two processing departments—Formulating and Bottling. In the Formulating Department, ingredients are checked for quality and then mixed and injected with carbon dioxide to create bulk cream soda. In the Bottling Department, bottles are checked for defects, filled with cream soda, capped, visually inspected again for defects, and then packed for shipping. Materials Costs As in job-order costing, materials are drawn from the storeroom using a materials requisition form. Materials can be added in any processing department, although it is not unusual for materials to be added only in the first processing department, with subsequent departments adding only labor and overhead costs. At Megan’s Classic Cream Soda, some materials (i.e., water, flavors, sugar, and carbon dioxide) are added in the Formulating Department and some materials (i.e., bottles, caps, and packing materials) are added in the Bottling Department. The journal entry to record the materials used in the first processing department, the Formulating Department, is as follows: Work in Process—Formulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX Raw Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX The journal entry to record the materials used in the second processing department, the Bottling Department, is as follows: Work in Process—Bottling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX Raw Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX Labor Costs In process costing, labor costs are traced to departments—not to individual jobs. The following journal entry records the labor costs in the Formulating Department at Megan’s Classic Cream Soda: Work in Process—Formulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX Salaries and Wages Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX A similar entry would be made to record labor costs in the Bottling Department. Overhead Costs In process costing, as in job-order costing, predetermined overhead rates are usually used. Manufacturing overhead cost is applied according to the amount of the allocation base that is incurred in the department. The following journal entry records the overhead cost applied in the Formulating Department: Work in Process—Formulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX XXX A similar entry would be made to apply manufacturing overhead costs in the Bottling Department. Process Costing 149 Completing the Cost Flows Once processing has been completed in a department, the units are transferred to the next department for further processing, as illustrated in the T-accounts in Exhibit 4–3. The following journal entry transfers the cost of partially completed units from the Formulating Department to the Bottling Department: Work in Process—Bottling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX Work in Process—Formulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX After processing has been completed in the Bottling Department, the costs of the completed units are transferred to the Finished Goods inventory account: Finished Goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX XXX Work in Process—Bottling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finally, when a customer’s order is filled and units are sold, the cost of the units is transferred to Cost of Goods Sold: Cost of Goods Sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX Finished Goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX To summarize, the cost flows between accounts are basically the same in a process costing system as they are in a job-order costing system. The only difference at this point is that in a process costing system each department has a separate Work in Process account. THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN LABOR RATES AND LABOR COST IN BUSINESS The emergence of China as a global competitor has increased the need for managers to understand the difference between labor rates and labor cost. Labor rates reflect the amount paid to employees per hour or month. Labor costs measure the employee compensation paid per unit of output. For example, Tenneco has plants in Shanghai, China, and Litchfield, Michigan, that both manufacture exhaust systems for automobiles. The monthly labor rate per employee at the Shanghai plant ranges from $210–$250, whereas the same figure for the Litchfield plant ranges from $1,880–$4,064. A naïve interpretation of these labor rates would be to automatically assume that the Shanghai plant is the lower labor cost facility. A wiser comparison of the two plants’ labor costs would account for the fact that the Litchfield plant produced 1.4 million exhaust systems in 2005 compared to 400,000 units at the Shanghai plant, while having only 20% more employees than the Shanghai plant. Source: Alex Taylor III, “A Tale of Two Factories,” Fortune, September 18, 2006, pp. 118–126. We now turn our attention to Double Diamond Skis, a company that manufactures a high-performance deep-powder ski, and that uses process costing to determine its unit product costs. The company’s production process is illustrated in Exhibit 4–4. Skis go through a sequence of five processing departments, starting with the Shaping and Milling Department and ending with the Finishing and Pairing Department. The basic idea in process costing is to add together all of the costs incurred in a department during a period and then to spread those costs uniformly across the units processed in that department during that period. As we shall see, applying this simple idea involves a few complications. Equivalent Units of Production After materials, labor, and overhead costs have been accumulated in a department, the department’s output must be determined so that unit product costs can be computed. The difficulty is that a department usually has some partially completed units in its ending 150 EXHIBIT 4–4 The Production Process at Double Diamond Skis* Graphics Application Department Molding Department X-FACTOR X-FACTOR X-FACTOR X-FACTOR X-FACTOR X-FACTOR Shaping and Milling Department X-FACTOR X-FACTOR X-FACTOR Finished Goods X-FACTOR A skilled technician selects skis to form a pair and adjusts the skis’ camber. *Adapted from Bill Gout, Jesse James Doquilo, and Studio M D, “Capped Crusaders,” Skiing, October 1993, pp. 138–144. X-FACTOR X-FACTOR The semi-finished skis are tuned by stone grinding and belt sanding. The ski edges are beveled and polished. Finishing and Pairing Department X-FACTOR X-FACTOR X-FACTOR The wooden core and various layers are stacked in a mold, polyurethane foam is injected into the mold, and then the mold is placed in a press that fuses the parts together. X-FACTOR X-FACTOR Grinding and Sanding Department Graphics are applied to the back of clear plastic top sheets using a heat-transfer process. X-FACTOR X-FACTOR Computer-assisted milling machines shape the wood core and aluminum sheets that serve as the backbone of the ski. Process Costing 151 inventory. It does not seem reasonable to count these partially completed units as equivalent to fully completed units when counting the department’s output. Therefore, these partially completed units are translated into an equivalent number of fully completed units. In process costing, this translation is done using the following formula: Equivalent units 5 Number of partially completed units 3 Percentage completion As the formula states, equivalent units is the product of the number of partially completed units and the percentage completion of those units with respect to the processing in the department. Roughly speaking, the equivalent units is the number of complete units that could have been obtained from the materials and effort that went into the partially complete units. For example, suppose the Molding Department at Double Diamond has 500 units in its ending work in process inventory that are 60% complete with respect to processing in the department. These 500 partially complete units are equivalent to 300 fully complete units (500 3 60% 5 300). Therefore, the ending work in process inventory contains 300 equivalent units. These equivalent units are added to any units completed during the period to determine the department’s output for the period—called the equivalent units of production. Equivalent units of production for a period can be computed in different ways. In this chapter, we discuss the weighted-average method. In Appendix 4A, we discuss the FIFO method. The FIFO method of process costing is a method in which equivalent units and unit costs relate only to work done during the current period. In contrast, the weightedaverage method blends together units and costs from the current period with units and costs from the prior period. In the weighted-average method, the equivalent units of production for a department are the number of units transferred to the next department (or to finished goods) plus the equivalent units in the department’s ending work in process inventory. Weighted-Average Method Under the weighted-average method, a department’s equivalent units are computed as follows: Weighted-Average Method (a separate calculation is made for each cost category in each processing department) Equivalent units Equivalent units in ending 5 Units transferred to the next 1 of production department or to finished goods work in process inventory Note that the computation of the equivalent units of production involves adding the number of units transferred out of the department to the equivalent units in the department’s ending inventory. There is no need to compute the equivalent units for the units transferred out of the department—they are 100% complete with respect to the work done in that department or they would not be transferred out. In other words, each unit transferred out of the department is counted as one equivalent unit. Consider the Shaping and Milling Department at Double Diamond. This department uses computerized milling machines to precisely shape the wooden core and metal sheets that will be used to form the backbone of the ski. (See Exhibit 4–4 for an overview of the production process at Double Diamond.) The activity shown at the top of the next page took place in the department in May. The first thing to note about the activity in the Shaping and Milling Department is the flow of units through the department. The department started with 200 units in beginning work in process inventory. During May, 5,000 units were started into production. This made a total of 5,200 units. Of this total, 4,800 units were completed and transferred to the next department during May and 400 units were still in the department at the end of the month as ending work in process inventory. In general, the units in LO4–2 Compute the equivalent units of production using the weightedaverage method. 152 Chapter 4 Percent Complete Shaping and Milling Department Beginning work in process inventory . . . . . . . Units started into production during May . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units completed during May and transferred to the next department . . . . . . Ending work in process inventory . . . . . . . . . Units 200 Materials Conversion 55% 30% 100%* 40% 100%* 25% 5,000 4,800 400 *We always assume that units transferred out of a department are 100% complete with respect to the processing done in that department. beginning work in process inventory plus the units started into production must equal the units in ending work in process inventory plus the units completed and transferred out. In equation form, this is: Units in beginning work in process inventory 1 Units started into production or transferred in 5 Units in ending work in process inventory 1 Units completed and transferred out Note the use of the term conversion in the table above. Conversion cost, as defined in an earlier chapter, is direct labor cost plus manufacturing overhead cost. In process costing, conversion cost is often treated as a single element of product cost. Note that the beginning work in process inventory was 55% complete with respect to materials costs and 30% complete with respect to conversion costs. This means that 55% of the materials costs required to complete the units in the department had already been incurred. Likewise, 30% of the conversion costs required to complete the units had already been incurred. Two equivalent unit figures must be computed—one for materials and one for conversion. These computations are shown in Exhibit 4–5. Note that the computations in Exhibit 4–5 ignore the fact that the units in the beginning work in process inventory were partially complete. For example, the 200 units in beginning inventory were already 30% complete with respect to conversion costs. Nevertheless, the weighted-average method is concerned only with the 4,900 equivalent units that are in ending inventories and in units transferred to the next department; it is not concerned with the fact that the beginning inventory was already partially complete. In other words, the 4,900 equivalent units computed using the weighted-average method include work that was accomplished in prior periods. This is a key point concerning the weighted-average method and it is easy to overlook. EXHIBIT 4–5 Equivalent Units of Production: Weighted-Average Method Shaping and Milling Department Units transferred to the next department . . . . . . . . . . Ending work in process inventory: Materials: 400 units 3 40% complete . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion: 400 units 3 25% complete . . . . . . . . . Equivalent units of production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Conversion 4,800 4,800 160 _____ 4,960 100 4,900 Process Costing 153 IN BUSINESS GETTING LESS FOR THE SAME PRICE When the prices of raw materials such as sugar and cotton increase during an economic downturn, companies realize that they cannot pass these cost increases on to customers in the form of higher prices. Instead, companies often respond to these circumstances by holding their prices constant while giving customers less for their money. For example, when the price of cotton increased Georgia-Pacific responded by decreasing the width of its Angel Soft Double Roll toilet paper from 4.27 inches to 4.00 inches. The company also reduced the number of sheets per roll from 352 to 300. Similarly, Procter & Gamble decreased the number of sheets in a roll of Charmin Ultra Soft Big Roll from 200 to 176. These product size reductions not only lower raw material costs, but they also reduce shipping costs. Georgia-Pacific estimates that its smaller rolls of toilet paper enable it to transport 12–17% more units per truck, thereby saving 345,000 gallons of gasoline per year. Source: Beth Kowitt, “When Less is . . . Less?” Fortune, November 15, 2010, p. 21. Beginning work in process inventory EXHIBIT 4–6 Visual Perspective of Equivalent Units of Production Double Diamond Skis Shaping and Milling Department Conversion Costs (weighted-average method) 5,000 units started 200 units 30% complete 4,600 units started and completed 400 units 25% complete Ending work in process inventory 4,800 units completed Units completed and transferred 4,800 to next department Ending work in process inventory: 100 400 units 3 25% Equivalent units of production 4,900 Exhibit 4–6 provides another way of looking at the computation of equivalent units of production. This exhibit depicts the equivalent units computation for conversion costs. Study it carefully before going on. Compute and Apply Costs In the last section, we computed the equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion at Double Diamond Skis. In this section we will compute the cost per equivalent unit for materials and for conversion. We will then use these costs to value ending work in process and finished goods inventories. Exhibit 4–7 displays all of the data concerning May’s operations in the Shaping and Milling Department that we will need to complete these tasks. LO4–3 Compute the cost per equivalent unit using the weighted-average method. 154 EXHIBIT 4–7 Shaping and Milling Department Data for May Operations Chapter 4 Beginning work in process inventory: Units in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completion with respect to materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completion with respect to conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Costs in beginning work in process inventory: Materials cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total cost in beginning work in process inventory . . . . . . . . . Units started into production during the period . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units completed and transferred out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Costs added during the period: Materials cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total cost added during the period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending work in process inventory: Units in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completion with respect to materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completion with respect to conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 55% 30% $ 9,600 5,575 $15,175 5,000 4,800 $368,600 350,900 $719,500 400 40% 25% Cost per Equivalent Unit—Weighted-Average Method In the weighted-average method, the cost per equivalent unit is computed as follows: Weighted-Average Method (a separate calculation is made for each cost category in each processing department) Cost added Cost of beginning 1 during the period work in process inventory Cost per equivalent unit 5 ______________________________________ Equivalent units of production Note that the numerator is the sum of the cost of beginning work in process inventory and of the cost added during the period. Thus, the weighted-average method blends together costs from the prior and current periods. That is why it is called the weighted-average method; it averages together units and costs from both the prior and current periods. The costs per equivalent unit for materials and for conversion are computed below for the Shaping and Milling Department for May: Shaping and Milling Department Costs per Equivalent Unit Cost of beginning work in process inventory . . . . . . Costs added during the period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total cost (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials $ 9,600 368,600 $378,200 Equivalent units of production (see Exhibit 4–5) (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost per equivalent unit (a) 4 (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,960 $76.25 Conversion $ 5,575 350,900 $356,475 4,900 $72.75 Applying Costs—Weighted-Average Method LO4–4 Assign costs to units using the weighted-average method. The costs per equivalent unit are used to value units in ending inventory and units that are transferred to the next department. For example, each unit transferred out of Double Diamond’s Shaping and Milling Department to the Graphics Application Department, as depicted in Exhibit 4–4, will carry with it a cost of $149.00 ($76.25 for Process Costing 155 materials cost and $72.75 for conversion cost). Because 4,800 units were transferred out in May to the next department, the total cost assigned to those units would be $715,200 (5 4,800 units 3 $149.00 per unit). A complete accounting of the costs of both ending work in process inventory and the units transferred out appears below: Shaping and Milling Department Costs of Ending Work in Process Inventory and the Units Transferred Out Materials Conversion Ending work in process inventory: Equivalent units of production (materials: 400 units 3 40% complete; conversion: 400 units 3 25% complete) (a) . . . . . . . . . . . Cost per equivalent unit (see page 154) (b) . . . . Cost of ending work in process inventory (a) 3 (b) Units completed and transferred out: Units transferred to the next department (a) . . . Cost per equivalent unit (see above) (b) . . . . . . . Cost of units transferred out (a) 3 (b) . . . . . . . . . 160 $76.25 $12,200 100 $72.75 $7,275 Total $19,475 4,800 4,800 $76.25 $72.75 $366,000 $349,200 $715,200 In each case, the equivalent units are multiplied by the cost per equivalent unit to determine the cost assigned to the units. This is done for each cost category—in this case, materials and conversion. The equivalent units for the units completed and transferred out are simply the number of units transferred to the next department because they would not have been transferred unless they were complete. Cost Reconciliation Report The costs assigned to ending work in process inventory and to the units transferred out reconcile with the costs we started with in Exhibit 4–7 as shown below: Shaping and Milling Department Cost Reconciliation Costs to be accounted for: Cost of beginning work in process inventory (Exhibit 4–7) . . . . . . . . . Costs added to production during the period (Exhibit 4–7) . . . . . . . . . Total cost to be accounted for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 15,175 719,500 $734,675 Costs accounted for as follows: Cost of ending work in process inventory (see above). . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of units transferred out (see above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total cost accounted for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 19,475 715,200 $734,675 The $715,200 cost of the units transferred to the next department, Graphics Application, will be accounted for in that department as “costs transferred in.” It will be treated in the process costing system as just another category of costs like materials or conversion costs. The only difference is that the costs transferred in will always be 100% complete with respect to the work done in the Graphics Applications Department. Costs are passed on from one department to the next in this fashion, until they reach the last processing department, Finishing and Pairing. When the products are completed in this last department, their costs are transferred to finished goods. LO4–5 Prepare a cost reconciliation report. 156 Chapter 4 Operation Costing The costing systems discussed in Chapters 3 and 4 represent the two ends of a continuum. On one end is job-order costing, which is used by companies that produce many different products in one facility. On the other end is process costing, which is used by companies that produce homogeneous products in large quantities. Between these two extremes there are many hybrid systems that include characteristics of both job-order and process costing. One of these hybrids is called operation costing. Operation costing is used in situations where products have some common characteristics and some individual characteristics. Shoes, for example, have common characteristics in that all styles involve cutting and sewing that can be done on a repetitive basis, using the same equipment and following the same basic procedures. Shoes also have individual characteristics—some are made of expensive leathers and others may be made using inexpensive synthetic materials. In a situation such as this, where products have some common characteristics but also must be processed individually, operation costing may be used to determine product costs. As mentioned above, operation costing is a hybrid system that employs aspects of both job-order and process costing. Products are typically processed in batches when operation costing is used, with each batch charged for its own specific materials. In this sense, operation costing is similar to job-order costing. However, labor and overhead costs are accumulated by operation or by department, and these costs are assigned to units as in process costing. If shoes are being produced, each shoe is charged the same per unit conversion cost, regardless of the style involved, but it is charged with its specific materials cost. Thus, the company is able to distinguish between styles in terms of materials, but it is able to employ the simplicity of a process costing system for labor and overhead costs. Examples of other products for which operation costing may be used include electronic equipment (such as semiconductors), textiles, clothing, and jewelry (such as rings, bracelets, and medallions). Products of this type are typically produced in batches, but they can vary considerably from model to model or from style to style in terms of the cost of materials. Summary Process costing is used in situations where homogeneous products or services are produced on a continuous basis. Costs flow through the manufacturing accounts in basically the same way in a process costing system as in a job-order costing system. However, costs are accumulated by department rather than by job in process costing. In process costing, the equivalent units of production must be determined for each cost category in each department. Under the weighted-average method, the equivalent units of production equals the number of units transferred out to the next department or to finished goods plus the equivalent units in ending work in process inventory. The equivalent units in ending inventory equals the product of the number of partially completed units in ending work in process inventory and their percentage of completion with respect to the specific cost category. Under the weighted-average method, the cost per equivalent unit for a specific cost category is computed by adding the cost of beginning work in process inventory and the cost added during the period and then dividing the result by the equivalent units of production. The cost per equivalent unit is then used to value the ending work in process inventory and the units transferred out to the next department or to finished goods. The cost reconciliation report reconciles the cost of beginning inventory and the costs added to production during the period to the cost of ending inventory and the cost of units transferred out. Costs are transferred from one department to the next until the last processing department. At that point, the cost of completed units is transferred to finished goods. Review Problem: Process Cost Flows and Costing Units Luxguard Home Paint Company produces exterior latex paint, which it sells in one-gallon containers. The company has two processing departments—Base Fab and Finishing. White paint, which is used as a base for all the company’s paints, is mixed from raw ingredients in the Process Costing Base Fab Department. Pigments are then added to the basic white paint, the pigmented paint is squirted under pressure into one-gallon containers, and the containers are labeled and packed for shipping in the Finishing Department. Information relating to the company’s operations for April follows: a. Issued raw materials for use in production: Base Fab Department, $851,000; and Finishing Department, $629,000. b. Incurred direct labor costs: Base Fab Department, $330,000; and Finishing Department, $270,000. c. Applied manufacturing overhead cost: Base Fab Department, $665,000; and Finishing Department, $405,000. d. Transferred basic white paint from the Base Fab Department to the Finishing Department, $1,850,000. e. Transferred paint that had been prepared for shipping from the Finishing Department to Finished Goods, $3,200,000. Required: 1. 2. 3. Prepare journal entries to record items (a) through (e) above. Post the journal entries from (1) above to T-accounts. The balance in the Base Fab Department’s Work in Process account on April 1 was $150,000; the balance in the Finishing Department’s Work in Process account was $70,000. After posting entries to the T-accounts, find the ending balance in each department’s Work in Process account. Determine the cost of ending work in process inventories and of units transferred out of the Base Fab Department in April. The following additional information is available regarding production in the Base Fab Department during April: Production data: Units (gallons) in process, April 1: materials 100% complete; labor and overhead 60% complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units (gallons) started into production during April . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units (gallons) completed and transferred to the Finishing Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units (gallons) in process, April 30: materials 50% complete; labor and overhead 25% complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost data: Work in process inventory, April 1: Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 30,000 420,000 370,000 80,000 $ 92,000 21,000 37,000 Total cost of work in process inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 150,000 Cost added during April: Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 851,000 330,000 665,000 Total cost added during April . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,846,000 Prepare a cost reconciliation report for April. Solution to Review Problem 1. a. b. c. d. e. Work in Process—Base Fab Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in Process—Finishing Department . . . . . . . . . . . . Raw Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in Process—Base Fab Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in Process—Finishing Department . . . . . . . . . . . . Salaries and Wages Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in Process—Base Fab Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in Process—Finishing Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in Process—Finishing Department . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in Process—Base Fab Department . . . . . . . . . . . Finished Goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in Process—Finishing Department . . . . . . . . . . . 851,000 629,000 1,480,000 330,000 270,000 600,000 665,000 405,000 1,070,000 1,850,000 1,850,000 3,200,000 3,200,000 157 158 Chapter 4 2. Salaries and Wages Payable Raw Materials Bal. XXX (a) (b) 1,480,000 Work in Process— Base Fab Department Bal. (a) (b) (c) 150,000 851,000 330,000 665,000 Bal. 146,000 (d) Manufacturing Overhead 1,850,000 (Various actual costs) Work in Process—Finishing Department 3. Bal. (a) (b) (c) (d) 70,000 629,000 270,000 405,000 1,850,000 Bal. 24,000 (e) 600,000 3,200,000 (c) 1,070,000 Finished Goods Bal. (e) XXX 3,200,000 First, we must compute the equivalent units of production for each cost category: Base Fab Department Equivalent Units of Production Materials Units transferred to the next department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending work in process inventory (materials: 80,000 units 3 50% complete; labor: 80,000 units 3 25% complete; overhead: 80,000 units 3 25% complete) . . . . . . . . . . . . Equivalent units of production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labor Overhead 370,000 370,000 370,000 40,000 410,000 20,000 390,000 20,000 390,000 Labor Overhead Then we must compute the cost per equivalent unit for each cost category: Base Fab Department Costs per Equivalent Unit Materials Costs: Cost of beginning work in process inventory . . . . . . . . Costs added during the period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total cost (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 92,000 851,000 $943,000 $ 21,000 330,000 $351,000 $ 37,000 665,000 $702,000 Equivalent units of production (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost per equivalent unit (a) 4 (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410,000 $2.30 390,000 $0.90 390,000 $1.80 The costs per equivalent unit can then be applied to the units in ending work in process inventory and the units transferred out as follows: Base Fab Department Costs of Ending Work in Process Inventory and the Units Transferred Out Materials Labor Overhead Total Ending work in process inventory: Equivalent units of production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,000 20,000 20,000 Cost per equivalent unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $2.30 $0.90 $1.80 Cost of ending work in process inventory . . . . . $92,000 $18,000 $36,000 $146,000 Units completed and transferred out: Units transferred to the next department . . . . . 370,000 370,000 370,000 Cost per equivalent unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $2.30 $0.90 $1.80 Cost of units completed and transferred out . . . $851,000 $333,000 $666,000 $1,850,000 Process Costing 159 4. Base Fab Department Cost Reconciliation Costs to be accounted for: Cost of beginning work in process inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Costs added to production during the period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 150,000 1,846,000 Total cost to be accounted for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,996,000 Costs accounted for as follows: Cost of ending work in process inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of units transferred out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 146,000 1,850,000 Total cost accounted for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,996,000 Glossary Conversion cost Direct labor cost plus manufacturing overhead cost. (p. 152) Equivalent units The product of the number of partially completed units and their percentage of completion with respect to a particular cost. Equivalent units are the number of complete whole units that could be obtained from the materials and effort contained in partially completed units. (p. 151) Equivalent units of production (weighted-average method) The units transferred to the next department (or to finished goods) during the period plus the equivalent units in the department’s ending work in process inventory. (p. 151) FIFO method A process costing method in which equivalent units and unit costs relate only to work done during the current period. (p. 151) Operation costing A hybrid costing system used when products have some common characteristics and some individual characteristics. (p. 156) Process costing A costing method used when essentially homogeneous products are produced on a continuous basis. (p. 145) Processing department An organizational unit where work is performed on a product and where materials, labor, or overhead costs are added to the product. (p. 146) Weighted-average method A process costing method that blends together units and costs from both the current and prior periods. (p. 151) Questions 4–1 4–2 4–3 4–4 4–5 4–6 4–7 4–8 Under what conditions would it be appropriate to use a process costing system? In what ways are job-order and process costing similar? Why is cost accumulation simpler in a process costing system than it is in a job-order costing system? How many Work in Process accounts are maintained in a company that uses process costing? Assume that a company has two processing departments—Mixing followed by Firing. Prepare a journal entry to show a transfer of work in process from the Mixing Department to the Firing Department. Assume that a company has two processing departments—Mixing followed by Firing. Explain what costs might be added to the Firing Department’s Work in Process account during a period. What is meant by the term equivalent units of production when the weighted-average method is used? Watkins Trophies, Inc., produces thousands of medallions made of bronze, silver, and gold. The medallions are identical except for the materials used in their manufacture. What costing system would you advise the company to use? Multiple-choice questions are provided on the text website at www.mhhe.com/garrison15e. 160 Chapter 4 Applying Excel Available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4, LO4–5 The Excel worksheet form that appears below is to be used to recreate the extended example on pages 153–155. Download the workbook containing this form from the Online Learning Center at www.mhhe.com/garrison15e. On the website you will also receive instructions about how to use this worksheet form. You should proceed to the requirements below only after completing your worksheet. Required: 1. Check your worksheet by changing the beginning work in process inventory to 100 units, the units started into production during the period to 2,500 units, and the units in ending work in process inventory to 200 units, keeping all of the other data the same as in the original example. If your worksheet is operating properly, the cost per equivalent unit for materials should now be $152.50 and the cost per equivalent unit for conversion Process Costing 2. 161 should be $145.50. If you do not get these answers, find the errors in your worksheet and correct them. How much is the total cost of the units transferred out? Did it change? Why or why not? Enter the following data from a different company into your worksheet: Beginning work in process inventory: Units in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Completion with respect to materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100% Completion with respect to conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20% Costs in the beginning work in process inventory: Materials cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $2,000 Conversion cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $800 Units started into production during the period . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,800 Costs added during the period: Materials cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $18,400 Conversion cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $38,765 Ending work in process inventory: Units in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Completion with respect to materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100% Completion with respect to conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30% 3. What is the cost of the units transferred out? What happens to the cost of the units transferred out in part (2) above if the percentage completion with respect to conversion for the beginning inventory is changed from 20% to 40% and everything else remains the same? What happens to the cost per equivalent unit for conversion? Explain. The Foundational 15 Available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. Clopack Company manufactures one product that goes through one processing department called Mixing. All raw materials are introduced at the start of work in the Mixing Department. The company uses the weighted-average method to account for units and costs. Its Work in Process T-account for the Mixing Department for June follows (all forthcoming questions pertain to June): Work in Process—Mixing Department June 1 balance Materials Direct labor Overhead June 30 balance 28,000 Completed and transferred to Finished Goods ? 120,000 79,500 97,000 ? The June 1 work in process inventory consisted of 5,000 pounds with $16,000 in materials cost and $12,000 in conversion cost. The June 1 work in process inventory was 100% complete with respect to materials and 50% complete with respect to conversion. During June, 37,500 pounds were started into production. The June 30 work in process inventory consisted of 8,000 pounds that were 100% complete with respect to materials and 40% complete with respect to conversion. Required: 1. 2. 3. Prepare the journal entries to record the raw materials used in production and the direct labor cost incurred. Prepare the journal entry to record the overhead cost applied to production. How many units were completed and transferred to finished goods during the period? LO4–1, LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4, LO4–5 162 Chapter 4 4. Compute the equivalent units of production for materials. 5. Compute the equivalent units of production for conversion. 6. What is the amount of the cost of beginning work in process inventory plus the cost added during the period for materials? 7. What is the amount of the cost of beginning work in process inventory plus the cost added during the period for conversion? 8. What is the cost per equivalent unit for materials? 9. What is the cost per equivalent unit for conversion? 10. What is the cost of ending work in process inventory for materials? 11. What is the cost of ending work in process inventory for conversion? 12. What is the cost of materials transferred to finished goods? 13. What is the amount of conversion cost transferred to finished goods? 14. Prepare the journal entry to record the transfer of costs from Work in Process to Finished Goods. 15. What is the total cost to be accounted for? What is the total cost accounted for? Exercises All applicable exercises are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. EXERCISE 4–1 Process Costing Journal Entries [LO4–1] Quality Brick Company produces bricks in two processing departments—Molding and Firing. Information relating to the company’s operations in March follows: a. Raw materials were issued for use in production: Molding Department, $23,000; and Firing Department, $8,000. b. Direct labor costs were incurred: Molding Department, $12,000; and Firing Department, $7,000. c. Manufacturing overhead was applied: Molding Department, $25,000; and Firing Department, $37,000. d. Unfired, molded bricks were transferred from the Molding Department to the Firing Department. According to the company’s process costing system, the cost of the unfired, molded bricks was $57,000. e. Finished bricks were transferred from the Firing Department to the finished goods warehouse. According to the company’s process costing system, the cost of the finished bricks was $103,000. f. Finished bricks were sold to customers. According to the company’s process costing system, the cost of the finished bricks sold was $101,000. Required: Prepare journal entries to record items (a) through (f) above. EXERCISE 4–2 Computation of Equivalent Units—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2] Clonex Labs, Inc., uses a process costing system. The following data are available for one department for October: Percent Completed Work in process, October 1 . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process, October 31 . . . . . . . . . . Units Materials Conversion 30,000 15,000 65% 80% 30% 40% The department started 175,000 units into production during the month and transferred 190,000 completed units to the next department. Required: Compute the equivalent units of production for October assuming that the company uses the weighted-average method of accounting for units and costs. Process Costing EXERCISE 4–3 Cost per Equivalent Unit—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–3] Superior Micro Products uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data for the Assembly Department for May appear below: Work in process, May 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost added during May . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equivalent units of production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Labor Overhead $18,000 $238,900 35,000 $5,500 $80,300 33,000 $27,500 $401,500 33,000 Required: 1. 2. Compute the cost per equivalent unit for materials, for labor, and for overhead. Compute the total cost per equivalent whole unit. EXERCISE 4–4 Applying Costs to Units—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–4] Data concerning a recent period’s activity in the Prep Department, the first processing department in a company that uses process costing, appear below: Materials Conversion 2,000 $13.86 800 $4.43 Equivalent units of production in ending work in process . . . . Cost per equivalent unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A total of 20,100 units were completed and transferred to the next processing department during the period. Required: Compute the cost of the units transferred to the next department during the period and the cost of ending work in process inventory. EXERCISE 4–5 Cost Reconciliation Report—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–5] Maria Am Corporation uses a process costing system. The Baking Department is one of the processing departments in its strudel manufacturing facility. In June in the Baking Department, the cost of beginning work in process inventory was $3,570, the cost of ending work in process inventory was $2,860, and the cost added to production was $43,120. Required: Prepare a cost reconciliation report for the Baking Department for June. EXERCISE 4–6 Equivalent Units—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2] Hielta Oy, a Finnish company, processes wood pulp for various manufacturers of paper products. Data relating to tons of pulp processed during June are provided below: Percent Completed Work in process, June 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process, June 30 . . . . . . . . . . . Started into production during June . . . Tons of Pulp Materials Labor and Overhead 20,000 30,000 190,000 90% 60% 80% 40% Required: 1. 2. Compute the number of tons of pulp completed and transferred out during June. Compute the equivalent units of production for materials and for labor and overhead for June. EXERCISE 4–7 Process Costing Journal Entries [LO4–1] Chocolaterie de Geneve, SA, is located in a French-speaking canton in Switzerland. The company makes chocolate truffles that are sold in popular embossed tins. The company has two processing departments—Cooking and Molding. In the Cooking Department, the raw ingredients for the truffles are mixed and then cooked in special candy-making vats. In the Molding Department, the melted chocolate and other ingredients from the Cooking Department are carefully poured into 163 164 Chapter 4 molds and decorative flourishes are applied by hand. After cooling, the truffles are packed for sale. The company uses a process costing system. The T-accounts below show the flow of costs through the two departments in April: Work in Process—Cooking Balance 4/1 Direct materials Direct labor Overhead 8,000 42,000 50,000 75,000 Transferred out 160,000 Work in Process—Molding Balance 4/1 Transferred in Direct labor Overhead 4,000 160,000 36,000 45,000 Transferred out 240,000 Required: Prepare journal entries showing the flow of costs through the two processing departments during April. EXERCISE 4–8 Equivalent Units and Cost per Equivalent Unit—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4] Helix Corporation produces prefabricated flooring in a series of steps carried out in production departments. All of the material that is used in the first production department is added at the beginning of processing in that department. Data for May for the first production department follow: Percent Complete Work in process inventory, May 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process inventory, May 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units Materials Conversion 5,000 10,000 100% 100% 40% 30% Materials cost in work in process inventory, May 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion cost in work in process inventory, May 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . Units started into production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units transferred to the next production department . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials cost added during May . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion cost added during May . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,500 $4,000 180,000 175,000 $54,000 $352,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. Assume that the company uses the weighted-average method of accounting for units and costs. Determine the equivalent units for May for the first process. Compute the costs per equivalent unit for May for the first process. Determine the total cost of ending work in process inventory and the total cost of units transferred to the next process in May. EXERCISE 4–9 Equivalent Units and Cost per Equivalent Unit—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2, LO4–3] Pureform, Inc., manufactures a product that passes through two departments. Data for a recent month for the first department follow: Work in process inventory, beginning . . . . . . . Units started in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units transferred out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process inventory, ending . . . . . . . . . Cost added during the month . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units Materials Labor Overhead 5,000 45,000 42,000 8,000 $4,320 $1,040 $1,790 $52,800 $21,500 $32,250 Process Costing The beginning work in process inventory was 80% complete with respect to materials and 60% complete with respect to labor and overhead. The ending work in process inventory was 75% complete with respect to materials and 50% complete with respect to labor and overhead. Required: Assume that the company uses the weighted-average method of accounting for units and costs. 1. Compute the equivalent units for the month for the first department. 2. Determine the costs per equivalent unit for the month. EXERCISE 4–10 Equivalent Units—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2] Alaskan Fisheries, Inc., processes salmon for various distributors. Two departments are involved— Cleaning and Packing. Data relating to pounds of salmon processed in the Cleaning Department during July are presented below: Percent Completed Work in process inventory, July 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process inventory, July 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pounds of Salmon Materials Labor and Overhead 20,000 25,000 100% 100% 30% 60% A total of 380,000 pounds of salmon were started into processing during July. All materials are added at the beginning of processing in the Cleaning Department. Required: Compute the equivalent units for July for both materials and labor and overhead assuming that the company uses the weighted-average method of accounting for units. EXERCISE 4–11 Comprehensive Exercise; Second Production Department—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4, LO4–5] Scribners Corporation produces fine papers in three production departments—Pulping, Drying, and Finishing. In the Pulping Department, raw materials such as wood fiber and rag cotton are mechanically and chemically treated to separate their fibers. The result is a thick slurry of fibers. In the Drying Department, the wet fibers transferred from the Pulping Department are laid down on porous webs, pressed to remove excess liquid, and dried in ovens. In the Finishing Department, the dried paper is coated, cut, and spooled onto reels. The company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data for March for the Drying Department follow: Percent Completed Units Work in process inventory, March 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process inventory, March 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,000 8,000 Pulping cost in work in process inventory, March 1 . . . . . . . . . . Conversion cost in work in process inventory, March 1 . . . . . . . Units transferred to the next production department . . . . . . . . . Pulping cost added during March . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion cost added during March . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulping 100% 100% Conversion 20% 25% $4,800 $500 157,000 $102,450 $31,300 No materials are added in the Drying Department. Pulping cost represents the costs of the wet fibers transferred in from the Pulping Department. Wet fiber is processed in the Drying Department in batches; each unit in the above table is a batch and one batch of wet fibers produces a set amount of dried paper that is passed on to the Finishing Department. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Determine the equivalent units for March for pulping and conversion. Compute the costs per equivalent unit for March for pulping and conversion. Determine the total cost of ending work in process inventory and the total cost of units transferred to the Finishing Department in March. Prepare a cost reconciliation report for the Drying Department for March. 165 166 Chapter 4 EXERCISE 4–12 Cost Assignment; Cost Reconciliation—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2, LO4–4, LO4–5] Superior Micro Products uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. During January, the Delta Assembly Department completed its processing of 25,000 units and transferred them to the next department. The cost of beginning inventory and the costs added during January amounted to $599,780 in total. The ending inventory in January consisted of 3,000 units, which were 80% complete with respect to materials and 60% complete with respect to labor and overhead. The costs per equivalent unit for the month were as follows: Materials Cost per equivalent unit . . . . . . . . . . $12.50 Labor Overhead $3.20 $6.40 Required: 1. 2. 3. Compute the equivalent units of materials, labor, and overhead in the ending inventory for the month. Compute the cost of ending inventory and of the units transferred to the next department for January. Prepare a cost reconciliation for January. (Note: You will not be able to break the cost to be accounted for into the cost of beginning inventory and costs added during the month.) Problems All applicable problems are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. PROBLEM 4–13 Comprehensive Problem; Second Production Department—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4, LO4–5] Old Country Links Inc. produces sausages in three production departments—Mixing, Casing and Curing, and Packaging. In the Mixing Department, meats are prepared and ground and then mixed with spices. The spiced meat mixture is then transferred to the Casing and Curing Department, where the mixture is force-fed into casings and then hung and cured in climate-controlled smoking chambers. In the Packaging Department, the cured sausages are sorted, packed, and labeled. The company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data for September for the Casing and Curing Department follow: Percent Completed Work in process inventory, September 1 . . . . . . Work in process inventory, September 30 . . . . . Units Mixing Materials Conversion 1 1 100% 100% 90% 80% 80% 70% Mixing Materials Conversion $1,670 $81,460 $90 $6,006 $605 $42,490 Work in process inventory, September 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost added during September . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mixing cost represents the costs of the spiced meat mixture transferred in from the Mixing Department. The spiced meat mixture is processed in the Casing and Curing Department in batches; each unit in the above table is a batch and one batch of spiced meat mixture produces a set amount of sausages that are passed on to the Packaging Department. During September, 50 batches (i.e., units) were completed and transferred to the Packaging Department. Required: 1. 2. Determine the equivalent units for September for mixing, materials, and conversion. Do not round off your computations. Compute the costs per equivalent unit for September for mixing, materials, and conversion. Process Costing 3. 4. Determine the total cost of ending work in process inventory and the total cost of units transferred to the Packaging Department in September. Prepare a cost reconciliation report for the Casing and Curing Department for September. PROBLEM 4–14 Analysis of Work in Process T-account—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–1, LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4] Weston Products manufactures an industrial cleaning compound that goes through three processing departments—Grinding, Mixing, and Cooking. All raw materials are introduced at the start of work in the Grinding Department. The Work in Process T-account for the Grinding Department for May is given below: Work in Process—Grinding Department Inventory, May 1 Materials Conversion Inventory, May 31 21,800 Completed and transferred to the Mixing Department ? 133,400 225,500 ? The May 1 work in process inventory consisted of 18,000 pounds with $14,600 in materials cost and $7,200 in conversion cost. The May 1 work in process inventory was 100% complete with respect to materials and 30% complete with respect to conversion. During May, 167,000 pounds were started into production. The May 31 inventory consisted of 15,000 pounds that were 100% complete with respect to materials and 60% complete with respect to conversion. The company uses the weighted-average method to account for units and costs. Required: 1. 2. 3. Determine the equivalent units of production for May. Determine the costs per equivalent unit for May. Determine the cost of the units completed and transferred to the Mixing Department during May. PROBLEM 4–15 Comprehensive Problem—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4, LO4–5] Sunspot Beverages, Ltd., of Fiji makes blended tropical fruit drinks in two stages. Fruit juices are extracted from fresh fruits and then blended in the Blending Department. The blended juices are then bottled and packed for shipping in the Bottling Department. The following information pertains to the operations of the Blending Department for June. Percent Completed Work in process, beginning . . . . . . . . . Started into production . . . . . . . . . . . . Completed and transferred out . . . . . . Work in process, ending . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process, beginning . . . . . . . . . Cost added during June . . . . . . . . . . . Units Materials Conversion 20,000 180,000 160,000 40,000 100% 75% 100% 25% Materials Conversion $25,200 $334,800 $24,800 $238,700 Required: Assume that the company uses the weighted-average method. 1. Determine the equivalent units for June for the Blending Department. 2. Compute the costs per equivalent unit for the Blending Department. 3. Determine the total cost of ending work in process inventory and the total cost of units transferred to the Bottling Department. 4. Prepare a cost reconciliation report for the Blending Department for June. 167 168 Chapter 4 PROBLEM 4–16 Comprehensive Problem—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4, LO4–5] Builder Products, Inc., manufactures a caulking compound that goes through three processing stages prior to completion. Information on work in the first department, Cooking, is given below for May: Production data: Pounds in process, May 1; materials 100% complete; conversion 80% complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pounds started into production during May . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pounds completed and transferred out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pounds in process, May 31; materials 60% complete; conversion 20% complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost data: Work in process inventory, May 1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost added during May: Materials cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,000 100,000 ? 15,000 $1,500 $7,200 $154,500 $90,800 The company uses the weighted-average method. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Compute the equivalent units of production. Compute the costs per equivalent unit for the month. Determine the cost of ending work in process inventory and of the units transferred out to the next department. Prepare a cost reconciliation report for the month. PROBLEM 4–17 Cost Flows [LO4–1] Lubricants, Inc., produces a special kind of grease that is widely used by race car drivers. The grease is produced in two processing departments: Refining and Blending. Raw materials are introduced at various points in the Refining Department. The following incomplete Work in Process account is available for the Refining Department for March: Work in Process—Refining Department March 1 balance Materials Direct labor Overhead March 31 balance 38,000 Completed and transferred to Blending ? 495,000 72,000 181,000 ? The March 1 work in process inventory in the Refining Department consists of the following elements: materials, $25,000; direct labor, $4,000; and overhead, $9,000. Costs incurred during March in the Blending Department were: materials used, $115,000; direct labor, $18,000; and overhead cost applied to production, $42,000. Required: 1. Prepare journal entries to record the costs incurred in both the Refining Department and Blending Department during March. Key your entries to the items (a) through (g) below. a. Raw materials were issued for use in production. b. Direct labor costs were incurred. c. Manufacturing overhead costs for the entire factory were incurred, $225,000. (Credit Accounts Payable.) d. Manufacturing overhead cost was applied to production using a predetermined overhead rate. e. Units that were complete with respect to processing in the Refining Department were transferred to the Blending Department, $740,000. Process Costing f. 2. Units that were complete with respect to processing in the Blending Department were transferred to Finished Goods, $950,000. g. Completed units were sold on account, $1,500,000. The Cost of Goods Sold was $900,000. Post the journal entries from (1) above to T-accounts. The following account balances existed at the beginning of March. (The beginning balance in the Refining Department’s Work in Process account is given on the prior page.) Raw Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in Process—Blending Department . . . . . . . . . . . Finished Goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $618,000 $65,000 $20,000 After posting the entries to the T-accounts, find the ending balance in the inventory accounts and the manufacturing overhead account. PROBLEM 4–18 Interpreting a Report—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4] Cooperative San José of southern Sonora state in Mexico makes a unique syrup using cane sugar and local herbs. The syrup is sold in small bottles and is prized as a flavoring for drinks and for use in desserts. The bottles are sold for $12 each. The first stage in the production process is carried out in the Mixing Department, which removes foreign matter from the raw materials and mixes them in the proper proportions in large vats. The company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. A hastily prepared report for the Mixing Department for April appears below: Units to be accounted for: Work in process, April 1 (materials 90% complete; conversion 80% complete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Started into production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,000 200,000 Total units to be accounted for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230,000 Units accounted for as follows: Transferred to next department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process, April 30 (materials 75% complete; conversion 60% complete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,000 40,000 Total units accounted for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230,000 Cost Reconciliation Cost to be accounted for: Work in process, April 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost added during the month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 98,000 827,000 Total cost to be accounted for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $925,000 Cost accounted for as follows: Work in process, April 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferred to next department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $119,400 805,600 Total cost accounted for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $925,000 Management would like some additional information about Cooperative San José’s operations. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. What were the equivalent units for the month? What were the costs per equivalent unit for the month? The beginning inventory consisted of the following costs: materials, $67,800; and conversion cost, $30,200. The costs added during the month consisted of: materials, $579,000; and conversion cost, $248,000. How many of the units transferred to the next department were started and completed during the month? The manager of the Mixing Department stated, “Materials prices jumped from about $2.50 per unit in March to $3 per unit in April, but due to good cost control I was able to hold our materials cost to less than $3 per unit for the month.” Should this manager be rewarded for good cost control? Explain. 169 170 Chapter 4 Cases All applicable cases are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. CASE 4–19 Second Department—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4] “I think we goofed when we hired that new assistant controller,” said Ruth Scarpino, president of Provost Industries. “Just look at this report that he prepared for last month for the Finishing Department. I can’t understand it.” Finishing Department costs: Work in process inventory, April 1, 450 units; materials 100% complete; conversion 60% complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Costs transferred in during the month from the preceding department, 1,950 units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials cost added during the month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion costs incurred during the month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 8,208* 17,940 6,210 13,920 Total departmental costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $46,278 Finishing Department costs assigned to: Units completed and transferred to finished goods, 1,800 units at $25.71 per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work in process inventory, April 30, 600 units; materials 0% complete; conversion 35% complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $46,278 Total departmental costs assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $46,278 0 *Consists of cost transferred in, $4,068; materials cost, $1,980; and conversion cost, $2,160. “He’s struggling to learn our system,” replied Frank Harrop, the operations manager. “The problem is that he’s been away from process costing for a long time, and it’s coming back slowly.” “It’s not just the format of his report that I’m concerned about. Look at that $25.71 unit cost that he’s come up with for April. Doesn’t that seem high to you?” said Ms. Scarpino. “Yes, it does seem high; but on the other hand, I know we had an increase in materials prices during April, and that may be the explanation,” replied Mr. Harrop. “I’ll get someone else to redo this report and then we may be able to see what’s going on.” Provost Industries manufactures a ceramic product that goes through two processing departments—Molding and Finishing. The company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing. Required: 1. 2. Prepare a report for the Finishing Department showing how much cost should have been assigned to the units completed and transferred to finished goods, and how much cost should have been assigned to ending work in process inventory in the Finishing Department. Explain to the president why the unit cost on the new assistant controller’s report is so high. CASE 4–20 Ethics and the Manager, Understanding the Impact of Percentage Completion on Profit—Weighted-Average Method [LO4–2, LO4–3, LO4–4] Gary Stevens and Mary James are production managers in the Consumer Electronics Division of General Electronics Company, which has several dozen plants scattered in locations throughout the world. Mary manages the plant located in Des Moines, Iowa, while Gary manages the plant in El Segundo, California. Production managers are paid a salary and get an additional bonus equal to 5% of their base salary if the entire division meets or exceeds its target profits for the year. The bonus is determined in March after the company’s annual report has been prepared and issued to stockholders. Shortly after the beginning of the new year, Mary received a phone call from Gary that went like this: Gary: How’s it going, Mary? Mary: Fine, Gary. How’s it going with you? Process Costing 171 Gary: Great! I just got the preliminary profit figures for the division for last year and we are within $200,000 of making the year’s target profits. All we have to do is pull a few strings, and we’ll be over the top! Mary: What do you mean? Gary: Well, one thing that would be easy to change is your estimate of the percentage completion of your ending work in process inventories. Mary: I don’t know if I can do that, Gary. Those percentage completion figures are supplied by Tom Winthrop, my lead supervisor, who I have always trusted to provide us with good estimates. Besides, I have already sent the percentage completion figures to corporate headquarters. Gary: You can always tell them there was a mistake. Think about it, Mary. All of us managers are doing as much as we can to pull this bonus out of the hat. You may not want the bonus check, but the rest of us sure could use it. The final processing department in Mary’s production facility began the year with no work in process inventories. During the year, 210,000 units were transferred in from the prior processing department and 200,000 units were completed and sold. Costs transferred in from the prior department totaled $39,375,000. No materials are added in the final processing department. A total of $20,807,500 of conversion cost was incurred in the final processing department during the year. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Tom Winthrop estimated that the units in ending inventory in the final processing department were 30% complete with respect to the conversion costs of the final processing department. If this estimate of the percentage completion is used, what would be the Cost of Goods Sold for the year? Does Gary Stevens want the estimated percentage completion to be increased or decreased? Explain why. What percentage completion would result in increasing reported net operating income by $200,000 over the net operating income that would be reported if the 30% figure were used? Do you think Mary James should go along with the request to alter estimates of the percentage completion? Why or why not? Appendix 4A: FIFO Method The FIFO method of process costing differs from the weighted-average method in two ways: (1) the computation of equivalent units, and (2) the way in which costs of beginning inventory are treated. The FIFO method is generally considered more accurate than the weighted-average method, but it is more complex. The complexity is not a problem for computers, but the FIFO method is a little more difficult to understand and to learn than the weighted-average method. Equivalent Units—FIFO Method The computation of equivalent units under the FIFO method differs from the computation under the weighted-average method in two ways. First, the “units transferred out” is divided into two parts. One part consists of the units from the beginning inventory that were completed and transferred out, and the other part consists of the units that were both started and completed during the current period. Second, full consideration is given to the amount of work expended during the current period on units in the beginning work in process inventory as well as on units in the ending inventory. Thus, under the FIFO method, both beginning and ending inventories are converted to an equivalent units basis. For the beginning inventory, the equivalent units represent the work done to complete the units; for the ending inventory, the equivalent units represent the work done to bring the units to a stage of partial completion at the end of the period (the same as with the weighted-average method). LO4–6 Compute the equivalent units of production using the FIFO method. 172 Chapter 4 The formula for computing the equivalent units of production under the FIFO method is more complex than under the weighted-average method: FIFO Method (a separate calculation is made for each cost category in each processing department) Equivalent units of production 5 Equivalent units to complete beginning work in process inventory* 1 Units started and completed during the period 1 Equivalent units in ending work in process inventory ( *Equivalent units to Units in beginning Percentage completion complete beginning work 5 work in process 3 100% 2 of beginning work in in process inventory inventory process inventory ) Or, the equivalent units of production can also be determined as follows: Equivalent units of production 5 Units transferred out 1 Equivalent units in ending work in process inventory 2 Equivalent units in beginning work in process inventory To illustrate the FIFO method, refer again to the data for the Shaping and Milling Department at Double Diamond Skis. The department completed and transferred 4,800 units to the Graphics Application Department during May. Because 200 of these units came from the beginning inventory, the Shaping and Milling Department must have started and completed 4,600 units during May. The 200 units in the beginning inventory were 55% complete with respect to materials and only 30% complete with respect to conversion costs when the month started. Thus, to complete these units the department must have added another 45% of materials costs (100% 2 55% 5 45%) and another 70% of conversion costs (100% 2 30% 5 70%). Following this line of reasoning, the equivalent units for the department for May would be computed as shown in Exhibit 4A–1. EXHIBIT 4A–1 Equivalent Units of Production: FIFO Method Materials To complete beginning work in process inventory: Materials: 200 units 3 (100% 2 55%)* . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion: 200 units 3 (100% 2 30%)* . . . . . . . . . Units started and completed during the period . . . . . . Ending work in process inventory: Materials: 400 units 3 40% complete . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion: 400 units 3 25% complete . . . . . . . . . . Equivalent units of production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion 90 4,600† 140 4,600† 160 _____ 4,850 100 4,840 *This is the work needed to complete the units in beginning inventory. † 5,000 units started 2 400 units in ending work in process 5 4,600 units started and completed. This can also be computed as 4,800 units completed and transferred to the next department 2 200 units in beginning work in process inventory. The FIFO method assumes that the units in beginning inventory are finished first. Process Costing 173 Comparison of Equivalent Units of Production under the Weighted-Average and FIFO Methods Stop at this point and compare the data in Exhibit 4A–1 with the data in Exhibit 4–5 in the chapter, which shows the computation of equivalent units under the weighted-average method. Also refer to Exhibit 4A–2, which compares the two methods. The essential difference between the two methods is that the weighted-average method blends work and costs from the prior period with work and costs in the current period, whereas the FIFO method separates the two periods. To see this more clearly, consider the following reconciliation of the two calculations of equivalent units: Shaping and Milling Department Materials Equivalent units—weighted-average method . . . . . . . . . . . Less equivalent units in beginning work in process inventory: 200 units 3 55% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 units 3 30% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equivalent units of production—FIFO method . . . . . . . . . . Conversion 4,960 4,900 110 _____ 4,850 60 4,840 Double Diamond Skis Shaping and Milling Department Conversion Costs EXHIBIT 4A–2 Visual Perspective of Equivalent Units of Production Weighted-Average Method Beginning work in process inventory 200 units 30% complete 5,000 units started 4,600 units started and completed Units completed and transferred to next department Ending work in process inventory: 400 units 3 25% Equivalent units of production 400 units 25% complete Ending work in process inventory 400 units 25% complete Ending work in process inventory 4,800 100 4,900 FIFO Method Beginning work in process inventory 200 units 30% complete 5,000 units started 4,600 units started and completed Beginning work in process inventory: 200 units 3 70%* Units started and completed Ending work in process inventory: 400 units 3 25% Equivalent units of production 140 4,600 100 4,840 * 100% 2 30% 5 70%. This 70% represents the work needed to complete the units in the beginning inventory. 174 Chapter 4 As shown in the reconciliation of the two costing methods, it is evident that the FIFO method removes the equivalent units that were already in beginning inventory from the equivalent units as defined using the weighted-average method. Thus, the FIFO method isolates the equivalent units that are due to work performed during the current period. The weighted-average method blends together the equivalent units already in beginning inventory with the equivalent units that are due to work performed in the current period. Cost per Equivalent Unit—FIFO Method LO4–7 Compute the cost per equivalent unit using the FIFO method. In the FIFO method, the cost per equivalent unit is computed as follows: FIFO Method (a separate calculation is made for each cost category in each processing department) Cost added during the period Cost per equivalent unit 5 _________________________ Equivalent units of production Unlike the weighted-average method, in the FIFO method the cost per equivalent unit is based only on the costs incurred in the department in the current period. The costs per equivalent unit for materials and for conversion are computed below for the Shaping and Milling Department for May: Shaping and Milling Department Costs per Equivalent Unit—FIFO method Materials Cost added during the period (a) . . . . . . . . . $368,600 Equivalent units of production (b) . . . . . . . . . 4,850 Cost per equivalent unit (a) 4 (b) . . . . . . . . . . $76.00 Conversion $350,900 4,840 $72.50 Applying Costs—FIFO Method LO4–8 Assign costs to units using the FIFO method. The costs per equivalent unit are used to value units in ending inventory and units that are transferred to the next department. For example, each unit transferred out of the Shaping and Milling Department to the Graphics Application Department will carry with it a cost of $148.50—$76.00 for materials cost and $72.50 for conversion cost. Because 4,800 units were transferred out in May to the next department, the total cost assigned to those units would be $712,800 (4,800 units 3 $148.50 per unit). A complete accounting of the costs of both ending work in process inventory and the units transferred out appears on the next page. It is more complicated than the weightedaverage method. This is because the cost of the units transferred out consists of three separate components: (1) the cost of beginning work in process inventory; (2) the cost to complete the units in beginning work in process inventory; and (3) the cost of units started and completed during the period. Again, note that the cost of the units transferred out consists of three distinct components—the cost of beginning work in process inventory, the cost to complete the units in beginning inventory, and the cost of units started and completed during the period. This is a major difference between the weighted-average and FIFO methods. Process Costing 175 Shaping and Milling Department Costs of Ending Work in Process Inventory and Units Transferred Out—FIFO Method Materials Conversion Ending work in process inventory: Equivalent units of production 160 100 (see Exhibit 4A–1) (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $76.00 $72.50 Cost per equivalent unit (see page 174) (b) . . . . . Cost of ending work in process inventory $7,250 (a) 3 (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $12,160 Units transferred out: $9,600 Cost in beginning work in process inventory . . . Cost to complete the units in beginning work in process inventory: Equivalent units of production required to complete the units in beginning inventory 90 (see Exhibit 4A–1) (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $76.00 Cost per equivalent unit (see page 174) (b) . . . Cost to complete the units in beginning inventory (a) 3 (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $6,840 Cost of units started and completed this period: Units started and completed this period 4,600 (see Exhibit 4A–1) (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $76.00 Cost per equivalent unit (see page 174) (b) . . . Cost of units started and completed this period (a) 3 (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $349,600 $5,575 Total $19,410 $15,175 140 $72.50 $10,150 $16,990 4,600 $72.50 $333,500 Total cost of units transferred out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 683,100 $715,265 Cost Reconciliation Report—FIFO Method The costs assigned to ending work in process inventory and to the units transferred out reconcile with the costs we started with in Exhibit 4–7 as shown below: Shaping and Milling Department Cost Reconciliation Costs to be accounted for: Cost of beginning work in process inventory (Exhibit 4–7) . . . . $ 15,175 Costs added to production during the period (Exhibit 4–7) . . . . 719,500 Total cost to be accounted for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $734,675 Costs accounted for as follows: Cost of ending work in process inventory (see above) . . . . . . . $ 19,410 Cost of units transferred out (see above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715,265 Total cost accounted for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $734,675 The $715,265 cost of the units transferred to the next department, Graphics Application, will be accounted for in that department as “costs transferred in.” As in the weightedaverage method, this cost will be treated in the process costing system as just another category of costs, like materials or conversion costs. The only difference is that the costs transferred in will always be 100% complete with respect to the work done in the Graphics Applications Department. Costs are passed on from one department to the next in this fashion, until they reach the last processing department, Finishing and Pairing. When the products are completed in this last department, their costs are transferred to finished goods. LO4–9 Prepare a cost reconciliation report using the FIFO method. 176 Chapter 4 A Comparison of Costing Methods In most situations, the weighted-average and FIFO methods will produce very similar unit costs. If there never are any ending inventories, the two methods will produce identical results. The reason for this is that without any ending inventories, no costs can be carried forward into the next period and the weighted-average method will base unit costs on just the current period’s costs—just as in the FIFO method. If there are ending inventories, either erratic input prices or erratic production levels would also be required to generate much of a difference in unit costs under the two methods. This is because the weighted-average method will blend the unit costs from the prior period with the unit costs of the current period. Unless these unit costs differ greatly, the blending will not make much difference. Nevertheless, from the standpoint of cost control, the FIFO method is superior to the weighted-average method. Current performance should be evaluated based on costs of the current period only but the weighted-average method mixes costs of the current period with costs of the prior period. Thus, under the weighted-average method, the manager’s apparent performance in the current period is influenced by what happened in the prior period. This problem does not arise under the FIFO method because the FIFO method makes a clear distinction between costs of prior periods and costs incurred during the current period. For the same reason, the FIFO method also provides more up-to-date cost data for decision-making purposes. On the other hand, the weighted-average method is simpler to apply than the FIFO method, but computers can handle the additional calculations with ease once they have been appropriately programmed. Appendix 4A Exercises and Problems All applicable exercises and problems are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. EXERCISE 4A–1 Computation of Equivalent Units—FIFO Method [LO4–6] Refer to the data for Clonex Labs, Inc., in Exercise 4–2. Required: Compute the equivalent units of production for October assuming that the company uses the FIFO method of accounting for units and costs. EXERCISE 4A–2 Cost per Equivalent Unit—FIFO Method [LO4–7] Superior Micro Products uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data for the Assembly Department for May appear below: Cost added during May . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equivalent units of production . . . . . . . . . . Materials Labor Overhead $193,320 27,000 $62,000 25,000 $310,000 25,000 Required: Compute the cost per equivalent unit for materials, labor, overhead, and in total. EXERCISE 4A–3 Applying Costs to Units—FIFO Method [LO4–8] Data concerning a recent period’s activity in the Assembly Department, the first processing department in a company that uses process costing, appear below: Materials Conversion Cost of work in process inventory at the beginning of the period . . . . . Equivalent units of production in the ending work in process inventory . . . Equivalent units of production required to complete the beginning work in process inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost per equivalent unit for the period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $3,200 400 $650 200 600 $2.32 1,200 $0.75 Process Costing A total of 26,000 units were completed and transferred to the next processing department during the period. Beginning work in process inventory consisted of 2,000 units and ending work in process inventory consisted of 1,000 units. Required: Using the FIFO method, compute the cost of the units transferred to the next department during the period and the cost of ending work in process inventory. EXERCISE 4A–4 Cost Reconciliation Report—FIFO Method [LO4–9] Schroeder Baking Corporation uses a process costing system in its large-scale baking operations. The Mixing Department is one of the company’s processing departments. In the Mixing Department in July, the cost of beginning work in process inventory was $1,460, the cost of ending work in process inventory was $3,120, and the cost added to production was $36,540. Required: Prepare a cost reconciliation report for the Mixing Department for July. EXERCISE 4A–5 Computation of Equivalent Units—FIFO Method [LO4–6] MediSecure, Inc., produces clear plastic containers for pharmacies in a process that starts in the Molding Department. Data concerning that department’s operations in the most recent period appear below: Beginning work in process: Units in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completion with respect to materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completion with respect to conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units started into production during the month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units completed and transferred out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending work in process: Units in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completion with respect to materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completion with respect to conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 80% 40% 153,600 153,700 400 75% 20% Required: MediSecure uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Compute the equivalent units of production for the period for the Molding Department. EXERCISE 4A–6 Equivalent Units—FIFO Method [LO4–6] Refer to the data for Alaskan Fisheries, Inc., in Exercise 4–10. Required: Compute the equivalent units for July for the Cleaning Department assuming that the company uses the FIFO method of accounting for units. EXERCISE 4A–7 Equivalent Units and Cost per Equivalent Unit—FIFO Method [LO4–6, LO4–7] Refer to the data for Pureform, Inc., in Exercise 4–9. Required: Assume that the company uses the FIFO method of accounting for units and costs. 1. Compute the equivalent units for the month for the first processing department. 2. Determine the costs per equivalent unit for the month. EXERCISE 4A–8 Equivalent Units—FIFO Method [LO4–6] Refer to the data for Hielta Oy in Exercise 4–6. Assume that the company uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Required: 1. 2. Compute the number of tons of pulp completed and transferred out during June. Compute the equivalent units of production for materials and for labor and overhead for June. 177 178 Chapter 4 EXERCISE 4A–9 Equivalent Units; Applying Costs—FIFO Method [LO4–6, LO4–7, LO4–8] Jarvene Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. The following data are for the most recent month of operations in one of the company’s processing departments: Units in beginning inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units started into production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units in ending inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units transferred to the next department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Percentage completion of beginning inventory . . . . . . Percentage completion of ending inventory . . . . . . . . 400 3,000 300 3,100 Materials Conversion 80% 70% 40% 60% The cost of beginning inventory according to the company’s costing system was $11,040 of which $8,120 was for materials and the remainder was for conversion cost. The costs added during the month amounted to $132,730. The costs per equivalent unit for the month were: Cost per equivalent unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Conversion $25.40 $18.20 Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Compute the total cost per equivalent unit for the month. Compute the equivalent units of material and of conversion in the ending inventory. Compute the equivalent units of material and of conversion that were required to complete the beginning inventory. Determine the number of units started and completed during the month. Determine the costs of ending inventory and units transferred out. PROBLEM 4A–10 Equivalent Units; Applying Costs; Cost Reconciliation Report—FIFO Method [LO4–6, LO4–7, LO4–8, LO4–9] Selzik Company makes super-premium cake mixes that go through two processing departments, Blending and Packaging. The following activity was recorded in the Blending Department during July: Production data: Units in process, July 1 (materials 100% complete; conversion 30% complete) . . . 10,000 Units started into production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170,000 Units in process, July 31 (materials 100% complete; conversion 40% complete) . . . 20,000 Cost data: Work in process inventory, July 1: Materials cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $8,500 Conversion cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $4,900 Cost added during the month: Materials cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $139,400 Conversion cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $244,200 All materials are added at the beginning of work in the Blending Department. The company uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Determine the equivalent units for July for the Blending Department. Compute the costs per equivalent unit for July for the Blending Department. Determine the total cost of ending work in process inventory and the total cost of units transferred to the next process for the Blending Department in July. Prepare a cost reconciliation report for the Blending Department for July. Process Costing PROBLEM 4A–11 Equivalent Units; Cost per Equivalent Unit; Applying Costs—FIFO Method [LO4–6, LO4–7, LO4–8, LO4–9] Refer to the data for the Blending Department of Sunspots Beverages, Ltd., in Problem 4–15. Assume that the company uses the FIFO method rather than the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Determine the equivalent units for June for the Blending Department. Compute the costs per equivalent unit for June for the Blending Department. Determine the total cost of ending work in process inventory and the total cost of units transferred to the next process for the Blending Department in June. Prepare a cost reconciliation report for the Blending Department for June. CASE 4A–12 Second Department—FIFO Method [LO4–6, LO4–7, LO4–8] Refer to the data for Provost Industries in Case 4–19. Assume that the company uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Required: 1. 2. Prepare a report for the Finishing Department for April showing how much cost should have been assigned to the units completed and transferred to finished goods and how much cost should have been assigned to the ending work in process inventory. As stated in the case, the company experienced an increase in materials prices during April. Would the effects of this price increase tend to show up more under the weighted-average method or under the FIFO method? Why? Appendix 4B: Service Department Allocations Most large organizations have both operating departments and service departments. The central purposes of the organization are carried out in the operating departments. In contrast, service departments do not directly engage in operating activities. Instead, they provide services or assistance to the operating departments. Examples of operating departments include the Surgery Department at Mt. Sinai Hospital, the Geography Department at the University of Washington, the Marketing Department at Allstate Insurance Company, and production departments at manufacturers such as Mitsubishi, Hewlett-Packard, and Michelin. In process costing, the processing departments are all operating departments. Examples of service departments include Cafeteria, Internal Auditing, Human Resources, Cost Accounting, and Purchasing. The overhead costs of operating departments commonly include allocations of costs from the service departments. To the extent that service department costs are classified as production costs, they should be included in unit product costs and thus, must be allocated to operating departments in a process costing system. Three approaches are used to allocate the costs of service departments to other departments: the direct method, the step-down method, and the reciprocal method. These three methods are discussed in the following sections. However, before getting into the details of these methods, we will discuss interdepartmental services. Interdepartmental Services Many service departments provide services to each other, as well as to operating departments. For example, the Cafeteria Department provides meals for all employees, including those assigned to other service departments, as well as to employees of the operating departments. In turn, the Cafeteria Department may receive services from other service departments, such as from Custodial Services or from Personnel. Services provided between service departments are known as interdepartmental or reciprocal services. 179 180 Chapter 4 Direct Method LO4–10 Allocate service department costs to operating departments using the direct method. The direct method is the simplest of the three cost allocation methods. It ignores the services provided by a service department to other service departments (e.g., interdepartmental services) and allocates all service department costs directly to operating departments. Even if a service department (such as Personnel) provides a large amount of service to another service department (such as the cafeteria), no allocations are made between the two departments. Rather, all costs are allocated directly to the operating departments, bypassing the other service departments; hence, the term direct method. For an example of the direct method, consider Mountain View Hospital, which has two service departments and two operating departments as shown below. The hospital allocates its Hospital Administration costs on the basis of employee-hours and its Custodial Services costs on the basis of square feet occupied. Service Operating Departments Departments Hospital Custodial Patient Administration Services Laboratory Care Departmental costs before allocation . . . . . . . Employee hours . . . Space occupied— square feet . . . . . . $360,000 12,000 $90,000 6,000 $261,000 18,000 10,000 200 5,000 Total $689,000 $1,400,000 30,000 66,000 45,000 60,200 The direct method of allocating the hospital’s service department costs to the operating departments is shown in Exhibit 4B–1. Several things should be noted in this exhibit. First, the employee-hours of the Hospital Administration Department and the Custodial Services Department are ignored when allocating the costs of Hospital Administration using the direct method. Under the direct method, any of the allocation base attributable to the service departments themselves is ignored; only the amount of the allocation base attributable to the operating departments is used in the allocation. Note that the same rule is used when allocating the costs of the Custodial Services Department. Even though the Hospital Administration and Custodial Services departments occupy some space, this is ignored when the Custodial Services costs are allocated. Finally, note that after all allocations have been completed, all of the service department costs are contained in the two operating departments. EXHIBIT 4B–1 Direct Method of Allocation Service Departments Departmental costs before allocation . . . . . . . . . . Allocation: Hospital Administration costs (18 ⁄48, 30 ⁄48)* . . . . . Custodial Services costs (5 ⁄50, 45 ⁄50)† . . . . . . . . . Total cost after allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Departments Hospital Administration Custodial Services Laboratory Patient Care Total $360,000 $90,000 $261,000 $689,000 $1,400,000 135,000 9,000 225,000 81,000 $405,000 $995,000 (360,000) (90,000) $ 0 $ 0 $1,400,000 *Based on the employee-hours in the two operating departments, which are 18,000 hours 1 30,000 hours 5 48,000 hours. † Based on the square feet occupied by the two operating departments, which is 5,000 square feet 1 45,000 square feet 5 50,000 square feet. Process Costing 181 Although the direct method is simple, it is less accurate than the other methods because it ignores interdepartmental services. Step-Down Method LO4–11 Unlike the direct method, the step-down method provides for allocation of a service department’s costs to other service departments, as well as to operating departments. The step-down method is sequential. The sequence typically begins with the department that provides the greatest amount of service to other service departments. After its costs have been allocated, the process continues, step by step, ending with the department that provides the least amount of services to other service departments. This step procedure is illustrated in Exhibit 4B–2. Exhibit 4B–3 shows the details of the step-down method. Note the following three key points about these allocations. First, under Allocation in Exhibit 4B–3, you see two allocations, or steps. In the first step, the costs of Hospital Administration are allocated Allocate service department costs to operating departments using the step-down method. EXHIBIT 4B–2 Graphic Illustration—Step-Down Method Hospital Administration Costs are allocated to other departments on the basis of employee-hours. Custodial Services Costs are allocated to operating departments on the basis of square feet occupied. Laboratory Patient Care EXHIBIT 4B–3 Step-Down Method of Allocation Service Departments Departmental costs before allocation . . . . . . . . . Allocation: Hospital Administration costs (6⁄54, 18 ⁄54, 30 ⁄54)* . . Custodial Services costs (5 ⁄50, 45 ⁄50)† . . . . . . . . . Total cost after allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Departments Hospital Administration Custodial Services Laboratory $360,000 $ 90,000 $261,000 $ 689,000 $1,400,000 (360,000) 40,000 (130,000) $ 0 120,000 13,000 $394,000 200,000 117,000 $1,006,000 $1,400,000 $ 0 Patient Care Total *Based on the employee-hours in Custodial Services and the two operating departments, which are 6,000 hours 1 18,000 hours 1 30,000 hours 5 54,000 hours. As in Exhibit 4B–1, this allocation is based on the square feet occupied by the two operating departments. 182 Chapter 4 to another service department (Custodial Services) as well as to the operating departments. In contrast to the direct method, the allocation base for Hospital Administration costs now includes the employee-hours for Custodial Services as well as for the operating departments. However, the allocation base still excludes the employee-hours for Hospital Administration itself. In both the direct and step-down methods, any amount of the allocation base attributable to the service department whose cost is being allocated is always ignored. Second, looking again at Exhibit 4B–3, note that in the second step under the Allocation heading, the cost of Custodial Services is allocated to the two operating departments, and none of the cost is allocated to Hospital Administration even though Hospital Administration occupies space in the building. In the step-down method, any amount of the allocation base that is attributable to a service department whose cost has already been allocated is ignored. After a service department’s costs have been allocated, costs of other service departments are not reallocated back to it. Third, note that the cost of Custodial Services allocated to other departments in the second step ($130,000) in Exhibit 4B–3 includes the costs of Hospital Administration that were allocated to Custodial Services in the first step in Exhibit 4B–3. Reciprocal Method The reciprocal method gives full recognition to interdepartmental services. Under the step-down method only partial recognition of interdepartmental services is possible. The step-down method always allocates costs forward—never backward. The reciprocal method, by contrast, allocates service department costs in both directions. Thus, because Custodial Services in the prior example provides services for Hospital Administration, part of Custodial Services’ costs will be allocated back to Hospital Administration if the reciprocal method is used. At the same time, part of Hospital Administration’s costs will be allocated forward to Custodial Services. Reciprocal allocation requires the use of simultaneous linear equations and is beyond the scope of this book. Examples of the reciprocal method can be found in more advanced cost accounting texts. Appendix 4B Exercises and Problems All applicable exercises and problems are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. EXERCISE 4B–1 Direct Method [LO4–10] Seattle Western University has provided the following data to be used in its service department cost allocations: Service Departments Departmental costs before allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . Student credit-hours . . . . . . . Space occupied—square feet Operating Departments Administration Facility Services Undergraduate Programs Graduate Programs $2,400,000 $1,600,000 25,000 10,000 $26,800,000 20,000 70,000 $5,700,000 5,000 30,000 Required: Using the direct method, allocate the costs of the service departments to the two operating departments. Allocate the costs of Administration on the basis of student credit-hours and Facility Services costs on the basis of space occupied. Process Costing 183 EXERCISE 4B–2 Step-Down Method [LO4–11] Madison Park Co-op, a whole foods grocery and gift shop, has provided the following data to be used in its service department cost allocations: Service Departments Administration Departmental costs before allocations . . . Employee-hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space occupied—square feet . . . . . . . . $150,000 320 250 Operating Departments Janitorial Groceries Gifts $40,000 160 100 $2,320,000 3,100 4,000 $950,000 740 1,000 Required: Using the step-down method, allocate the costs of the service departments to the two operating departments. Allocate Administration first on the basis of employee-hours and then Janitorial on the basis of space occupied. EXERCISE 4B–3 Step-Down Method [LO4–11] The Ferre Publishing Company has three service departments and two operating departments. Selected data from a recent period on the five departments follow: Service Departments Operating Departments Administration Janitorial Maintenance Binding Printing Total $140,000 60 15,000 $105,000 35 10,000 $48,000 140 20,000 $275,000 315 40,000 30,000 $430,000 210 100,000 60,000 $998,000 760 185,000 90,000 Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of employees . . . . . . . . . . Square feet of space occupied . . . . Hours of press time . . . . . . . . . . . . The company allocates service department costs by the step-down method in the following order: Administration (number of employees), Janitorial (space occupied), and Maintenance (hours of press time). Required: Using the step-down method, allocate the service department costs to the operating departments. EXERCISE 4B–4 Direct Method [LO4–10] Refer to the data for the Ferre Publishing Company in Exercise 4B–3. Required: Assuming that the company uses the direct method rather than the step-down method to allocate service department costs, how much cost would be assigned to each operating department? PROBLEM 4B–5 Step-Down Method [LO4–11] Woodbury Hospital has three service departments and three operating departments. Estimated cost and operating data for all departments in the hospital for the forthcoming quarter are presented in the table below: Service Departments Housekeeping Services Operating Departments Food Services Admin. Services Laboratory Radiology General Hospital Total Variable costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 0 87,000 $193,860 107,200 $158,840 90,180 $243,600 162,300 $304,800 215,700 $ 74,500 401,300 $ 975,600 1,063,680 Total cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $87,000 $301,060 $249,020 $405,900 $520,500 $475,800 $2,039,280 800 2,000 1,000 68,000 71,800 0.8% 6,500 2.4% 10,000 14,000 1.6% 7,500 7,000 95.2% 108,000 25,000 100% 150,000 46,000 30% 20% 50% 100% Meals served . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Percentage of peak-period needs—Food Services . . . . . . Square feet of space . . . . . . . . . . Files processed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Percentage of peak-period needs—Admin. Services . . . . . 5,000 13,000 184 Chapter 4 The costs of the service departments are allocated by the step-down method using the allocation bases and in the order shown in the following table: Service Department Housekeeping Services . . . . . . . . . . Food Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative Services . . . . . . . . . . Costs Incurred Allocation Bases Fixed Variable Fixed Variable Fixed Square feet of space Meals served Peak-period needs—Food Services Files processed Peak-period needs—Admin. Services All billing in the hospital is done through Laboratory, Radiology, or General Hospital. The hospital’s administrator wants the costs of the three service departments allocated to these three billing centers. Required: Using the step-down method, prepare the cost allocation desired by the hospital administrator. Include under each billing center the direct costs of the center, as well as the costs allocated from the service departments. PROBLEM 4B–6 Step-Down Method versus Direct Method; Predetermined Overhead Rates [LO4–10, LO4–11] The Sendai Co., Ltd., of Japan has budgeted costs in its various departments as follows for the coming year: Factory Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custodial Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machining—overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly—overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $270,000 68,760 28,840 45,200 376,300 175,900 Total cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $965,000 The company allocates service department costs to other departments in the order listed below. Department Factory Administration . . . . Custodial Services . . . . . . Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of Employees Total LaborHours Square Feet of Space Occupied Direct LaborHours MachineHours 12 4 5 25 40 60 — 3,000 5,000 22,000 30,000 90,000 5,000 2,000 3,000 10,000 70,000 20,000 — — — — 20,000 80,000 — — — — 70,000 10,000 146 150,000 110,000 100,000 80,000 Machining and Assembly are operating departments; the other departments are service departments. Factory Administration is allocated on the basis of labor-hours; Custodial Services on the basis of square feet occupied; Personnel on the basis of number of employees; and Maintenance on the basis of machine-hours. Required: 1. Allocate service department costs to consuming departments by the step-down method. Then compute predetermined overhead rates in the operating departments using a machine-hours basis in Machining and a direct labor-hours basis in Assembly. Process Costing 2. 3. 4. Repeat (1) above, this time using the direct method. Again compute predetermined overhead rates in Machining and Assembly. Assume that the company doesn’t bother with allocating service department costs but simply computes a single plantwide overhead rate based on total overhead costs (both service department and operating department costs) divided by total direct labor-hours. Compute the plantwide overhead rate. Suppose a job requires machine and labor time as follows: MachineHours Direct Labor-Hours Machining Department . . . . . . . . Assembly Department . . . . . . . . . 190 10 25 75 Total hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 100 Using the overhead rates computed in (1), (2), and (3) above, compute the amount of overhead cost that would be assigned to the job if the overhead rates were developed using the stepdown method, the direct method, and the plantwide method. CASE 4B–7 Step-Down Method versus Direct Method [LO4–10, LO4–11] “This is really an odd situation,” said Jim Carter, general manager of Highland Publishing Company. “We get most of the jobs we bid on that require a lot of press time in the Printing Department, yet profits on those jobs are never as high as they ought to be. On the other hand, we lose most of the jobs we bid on that require a lot of time in the Binding Department. I would be inclined to think that the problem is with our overhead rates, but we’re already computing separate overhead rates for each department. So what else could be wrong?” Highland Publishing Company is a large organization that offers a variety of printing and binding work. The Printing and Binding departments are supported by three service departments. The costs of these service departments are allocated to other departments in the order listed below. (For each service department, use the allocation base that provides the best measure of service provided, as discussed in the chapter.) Department Total LaborHours Square Feet of Space Occupied Number of Employees MachineHours Direct LaborHours Personnel . . . . . . . . . Custodial Services . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . Printing . . . . . . . . . . . Binding . . . . . . . . . . . 20,000 30,000 50,000 90,000 260,000 4,000 6,000 20,000 80,000 40,000 10 15 25 40 120 150,000 30,000 60,000 175,000 450,000 150,000 210 180,000 235,000 Budgeted overhead costs in each department for the current year are shown below: Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custodial Services . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 360,000 141,000 201,000 525,000 373,500 Total budgeted cost . . . . . . . . . $1,600,500 Because of its simplicity, the company has always used the direct method to allocate service department costs to the two operating departments. 185 186 Chapter 4 Required: 1. 2. 3. Using the step-down method, allocate the service department costs to the consuming departments. Then compute predetermined overhead rates for the current year using machine-hours as the allocation base in the Printing Department and direct labor-hours as the allocation base in the Binding Department. Repeat (1) above, this time using the direct method. Again compute predetermined overhead rates in the Printing and Binding departments. Assume that during the current year the company bids on a job that requires machine and labor time as follows: a. b. MachineHours Direct Labor-Hours Printing Department . . . . . . . . . Binding Department . . . . . . . . . 15,400 800 900 2,000 Total hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16,200 2,900 Determine the amount of overhead cost that would be assigned to the job if the company used the overhead rates developed in (1) above. Then determine the amount of overhead cost that would be assigned to the job if the company used the overhead rates developed in (2) above. Explain to Mr. Carter, the general manager, why the step-down method provides a better basis for computing predetermined overhead rates than the direct method. CHAPTER 5 Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships Moreno Turns Around the Los Angeles Angels BUSIN ESS FO CUS LEARNING OBJECTIVES After studying Chapter 5, you should be able to: LO5–1 Explain how changes in activity affect contribution margin and net operating income. LO5–2 Prepare and interpret a cost-volumeprofit (CVP) graph and a profit graph. LO5–3 Use the contribution margin ratio (CM ratio) to compute changes in contribution margin and net operating income resulting from changes in sales volume. When Arturo Moreno bought Major League Baseball’s Los Angeles Angels in 2003, the team was drawing 2.3 million fans and losing $5.5 million per year. Moreno immediately cut prices to attract more fans and increase profits. In his first spring training game, he reduced the price of selected tickets from $12 to $6. By increasing attendance, Moreno understood that he would sell more food and souvenirs. He dropped the price of draft beer by $2 and cut the price of baseball caps from $20 to $7. The Angels now consistently draw about 3.4 million fans per year. This growth in attendance helped double stadium sponsorship revenue to $26 million, and it motivated the Fox Sports Network to pay the Angels $500 million to broadcast all of its games for the next ten years. Since Moreno bought the Angels, annual revenues have jumped from $127 million to $212 million, and the team’s operating loss of $5.5 million has been transformed to a profit of $10.3 million. ■ LO5–4 Show the effects on net operating income of changes in variable costs, fixed costs, selling price, and volume. LO5–5 Determine the break-even point. LO5–6 Determine the level of sales needed to achieve a desired target profit. LO5–7 Compute the margin of safety and explain its significance. LO5–8 Compute the degree of operating leverage at a particular level of sales and explain how it can be used to predict changes in net operating income. Source: Matthew Craft, “Moreno’s Math,” Forbes, May 11, 2009, pp. 84–87. LO5–9 Compute the break-even point for a multiproduct company and explain the effects of shifts in the sales mix on contribution margin and the break-even point. 187 188 Chapter 5 ost-volume-profit (CVP) analysis helps managers make many C important decisions such as what products and services to offer, what prices to charge, what marketing strategy to use, and what cost structure to maintain. Its primary purpose is to estimate how profits are affected by the following five factors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Selling prices. Sales volume. Unit variable costs. Total fixed costs. Mix of products sold. To simplify CVP calculations, managers typically adopt the following assumptions with respect to these factors1: 1. Selling price is constant. The price of a product or service will not change as volume changes. 2. Costs are linear and can be accurately divided into variable and fixed elements. The variable element is constant per unit. The fixed element is constant in total over the entire relevant range. 3. In multiproduct companies, the mix of products sold remains constant. While these assumptions may be violated in practice, the results of CVP analysis are often “good enough” to be quite useful. Perhaps the greatest danger lies in relying on simple CVP analysis when a manager is contemplating a large change in sales volume that lies outside the relevant range. However, even in these situations the CVP model can be adjusted to take into account anticipated changes in selling prices, variable costs per unit, total fixed costs, and the sales mix that arise when the estimated sales volume falls outside the relevant range. To help explain the role of CVP analysis in business decisions, we’ll now turn our attention to the case of Acoustic Concepts, Inc., a company founded by Prem Narayan. MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING IN ACTION THE ISSUE Prem, who was a graduate student in engineering at the time, started Acoustic Concepts to market a radical new speaker he had designed for automobile sound systems. The speaker, called the Sonic Blaster, uses an advanced microprocessor and proprietary software to boost amplification to awesome levels. Prem contracted with a Taiwanese electronics manufacturer to produce the speaker. With seed money provided by his family, Prem placed an order with the manufacturer and ran advertisements in auto magazines. The Sonic Blaster was an immediate success, and sales grew to the point that Prem moved the company’s headquarters out of his apartment and into rented quarters in a nearby industrial park. He also hired a receptionist, an accountant, a sales manager, and a small sales staff to sell the speakers to retail stores. The accountant, Bob Luchinni, had worked for several small companies where he had acted as a business advisor as well as accountant and bookkeeper. The following discussion occurred soon after Bob was hired: Prem: Bob, I’ve got a lot of questions about the company’s finances that I hope you can help answer. Bob: We’re in great shape. The loan from your family will be paid off within a few months. Prem: I know, but I am worried about the risks I’ve taken on by expanding operations. What would happen if a competitor entered the market and our sales slipped? How far could sales drop without putting us into the red? Another question I’ve been trying to resolve is how much our sales would have to increase to justify the big marketing campaign the sales staff is pushing for. Bob: Marketing always wants more money for advertising. 1 One additional assumption often used in manufacturing companies is that inventories do not change. The number of units produced equals the number of units sold. Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships 189 Prem: And they are always pushing me to drop the selling price on the speaker. I agree with them that a lower price will boost our sales volume, but I’m not sure the increased volume will offset the loss in revenue from the lower price. Bob: It sounds like these questions are all related in some way to the relationships among our selling prices, our costs, and our volume. I shouldn’t have a problem coming up with some answers. Prem: Can we meet again in a couple of days to see what you have come up with? Bob: Sounds good. By then I’ll have some preliminary answers for you as well as a model you can use for answering similar questions in the future. The Basics of Cost-Volume-Profit (CVP) Analysis Bob Luchinni’s preparation for his forthcoming meeting with Prem begins with the contribution income statement. The contribution income statement emphasizes the behavior of costs and therefore is extremely helpful to managers in judging the impact on profits of changes in selling price, cost, or volume. Bob will base his analysis on the following contribution income statement he prepared last month: Acoustic Concepts, Inc. Contribution Income Statement For the Month of June Sales (400 speakers) . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . Total $100,000 60,000 40,000 35,000 $ 5,000 Per Unit $250 150 $100 Notice that sales, variable expenses, and contribution margin are expressed on a per unit basis as well as in total on this contribution income statement. The per unit figures will be very helpful to Bob in some of his calculations. Note that this contribution income statement has been prepared for management’s use inside the company and would not ordinarily be made available to those outside the company. Contribution Margin Contribution margin is the amount remaining from sales revenue after variable expenses have been deducted. Thus, it is the amount available to cover fixed expenses and then to provide profits for the period. Notice the sequence here—contribution margin is used first to cover the fixed expenses, and then whatever remains goes toward profits. If the contribution margin is not sufficient to cover the fixed expenses, then a loss occurs for the period. To illustrate with an extreme example, assume that Acoustic Concepts sells only one speaker during a particular month. The company’s income statement would appear as follows: Contribution Income Statement Sales of 1 Speaker Sales (1 speaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating loss . . . . . . . . . . . . Total $ 250 150 100 35,000 $(34,900) Per Unit $250 150 $100 LO5–1 Explain how changes in activity affect contribution margin and net operating income. 190 Chapter 5 For each additional speaker the company sells during the month, $100 more in contribution margin becomes available to help cover the fixed expenses. If a second speaker is sold, for example, then the total contribution margin will increase by $100 (to a total of $200) and the company’s loss will decrease by $100, to $34,800: Contribution Income Statement Sales of 2 Speakers Sales (2 speakers) . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating loss . . . . . . . . . . . . Total 500 300 200 35,000 $(34,800) $ Per Unit $250 150 $100 If enough speakers can be sold to generate $35,000 in contribution margin, then all of the fixed expenses will be covered and the company will break even for the month—that is, it will show neither profit nor loss but just cover all of its costs. To reach the breakeven point, the company will have to sell 350 speakers in a month because each speaker sold yields $100 in contribution margin: Contribution Income Statement Sales of 350 Speakers Sales (350 speakers) . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . Total $87,500 52,500 35,000 35,000 $ 0 Per Unit $250 150 $100 Computation of the break-even point is discussed in detail later in the chapter; for the moment, note that the break-even point is the level of sales at which profit is zero. Once the break-even point has been reached, net operating income will increase by the amount of the unit contribution margin for each additional unit sold. For example, if 351 speakers are sold in a month, then the net operating income for the month will be $100 because the company will have sold 1 speaker more than the number needed to break even: Contribution Income Statement Sales of 351 Speakers Sales (351 speakers) . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . Total $87,750 52,650 35,100 35,000 $ 100 Per Unit $250 150 $100 If 352 speakers are sold (2 speakers above the break-even point), the net operating income for the month will be $200. If 353 speakers are sold (3 speakers above the break-even point), the net operating income for the month will be $300, and so forth. To estimate the profit at any sales volume above the break-even point, multiply the number of units sold in excess of the break-even point by the unit contribution margin. The result Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships represents the anticipated profits for the period. Or, to estimate the effect of a planned increase in sales on profits, simply multiply the increase in units sold by the unit contribution margin. The result will be the expected increase in profits. To illustrate, if Acoustic Concepts is currently selling 400 speakers per month and plans to increase sales to 425 speakers per month, the anticipated impact on profits can be computed as follows: Increased number of speakers to be sold . . . . . Contribution margin per speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . Increase in net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3 $100 $ 2,500 These calculations can be verified as follows: Sales Volume Sales (@ $250 per speaker) . . . . . . Variable expenses (@ $150 per speaker) . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Speakers 425 Speakers Difference (25 Speakers) $100,000 $106,250 $6,250 $250 60,000 40,000 35,000 $ 5,000 63,750 42,500 35,000 $ 7,500 3,750 2,500 0 $2,500 150 $100 Per Unit To summarize, if sales are zero, the company’s loss would equal its fixed expenses. Each unit that is sold reduces the loss by the amount of the unit contribution margin. Once the break-even point has been reached, each additional unit sold increases the company’s profit by the amount of the unit contribution margin. CVP Relationships in Equation Form The contribution format income statement can be expressed in equation form as follows: Profit 5 (Sales 2 Variable expenses) 2 Fixed expenses For brevity, we use the term profit to stand for net operating income in equations. When a company has only a single product, as at Acoustic Concepts, we can further refine the equation as follows: Sales 5 Selling price per unit 3 Quantity sold 5 P 3 Q Variable expenses 5 Variable expenses per unit 3 Quantity sold 5 V 3 Q Profit 5 (P 3 Q 2 V 3 Q) 2 Fixed expenses We can do all of the calculations of the previous section using this simple equation. For example, on the previous page we computed that the net operating income (profit) at sales of 351 speakers would be $100. We can arrive at the same conclusion using the above equation as follows: Profit 5 (P 3 Q 2 V 3 Q) 2 Fixed expenses Profit 5 ($250 3 351 2 $150 3 351) 2 $35,000 5 ($250 2 $150) 3 351 2 $35,000 5 ($100) 3 351 2 $35,000 5 $35,100 2 $35,000 5 $100 191 192 Chapter 5 It is often useful to express the simple profit equation in terms of the unit contribution margin (Unit CM) as follows: Unit CM 5 Selling price per unit 2 Variable expenses per unit 5 P 2 V Profit 5 (P 3 Q 2 V 3 Q) 2 Fixed expenses Profit 5 (P 2 V) 3 Q 2 Fixed expenses Profit 5 Unit CM 3 Q 2 Fixed expenses We could also have used this equation to determine the profit at sales of 351 speakers as follows: Profit 5 Unit CM 3 Q 2 Fixed expenses 5 $100 3 351 2 $35,000 5 $35,100 2 $35,000 5 $100 For those who are comfortable with algebra, the quickest and easiest approach to solving the problems in this chapter may be to use the simple profit equation in one of its forms. CVP Relationships in Graphic Form LO5–2 Prepare and interpret a costvolume-profit (CVP) graph and a profit graph. The relationships among revenue, cost, profit, and volume are illustrated on a costvolume-profit (CVP) graph. A CVP graph highlights CVP relationships over wide ranges of activity. To help explain his analysis to Prem Narayan, Bob Luchinni prepared a CVP graph for Acoustic Concepts. Preparing the CVP Graph In a CVP graph (sometimes called a break-even chart), unit volume is represented on the horizontal (X) axis and dollars on the vertical (Y) axis. Preparing a CVP graph involves the three steps depicted in Exhibit 5–1: 1. Draw a line parallel to the volume axis to represent total fixed expense. For Acoustic Concepts, total fixed expenses are $35,000. 2. Choose some volume of unit sales and plot the point representing total expense (fixed and variable) at the sales volume you have selected. In Exhibit 5–1, Bob Luchinni chose a volume of 600 speakers. Total expense at that sales volume is: Fixed expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expense (600 speakers 3 $150 per speaker) . . . . . . . . . Total expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 35,000 90,000 $125,000 After the point has been plotted, draw a line through it back to the point where the fixed expense line intersects the dollars axis. 3. Again choose some sales volume and plot the point representing total sales dollars at the activity level you have selected. In Exhibit 5–1, Bob Luchinni again chose a volume of 600 speakers. Sales at that volume total $150,000 (600 speakers 3 $250 per speaker). Draw a line through this point back to the origin. The interpretation of the completed CVP graph is given in Exhibit 5–2. The anticipated profit or loss at any given level of sales is measured by the vertical distance between the total revenue line (sales) and the total expense line (variable expense plus fixed expense). Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships EXHIBIT 5–1 Preparing the CVP Graph $175,000 Step 3 (total sales revenue) $150,000 $125,000 193 Step 2 (total expense) $100,000 $75,000 Step 1 (fixed expense) $50,000 $25,000 $0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 Volume in speakers sold 700 800 EXHIBIT 5–2 The Completed CVP Graph $175,000 Total revenue $150,000 $125,000 Break-even point: 350 speakers or $87,500 in sales $100,000 Total expense $75,000 $50,000 Variable expense at $150 per speaker Profit area Total fixed expense, $35,000 Loss area $25,000 $0 0 100 200 300 400 500 Volume in speakers sold 600 700 The break-even point is where the total revenue and total expense lines cross. The break-even point of 350 speakers in Exhibit 5–2 agrees with the break-even point computed earlier. As discussed earlier, when sales are below the break-even point—in this case, 350 units—the company suffers a loss. Note that the loss (represented by the vertical distance 194 Chapter 5 EXHIBIT 5–3 The Profit Graph $40,000 $35,000 $30,000 $25,000 $20,000 $15,000 $10,000 Break-even point: 350 speakers Profit $5,000 $0 –$5,000 –$10,000 –$15,000 –$20,000 –$25,000 –$30,000 –$35,000 –$40,000 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 Volume in speakers sold between the total expense and total revenue lines) gets bigger as sales decline. When sales are above the break-even point, the company earns a profit and the size of the profit (represented by the vertical distance between the total revenue and total expense lines) increases as sales increase. An even simpler form of the CVP graph, which we call a profit graph, is presented in Exhibit 5–3. That graph is based on the following equation: Profit 5 Unit CM 3 Q 2 Fixed expenses In the case of Acoustic Concepts, the equation can be expressed as: Profit 5 $100 3 Q 2 $35,000 LO5–3 Use the contribution margin ratio (CM ratio) to compute changes in contribution margin and net operating income resulting from changes in sales volume. Because this is a linear equation, it plots as a single straight line. To plot the line, compute the profit at two different sales volumes, plot the points, and then connect them with a straight line. For example, when the sales volume is zero (i.e., Q 5 0), the profit is 2 $35,000 (5 $100 3 0 2 $35,000). When Q is 600, the profit is $25,000 (5 $100 3 600 2 $35,000). These two points are plotted in Exhibit 5–3 and a straight line has been drawn through them. The break-even point on the profit graph is the volume of sales at which profit is zero and is indicated by the dashed line on the graph. Note that the profit steadily increases to the right of the break-even point as the sales volume increases and that the loss becomes steadily worse to the left of the break-even point as the sales volume decreases. Contribution Margin Ratio (CM Ratio) In the previous section, we explored how cost-volume-profit relationships can be visualized. In this section, we show how the contribution margin ratio can be used in costvolume-profit calculations. As the first step, we have added a column to Acoustic Concepts’ Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships contribution format income statement in which sales revenues, variable expenses, and contribution margin are expressed as a percentage of sales: Total Per Unit Percent of Sales Sales (400 speakers) . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . $100,000 60,000 40,000 35,000 $250 150 $100 100% 60% 40% Net operating income . . . . . . . . . $ 5,000 The contribution margin as a percentage of sales is referred to as the contribution margin ratio (CM ratio). This ratio is computed as follows: Contribution margin CM ratio 5 _________________ Sales For Acoustic Concepts, the computations are: Total contribution margin $40,000 CM ratio 5 _____________________ 5 ________ 5 40% Total sales $100,000 In a company such as Acoustic Concepts that has only one product, the CM ratio can also be computed on a per unit basis as follows: Unit contribution margin $100 CM ratio 5 _____________________ 5 _____ 5 40% Unit selling price $250 The CM ratio shows how the contribution margin will be affected by a change in total sales. Acoustic Concepts’ CM ratio of 40% means that for each dollar increase in sales, total contribution margin will increase by 40 cents ($1 sales 3 CM ratio of 40%). Net operating income will also increase by 40 cents, assuming that fixed costs are not affected by the increase in sales. Generally, the effect of a change in sales on the contribution margin is expressed in equation form as: Change in contribution margin 5 CM ratio 3 Change in sales As this illustration suggests, the impact on net operating income of any given dollar change in total sales can be computed by applying the CM ratio to the dollar change. For example, if Acoustic Concepts plans a $30,000 increase in sales during the coming month, the contribution margin should increase by $12,000 ($30,000 increase in sales 3 CM ratio of 40%). As we noted above, net operating income will also increase by $12,000 if fixed costs do not change. This is verified by the following table: Sales Volume Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . Present Expected Increase $100,000 60,000 40,000 35,000 $ 5,000 $130,000 78,000* 52,000 35,000 $ 17,000 $30,000 18,000 12,000 0 $12,000 Percent of Sales 100% 60% 40% *$130,000 expected sales 4 $250 per unit 5 520 units. 520 units 3 $150 per unit 5 $78,000. 195 196 Chapter 5 The relation between profit and the CM ratio can also be expressed using the following equations: Profit 5 CM ratio 3 Sales 2 Fixed expenses2 or, in terms of changes, Change in profit 5 CM ratio 3 Change in sales 2 Change in fixed expenses For example, at sales of $130,000, the profit is expected to be $17,000 as shown below: Profit 5 CM ratio 3 Sales 2 Fixed expenses 5 0.40 3 $130,000 2 $35,000 5 $52,000 2 $35,000 5 $17,000 Again, if you are comfortable with algebra, this approach will often be quicker and easier than constructing contribution format income statements. The CM ratio is particularly valuable in situations where the dollar sales of one product must be traded off against the dollar sales of another product. In this situation, products that yield the greatest amount of contribution margin per dollar of sales should be emphasized. LO5–4 Some Applications of CVP Concepts Show the effects on net operating income of changes in variable costs, fixed costs, selling price, and volume. Bob Luchinni, the accountant at Acoustic Concepts, wanted to demonstrate to the company’s president Prem Narayan how the concepts developed on the preceding pages can be used in planning and decision making. Bob gathered the following basic data: Selling price . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . Per Unit Percent of Sales $250 150 $100 100% 60% 40% Recall that fixed expenses are $35,000 per month. Bob Luchinni will use these data to show the effects of changes in variable costs, fixed costs, sales price, and sales volume on the company’s profitability in a variety of situations. Before proceeding further, however, we need to introduce another concept—the variable expense ratio. The variable expense ratio is the ratio of variable expenses to sales. It can be computed by dividing the total variable expenses by the total sales, or in a single product analysis, it can be computed by dividing the variable expenses per unit by the unit selling price. In the case of Acoustic Concepts, the variable expense ratio is 0.60; that is, variable expense is 60% of sales. Expressed as an equation, the definition of the variable expense ratio is: Variable expenses Variable expense ratio 5 _______________ Sales 2 This equation can be derived using the basic profit equation and the definition of the CM ratio as follows: Profit 5 (Sales 2 Variable expenses) 2 Fixed expenses Profit 5 Contribution margin 2 Fixed expenses Contribution margin Profit 5 _________________ 3 Sales 2 Fixed expenses Sales Profit 5 CM ratio 3 Sales 2 Fixed expenses Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships This leads to a useful equation that relates the CM ratio to the variable expense ratio as follows: Contribution margin CM ratio 5 _________________ Sales Sales 2 Variable expenses CM ratio 5 ______________________ Sales CM ratio 5 1 2 Variable expense ratio Change in Fixed Cost and Sales Volume Acoustic Concepts is currently selling 400 speakers per month at $250 per speaker for total monthly sales of $100,000. The sales manager feels that a $10,000 increase in the monthly advertising budget would increase monthly sales by $30,000 to a total of 520 units. Should the advertising budget be increased? The table below shows the financial impact of the proposed change in the monthly advertising budget. Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . Current Sales Sales with Additional Advertising Budget Difference $100,000 60,000 40,000 35,000 $ 5,000 $130,000 78,000* 52,000 45,000† $ 7,000 $30,000 18,000 12,000 10,000 $ 2,000 Percent of Sales 100% 60% 40% *520 units 3 $150 per unit 5 $78,000. † $35,000 1 additional $10,000 monthly advertising budget 5 $45,000. Assuming no other factors need to be considered, the increase in the advertising budget should be approved because it would increase net operating income by $2,000. There are two shorter ways to arrive at this solution. The first alternative solution follows: Alternative Solution 1 Expected total contribution margin: $130,000 3 40% CM ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Present total contribution margin: $100,000 3 40% CM ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Increase in total contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . Change in fixed expenses: Less incremental advertising expense . . . . . . . . Increased net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $52,000 40,000 12,000 10,000 $ 2,000 Because in this case only the fixed costs and the sales volume change, the solution can also be quickly derived as follows: Alternative Solution 2 Incremental contribution margin: $30,000 3 40% CM ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Less incremental advertising expense . . . . . . . . . . Increased net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $12,000 10,000 $ 2,000 197 198 Chapter 5 Notice that this approach does not depend on knowledge of previous sales. Also note that it is unnecessary under either shorter approach to prepare an income statement. Both of the alternative solutions involve incremental analysis—they consider only the costs and revenues that will change if the new program is implemented. Although in each case a new income statement could have been prepared, the incremental approach is simpler and more direct and focuses attention on the specific changes that would occur as a result of the decision. Change in Variable Costs and Sales Volume Refer to the original data. Recall that Acoustic Concepts is currently selling 400 speakers per month. Prem is considering the use of higher-quality components, which would increase variable costs (and thereby reduce the contribution margin) by $10 per speaker. However, the sales manager predicts that using higher-quality components would increase sales to 480 speakers per month. Should the higher-quality components be used? The $10 increase in variable costs would decrease the unit contribution margin by $10—from $100 down to $90. Solution Expected total contribution margin with higher-quality components: 480 speakers 3 $90 per speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $43,200 Present total contribution margin: 400 speakers 3 $100 per speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,000 $ 3,200 Increase in total contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . According to this analysis, the higher-quality components should be used. Because fixed costs would not change, the $3,200 increase in contribution margin shown above should result in a $3,200 increase in net operating income. Change in Fixed Cost, Selling Price, and Sales Volume Refer to the original data and recall again that Acoustic Concepts is currently selling 400 speakers per month. To increase sales, the sales manager would like to cut the selling price by $20 per speaker and increase the advertising budget by $15,000 per month. The sales manager believes that if these two steps are taken, unit sales will increase by 50% to 600 speakers per month. Should the changes be made? A decrease in the selling price of $20 per speaker would decrease the unit contribution margin by $20 down to $80. Solution Expected total contribution margin with lower selling price: 600 speakers 3 $80 per speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Present total contribution margin: 400 speakers 3 $100 per speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incremental contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change in fixed expenses: Less incremental advertising expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction in net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $48,000 40,000 8,000 15,000 $ (7,000) According to this analysis, the changes should not be made. The $7,000 reduction in net operating income that is shown above can be verified by preparing comparative income statements as shown on the next page. Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships Present 400 Speakers per Month Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . Net operating income (loss) Expected 600 Speakers per Month Total Per Unit Total $100,000 60,000 40,000 35,000 $ 5,000 $250 150 $100 $138,000 90,000 48,000 50,000* $ (2,000) Per Unit Difference $230 150 $ 80 $38,000 30,000 8,000 15,000 $ (7,000) *35,000 1 Additional monthly advertising budget of $15,000 5 $50,000. Change in Variable Cost, Fixed Cost, and Sales Volume Refer to Acoustic Concepts’ original data. As before, the company is currently selling 400 speakers per month. The sales manager would like to pay salespersons a sales commission of $15 per speaker sold, rather than the flat salaries that now total $6,000 per month. The sales manager is confident that the change would increase monthly sales by 15% to 460 speakers per month. Should the change be made? Solution Changing the sales staff’s compensation from salaries to commissions would affect both fixed and variable expenses. Fixed expenses would decrease by $6,000, from $35,000 to $29,000. Variable expenses per unit would increase by $15, from $150 to $165, and the unit contribution margin would decrease from $100 to $85. Expected total contribution margin with sales staff on commissions: 460 speakers 3 $85 per speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $39,100 Present total contribution margin: 400 speakers 3 $100 per speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,000 Decrease in total contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (900) Change in fixed expenses: Add salaries avoided if a commission is paid . . . . . . . 6,000 $ 5,100 Increase in net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . According to this analysis, the changes should be made. Again, the same answer can be obtained by preparing comparative income statements: Present 400 Speakers per Month Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . Expected 460 Speakers per Month Total Per Unit Total $100,000 60,000 40,000 35,000 $ 5,000 $250 150 $100 $115,000 75,900 39,100 29,000 $ 10,100 Per Unit Difference $250 165 $ 85 $15,000 15,900 900 (6,000)* $ 5,100 *Note: A reduction in fixed expenses has the effect of increasing net operating income. 199 200 Chapter 5 Change in Selling Price Refer to the original data where Acoustic Concepts is currently selling 400 speakers per month. The company has an opportunity to make a bulk sale of 150 speakers to a wholesaler if an acceptable price can be negotiated. This sale would not disturb the company’s regular sales and would not affect the company’s total fixed expenses. What price per speaker should be quoted to the wholesaler if Acoustic Concepts is seeking a profit of $3,000 on the bulk sale? Solution Variable cost per speaker . . . . . . Desired profit per speaker: $3,000 4 150 speakers . . . . . Quoted price per speaker . . . . . $150 20 $170 Notice that fixed expenses are not included in the computation. This is because fixed expenses are not affected by the bulk sale, so all of the additional contribution margin increases the company’s profits. IN BUSINESS MANAGING RISK IN THE BOOK PUBLISHING INDUSTRY Greenleaf Book Group is a book publishing company in Austin, Texas, that attracts authors who are willing to pay publishing costs and forgo up-front advances in exchange for a larger royalty rate on each book sold. For example, assume a typical publisher prints 10,000 copies of a new book that it sells for $12.50 per unit. The publisher pays the author an advance of $20,000 to write the book and then incurs $60,000 of expenses to market, print, and edit the book. The publisher also pays the author a 20% royalty (or $2.50 per unit) on each book sold above 8,000 units. In this scenario, the publisher must sell 6,400 books to break even (5 $80,000 in fixed costs 4 $12.50 per unit). If all 10,000 copies are sold, the author earns $25,000 (5 $20,000 advance 1 2,000 copies 3 $2.50) and the publisher earns $40,000 (5 $125,000 2 $60,000 2 $20,000 2 $5,000). Greenleaf alters the financial arrangement described above by requiring the author to assume the risk of poor sales. It pays the author a 70% royalty on all units sold (or $8.75 per unit), but the author forgoes the $20,000 advance and pays Greenleaf $60,000 to market, print, and edit the book. If the book flops, the author fails to recover her production costs. If all 10,000 units are sold, the author earns $27,500 (5 $10,000 units 3 $8.75 2 $60,000) and Greenleaf earns $37,500 (5 10,000 units 3 ($12.50 2 $8.75)). Source: Christopher Steiner, “Book It,” Forbes, September 7, 2009, p. 58. Break-Even and Target Profit Analysis Managers use break-even and target profit analysis to answer questions such as how much would we have to sell to avoid incurring a loss or how much would we have to sell to make a profit of $10,000 per month? We’ll discuss break-even analysis first followed by target profit analysis. Break-Even Analysis LO5–5 Determine the break-even point. Earlier in the chapter we defined the break-even point as the level of sales at which the company’s profit is zero. To calculate the break-even point (in unit sales and dollar sales), managers can use either of two approaches, the equation method or the formula method. We’ll demonstrate both approaches using the data from Acoustic Concepts. Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships The Equation Method The equation method relies on the basic profit equation introduced earlier in the chapter. Since Acoustic Concepts has only one product, we’ll use the contribution margin form of this equation to perform the break-even calculations. Remembering that Acoustic Concepts’ unit contribution margin is $100, and its fixed expenses are $35,000, the company’s break-even point is computed as follows: Profit 5 Unit CM 3 Q 2 Fixed expense $0 5 $100 3 Q 2 $35,000 $100 3 Q 5 $0 1 $35,000 Q 5 $35,000 4 $100 Q 5 350 Thus, as we determined earlier in the chapter, Acoustic Concepts will break even (or earn zero profit) at a sales volume of 350 speakers per month. The Formula Method The formula method is a shortcut version of the equation method. It centers on the idea discussed earlier in the chapter that each unit sold provides a certain amount of contribution margin that goes toward covering fixed expenses. In a single product situation, the formula for computing the unit sales to break even is: Fixed expenses3 Units sales to break even 5 ______________ Unit CM In the case of Acoustic Concepts, the unit sales needed to break even is computed as follows: Fixed expenses Units sales to break even 5 _____________ Unit CM $35,000 5 _______ $100 5 350 Notice that 350 units is the same answer that we got when using the equation method. This will always be the case because the formula method and equation method are mathematically equivalent. The formula method simply skips a few steps in the equation method. Break-Even in Dollar Sales In addition to finding the break-even point in unit sales, we can also find the break-even point in dollar sales using three methods. First, we could solve for the break-even point in unit sales using the equation method or formula method and then simply multiply the result by the selling price. In the case of Acoustic Concepts, the break-even point in dollar sales using this approach would be computed as 350 speakers 3 $250 per speaker, or $87,500 in total sales. Second, we can use the equation method to compute the break-even point in dollar sales. Remembering that Acoustic Concepts’ contribution margin ratio is 40% and its fixed expenses are $35,000, the equation method calculates the break-even point in dollar sales as follows: Profit 5 CM ratio 3 Sales 2 Fixed expenses $0 5 0.40 3 Sales 2 $35,000 0.40 3 Sales 5 $0 1 $35,000 Sales 5 $35,000 4 0.40 Sales 5 $87,500 3 This formula can be derived as follows: Profit 5 Unit CM 3 Q 2 Fixed expenses $0 5 Unit CM 3 Q 2 Fixed expenses Unit CM 3 Q 5 $0 1 Fixed expenses Q 5 Fixed expenses 4 Unit CM 201 202 Chapter 5 Third, we can use the formula method to compute the dollar sales needed to break even as shown below: Fixed expenses4 Dollar sales to break even 5 ______________ CM ratio In the case of Acoustic Concepts, the computations are performed as follows: Fixed expenses Dollar sales to break even 5 _____________ CM ratio $35,000 5 _______ 0.40 5 $87,500 Again, you’ll notice that the break-even point in dollar sales ($87,500) is the same under all three methods. This will always be the case because these methods are mathematically equivalent. LO5–6 Target Profit Analysis Determine the level of sales needed to achieve a desired target profit. Target profit analysis is one of the key uses of CVP analysis. In target profit analysis, we estimate what sales volume is needed to achieve a specific target profit. For example, suppose Prem Narayan of Acoustic Concepts would like to estimate the sales needed to attain a target profit of $40,000 per month. To determine the unit sales and dollar sales needed to achieve a target profit, we can rely on the same two approaches that we have been discussing thus far, the equation method or the formula method. The Equation Method To compute the unit sales required to achieve a target profit of $40,000 per month, Acoustic Concepts can use the same profit equation that was used for its break-even analysis. Remembering that the company’s contribution margin per unit is $100 and its total fixed expenses are $35,000, the equation method could be applied as follows: Profit 5 Unit CM 3 Q 2 Fixed expense $40,000 5 $100 3 Q 2 $35,000 $100 3 Q 5 $40,000 1 $35,000 Q 5 $75,000 4 $100 Q 5 750 Thus, the target profit can be achieved by selling 750 speakers per month. Notice that the only difference between this equation and the equation used for Acoustic Concepts’ break-even calculation is the profit figure. In the break-even scenario, the profit is $0, whereas in the target profit scenario the profit is $40,000. 4 This formula can be derived as follows: Profit 5 CM ratio 3 Sales 2 Fixed expenses $0 5 CM ratio 3 Sales 2 Fixed expenses CM ratio 3 Sales 5 $0 1 Fixed expenses Sales 5 Fixed expenses 4 CM ratio Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships The Formula Method In general, in a single product situation, we can compute the sales volume required to attain a specific target profit using the following formula: Target profit 1 Fixed expenses Units sales to attain the target profit 5 __________________________ Unit CM In the case of Acoustic Concepts, the unit sales needed to attain a target profit of 40,000 is computed as follows: Target profit 1 Fixed expenses Units sales to attain the target profit 5 _________________________ Unit CM $40,000 1 $35,000 5 ________________ $100 5 750 Target Profit Analysis in Terms of Dollar Sales When quantifying the dollar sales needed to attain a target profit we can apply the same three methods that we used for calculating the dollar sales needed to break even. First, we can solve for the unit sales needed to attain the target profit using the equation method or formula method and then simply multiply the result by the selling price. In the case of Acoustic Concepts, the dollar sales to attain its target profit would be computed as 750 speakers 3 $250 per speaker, or $187,500 in total sales. Second, we can use the equation method to compute the dollar sales needed to attain the target profit. Remembering that Acoustic Concepts’ target profit is $40,000, its contribution margin ratio is 40%, and its fixed expenses are $35,000, the equation method calculates the answer as follows: Profit 5 CM ratio 3 Sales 2 Fixed expenses $40,000 5 0.40 3 Sales 2 $35,000 0.40 3 Sales 5 $40,000 1 $35,000 Sales 5 $75,000 4 0.40 Sales 5 $187,500 Third, we can use the formula method to compute the dollar sales needed to attain the target profit as shown below: Target profit 1 Fixed expenses Dollar sales to attain a target profit 5 __________________________ CM ratio In the case of Acoustic Concepts, the computations would be: Target profit 1 Fixed expenses Dollar sales to attain a target profit 5 __________________________ CM ratio $40,000 1 $35,000 5 ________________ $0.40 5 $187,500 Again, you’ll notice that the answers are the same regardless of which method we use. This is because all of the methods discussed are simply different roads to the same destination. 203 204 IN BUSINESS Chapter 5 SNAP FITNESS GROWS IN A WEAK ECONOMY When Bally’s Total Fitness was filing for bankruptcy, Snap Fitness was expanding to more than 900 clubs in the United States with 400,000 members. The secret to Snap Fitness’ success is its “no frills” approach to exercise. Each club typically has five treadmills, two stationary bikes, five elliptical machines, and weight equipment while bypassing amenities such as on-site child care, juice bars, and showers. Each club is usually staffed only 25–40 hours per week and it charges a membership fee of $35 per month. To open a new Snap Fitness location, each franchise owner has an initial capital outlay of $120,000 for various types of equipment and a one-time licensing fee of $15,000. The franchisee also pays Snap (the parent company) a royalty fee of $400 per month plus $0.50 for each membership. Snap also collects one-time fees of $5 for each new member’s “billing setup” and $5 for each security card issued. If a new club attracts 275 members, it can break even in as little as three months. Can you estimate the underlying calculations related to this break-even point? Source: Nicole Perlroth, “Survival of the Fittest,” Forbes, January 12, 2009, pp. 54–55. The Margin of Safety LO5–7 Compute the margin of safety and explain its significance. The margin of safety is the excess of budgeted or actual sales dollars over the break-even volume of sales dollars. It is the amount by which sales can drop before losses are incurred. The higher the margin of safety, the lower the risk of not breaking even and incurring a loss. The formula for the margin of safety is: Margin of safety in dollars 5 Total budgeted (or actual) sales 2 Break-even sales The margin of safety can also be expressed in percentage form by dividing the margin of safety in dollars by total dollar sales: Margin of safety in dollars Margin of safety percentage 5 __________________________________ Total budgeted (or actual) sales in dollars The calculation of the margin of safety for Acoustic Concepts is: Sales (at the current volume of 400 speakers) (a) . . . . . . . Break-even sales (at 350 speakers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Margin of safety in dollars (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $100,000 87,500 $ 12,500 Margin of safety percentage, (b) 4 (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5% This margin of safety means that at the current level of sales and with the company’s current prices and cost structure, a reduction in sales of $12,500, or 12.5%, would result in just breaking even. In a single-product company like Acoustic Concepts, the margin of safety can also be expressed in terms of the number of units sold by dividing the margin of safety in dollars by the selling price per unit. In this case, the margin of safety is 50 speakers ($12,500 4 $250 per speaker 5 50 speakers). Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships COMPUTING MARGIN OF SAFETY FOR A SMALL BUSINESS 205 IN BUSINESS Sam Calagione owns Dogfish Head Craft Brewery, a microbrewery in Rehobeth Beach, Delaware. He charges distributors as much as $100 per case for his premium beers such as World Wide Stout. The high-priced microbrews bring in $800,000 in operating income on revenue of $7 million. Calagione reports that his raw ingredients and labor costs for one case of World Wide Stout are $30 and $16, respectively. Bottling and packaging costs are $6 per case. Gas and electric costs are about $10 per case. If we assume that World Wide Stout is representative of all Dogfish microbrews, then we can compute the company’s margin of safety in five steps. First, variable cost as a percentage of sales is 62% [($30 1 $16 1 $6 1 $10)/$100]. Second, the contribution margin ratio is 38% (1 2 0.62). Third, Dogfish’s total fixed cost is $1,860,000 [($7,000,000 3 0.38) 2 $800,000]. Fourth, the break-even point in dollar sales is $4,894,737 ($1,860,000/0.38). Fifth, the margin of safety is $2,105,263 ($7,000,000 2 $4,894,737). Source: Patricia Huang, “Château Dogfish,” Forbes, February 28, 2005, pp. 57–59. Prem Narayan and Bob Luchinni met to discuss the results of Bob’s analysis. Prem: Bob, everything you have shown me is pretty clear. I can see what impact the sales manager’s suggestions would have on our profits. Some of those suggestions are quite good and others are not so good. I am concerned that our margin of safety is only 50 speakers. What can we do to increase this number? Bob: Well, we have to increase total sales or decrease the break-even point or both. Prem: And to decrease the break-even point, we have to either decrease our fixed expenses or increase our unit contribution margin? Bob: Exactly. Prem: And to increase our unit contribution margin, we must either increase our selling price or decrease the variable cost per unit? Bob: Correct. Prem: So what do you suggest? Bob: Well, the analysis doesn’t tell us which of these to do, but it does indicate we have a potential problem here. Prem: If you don’t have any immediate suggestions, I would like to call a general meeting next week to discuss ways we can work on increasing the margin of safety. I think everyone will be concerned about how vulnerable we are to even small downturns in sales. MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING IN ACTION THE WRAP-UP CVP Considerations in Choosing a Cost Structure Cost structure refers to the relative proportion of fixed and variable costs in an organization. Managers often have some latitude in trading off between these two types of costs. For example, fixed investments in automated equipment can reduce variable labor costs. In this section, we discuss the choice of a cost structure. We also introduce the concept of operating leverage. Cost Structure and Profit Stability Which cost structure is better—high variable costs and low fixed costs, or the opposite? No single answer to this question is possible; each approach has its advantages. To show what we mean, refer to the following contribution format income statements for two 206 Chapter 5 blueberry farms. Bogside Farm depends on migrant workers to pick its berries by hand, whereas Sterling Farm has invested in expensive berry-picking machines. Consequently, Bogside Farm has higher variable costs, but Sterling Farm has higher fixed costs: Bogside Farm Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . Sterling Farm Amount Percent Amount Percent $100,000 60,000 40,000 30,000 $ 10,000 100% 60% 40% $100,000 30,000 70,000 60,000 $ 10,000 100% 30% 70% Which farm has the better cost structure? The answer depends on many factors, including the long-run trend in sales, year-to-year fluctuations in the level of sales, and the attitude of the owners toward risk. If sales are expected to exceed $100,000 in the future, then Sterling Farm probably has the better cost structure. The reason is that its CM ratio is higher, and its profits will therefore increase more rapidly as sales increase. To illustrate, assume that each farm experiences a 10% increase in sales without any increase in fixed costs. The new income statements would be as follows: Bogside Farm Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . Sterling Farm Amount Percent Amount Percent $110,000 66,000 44,000 30,000 $ 14,000 100% 60% 40% $110,000 33,000 77,000 60,000 $ 17,000 100% 30% 70% Sterling Farm has experienced a greater increase in net operating income due to its higher CM ratio even though the increase in sales was the same for both farms. What if sales drop below $100,000? What are the farms’ break-even points? What are their margins of safety? The computations needed to answer these questions are shown below using the formula method: Bogside Farm Sterling Farm Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dollar sales to break even . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 30,000 4 0.40 $ 75,000 $ 60,000 4 0.70 $ 85,714 Total current sales (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Break-even sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Margin of safety in sales dollars (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . $100,000 75,000 $ 25,000 $100,000 85,714 $ 14,286 Margin of safety percentage (b) 4 (a) . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0% 14.3% Bogside Farm’s margin of safety is greater and its contribution margin ratio is lower than Sterling Farm. Therefore, Bogside Farm is less vulnerable to downturns than Sterling Farm. Due to its lower contribution margin ratio, Bogside Farm will not lose contribution margin as rapidly as Sterling Farm when sales decline. Thus, Bogside Farm’s profit will be less volatile. We saw earlier that this is a drawback when sales increase, but it provides Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships 207 more protection when sales drop. And because its break-even point is lower, Bogside Farm can suffer a larger sales decline before losses emerge. To summarize, without knowing the future, it is not obvious which cost structure is better. Both have advantages and disadvantages. Sterling Farm, with its higher fixed costs and lower variable costs, will experience wider swings in net operating income as sales fluctuate, with greater profits in good years and greater losses in bad years. Bogside Farm, with its lower fixed costs and higher variable costs, will enjoy greater profit stability and will be more protected from losses during bad years, but at the cost of lower net operating income in good years. Operating Leverage A lever is a tool for multiplying force. Using a lever, a massive object can be moved with only a modest amount of force. In business, operating leverage serves a similar purpose. Operating leverage is a measure of how sensitive net operating income is to a given percentage change in dollar sales. Operating leverage acts as a multiplier. If operating leverage is high, a small percentage increase in sales can produce a much larger percentage increase in net operating income. Operating leverage can be illustrated by returning to the data for the two blueberry farms. We previously showed that a 10% increase in sales (from $100,000 to $110,000 in each farm) results in a 70% increase in the net operating income of Sterling Farm (from $10,000 to $17,000) and only a 40% increase in the net operating income of Bogside Farm (from $10,000 to $14,000). Thus, for a 10% increase in sales, Sterling Farm experiences a much greater percentage increase in profits than does Bogside Farm. Therefore, Sterling Farm has greater operating leverage than Bogside Farm. The degree of operating leverage at a given level of sales is computed by the following formula: Contribution margin Degree of operating leverage 5 __________________ Net operating income The degree of operating leverage is a measure, at a given level of sales, of how a percentage change in sales volume will affect profits. To illustrate, the degree of operating leverage for the two farms at $100,000 sales would be computed as follows: $40,000 Bogside Farm: _______ 5 4 $10,000 $70,000 Sterling Farm: _______ 5 7 $10,000 Because the degree of operating leverage for Bogside Farm is 4, the farm’s net operating income grows four times as fast as its sales. In contrast, Sterling Farm’s net operating income grows seven times as fast as its sales. Thus, if sales increase by 10%, then we can expect the net operating income of Bogside Farm to increase by four times this amount, or by 40%, and the net operating income of Sterling Farm to increase by seven times this amount, or by 70%. In general, this relation between the percentage change in sales and the percentage change in net operating income is given by the following formula: Percentage Percentage change in Degree of 3 5 net operating income operating leverage change in sales Bogside Farm: Percentage change in net operating income 5 4 3 10% 5 40% Sterling Farm: Percentage change in net operating income 5 7 3 10% 5 70% What is responsible for the higher operating leverage at Sterling Farm? The only difference between the two farms is their cost structure. If two companies have the same total revenue and same total expense but different cost structures, then the company with LO5–8 Compute the degree of operating leverage at a particular level of sales and explain how it can be used to predict changes in net operating income. 208 Chapter 5 the higher proportion of fixed costs in its cost structure will have higher operating leverage. Referring back to the original example on page 206, when both farms have sales of $100,000 and total expenses of $90,000, one-third of Bogside Farm’s costs are fixed but two-thirds of Sterling Farm’s costs are fixed. As a consequence, Sterling’s degree of operating leverage is higher than Bogside’s. The degree of operating leverage is not a constant; it is greatest at sales levels near the break-even point and decreases as sales and profits rise. The following table shows the degree of operating leverage for Bogside Farm at various sales levels. (Data used earlier for Bogside Farm are shown in color.) Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . Contribution margin (a) . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income (b) . . . $75,000 45,000 30,000 30,000 $ 0 Degree of operating leverage, (a) 4 (b) . . . . . . . ` $80,000 $100,000 $150,000 $225,000 48,000 60,000 90,000 135,000 32,000 40,000 60,000 90,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 $ 2,000 $ 10,000 $ 30,000 $ 60,000 16 4 2 1.5 Thus, a 10% increase in sales would increase profits by only 15% (10% 3 1.5) if sales were previously $225,000, as compared to the 40% increase we computed earlier at the $100,000 sales level. The degree of operating leverage will continue to decrease the farther the company moves from its break-even point. At the break-even point, the degree of operating leverage is infinitely large ($30,000 contribution margin 4 $0 net operating income 5 `). The degree of operating leverage can be used to quickly estimate what impact various percentage changes in sales will have on profits, without the necessity of preparing detailed income statements. As shown by our examples, the effects of operating leverage can be dramatic. If a company is near its break-even point, then even small percentage increases in sales can yield large percentage increases in profits. This explains why management will often work very hard for only a small increase in sales volume. If the degree of operating leverage is 5, then a 6% increase in sales would translate into a 30% increase in profits. IN BUSINESS THE DANGERS OF A HIGH DEGREE OF OPERATING LEVERAGE In recent years, computer chip manufacturers have poured more than $75 billion into constructing new manufacturing facilities to meet the growing demand for digital devices such as iPhones and Blackberrys. Because 70% of the costs of running these facilities are fixed, a sharp drop in customer demand forces these companies to choose between two undesirable options. They can slash production levels and absorb large amounts of unused capacity costs, or they can continue producing large volumes of output in spite of shrinking demand, thereby flooding the market with excess supply and lowering prices. Either choice distresses investors who tend to shy away from computer chip makers in economic downturns. Source: Bruce Einhorn, “Chipmakers on the Edge,” BusinessWeek, January 5, 2009, pp. 30–31. Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships 209 Structuring Sales Commissions Companies usually compensate salespeople by paying them a commission based on sales, a salary, or a combination of the two. Commissions based on sales dollars can lead to lower profits. To illustrate, consider Pipeline Unlimited, a producer of surfing equipment. Salespersons sell the company’s products to retail sporting goods stores throughout North America and the Pacific Basin. Data for two of the company’s surfboards, the XR7 and Turbo models, appear below: Model Selling price . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . XR7 Turbo $695 344 $351 $749 410 $339 Which model will salespeople push hardest if they are paid a commission of 10% of sales revenue? The answer is the Turbo because it has the higher selling price and hence the larger commission. On the other hand, from the standpoint of the company, profits will be greater if salespeople steer customers toward the XR7 model because it has the higher contribution margin. To eliminate such conflicts, commissions can be based on contribution margin rather than on selling price. If this is done, the salespersons will want to sell the mix of products that maximizes contribution margin. Providing that fixed costs are not affected by the sales mix, maximizing the contribution margin will also maximize the company’s profit.5 In effect, by maximizing their own compensation, salespersons will also maximize the company’s profit. Sales Mix Before concluding our discussion of CVP concepts, we need to consider the impact of changes in sales mix on a company’s profit. The Definition of Sales Mix The term sales mix refers to the relative proportions in which a company’s products are sold. The idea is to achieve the combination, or mix, that will yield the greatest profits. Most companies have many products, and often these products are not equally profitable. Hence, profits will depend to some extent on the company’s sales mix. Profits will be greater if high-margin rather than low-margin items make up a relatively large proportion of total sales. Changes in the sales mix can cause perplexing variations in a company’s profits. A shift in the sales mix from high-margin items to low-margin items can cause total profits to decrease even though total sales may increase. Conversely, a shift in the sales mix from low-margin items to high-margin items can cause the reverse effect—total profits may increase even though total sales decrease. It is one thing to achieve a particular sales volume; it is quite another to sell the most profitable mix of products. 5 This also assumes the company has no production constraint. If it does, the sales commissions should be modified. See the Profitability Appendix at the end of the book. LO5–9 Compute the break-even point for a multiproduct company and explain the effects of shifts in the sales mix on contribution margin and the break-even point. 210 IN BUSINESS Chapter 5 NETBOOK SALES CANNIBALIZE PC SALES When computer manufacturers introduced the “netbook,” they expected it to serve as a consumer’s third computer—complementing home and office personal computers (PCs) rather than replacing them. However, when the economy soured many customers decided to buy lower-priced netbooks instead of PCs, which in turn adversely affected the financial performance of many companies. For example, when Microsoft failed to achieve its sales goals, the company partially blamed growing netbook sales and declining PC sales for its troubles. Microsoft’s Windows operating system for netbooks sells for $15–$25 per device, which is less than half the cost of the company’s least expensive Windows operating system for PCs. Source: Olga Kharif, “Small, Cheap—and Frighteningly Popular,” BusinessWeek, December 8, 2008, p. 64. Sales Mix and Break-Even Analysis If a company sells more than one product, break-even analysis is more complex than discussed to this point. The reason is that different products will have different selling prices, different costs, and different contribution margins. Consequently, the break-even point depends on the mix in which the various products are sold. To illustrate, consider Virtual Journeys Unlimited, a small company that sells two DVDs: the Monuments DVD, a tour of the United States’ most popular National Monuments; and the Parks DVD, which tours the United States’ National Parks. The company’s September sales, expenses, and break-even point are shown in Exhibit 5–4. As shown in the exhibit, the break-even point is $60,000 in sales, which was computed by dividing the company’s fixed expenses of $27,000 by its overall CM ratio of 45%. However, this is the break-even only if the company’s sales mix does not change. Currently, the Monuments DVD is responsible for 20% and the Parks DVD for 80% of the company’s dollar sales. Assuming this sales mix does not change, if total sales are $60,000, the sales of the Monuments DVD would be $12,000 (20% of $60,000) and the sales of the Parks DVD would be $48,000 (80% of $60,000). As shown in Exhibit 5–4, at these levels of sales, the company would indeed break even. But $60,000 in sales represents the break-even point for the company only if the sales mix does not change. If the sales mix changes, then the break-even point will also usually change. This is illustrated by the results for October in which the sales mix shifted away from the more profitable Parks DVD (which has a 50% CM ratio) toward the less profitable Monuments CD (which has a 25% CM ratio). These results appear in Exhibit 5–5. Although sales have remained unchanged at $100,000, the sales mix is exactly the reverse of what it was in Exhibit 5–4, with the bulk of the sales now coming from the less profitable Monuments DVD. Notice that this shift in the sales mix has caused both the overall CM ratio and total profits to drop sharply from the prior month even though total sales are the same. The overall CM ratio has dropped from 45% in September to only 30% in October, and net operating income has dropped from $18,000 to only $3,000. In addition, with the drop in the overall CM ratio, the company’s break-even point is no longer $60,000 in sales. Because the company is now realizing less average contribution margin per dollar of sales, it takes more sales to cover the same amount of fixed costs. Thus, the break-even point has increased from $60,000 to $90,000 in sales per year. In preparing a break-even analysis, an assumption must be made concerning the sales mix. Usually the assumption is that it will not change. However, if the sales mix is expected to change, then this must be explicitly considered in any CVP computations. Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships 211 EXHIBIT 5–4 Multiproduct Break-Even Analysis Virtual Journeys Unlimited Contribution Income Statement For the Month of September Monuments DVD Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . Amount $20,000 15,000 $ 5,000 Percent 100% 75% 25% Parks DVD Amount $80,000 40,000 $40,000 Percent 100% 50% 50% Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . Total Amount $100,000 55,000 45,000 Percent 100% 55% 45% 27,000 $ 18,000 Computation of the break-even point: Fixed expenses $27,000 5 5 $60,000 Overall CM ratio 0.45 Verification of the break-even point: Current dollar sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . Percentage of total dollar sales . . . . Monuments DVD $20,000 20% Parks DVD $80,000 80% Total $100,000 100% Sales at the break-even point . . . . . $12,000 $48,000 $60,000 Monuments DVD Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . Amount $12,000 9,000 $ 3,000 Percent 100% 75% 25% Parks DVD Amount $48,000 24,000 $24,000 Percent 100% 50% 50% Total Amount $ 60,000 33,000 27,000 27,000 $ 0 Percent 100% 55% 45% EXHIBIT 5–5 Multiproduct Break-Even Analysis: A Shift in Sales Mix (see Exhibit 5–4) Virtual Journeys Unlimited Contribution Income Statement For the Month of October Monuments DVD Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . Amount $80,000 60,000 $20,000 Percent 100% 75% 25% Parks DVD Amount $20,000 10,000 $10,000 Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . Percent 100% 50% 50% Total Amount $100,000 70,000 30,000 27,000 $ 3,000 Computation of the break-even point: Fixed expenses $27,000 5 5 $90,000 Overall CM ratio 0.30 Percent 100% 70% 30% 212 Chapter 5 Summary CVP analysis is based on a simple model of how profits respond to prices, costs, and volume. This model can be used to answer a variety of critical questions such as what is the company’s breakeven volume, what is its margin of safety, and what is likely to happen if specific changes are made in prices, costs, and volume. A CVP graph depicts the relationships between unit sales on the one hand and fixed expenses, variable expenses, total expenses, total sales, and profits on the other hand. The profit graph is simpler than the CVP graph and shows how profits depend on sales. The CVP and profit graphs are useful for developing intuition about how costs and profits respond to changes in sales. The contribution margin ratio is the ratio of the total contribution margin to total sales. This ratio can be used to quickly estimate what impact a change in total sales would have on net operating income. The ratio is also useful in break-even analysis. Break-even analysis is used to estimate how much sales would have to be to just break even. The unit sales required to break even can be estimated by dividing the fixed expense by the unit contribution margin. Target profit analysis is used to estimate how much sales would have to be to attain a specified target profit. The unit sales required to attain the target profit can be estimated by dividing the sum of the target profit and fixed expense by the unit contribution margin. The margin of safety is the amount by which the company’s current sales exceeds breakeven sales. The degree of operating leverage allows quick estimation of what impact a given percentage change in sales would have on the company’s net operating income. The higher the degree of operating leverage, the greater is the impact on the company’s profits. The degree of operating leverage is not constant—it depends on the company’s current level of sales. The profits of a multiproduct company are affected by its sales mix. Changes in the sales mix can affect the break-even point, margin of safety, and other critical factors. Review Problem: CVP Relationships Voltar Company manufactures and sells a specialized cordless telephone for high electromagnetic radiation environments. The company’s contribution format income statement for the most recent year is given below: Total Per Unit Percent of Sales Sales (20,000 units) . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . $1,200,000 900,000 $60 45 100% ? % Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,000 240,000 $15 ? % Net operating income . . . . . . . . . $ 60,000 Management is anxious to increase the company’s profit and has asked for an analysis of a number of items. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Compute the company’s CM ratio and variable expense ratio. Compute the company’s break-even point in both unit sales and dollar sales. Use the equation method. Assume that sales increase by $400,000 next year. If cost behavior patterns remain unchanged, by how much will the company’s net operating income increase? Use the CM ratio to compute your answer. Refer to the original data. Assume that next year management wants the company to earn a profit of at least $90,000. How many units will have to be sold to meet this target profit? Refer to the original data. Compute the company’s margin of safety in both dollar and percentage form. Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships 6. 7. a. b. Compute the company’s degree of operating leverage at the present level of sales. Assume that through a more intense effort by the sales staff, the company’s sales increase by 8% next year. By what percentage would you expect net operating income to increase? Use the degree of operating leverage to obtain your answer. c. Verify your answer to (b) by preparing a new contribution format income statement showing an 8% increase in sales. In an effort to increase sales and profits, management is considering the use of a higherquality speaker. The higher-quality speaker would increase variable costs by $3 per unit, but management could eliminate one quality inspector who is paid a salary of $30,000 per year. The sales manager estimates that the higher-quality speaker would increase annual sales by at least 20%. a. Assuming that changes are made as described above, prepare a projected contribution format income statement for next year. Show data on a total, per unit, and percentage basis. b. Compute the company’s new break-even point in both unit sales and dollar sales. Use the formula method. c. Would you recommend that the changes be made? Solution to Review Problem 1. Unit contribution margin $15 CM ratio 5 _____________________ 5 ____ 5 25% $60 Unit selling price Variable expense $45 Variable expense ratio 5 ______________ 5 ____ 5 75% Selling price $60 Profit 5 Unit CM 3 Q 2 Fixed expenses 2. $0 5 ($60 2 $45) 3 Q 2 $240,000 $15Q 5 $240,000 Q 5 $240,000 4 $15 Q 5 16,000 units; or at $60 per unit, $960,000 3. 4. Increase in sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiply by the CM ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expected increase in contribution margin . . . . . . . . $400,000 3 25% $100,000 Because the fixed expenses are not expected to change, net operating income will increase by the entire $100,000 increase in contribution margin computed above. Equation method: Profit 5 Unit CM 3 Q 2 Fixed expenses $90,000 5 ($60 2 $45) 3 Q 2 $240,000 $15Q 5 $90,000 1 $240,000 Q 5 $330,000 4 $15 Q 5 22,000 units Formula method: Target profit 1 Fixed expenses _________________ Unit sales to attain _________________________ $90,000 1 $240,000 5 5 22,000 units 5 the target profit Contribution margin per unit $15 per unit 5. Margin of safety in dollars 5 Total sales 2 Break-even sales 5 $1,200,000 2 $960,000 5 $240,000 Margin of safety in dollars $240,000 Margin of safety percentage 5 ______________________ 5 __________ 5 20% $1,200,000 Total sales 213 214 Chapter 5 6. a. Contribution margin $300,000 Degree of operating leverage 5 __________________ 5 ________ 5 5 $60,000 Net operating income b. c. Expected increase in sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Degree of operating leverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8% 35 Expected increase in net operating income . . . . . . . . . . 40% If sales increase by 8%, then 21,600 units (20,000 3 1.08 5 21,600) will be sold next year. The new contribution format income statement would be as follows: Total Per Unit Percent of Sales Sales (21,600 units) . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,296,000 972,000 $60 45 100% 75% Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324,000 240,000 $15 25% Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . $ 84,000 Thus, the $84,000 expected net operating income for next year represents a 40% increase over the $60,000 net operating income earned during the current year: $24,000 $84,000 2 $60,000 _______ ________________ 5 5 40% increase $60,000 $60,000 Note that the increase in sales from 20,000 to 21,600 units has increased both total sales and total variable expenses. 7. a. A 20% increase in sales would result in 24,000 units being sold next year: 20,000 units 3 1.20 5 24,000 units. Sales (24,000 units) . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . Total Per Unit Percent of Sales $1,440,000 1,152,000 $60 48* 100% 80% $12 20% Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . 288,000 210,000† $ 78,000 *$45 1 $3 5 $48; $48 4 $60 5 80%. † $240,000 2 $30,000 5 $210,000. Note that the change in per unit variable expenses results in a change in both the per unit contribution margin and the CM ratio. Fixed expenses b. Unit sales to break even 5 _____________________ Unit contribution margin $210,000 5 __________ 5 17,500 units $12 per unit Fixed expenses Dollar sales to break even 5 _____________ CM ratio $210,000 5 ________ 5 $1,050,000 0.20 c. Yes, based on these data, the changes should be made. The changes increase the company’s net operating income from the present $60,000 to $78,000 per year. Although the changes also result in a higher break-even point (17,500 units as compared to the present 16,000 units), the company’s margin of safety actually becomes greater than before: Margin of safety in dollars 5 Total sales 2 Break-even sales 5 $1,440,000 2 $1,050,000 5 $390,000 As shown in (5) on the prior page, the company’s present margin of safety is only $240,000. Thus, several benefits will result from the proposed changes. Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships 215 Glossary Break-even point The level of sales at which profit is zero. (p. 190) Contribution margin ratio (CM ratio) A ratio computed by dividing contribution margin by dollar sales. (p. 195) Cost-volume-profit (CVP) graph A graphical representation of the relationships between an organization’s revenues, costs, and profits on the one hand and its sales volume on the other hand. (p. 192) Degree of operating leverage A measure, at a given level of sales, of how a percentage change in sales will affect profits. The degree of operating leverage is computed by dividing contribution margin by net operating income. (p. 207) Incremental analysis An analytical approach that focuses only on those costs and revenues that change as a result of a decision. (p. 198) Margin of safety The excess of budgeted or actual dollar sales over the break-even dollar sales. (p. 204) Operating leverage A measure of how sensitive net operating income is to a given percentage change in dollar sales. (p. 207) Sales mix The relative proportions in which a company’s products are sold. Sales mix is computed by expressing the sales of each product as a percentage of total sales. (p. 209) Target profit analysis Estimating what sales volume is needed to achieve a specific target profit. (p. 202) Variable expense ratio A ratio computed by dividing variable expenses by dollar sales. (p. 196) Questions 5–1 5–2 5–3 5–4 5–5 5–6 5–7 5–8 5–9 What is meant by a product’s contribution margin ratio? How is this ratio useful in planning business operations? Often the most direct route to a business decision is an incremental analysis. What is meant by an incremental analysis? In all respects, Company A and Company B are identical except that Company A’s costs are mostly variable, whereas Company B’s costs are mostly fixed. When sales increase, which company will tend to realize the greatest increase in profits? Explain. What is meant by the term operating leverage? What is meant by the term break-even point? In response to a request from your immediate supervisor, you have prepared a CVP graph portraying the cost and revenue characteristics of your company’s product and operations. Explain how the lines on the graph and the break-even point would change if (a) the selling price per unit decreased, (b) fixed cost increased throughout the entire range of activity portrayed on the graph, and (c) variable cost per unit increased. What is meant by the margin of safety? What is meant by the term sales mix? What assumption is usually made concerning sales mix in CVP analysis? Explain how a shift in the sales mix could result in both a higher break-even point and a lower net income. Multiple-choice questions are provided on the text website at www.mhhe.com/garrison15e. Applying Excel Available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. The Excel worksheet form that appears on the next page is to be used to recreate portions of the Review Problem on pages 212–214. Download the workbook containing this form from the Online Learning Center at www.mhhe.com/garrison15e. On the website you will also receive instructions about how to use this worksheet form. LO5–6, LO5–7, LO5–8 216 Chapter 5 You should proceed to the requirements below only after completing your worksheet. Required: 1. 2. Check your worksheet by changing the fixed expenses to $270,000. If your worksheet is operating properly, the degree of operating leverage should be 10. If you do not get this answer, find the errors in your worksheet and correct them. How much is the margin of safety percentage? Did it change? Why or why not? Enter the following data from a different company into your worksheet: Unit sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling price per unit . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses per unit . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 4. 10,000 units $120 per unit $72 per unit $420,000 What is the margin of safety percentage? What is the degree of operating leverage? Using the degree of operating leverage and without changing anything in your worksheet, calculate the percentage change in net operating income if unit sales increase by 15%. Confirm the calculations you made in part (3) above by increasing the unit sales in your worksheet by 15%. What is the new net operating income and by what percentage did it increase? Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships 5. 217 Thad Morgan, a motorcycle enthusiast, has been exploring the possibility of relaunching the Western Hombre brand of cycle that was popular in the 1930s. The retro-look cycle would be sold for $10,000 and at that price, Thad estimates 600 units would be sold each year. The variable cost to produce and sell the cycles would be $7,500 per unit. The annual fixed cost would be $1,200,000. a. Using your worksheet, what would be the break-even unit sales, the margin of safety in dollars, and the degree of operating leverage? b. Thad is worried about the selling price. Rumors are circulating that other retro brands of cycles may be revived. If so, the selling price for the Western Hombre would have to be reduced to $9,000 to compete effectively. In that event, Thad would also reduce fixed expenses by $300,000 by reducing advertising expenses, but he still hopes to sell 600 units per year. Do you think this is a good plan? Explain. Also, explain the degree of operating leverage that appears on your worksheet. The Foundational 15 Available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. Oslo Company prepared the following contribution format income statement based on a sales volume of 1,000 units (the relevant range of production is 500 units to 1,500 units): Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $20,000 12,000 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8,000 6,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 2,000 Required: (Answer each question independently and always refer to the original data unless instructed otherwise.) 1. What is the contribution margin per unit? 2. What is the contribution margin ratio? 3. What is the variable expense ratio? 4. If sales increase to 1,001 units, what would be the increase in net operating income? 5. If sales decline to 900 units, what would be the net operating income? 6. If the selling price increases by $2 per unit and the sales volume decreases by 100 units, what would be the net operating income? 7. If the variable cost per unit increases by $1, spending on advertising increases by $1,500, and unit sales increase by 250 units, what would be the net operating income? 8. What is the break-even point in unit sales? 9. What is the break-even point in dollar sales? 10. How many units must be sold to achieve a target profit of $5,000? 11. What is the margin of safety in dollars? What is the margin of safety percentage? 12. What is the degree of operating leverage? 13. Using the degree of operating leverage, what is the estimated percent increase in net operating income of a 5% increase in sales? 14. Assume that the amounts of the company’s total variable expenses and total fixed expenses were reversed. In other words, assume that the total variable expenses are $6,000 and the total fixed expenses are $12,000. Under this scenario and assuming that total sales remain the same, what is the degree of operating leverage? 15. Using the degree of operating leverage that you computed in the previous question, what is the estimated percent increase in net operating income of a 5% increase in sales? LO5–1, LO5–3, LO5–4, LO5–5, LO5–6, LO5–7, LO5–8 218 Chapter 5 Exercises All applicable exercises are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. EXERCISE 5–1 Preparing a Contribution Format Income Statement [LO5–1] Whirly Corporation’s most recent income statement is shown below: Total Per Unit Sales (10,000 units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $350,000 200,000 $35.00 20.00 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,000 135,000 $15.00 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 15,000 Required: Prepare a new contribution format income statement under each of the following conditions (consider each case independently): 1. The sales volume increases by 100 units. 2. The sales volume decreases by 100 units. 3. The sales volume is 9,000 units. EXERCISE 5–2 Prepare a Cost-Volume-Profit (CVP) Graph [LO5–2] Karlik Enterprises distributes a single product whose selling price is $24 and whose variable expense is $18 per unit. The company’s monthly fixed expense is $24,000. Required: 1. 2. Prepare a cost-volume-profit graph for the company up to a sales level of 8,000 units. Estimate the company’s break-even point in unit sales using your cost-volume-profit graph. EXERCISE 5–3 Prepare a Profit Graph [LO5–2] Jaffre Enterprises distributes a single product whose selling price is $16 and whose variable expense is $11 per unit. The company’s fixed expense is $16,000 per month. Required: 1. 2. Prepare a profit graph for the company up to a sales level of 4,000 units. Estimate the company’s break-even point in unit sales using your profit graph. EXERCISE 5–4 Computing and Using the CM Ratio [LO5–3] Last month when Holiday Creations, Inc., sold 50,000 units, total sales were $200,000, total variable expenses were $120,000, and fixed expenses were $65,000. Required: 1. 2. What is the company’s contribution margin (CM) ratio? Estimate the change in the company’s net operating income if it were to increase its total sales by $1,000. EXERCISE 5–5 Changes in Variable Costs, Fixed Costs, Selling Price, and Volume [LO5–4] Data for Hermann Corporation are shown below: Per Unit Percent of Sales Selling price . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . $90 63 100% 70 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . $27 30% Fixed expenses are $30,000 per month and the company is selling 2,000 units per month. Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships Required: 1. 2. The marketing manager argues that a $5,000 increase in the monthly advertising budget would increase monthly sales by $9,000. Should the advertising budget be increased? Refer to the original data. Management is considering using higher-quality components that would increase the variable expense by $2 per unit. The marketing manager believes that the higher-quality product would increase sales by 10% per month. Should the higher-quality components be used? EXERCISE 5–6 Compute the Break-Even Point [LO5–5] Mauro Products distributes a single product, a woven basket whose selling price is $15 and whose variable expense is $12 per unit. The company’s monthly fixed expense is $4,200. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Solve for the company’s break-even point in unit sales using the equation method. Solve for the company’s break-even point in dollar sales using the equation method and the CM ratio. Solve for the company’s break-even point in unit sales using the formula method. Solve for the company’s break-even point in dollar sales using the formula method and the CM ratio. EXERCISE 5–7 Compute the Level of Sales Required to Attain a Target Profit [LO5–6] Lin Corporation has a single product whose selling price is $120 and whose variable expense is $80 per unit. The company’s monthly fixed expense is $50,000. Required: 1. 2. Using the equation method, solve for the unit sales that are required to earn a target profit of $10,000. Using the formula method, solve for the unit sales that are required to earn a target profit of $15,000. EXERCISE 5–8 Compute the Margin of Safety [LO5–7] Molander Corporation is a distributor of a sun umbrella used at resort hotels. Data concerning the next month’s budget appear below: Selling price . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . Unit sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $30 per unit $20 per unit $7,500 per month 1,000 units per month Required: 1. 2. Compute the company’s margin of safety. Compute the company’s margin of safety as a percentage of its sales. EXERCISE 5–9 Compute and Use the Degree of Operating Leverage [LO5–8] Engberg Company installs lawn sod in home yards. The company’s most recent monthly contribution format income statement follows: Amount Percent of Sales Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . $80,000 32,000 100% 40% Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,000 38,000 60% Net operating income . . . . . . . . $10,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. Compute the company’s degree of operating leverage. Using the degree of operating leverage, estimate the impact on net operating income of a 5% increase in sales. Verify your estimate from part (2) above by constructing a new contribution format income statement for the company assuming a 5% increase in sales. 219 220 Chapter 5 EXERCISE 5–10 Compute the Break-Even Point for a Multiproduct Company [LO5–9] Lucido Products markets two computer games: Claimjumper and Makeover. A contribution format income statement for a recent month for the two games appears below: Claimjumper Makeover Total Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . $30,000 20,000 $70,000 50,000 $100,000 70,000 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . $10,000 $20,000 30,000 24,000 $ Net operating income . . . . . . . . 6,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. Compute the overall contribution margin (CM) ratio for the company. Compute the overall break-even point for the company in dollar sales. Verify the overall break-even point for the company by constructing a contribution format income statement showing the appropriate levels of sales for the two products. EXERCISE 5–11 Missing Data; Basic CVP Concepts [LO5–1, LO5–9] Fill in the missing amounts in each of the eight case situations below. Each case is independent of the others. (Hint: One way to find the missing amounts would be to prepare a contribution format income statement for each case, enter the known data, and then compute the missing items.) a. Assume that only one product is being sold in each of the four following case situations: Case 1........ 2........ 3........ 4........ b. Units Sold 15,000 ? 10,000 6,000 Sales Variable Expenses Contribution Margin per Unit Fixed Expenses Net Operating Income (Loss) $180,000 $100,000 ? $300,000 $120,000 ? $70,000 ? ? $10 $13 ? $50,000 $32,000 ? $100,000 ? $8,000 $12,000 $(10,000) Assume that more than one product is being sold in each of the four following case situations: Case 1................ 2................ 3................ 4................ Sales Variable Expenses Average Contribution Margin Ratio Fixed Expenses Net Operating Income (Loss) $500,000 $400,000 ? $600,000 ? $260,000 ? $420,000 20% ? 60% ? ? $100,000 $130,000 ? $7,000 ? $20,000 $(5,000) EXERCISE 5–12 Multiproduct Break-Even Analysis [LO5–9] Olongapo Sports Corporation distributes two premium golf balls—the Flight Dynamic and the Sure Shot. Monthly sales and the contribution margin ratios for the two products follow: Product Flight Dynamic Sure Shot Total $150,000 80% $250,000 36% $400,000 ? Sales . . . . . . . . . CM ratio . . . . . . . Fixed expenses total $183,750 per month. Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships Required: 1. 2. 3. Prepare a contribution format income statement for the company as a whole. Carry computations to one decimal place. Compute the break-even point for the company based on the current sales mix. If sales increase by $100,000 a month, by how much would you expect net operating income to increase? What are your assumptions? EXERCISE 5–13 Using a Contribution Format Income Statement [LO5–1, LO5–4] Miller Company’s most recent contribution format income statement is shown below: Total Per Unit Sales (20,000 units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $300,000 180,000 $15.00 9.00 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,000 70,000 $ 6.00 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 50,000 Required: Prepare a new contribution format income statement under each of the following conditions (consider each case independently): 1. The number of units sold increases by 15%. 2. The selling price decreases by $1.50 per unit, and the number of units sold increases by 25%. 3. The selling price increases by $1.50 per unit, fixed expenses increase by $20,000, and the number of units sold decreases by 5%. 4. The selling price increases by 12%, variable expenses increase by 60 cents per unit, and the number of units sold decreases by 10%. EXERCISE 5–14 Break-Even and Target Profit Analysis [LO5–3, LO5–4, LO5–5, LO5–6] Lindon Company is the exclusive distributor for an automotive product that sells for $40 per unit and has a CM ratio of 30%. The company’s fixed expenses are $180,000 per year. The company plans to sell 16,000 units this year. Required: 1. 2. 3. What are the variable expenses per unit? Using the equation method: a. What is the break-even point in unit sales and in dollar sales? b. What amount of unit sales and dollar sales is required to earn an annual profit of $60,000? c. Assume that by using a more efficient shipper, the company is able to reduce its variable expenses by $4 per unit. What is the company’s new break-even point in unit sales and in dollar sales? Repeat (2) above using the formula method. EXERCISE 5–15 Operating Leverage [LO5–4, LO5–8] Magic Realm, Inc., has developed a new fantasy board game. The company sold 15,000 games last year at a selling price of $20 per game. Fixed expenses associated with the game total $182,000 per year, and variable expenses are $6 per game. Production of the game is entrusted to a printing contractor. Variable expenses consist mostly of payments to this contractor. Required: 1. 2. Prepare a contribution format income statement for the game last year and compute the degree of operating leverage. Management is confident that the company can sell 18,000 games next year (an increase of 3,000 games, or 20%, over last year). Compute: a. The expected percentage increase in net operating income for next year. b. The expected total dollar net operating income for next year. (Do not prepare an income statement; use the degree of operating leverage to compute your answer.) 221 222 Chapter 5 EXERCISE 5–16 Break-Even Analysis and CVP Graphing [LO5–2, LO5–4, LO5–5] The Hartford Symphony Guild is planning its annual dinner-dance. The dinner-dance committee has assembled the following expected costs for the event: Dinner (per person) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Favors and program (per person) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rental of ballroom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Professional entertainment during intermission . . . . Tickets and advertising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $18 $2 $2,800 $900 $1,000 $1,300 The committee members would like to charge $35 per person for the evening’s activities. Required: 1. 2. 3. Compute the break-even point for the dinner-dance (in terms of the number of persons who must attend). Assume that last year only 300 persons attended the dinner-dance. If the same number attend this year, what price per ticket must be charged in order to break even? Refer to the original data ($35 ticket price per person). Prepare a CVP graph for the dinnerdance from zero tickets up to 600 tickets sold. EXERCISE 5–17 Break-Even and Target Profit Analysis [LO5–4, LO5–5, LO5–6] Outback Outfitters sells recreational equipment. One of the company’s products, a small camp stove, sells for $50 per unit. Variable expenses are $32 per stove, and fixed expenses associated with the stove total $108,000 per month. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Compute the break-even point in unit sales and in dollar sales. If the variable expenses per stove increase as a percentage of the selling price, will it result in a higher or a lower break-even point? Why? (Assume that the fixed expenses remain unchanged.) At present, the company is selling 8,000 stoves per month. The sales manager is convinced that a 10% reduction in the selling price would result in a 25% increase in monthly sales of stoves. Prepare two contribution format income statements, one under present operating conditions, and one as operations would appear after the proposed changes. Show both total and per unit data on your statements. Refer to the data in (3) above. How many stoves would have to be sold at the new selling price to yield a minimum net operating income of $35,000 per month? EXERCISE 5–18 Break-Even and Target Profit Analysis; Margin of Safety; CM Ratio [LO5–1, LO5–3, LO5–5, LO5–6, LO5–7] Menlo Company distributes a single product. The company’s sales and expenses for last month follow: Total Per Unit Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $450,000 180,000 $30 12 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,000 216,000 $18 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 54,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. What is the monthly break-even point in unit sales and in dollar sales? Without resorting to computations, what is the total contribution margin at the break-even point? How many units would have to be sold each month to earn a target profit of $90,000? Use the formula method. Verify your answer by preparing a contribution format income statement at the target sales level. Refer to the original data. Compute the company’s margin of safety in both dollar and percentage terms. What is the company’s CM ratio? If sales increase by $50,000 per month and there is no change in fixed expenses, by how much would you expect monthly net operating income to increase? Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships 223 Problems All applicable problems are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. PROBLEM 5–19 Break-Even Analysis; Pricing [LO5–1, LO5–4, LO5–5] Minden Company introduced a new product last year for which it is trying to find an optimal selling price. Marketing studies suggest that the company can increase sales by 5,000 units for each $2 reduction in the selling price. The company’s present selling price is $70 per unit, and variable expenses are $40 per unit. Fixed expenses are $540,000 per year. The present annual sales volume (at the $70 selling price) is 15,000 units. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. What is the present yearly net operating income or loss? What is the present break-even point in unit sales and in dollar sales? Assuming that the marketing studies are correct, what is the maximum annual profit that the company can earn? At how many units and at what selling price per unit would the company generate this profit? What would be the break-even point in unit sales and in dollar sales using the selling price you determined in (3) above (e.g., the selling price at the level of maximum profits)? Why is this break-even point different from the break-even point you computed in (2) above? PROBLEM 5–20 Various CVP Questions: Break-Even Point; Cost Structure; Target Sales [LO5–1, LO5–3, LO5–4, LO5–5, LO5–6, LO5–8] Northwood Company manufactures basketballs. The company has a ball that sells for $25. At present, the ball is manufactured in a small plant that relies heavily on direct labor workers. Thus, variable expenses are high, totaling $15 per ball, of which 60% is direct labor cost. Last year, the company sold 30,000 of these balls, with the following results: Sales (30,000 balls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $750,000 450,000 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,000 210,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 90,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Compute (a) the CM ratio and the break-even point in balls, and (b) the degree of operating leverage at last year’s sales level. Due to an increase in labor rates, the company estimates that variable expenses will increase by $3 per ball next year. If this change takes place and the selling price per ball remains constant at $25, what will be the new CM ratio and break-even point in balls? Refer to the data in (2) above. If the expected change in variable expenses takes place, how many balls will have to be sold next year to earn the same net operating income, $90,000, as last year? Refer again to the data in (2) above. The president feels that the company must raise the selling price of its basketballs. If Northwood Company wants to maintain the same CM ratio as last year, what selling price per ball must it charge next year to cover the increased labor costs? Refer to the original data. The company is discussing the construction of a new, automated manufacturing plant. The new plant would slash variable expenses per ball by 40%, but it would cause fixed expenses per year to double. If the new plant is built, what would be the company’s new CM ratio and new break-even point in balls? Refer to the data in (5) above. a. If the new plant is built, how many balls will have to be sold next year to earn the same net operating income, $90,000, as last year? b. Assume the new plant is built and that next year the company manufactures and sells 30,000 balls (the same number as sold last year). Prepare a contribution format income statement and compute the degree of operating leverage. c. If you were a member of top management, would you have been in favor of constructing the new plant? Explain. 224 Chapter 5 PROBLEM 5–21 Sales Mix; Multiproduct Break-Even Analysis [LO5–9] Gold Star Rice, Ltd., of Thailand exports Thai rice throughout Asia. The company grows three varieties of rice—Fragrant, White, and Loonzain. Budgeted sales by product and in total for the coming month are shown below: Product White Fragrant Loonzain Total Percentage of total sales Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . 20% $150,000 108,000 100% 72% 52% $390,000 78,000 100% 20% 28% $210,000 84,000 100% 40% 100% $750,000 270,000 100% 36% Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . $ 42,000 28% $312,000 80% $126,000 60% 480,000 64% Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449,280 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . $30,720 Fixed expenses ________ $449,280 Dollar sales to 5 _____________ 5 5 $702,000 break even CM ratio 0.64 As shown by these data, net operating income is budgeted at $30,720 for the month and breakeven sales at $702,000. Assume that actual sales for the month total $750,000 as planned. Actual sales by product are: White, $300,000; Fragrant, $180,000; and Loonzain, $270,000. Required: 1. 2. 3. Prepare a contribution format income statement for the month based on actual sales data. Present the income statement in the format shown above. Compute the break-even point in dollar sales for the month based on your actual data. Considering the fact that the company met its $750,000 sales budget for the month, the president is shocked at the results shown on your income statement in (1) above. Prepare a brief memo for the president explaining why both the operating results and the break-even point in dollar sales are different from what was budgeted. PROBLEM 5–22 Basics of CVP Analysis; Cost Structure [LO5–1, LO5–3, LO5–4, LO5–5, LO5–6] Due to erratic sales of its sole product—a high-capacity battery for laptop computers—PEM, Inc., has been experiencing difficulty for some time. The company’s contribution format income statement for the most recent month is given below: Sales (19,500 units 3 $30 per unit) . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $585,000 409,500 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175,500 180,000 Net operating loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (4,500) Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Compute the company’s CM ratio and its break-even point in both unit sales and dollar sales. The president believes that a $16,000 increase in the monthly advertising budget, combined with an intensified effort by the sales staff, will result in an $80,000 increase in monthly sales. If the president is right, what will be the effect on the company’s monthly net operating income or loss? (Use the incremental approach in preparing your answer.) Refer to the original data. The sales manager is convinced that a 10% reduction in the selling price, combined with an increase of $60,000 in the monthly advertising budget, will double unit sales. What will the new contribution format income statement look like if these changes are adopted? Refer to the original data. The Marketing Department thinks that a fancy new package for the laptop computer battery would help sales. The new package would increase packaging costs by 75 cents per unit. Assuming no other changes, how many units would have to be sold each month to earn a profit of $9,750? Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships 5. Refer to the original data. By automating, the company could reduce variable expenses by $3 per unit. However, fixed expenses would increase by $72,000 each month. a. Compute the new CM ratio and the new break-even point in both unit sales and dollar sales. b. Assume that the company expects to sell 26,000 units next month. Prepare two contribution format income statements, one assuming that operations are not automated and one assuming that they are. (Show data on a per unit and percentage basis, as well as in total, for each alternative.) c. Would you recommend that the company automate its operations? Explain. PROBLEM 5–23 Basics of CVP Analysis [LO5–1, LO5–3, LO5–4, LO5–5, LO5–8] Feather Friends, Inc., distributes a high-quality wooden birdhouse that sells for $20 per unit. Variable expenses are $8 per unit, and fixed expenses total $180,000 per year. Required: Answer the following independent questions: 1. What is the product’s CM ratio? 2. Use the CM ratio to determine the break-even point in dollar sales. 3. Due to an increase in demand, the company estimates that sales will increase by $75,000 during the next year. By how much should net operating income increase (or net loss decrease) assuming that fixed expenses do not change? 4. Assume that the operating results for last year were: Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $400,000 160,000 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240,000 180,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 60,000 a. b. 5. 6. Compute the degree of operating leverage at the current level of sales. The president expects sales to increase by 20% next year. By what percentage should net operating income increase? Refer to the original data. Assume that the company sold 18,000 units last year. The sales manager is convinced that a 10% reduction in the selling price, combined with a $30,000 increase in advertising, would increase annual unit sales by one-third. Prepare two contribution format income statements, one showing the results of last year’s operations and one showing the results of operations if these changes are made. Would you recommend that the company do as the sales manager suggests? Refer to the original data. Assume again that the company sold 18,000 units last year. The president does not want to change the selling price. Instead, he wants to increase the sales commission by $1 per unit. He thinks that this move, combined with some increase in advertising, would increase annual sales by 25%. By how much could advertising be increased with profits remaining unchanged? Do not prepare an income statement; use the incremental analysis approach. PROBLEM 5–24 Break-Even and Target Profit Analysis [LO5–5, LO5–6] The Shirt Works sells a large variety of tee shirts and sweatshirts. Steve Hooper, the owner, is thinking of expanding his sales by hiring high school students, on a commission basis, to sell sweatshirts bearing the name and mascot of the local high school. These sweatshirts would have to be ordered from the manufacturer six weeks in advance, and they could not be returned because of the unique printing required. The sweatshirts would cost Hooper $8 each with a minimum order of 75 sweatshirts. Any additional sweatshirts would have to be ordered in increments of 75. Since Hooper’s plan would not require any additional facilities, the only costs associated with the project would be the costs of the sweatshirts and the costs of the sales commissions. The selling price of the sweatshirts would be $13.50 each. Hooper would pay the students a commission of $1.50 for each shirt sold. Required: 1. 2. To make the project worthwhile, Hooper would require a $1,200 profit for the first three months of the venture. What level of unit sales and dollar sales would be required to reach this target net operating income? Show all computations. Assume that the venture is undertaken and an order is placed for 75 sweatshirts. What would be Hooper’s break-even point in unit sales and in dollar sales? Show computations and explain the reasoning behind your answer. 225 226 Chapter 5 PROBLEM 5–25 Changes in Fixed and Variable Expenses; Break-Even and Target Profit Analysis [LO5–4, LO5–5, LO5–6] Neptune Company produces toys and other items for use in beach and resort areas. A small, inflatable toy has come onto the market that the company is anxious to produce and sell. The new toy will sell for $3 per unit. Enough capacity exists in the company’s plant to produce 16,000 units of the toy each month. Variable expenses to manufacture and sell one unit would be $1.25, and fixed expenses associated with the toy would total $35,000 per month. The company’s Marketing Department predicts that demand for the new toy will exceed the 16,000 units that the company is able to produce. Additional manufacturing space can be rented from another company at a fixed expense of $1,000 per month. Variable expenses in the rented facility would total $1.40 per unit, due to somewhat less efficient operations than in the main plant. Required: 1. 2. 3. Compute the monthly break-even point for the new toy in unit sales and in dollar sales. How many units must be sold each month to make a monthly profit of $12,000? If the sales manager receives a bonus of 10 cents for each unit sold in excess of the break-even point, how many units must be sold each month to earn a return of 25% on the monthly investment in fixed expenses? PROBLEM 5–26 Basic CVP Analysis; Graphing [LO5–1, LO5–2, LO5–4, LO5–5] The Fashion Shoe Company operates a chain of women’s shoe shops that carry many styles of shoes that are all sold at the same price. Sales personnel in the shops are paid a substantial commission on each pair of shoes sold (in addition to a small base salary) in order to encourage them to be aggressive in their sales efforts. The following worksheet contains cost and revenue data for Shop 48 and is typical of the company’s many outlets: Per Pair of Shoes Selling price . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $30.00 Variable expenses: Invoice cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales commission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $13.50 4.50 Total variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $18.00 Annual Fixed expenses: Advertising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Salaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 30,000 20,000 100,000 Total fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $150,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Calculate the annual break-even point in unit sales and in dollar sales for Shop 48. Prepare a CVP graph showing cost and revenue data for Shop 48 from zero shoes up to 17,000 pairs of shoes sold each year. Clearly indicate the break-even point on the graph. If 12,000 pairs of shoes are sold in a year, what would be Shop 48’s net operating income or loss? The company is considering paying the store manager of Shop 48 an incentive commission of 75 cents per pair of shoes (in addition to the salesperson’s commission). If this change is made, what will be the new break-even point in unit sales and in dollar sales? Refer to the original data. As an alternative to (4) above, the company is considering paying the store manager 50 cents commission on each pair of shoes sold in excess of the break-even point. If this change is made, what will be the shop’s net operating income or loss if 15,000 pairs of shoes are sold? Refer to the original data. The company is considering eliminating sales commissions entirely in its shops and increasing fixed salaries by $31,500 annually. If this change is made, what will be the new break-even point in unit sales and in dollar sales for Shop 48? Would you recommend that the change be made? Explain. Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships PROBLEM 5–27 Sales Mix; Break-Even Analysis; Margin of Safety [LO5–7, LO5–9] Island Novelties, Inc., of Palau makes two products, Hawaiian Fantasy and Tahitian Joy. Present revenue, cost, and sales data for the two products follow: Hawaiian Fantasy Tahitian Joy $15 $9 20,000 $100 $20 5,000 Selling price per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses per unit . . . . . . . . . . . Number of units sold annually . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses total $475,800 per year. Required: 1. 2. 3. Assuming the sales mix given above, do the following: a. Prepare a contribution format income statement showing both dollar and percent columns for each product and for the company as a whole. b. Compute the break-even point in dollar sales for the company as a whole and the margin of safety in both dollars and percent. The company has developed a new product to be called Samoan Delight. Assume that the company could sell 10,000 units at $45 each. The variable expenses would be $36 each. The company’s fixed expenses would not change. a. Prepare another contribution format income statement, including sales of the Samoan Delight (sales of the other two products would not change). b. Compute the company’s new break-even point in dollar sales and the new margin of safety in both dollars and percent. The president of the company examines your figures and says, “There’s something strange here. Our fixed expenses haven’t changed and you show greater total contribution margin if we add the new product, but you also show our break-even point going up. With greater contribution margin, the break-even point should go down, not up. You’ve made a mistake somewhere.” Explain to the president what has happened. PROBLEM 5–28 Sales Mix; Commission Structure; Multiproduct Break-Even Analysis [LO5–9] Carbex, Inc., produces cutlery sets out of high-quality wood and steel. The company makes a standard cutlery set and a deluxe set and sells them to retail department stores throughout the country. The standard set sells for $60, and the deluxe set sells for $75. The variable expenses associated with each set are given below. Production costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales commissions (15% of sales price) . . . . . . . Standard Deluxe $15.00 $9.00 $30.00 $11.25 The company’s fixed expenses each month are: Advertising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $105,000 $21,700 $63,000 Salespersons are paid on a commission basis to encourage them to be aggressive in their sales efforts. Mary Parsons, the financial vice president, watches sales commissions carefully and has noted that they have risen steadily over the last year. For this reason, she was shocked to find that even though sales have increased, profits for the current month—May—are down substantially from April. Sales, in sets, for the last two months are given below: April . . . . . . . . . May . . . . . . . . . Standard Deluxe Total 4,000 1,000 2,000 5,000 6,000 6,000 227 228 Chapter 5 Required: 1. Prepare contribution format income statements for April and May. Use the following headings: Standard Amount Percent Deluxe Amount Percent Total Amount Percent Sales . . . Etc . . . . . 2. 3. Place the fixed expenses only in the Total column. Do not show percentages for the fixed expenses. Explain the difference in net operating incomes between the two months, even though the same total number of sets was sold in each month. What can be done to the sales commissions to improve the sales mix? a. Using April’s sales mix, what is the break-even point in dollar sales? b. Without doing any calculations, explain whether the break-even points would be higher or lower with May’s sales mix than April’s sales mix. PROBLEM 5–29 Changes in Cost Structure; Break-Even Analysis; Operating Leverage; Margin of Safety [LO5–4, LO5–5, LO5–7, LO5–8] Morton Company’s contribution format income statement for last month is given below: Sales (15,000 units 3 $30 per unit) . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $450,000 315,000 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,000 90,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 45,000 The industry in which Morton Company operates is quite sensitive to cyclical movements in the economy. Thus, profits vary considerably from year to year according to general economic conditions. The company has a large amount of unused capacity and is studying ways of improving profits. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. New equipment has come onto the market that would allow Morton Company to automate a portion of its operations. Variable expenses would be reduced by $9 per unit. However, fixed expenses would increase to a total of $225,000 each month. Prepare two contribution format income statements, one showing present operations and one showing how operations would appear if the new equipment is purchased. Show an Amount column, a Per Unit column, and a Percent column on each statement. Do not show percentages for the fixed expenses. Refer to the income statements in (1) above. For both present operations and the proposed new operations, compute (a) the degree of operating leverage, (b) the break-even point in dollar sales, and (c) the margin of safety in both dollar and percentage terms. Refer again to the data in (1) above. As a manager, what factor would be paramount in your mind in deciding whether to purchase the new equipment? (Assume that enough funds are available to make the purchase.) Refer to the original data. Rather than purchase new equipment, the marketing manager argues that the company’s marketing strategy should be changed. Rather than pay sales commissions, which are currently included in variable expenses, the company would pay salespersons fixed salaries and would invest heavily in advertising. The marketing manager claims this new approach would increase unit sales by 30% without any change in selling price; the company’s new monthly fixed expenses would be $180,000; and its net operating income would increase by 20%. Compute the break-even point in dollar sales for the company under the new marketing strategy. Do you agree with the marketing manager’s proposal? PROBLEM 5–30 Graphing; Incremental Analysis; Operating Leverage [LO5–2, LO5–4, LO5–5, LO5–6, LO5–8] Angie Silva has recently opened The Sandal Shop in Brisbane, Australia, a store that specializes in fashionable sandals. Angie has just received a degree in business and she is anxious to apply the principles she has learned to her business. In time, she hopes to open a chain of sandal shops. As a first step, she has prepared the following analysis for her new store: Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships Sales price per pair of sandals . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses per pair of sandals . . . . . . . $40 16 Contribution margin per pair of sandals . . . . . . $24 Fixed expenses per year: Building rental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment depreciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $15,000 7,000 20,000 18,000 Total fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $60,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. How many pairs of sandals must be sold each year to break even? What does this represent in total sales dollars? Prepare a CVP graph or a profit graph for the store from zero pairs up to 4,000 pairs of sandals sold each year. Indicate the break-even point on your graph. Angie has decided that she must earn at least $18,000 the first year to justify her time and effort. How many pairs of sandals must be sold to reach this target profit? Angie now has two salespersons working in the store—one full time and one part time. It will cost her an additional $8,000 per year to convert the part-time position to a full-time position. Angie believes that the change would bring in an additional $25,000 in sales each year. Should she convert the position? Use the incremental approach. (Do not prepare an income statement.) Refer to the original data. During the first year, the store sold only 3,000 pairs of sandals and reported the following operating results: a. b. Sales (3,000 pairs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $120,000 48,000 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,000 60,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 12,000 What is the store’s degree of operating leverage? Angie is confident that with a more intense sales effort and with a more creative advertising program she can increase sales by 50% next year. What would be the expected percentage increase in net operating income? Use the degree of operating leverage to compute your answer. PROBLEM 5–31 Interpretive Questions on the CVP Graph [LO5–2, LO5–5] A CVP graph such as the one shown below is a useful technique for showing relationships among an organization’s costs, volume, and profits. 8 6 1 4 3 9 7 5 2 229 230 Chapter 5 Required: 1. 2. Identify the numbered components in the CVP graph. State the effect of each of the following actions on line 3, line 9, and the break-even point. For line 3 and line 9, state whether the action will cause the line to: Remain unchanged. Shift upward. Shift downward. Have a steeper slope (i.e., rotate upward). Have a flatter slope (i.e., rotate downward). Shift upward and have a steeper slope. Shift upward and have a flatter slope. Shift downward and have a steeper slope. Shift downward and have a flatter slope. In the case of the break-even point, state whether the action will cause the break-even point to: Remain unchanged. Increase. Decrease. Probably change, but the direction is uncertain. Treat each case independently. x. Example. Fixed expenses are reduced by $5,000 per period. Answer (see choices above): Line 3: Shift downward. Line 9: Remain unchanged. Break-even point: Decrease. a. b. c. d. e. The unit selling price is increased from $18 to $20. Unit variable expenses are decreased from $12 to $10. Fixed expenses are increased by $3,000 per period. Two thousand more units are sold during the period than were budgeted. Due to paying salespersons a commission rather than a flat salary, fixed expenses are reduced by $8,000 per period and unit variable expenses are increased by $3. Due to an increase in the cost of materials, both unit variable expenses and the selling price are increased by $2. Advertising costs are increased by $10,000 per period, resulting in a 10% increase in the number of units sold. Due to automating an operation previously done by workers, fixed expenses are increased by $12,000 per period and unit variable expenses are reduced by $4. f. g. h. Cases All applicable cases are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. CASE 5–32 Break-Evens for Individual Products in a Multiproduct Company [LO5–5, LO5–9] Cheryl Montoya picked up the phone and called her boss, Wes Chan, the vice president of marketing at Piedmont Fasteners Corporation: “Wes, I’m not sure how to go about answering the questions that came up at the meeting with the president yesterday.” “What’s the problem?” “The president wanted to know the break-even point for each of the company’s products, but I am having trouble figuring them out.” “I’m sure you can handle it, Cheryl. And, by the way, I need your analysis on my desk tomorrow morning at 8:00 sharp in time for the follow-up meeting at 9:00.” Piedmont Fasteners Corporation makes three different clothing fasteners in its manufacturing facility in North Carolina. Data concerning these products appear below: Normal annual sales volume . . . . . . . . Unit selling price . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expense per unit . . . . . . . . . . Total fixed expenses are $400,000 per year. Velcro Metal Nylon 100,000 $1.65 $1.25 200,000 $1.50 $0.70 400,000 $0.85 $0.25 Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships All three products are sold in highly competitive markets, so the company is unable to raise its prices without losing unacceptable numbers of customers. The company has an extremely effective lean production system, so there are no beginning or ending work in process or finished goods inventories. Required: 1. 2. What is the company’s over-all break-even point in dollar sales? Of the total fixed expenses of $400,000, $20,000 could be avoided if the Velcro product is dropped, $80,000 if the Metal product is dropped, and $60,000 if the Nylon product is dropped. The remaining fixed expenses of $240,000 consist of common fixed expenses such as administrative salaries and rent on the factory building that could be avoided only by going out of business entirely. a. What is the break-even point in unit sales for each product? b. If the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product, what will be the overall profit of the company? Explain this result. CASE 5–33 Cost Structure; Break-Even and Target Profit Analysis [LO5–4, LO5–5, LO5–6] Pittman Company is a small but growing manufacturer of telecommunications equipment. The company has no sales force of its own; rather, it relies completely on independent sales agents to market its products. These agents are paid a sales commission of 15% for all items sold. Barbara Cheney, Pittman’s controller, has just prepared the company’s budgeted income statement for next year. The statement follows: Pittman Company Budgeted Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31 Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing expenses: Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses: Commissions to agents . . . . . . . . . . Fixed marketing expenses . . . . . . . . Fixed administrative expenses . . . . $16,000,000 $7,200,000 2,340,000 9,540,000 6,460,000 2,400,000 120,000* 1,800,000 4,320,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed interest expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,140,000 540,000 Income before income taxes . . . . . . . . Income taxes (30%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,600,000 480,000 Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1,120,000 *Primarily depreciation on storage facilities. As Barbara handed the statement to Karl Vecci, Pittman’s president, she commented, “I went ahead and used the agents’ 15% commission rate in completing these statements, but we’ve just learned that they refuse to handle our products next year unless we increase the commission rate to 20%.” “That’s the last straw,” Karl replied angrily. “Those agents have been demanding more and more, and this time they’ve gone too far. How can they possibly defend a 20% commission rate?” “They claim that after paying for advertising, travel, and the other costs of promotion, there’s nothing left over for profit,” replied Barbara. “I say it’s just plain robbery,” retorted Karl. “And I also say it’s time we dumped those guys and got our own sales force. Can you get your people to work up some cost figures for us to look at?” “We’ve already worked them up,” said Barbara. “Several companies we know about pay a 7.5% commission to their own salespeople, along with a small salary. Of course, we would have to handle all promotion costs, too. We figure our fixed expenses would increase by $2,400,000 per year, but that would be more than offset by the $3,200,000 (20% 3 $16,000,000) that we would avoid on agents’ commissions.” 231 232 Chapter 5 The breakdown of the $2,400,000 cost follows: Salaries: Sales manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Salespersons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Travel and entertainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advertising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 100,000 600,000 400,000 1,300,000 Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $2,400,000 “Super,” replied Karl. “And I noticed that the $2,400,000 is just what we’re paying the agents under the old 15% commission rate.” “It’s even better than that,” explained Barbara. “We can actually save $75,000 a year because that’s what we’re having to pay the auditing firm now to check out the agents’ reports. So our overall administrative expenses would be less.” “Pull all of these numbers together and we’ll show them to the executive committee tomorrow,” said Karl. “With the approval of the committee, we can move on the matter immediately.” Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Compute Pittman Company’s break-even point in dollar sales for next year assuming: a. The agents’ commission rate remains unchanged at 15%. b. The agents’ commission rate is increased to 20%. c. The company employs its own sales force. Assume that Pittman Company decides to continue selling through agents and pays the 20% commission rate. Determine the volume of sales that would be required to generate the same net income as contained in the budgeted income statement for next year. Determine the volume of sales at which net income would be equal regardless of whether Pittman Company sells through agents (at a 20% commission rate) or employs its own sales force. Compute the degree of operating leverage that the company would expect to have on December 31 at the end of next year assuming: a. The agents’ commission rate remains unchanged at 15%. b. The agents’ commission rate is increased to 20%. c. The company employs its own sales force. Use income before income taxes in your operating leverage computation. Based on the data in (1) through (4) above, make a recommendation as to whether the company should continue to use sales agents (at a 20% commission rate) or employ its own sales force. Give reasons for your answer. (CMA, adapted) CHAPTER 6 Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management Misguided Incentives in the Auto Industry BUSIN ESS FO CUS LEARNING OBJECTIVES After studying Chapter 6, you should be able to: When the economy tanks, automakers, such as General Motors and Chrysler, often “flood the market” with a supply of vehicles that far exceeds customer demand. They pursue this course of action even though it tarnishes their brand image and increases their auto storage costs, tire replacement costs, customer rebate costs, and advertising costs. This begs the question why would managers knowingly produce more vehicles than are demanded by customers? In the auto industry, a manager’s bonus is often influenced by her company’s reported profits; thus, there is a strong incentive to boost profits by producing more units. How can this be done you ask? It would seem logical that producing more units would have no impact on profits unless the units were sold, right? Wrong! As we will discover in this chapter, absorption costing—the most widely used method of determining product costs—can artificially increase profits when managers choose to increase the quantity of units produced. ■ Source: Marielle Segarra, “Lots of Trouble,” CFO, March 2012, pp. 29–30. LO6–1 Explain how variable costing differs from absorption costing and compute unit product costs under each method. LO6–2 Prepare income statements using both variable and absorption costing. LO6–3 Reconcile variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes and explain why the two amounts differ. LO6–4 Prepare a segmented income statement that differentiates traceable fixed costs from common fixed costs and use it to make decisions. LO6–5 Compute companywide and segment break-even points for a company with traceable fixed costs. LO6–6 (Appendix 6A) Prepare an income statement using super-variable costing and reconcile this approach with variable costing. 233 234 Chapter 6 his chapter describes two applications of the contribution for- T mat income statements that were introduced in earlier chapters. First, it explains how manufacturing companies can prepare variable costing income statements, which rely on the contribution format, for internal decision making purposes. The variable costing approach will be contrasted with absorption costing income statements, which were discussed in Chapter 3 and are generally used for external reports. Ordinarily, variable costing and absorption costing produce different net operating income figures, and the difference can be quite large. In addition to showing how these two methods differ, we will describe the advantages of variable costing for internal reporting purposes and we will show how management decisions can be affected by the costing method chosen. Second, the chapter explains how the contribution format can be used to prepare segmented income statements. In addition to companywide income statements, managers need to measure the profitability of individual segments of their organizations. A segment is a part or activity of an organization about which managers would like cost, revenue, or profit data. This chapter explains how to create contribution format income statements that report profit data for business segments, such as divisions, individual stores, geographic regions, customers, and product lines. Overview of Variable and Absorption Costing LO6–1 Explain how variable costing differs from absorption costing and compute unit product costs under each method. As you begin to read about variable and absorption costing income statements in the coming pages, focus your attention on three key concepts. First, both income statement formats include product costs and period costs, although they define these cost classifications differently. Second, variable costing income statements are grounded in the contribution format. They categorize expenses based on cost behavior—variable expenses are reported separately from fixed expenses. Absorption costing income statements ignore variable and fixed cost distinctions. Third, as mentioned in the paragraph above, variable and absorption costing net operating income figures often differ from one another. The reason for these differences always relates to the fact the variable costing and absorption costing income statements account for fixed manufacturing overhead differently. Pay very close attention to the two different ways that variable costing and absorption costing account for fixed manufacturing overhead. Variable Costing Under variable costing, only those manufacturing costs that vary with output are treated as product costs. This would usually include direct materials, direct labor, and the variable portion of manufacturing overhead. Fixed manufacturing overhead is not treated as a product cost under this method. Rather, fixed manufacturing overhead is treated as a period cost and, like selling and administrative expenses, it is expensed in its entirety each period. Consequently, the cost of a unit of product in inventory or in cost of goods sold under the variable costing method does not contain any fixed manufacturing overhead cost. Variable costing is sometimes referred to as direct costing or marginal costing. Absorption Costing As discussed in Chapter 3, absorption costing treats all manufacturing costs as product costs, regardless of whether they are variable or fixed. The cost of a unit of product under the absorption costing method consists of direct materials, direct labor, and both variable and fixed manufacturing overhead. Thus, absorption costing allocates a portion of fixed Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management 235 manufacturing overhead cost to each unit of product, along with the variable manufacturing costs. Because absorption costing includes all manufacturing costs in product costs, it is frequently referred to as the full cost method. Selling and Administrative Expenses Selling and administrative expenses are never treated as product costs, regardless of the costing method. Thus, under absorption and variable costing, variable and fixed selling and administrative expenses are always treated as period costs and are expensed as incurred. Summary of Differences The essential difference between variable costing and absorption costing, as illustrated in Exhibit 6–1, is how each method accounts for fixed manufacturing overhead costs—all other costs are treated the same under the two methods. In absorption costing, fixed manufacturing overhead costs are included as part of the costs of work in process inventories. When units are completed, these costs are transferred to finished goods and only when the units are sold do these costs flow through to the income statement as part of cost of goods sold. In variable costing, fixed manufacturing overhead costs are considered to be period costs—just like selling and administrative costs—and are taken immediately to the income statement as period expenses. EXHIBIT 6–1 Variable Costing versus Absorption Costing Costs Manufacturing costs Balance Sheet Raw materials purchases Raw Materials inventory Direct materials used in production Direct labor Variable manufacturing overhead Ab so co rptio sti ng n Work in Process inventory Goods completed (cost of goods manufactured) Income Statement Cost of Goods Sold Finished Goods inventory Fixed manufacturing overhead Goods sold Variab le costin g Nonmanufacturing costs Selling and administrative Period Expenses 236 Chapter 6 Variable and Absorption Costing—An Example To illustrate the difference between variable costing and absorption costing, consider Weber Light Aircraft, a company that produces light recreational aircraft. Data concerning the company’s operations appear below: Per Aircraft Selling price . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . Beginning inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units produced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Per Month $100,000 $19,000 $5,000 $1,000 $70,000 $10,000 $20,000 January February March 0 1 1 0 0 2 1 1 1 4 5 0 As you review the data above, it is important to realize that for the months of January, February, and March, the selling price per aircraft, variable cost per aircraft, and total monthly fixed expenses never change. The only variables that change in this example are the number of units produced (January 5 1 unit produced; February 5 2 units produced; March 5 4 units produced) and the number of units sold (January 5 1 unit sold; February 5 1 unit sold; March 5 5 units sold). We will first construct the company’s variable costing income statements for January, February, and March. Then we will show how the company’s net operating income would be determined for the same months using absorption costing. Variable Costing Contribution Format Income Statement LO6–2 Prepare income statements using both variable and absorption costing. To prepare the company’s variable costing income statements for January, February, and March we begin by computing the unit product cost. Under variable costing, product costs consist solely of variable production costs. At Weber Light Aircraft, the variable production cost per unit is $25,000, determined as follows: Variable Costing Unit Product Cost Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable costing unit product cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $19,000 5,000 1,000 $25,000 Since each month’s variable production cost is $25,000 per aircraft, the variable costing cost of goods sold for all three months can be easily computed as follows: Variable Costing Cost of Goods Sold January Variable production cost (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units sold (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable cost of goods sold (a) 3 (b) . . . . . . . . . . $25,000 1 $25,000 February March $25,000 1 $25,000 $25,000 5 $125,000 Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management 237 And the company’s total selling and administrative expense would be derived as follows: Selling and Administrative Expenses January Variable selling and administrative expense (@ $10,000 per unit sold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expense . . . . . . . Total selling and administrative expense . . . . . . . . $10,000 20,000 $30,000 February March $10,000 20,000 $30,000 $50,000 20,000 $70,000 Putting it all together, the variable costing income statements would appear as shown in Exhibit 6–2. Notice, the contribution format has been used in these income statements. Also, the monthly fixed manufacturing overhead costs ($70,000) have been recorded as a period expense in the month incurred. Variable Costing Contribution Format Income Statements January February Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses: Variable cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses: Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expense . . . Total fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income (loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . March $100,000 $100,000 $500,000 25,000 25,000 125,000 10,000 35,000 65,000 10,000 35,000 65,000 50,000 175,000 325,000 70,000 20,000 90,000 $ (25,000) 70,000 20,000 90,000 $ (25,000) 70,000 20,000 90,000 $235,000 A simple method for understanding how Weber Light Aircraft computed its variable costing net operating income figures is to focus on the contribution margin per aircraft sold, which is computed as follows: Contribution Margin per Aircraft Sold Selling price per aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable production cost per aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative expense per aircraft . . . . . Contribution margin per aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $100,000 $25,000 10,000 35,000 $ 65,000 The variable costing net operating income for each period can always be computed by multiplying the number of units sold by the contribution margin per unit and then subtracting total fixed costs. For Weber Light Aircraft these computations would appear as follows: Number of aircraft sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin per aircraft . . . . . . . . . Total contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income (loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . January February March 1 3 $65,000 $65,000 90,000 $(25,000) 1 3 $65,000 $65,000 90,000 $(25,000) 5 3 $65,000 $325,000 90,000 $235,000 Notice, January and February have the same net operating loss. This occurs because one aircraft was sold in each month and, as previously mentioned, the selling price per aircraft, variable cost per aircraft, and total monthly fixed expenses remain constant. EXHIBIT 6–2 Variable Costing Income Statements 238 Chapter 6 Absorption Costing Income Statement As we begin the absorption costing portion of the example, remember that the only reason absorption costing income differs from variable costing is that the methods account for fixed manufacturing overhead differently. Under absorption costing, fixed manufacturing overhead is included in product costs. In variable costing, fixed manufacturing overhead is not included in product costs and instead is treated as a period expense just like selling and administrative expenses. The first step in preparing Weber’s absorption costing income statements for January, February, and March is to determine the company’s unit product costs for each month as follows1: Absorption Costing Unit Product Cost January Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead ($70,000 4 1 unit produced in January; $70,000 4 2 units produced in February; $70,000 4 4 units produced in March) . . . Absorption costing unit product cost . . . . . . . . . . . . February March $19,000 5,000 1,000 $19,000 5,000 1,000 $19,000 5,000 1,000 70,000 $95,000 35,000 $60,000 17,500 $42,500 Notice that in each month, Weber’s fixed manufacturing overhead cost of $70,000 is divided by the number of units produced to determine the fixed manufacturing overhead cost per unit. Given these unit product costs, the company’s absorption costing net operating income in each month would be determined as shown in Exhibit 6–3. The sales for all three months in Exhibit 6–3 are the same as the sales shown in the variable costing income statements. The January cost of goods sold consists of one unit produced during January at a cost of $95,000 according to the absorption costing system. The February cost of goods sold consists of one unit produced during February at a cost of $60,000 according to the absorption costing system. The March cost of goods sold ($230,000) consists of one unit produced during February at an absorption cost of $60,000 plus four units produced in March with a total absorption cost of $170,000 (5 4 units produced 3 $42,500 per unit). The selling and administrative expenses equal the amounts reported in the variable costing income statements; however they are reported as one amount rather than being separated into variable and fixed components. EXHIBIT 6–3 Absorption Costing Income Statements Absorption Costing Income Statements January February Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold ($95,000 3 1 unit; $60,000 3 1 unit; $60,000 3 1 unit 1 $42,500 3 4 units) . . . Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . Net operating income (loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 March $100,000 $100,000 $500,000 95,000 5,000 30,000 $ (25,000) 60,000 40,000 30,000 $ 10,000 230,000 270,000 70,000 $200,000 For simplicity, we assume in this section that an actual costing system is used in which actual costs are spread over the units produced during the period. If a predetermined overhead rate were used, the analysis would be similar, but more complex. Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management 239 Note that even though sales were exactly the same in January and February and the cost structure did not change, net operating income was $35,000 higher in February than in January under absorption costing. This occurs because one aircraft produced in February is not sold until March. This aircraft has $35,000 of fixed manufacturing overhead attached to it that was incurred in February, but will not be recorded as part of cost of goods sold until March. Contrasting the variable costing and absorption costing income statements in Exhibits 6–2 and 6–3, note that net operating income is the same in January under variable costing and absorption costing, but differs in the other two months. We will discuss this in some depth shortly. Also note that the format of the variable costing income statement differs from the absorption costing income statement. An absorption costing income statement categorizes costs by function—manufacturing versus selling and administrative. All of the manufacturing costs flow through the absorption costing cost of goods sold and all of the selling and administrative expenses are listed separately as period expenses. In contrast, in the contribution approach, costs are categorized according to how they behave. All of the variable expenses are listed together and all of the fixed expenses are listed together. The variable expenses category includes manufacturing costs (i.e., variable cost of goods sold) as well as selling and administrative expenses. The fixed expenses category also includes both manufacturing costs and selling and administrative expenses. THE BEHAVIORAL SIDE OF CALCULATING UNIT PRODUCT COSTS IN BUSINESS Andreas STIHL, a manufacturer of chain saws and other landscaping products, asked its U.S. subsidiary, STIHL Inc., to replace its absorption costing income statements with the variable costing approach. From a computer systems standpoint, the change was not disruptive because STIHL used an enterprise system called SAP that accommodates both absorption and variable costing. However, from a behavioral standpoint, STIHL felt the change could be very disruptive. For example, STIHL’s senior managers were keenly aware that the variable costing approach reported lower unit product costs than the absorption costing approach. Given this reality, the sales force might be inclined to erroneously conclude that each product had magically become more profitable, thereby justifying ill-advised price reductions. Because of behavioral concerns such as this, STIHL worked hard to teach its employees how to interpret a variable costing income statement. Source: Carl S. Smith, “Going for GPK: STIHL Moves Toward This Costing System in the United States,” Strategic Finance, April 2005, pp. 36–39. Reconciliation of Variable Costing with Absorption Costing Income As noted earlier, variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes may not be the same. In the case of Weber Light Aircraft, the net operating incomes are the same in January, but differ in the other two months. These differences occur because under absorption costing some fixed manufacturing overhead is capitalized in inventories (i.e., included in product costs) rather than being immediately expensed on the income statement. If inventories increase during a period, under absorption costing some of the fixed manufacturing overhead of the current period will be deferred in ending inventories. For example, in February two aircraft were produced and each carried with it $35,000 (5 $70,000 4 2 aircraft produced) in fixed manufacturing overhead. Since only one aircraft was sold, $35,000 of this fixed manufacturing overhead was on February’s absorption costing income statement as part of cost of goods sold, but $35,000 would have been on the balance sheet as part of finished goods inventories. In contrast, under variable costing all of the $70,000 of fixed manufacturing overhead appeared on the February income LO6–3 Reconcile variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes and explain why the two amounts differ. 240 Chapter 6 statement as a period expense. Consequently, net operating income was higher under absorption costing than under variable costing by $35,000 in February. This was reversed in March when four units were produced, but five were sold. In March, under absorption costing $105,000 of fixed manufacturing overhead was included in cost of goods sold ($35,000 for the unit produced in February and sold in March plus $17,500 for each of the four units produced and sold in March), but only $70,000 was recognized as a period expense under variable costing. Hence, the net operating income in March was $35,000 lower under absorption costing than under variable costing. In general, when the units produced exceed unit sales and hence inventories increase, net operating income is higher under absorption costing than under variable costing. This occurs because some of the fixed manufacturing overhead of the period is deferred in inventories under absorption costing. In contrast, when unit sales exceed the units produced and hence inventories decrease, net operating income is lower under absorption costing than under variable costing. This occurs because some of the fixed manufacturing overhead of previous periods is released from inventories under absorption costing. When the units produced and unit sales are equal, no change in inventories occurs and absorption costing and variable costing net operating incomes are the same.2 Variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes can be reconciled by determining how much fixed manufacturing overhead was deferred in, or released from, inventories during the period: Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Deferred in, or Released from, Inventories under Absorption Costing January February Fixed manufacturing overhead in ending inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead in beginning inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead deferred in (released from) inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . March $0 $35,000 $ 0 0 0 35,000 $0 $35,000 $(35,000) In equation form, the fixed manufacturing overhead that is deferred in or released from inventories can be determined as follows: Manufacturing overhead Fixed manufacturing Fixed manufacturing deferred in overhead in overhead in 5 2 (released from) inventory ending inventories beginning inventories The reconciliation would then be reported as shown in Exhibit 6–4: EXHIBIT 6–4 Reconciliation of Variable Costing and Absorption Costing Net Operating Incomes Reconciliation of Variable Costing and Absorption Costing Net Operating Incomes January February March Variable costing net operating income (loss) . . . . . $(25,000) $(25,000) $235,000 Add (deduct) fixed manufacturing overhead deferred in (released from) inventory under 0 35,000 (35,000) absorption costing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Absorption costing net operating income (loss) . . . $(25,000) $ 10,000 $200,000 2 These general statements about the relation between variable costing and absorption costing net operating income assume LIFO is used to value inventories. Even when LIFO is not used, the general statements tend to be correct. Although U.S. GAAP allows LIFO and FIFO inventory flow assumptions, International Financial Reporting Standards do not allow a LIFO inventory flow assumption. Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management Relation between Production and Sales for the Period Effect on Inventories Relation between Absorption and Variable Costing Net Operating Incomes Units produced 5 Units sold No change in inventories Absorption costing net operating income 5 Variable costing net operating income Units produced . Units sold Inventories increase Absorption costing net operating income . Variable costing net operating income* Units produced , Units sold Inventories decrease Absorption costing net operating income , Variable costing net operating income† *Net operating income is higher under absorption costing because fixed manufacturing overhead cost is deferred in inventory under absorption costing as inventories increase. † Net operating income is lower under absorption costing because fixed manufacturing overhead cost is released from inventory under absorption costing as inventories decrease. Again note that the difference between variable costing net operating income and absorption costing net operating income is entirely due to the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that is deferred in, or released from, inventories during the period under absorption costing. Changes in inventories affect absorption costing net operating income—they do not affect variable costing net operating income, providing that variable manufacturing costs per unit are stable. The reasons for differences between variable and absorption costing net operating incomes are summarized in Exhibit 6–5. When the units produced equal the units sold, as in January for Weber Light Aircraft, absorption costing net operating income will equal variable costing net operating income. This occurs because when production equals sales, all of the fixed manufacturing overhead incurred in the current period flows through to the income statement under both methods. For companies that use Lean Production, the number of units produced tends to equal the number of units sold. This occurs because goods are produced in response to customer orders, thereby eliminating finished goods inventories and reducing work in process inventory to almost nothing. So, when a company uses Lean Production differences in variable costing and absorption costing net operating income will largely disappear. When the units produced exceed the units sold, absorption costing net operating income will exceed variable costing net operating income. This occurs because inventories have increased; therefore, under absorption costing some of the fixed manufacturing overhead incurred in the current period is deferred in ending inventories on the balance sheet, whereas under variable costing all of the fixed manufacturing overhead incurred in the current period flows through to the income statement. In contrast, when the units produced are less than the units sold, absorption costing net operating income will be less than variable costing net operating income. This occurs because inventories have decreased; therefore, under absorption costing fixed manufacturing overhead that had been deferred in inventories during a prior period flows through to the current period’s income statement together with all of the fixed manufacturing overhead incurred during the current period. Under variable costing, just the fixed manufacturing overhead of the current period flows through to the income statement. 241 EXHIBIT 6–5 Comparative Income Effects— Absorption and Variable Costing 242 Chapter 6 IN BUSINESS LEAN MANUFACTURING SHRINKS INVENTORIES Conmed, a surgical device maker in Utica, New York, switched to lean manufacturing by replacing its assembly lines with U-shaped production cells. It also started producing only enough units to satisfy customer demand rather than producing as many units as possible and storing them in warehouses. The company calculated that its customers use one of its disposable surgical devices every 90 seconds, so that is precisely how often it produces a new unit. Its assembly area for fluid-injection devices used to occupy 3,300 square feet of space and contained $93,000 worth of parts. Now the company produces its fluid-injection devices in 660 square feet of space while maintaining only $6,000 of parts inventory. When Conmed adopted lean manufacturing, it substantially reduced its finished goods inventories. What impact do you think this initial reduction in inventories may have had on net operating income? Why? Source: Pete Engardio, “Lean and Mean Gets Extreme,” BusinessWeek, March 23 and 30, 2009, pp. 60–62. Advantages of Variable Costing and the Contribution Approach Variable costing, together with the contribution approach, offers appealing advantages for internal reports. This section discusses three of those advantages. Enabling CVP Analysis CVP analysis requires that we break costs down into their fixed and variable components. Because variable costing income statements categorize costs as fixed and variable, it is much easier to use this income statement format to perform CVP analysis than attempting to use the absorption costing format, which mixes together fixed and variable costs. Moreover, absorption costing net operating income may or may not agree with the results of CVP analysis. For example, let’s suppose that you are interested in computing the sales that would be necessary to generate a target profit of $235,000 at Weber Light Aircraft. A CVP analysis based on the January variable costing income statement from Exhibit 6–2 would proceed as follows: Sales (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin ratio (b) 4 (a) . . . . . . . Total fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $100,000 $65,000 65% $90,000 Target profit 1 Fixed expenses Dollar sales to attain target profit 5 _________________________ CM ratio $235,000 1 $90,000 5 _________________ 5 $500,000 0.65 Thus, a CVP analysis based on the January variable costing income statement predicts that the net operating income would be $235,000 when sales are $500,000. And indeed, the net operating income under variable costing is $235,000 when the sales are $500,000 Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management in March. However, the net operating income under absorption costing is not $235,000 in March, even though the sales are $500,000. Why is this? The reason is that under absorption costing, net operating income can be distorted by changes in inventories. In March, inventories decreased, so some of the fixed manufacturing overhead that had been deferred in February’s ending inventories was released to the March income statement, resulting in a net operating income that is $35,000 lower than the $235,000 predicted by CVP analysis. If inventories had increased in March, the opposite would have occurred— the absorption costing net operating income would have been higher than the $235,000 predicted by CVP analysis. Explaining Changes in Net Operating Income The variable costing income statements in Exhibit 6–2 are clear and easy to understand. All other things the same, when sales go up, net operating income goes up. When sales go down, net operating income goes down. When sales are constant, net operating income is constant. The number of units produced does not affect net operating income. Absorption costing income statements can be confusing and are easily misinterpreted. Look again at the absorption costing income statements in Exhibit 6–3; a manager might wonder why net operating income went up from January to February even though sales were exactly the same. Was it a result of lower selling costs, more efficient operations, or was it some other factor? In fact, it was simply because the number of units produced exceeded the number of units sold in February and so some of the fixed manufacturing overhead costs were deferred in inventories in that month. These costs have not gone away—they will eventually flow through to the income statement in a later period when inventories go down. There is no way to tell this from the absorption costing income statements. To avoid mistakes when absorption costing is used, readers of financial statements should be alert to changes in inventory levels. Under absorption costing, if inventories increase, fixed manufacturing overhead costs are deferred in inventories, which in turn increases net operating income. If inventories decrease, fixed manufacturing overhead costs are released from inventories, which in turn decreases net operating income. Thus, when absorption costing is used, fluctuations in net operating income can be caused by changes in inventories as well as changes in sales. Supporting Decision Making The variable costing method correctly identifies the additional variable costs that will be incurred to make one more unit. It also emphasizes the impact of fixed costs on profits. The total amount of fixed manufacturing costs appears explicitly on the income statement, highlighting that the whole amount of fixed manufacturing costs must be covered for the company to be truly profitable. In the Weber Light Aircraft example, the variable costing income statements correctly report that the cost of producing another unit is $25,000 and they explicitly recognize that $70,000 of fixed manufactured overhead must be covered to earn a profit. Under absorption costing, fixed manufacturing overhead costs appear to be variable with respect to the number of units sold, but they are not. For example, in January, the absorption unit product cost at Weber Light Aircraft is $95,000, but the variable portion of this cost is only $25,000. The fixed overhead costs of $70,000 are commingled with variable production costs, thereby obscuring the impact of fixed overhead costs on profits. Because absorption unit product costs are stated on a per unit basis, managers may mistakenly believe that if another unit is produced, it will cost the company $95,000. But of course it would not. The cost of producing another unit would be only $25,000. Misinterpreting absorption unit product costs as variable can lead to many problems, including inappropriate pricing decisions and decisions to drop products that are in fact profitable. 243 244 Chapter 6 Segmented Income Statements and the Contribution Approach LO6–4 Prepare a segmented income statement that differentiates traceable fixed costs from common fixed costs and use it to make decisions. In the remainder of the chapter, we’ll learn how to use the contribution approach to construct income statements for business segments. These segmented income statements are useful for analyzing the profitability of segments, making decisions, and measuring the performance of segment managers. Traceable and Common Fixed Costs and the Segment Margin You need to understand three new terms to prepare segmented income statements using the contribution approach—traceable fixed cost, common fixed cost, and segment margin. A traceable fixed cost of a segment is a fixed cost that is incurred because of the existence of the segment—if the segment had never existed, the fixed cost would not have been incurred; and if the segment were eliminated, the fixed cost would disappear. Examples of traceable fixed costs include the following: • • • The salary of the Fritos product manager at PepsiCo is a traceable fixed cost of the Fritos business segment of PepsiCo. The maintenance cost for the building in which Boeing 747s are assembled is a traceable fixed cost of the 747 business segment of Boeing. The liability insurance at Disney World is a traceable fixed cost of the Disney World business segment of The Walt Disney Corporation. A common fixed cost is a fixed cost that supports the operations of more than one segment, but is not traceable in whole or in part to any one segment. Even if a segment were entirely eliminated, there would be no change in a true common fixed cost. For example: • • • The salary of the CEO of General Motors is a common fixed cost of the various divisions of General Motors. The cost of heating a Safeway or Kroger grocery store is a common fixed cost of the store’s various departments—groceries, produce, bakery, meat, and so forth. The cost of the receptionist’s salary at an office shared by a number of doctors is a common fixed cost of the doctors. The cost is traceable to the office, but not to individual doctors. To prepare a segmented income statement, variable expenses are deducted from sales to yield the contribution margin for the segment. The contribution margin tells us what happens to profits as volume changes—holding a segment’s capacity and fixed costs constant. The contribution margin is especially useful in decisions involving temporary uses of capacity such as special orders. These types of decisions often involve only variable costs and revenues—the two components of contribution margin. The segment margin is obtained by deducting the traceable fixed costs of a segment from the segment’s contribution margin. It represents the margin available after a segment has covered all of its own costs. The segment margin is the best gauge of the long-run profitability of a segment because it includes only those costs that are caused by the segment. If a segment can’t cover its own costs, then that segment probably should be dropped (unless it has important side effects on other segments). Notice, common fixed costs are not allocated to segments. From a decision-making point of view, the segment margin is most useful in major decisions that affect capacity such as dropping a segment. By contrast, as we noted earlier, the contribution margin is most useful in decisions involving short-run changes in volume, such as pricing special orders that involve temporary use of existing capacity. Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management HAS THE INTERNET KILLED CATALOGS? Smith & Hawken, an outdoor-accessories retailer, has experienced growing Internet sales and declining catalog sales. These trends seem consistent with conventional wisdom, which suggests that the Internet will make catalogs obsolete. Yet, Smith & Hawken, like many retailers with growing Internet sales, has no plans to discontinue its catalogs. In fact, the total number of catalogs mailed in the United States by all companies has jumped from 16.6 billion in 2002 to 19.2 billion in 2005. Why? Catalog shoppers and Internet shoppers are not independent customer segments. Catalog shoppers frequently choose to complete their sales transactions online rather than placing telephone orders. This explains why catalogs remain a compelling marketing medium even though catalog sales are declining for many companies. If retailers separately analyze catalog sales and Internet sales, they may discontinue the catalogs segment while overlooking the adverse impact of this decision on Internet segment margins. Source: Louise Lee, “Catalogs, Catalogs, Everywhere,” BusinessWeek, December 4, 2006, pp. 32–34. Identifying Traceable Fixed Costs The distinction between traceable and common fixed costs is crucial in segment reporting because traceable fixed costs are charged to segments and common fixed costs are not. In an actual situation, it is sometimes hard to determine whether a cost should be classified as traceable or common. The general guideline is to treat as traceable costs only those costs that would disappear over time if the segment itself disappeared. For example, if one division within a company were sold or discontinued, it would no longer be necessary to pay that division manager’s salary. Therefore the division manager’s salary would be classified as a traceable fixed cost of the division. On the other hand, the president of the company undoubtedly would continue to be paid even if one of many divisions was dropped. In fact, he or she might even be paid more if dropping the division was a good idea. Therefore, the president’s salary is common to the company’s divisions and should not be charged to them. When assigning costs to segments, the key point is to resist the temptation to allocate costs (such as depreciation of corporate facilities) that are clearly common and that will continue regardless of whether the segment exists or not. Any allocation of common costs to segments reduces the value of the segment margin as a measure of long-run segment profitability and segment performance. Traceable Costs Can Become Common Costs Fixed costs that are traceable to one segment may be a common cost of another segment. For example, United Airlines might want a segmented income statement that shows the segment margin for a particular flight from Chicago to Paris further broken down into first-class, business-class, and economy-class segment margins. The airline must pay a substantial landing fee at Charles DeGaulle airport in Paris. This fixed landing fee is a traceable cost of the flight, but it is a common cost of the first-class, business-class, and economy-class segments. Even if the first-class cabin is empty, the entire landing fee must be paid. So the landing fee is not a traceable cost of the first-class cabin. But on the other hand, paying the fee is necessary in order to have any first-class, business-class, or economy-class passengers. So the landing fee is a common cost of these three classes. 245 IN BUSINESS 246 Chapter 6 IN BUSINESS SEGMENT REPORTING AT THE VILAR PERFORMING ARTS CENTER The Vilar Performing Arts Center is a 535-seat theater located in Beaver Creek, Colorado, that presents an unusually wide variety of performances categorized into six business segments—Family Series, Broadway Series, Theatre/Comedy Series, Dance Series, Classical Series, and Concert Series. The executive director of the Vilar, Kris Sabel, must decide which shows to book, what financial terms to offer to the artists, what contributions are likely from underwriters (i.e., donors), and what prices to charge for tickets. He evaluates the profitability of the segments using segmented income statements that include traceable costs (such as the costs of transporting, lodging, and feeding the artists) and exclude common costs (such as the salaries of Kris and his staff, depreciation on the theater, and general marketing expenses). Data concerning the Classical Series segment for one season appears below: Number of shows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of seats budgeted . . . . . . . . . . Number of seats sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Average seats sold per show . . . . . . . . . 4 863 655 164 Ticket sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underwriting (donors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 46,800 65,000 Total income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Artists fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other traceable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . $111,800 78,870 11,231 Classical Series segment margin . . . . . $ 21,699 Although the Classical Series sold an average of only 164 seats per show, its overall segment margin ($21,699) is positive thanks to $65,000 of underwriting revenues from donors. Had common costs been allocated to the Classical Series, it may have appeared unprofitable and been discontinued—resulting in fewer shows during the season; less diverse programming; disappointment among a small, but dedicated, number of fans; and lower overall income for the Vilar due to the loss of its Classical Series segment margin. Segmented Income Statements—An Example ProphetMax, Inc., is a rapidly growing computer software company. Exhibit 6–6 shows its variable costing income statement for the most recent month. As the company has grown, its senior managers have asked for segmented income statements that could be used to make decisions and evaluate managerial performance. ProphetMax’s controller responded by creating examples of contribution format income statements segmented by the company’s divisions, product lines, and sales channels. She created Exhibit 6–7 to explain that ProphetMax’s profits can be segmented into its two divisions—the Business Products Division and the Consumer Products Division. The Consumer Products Division’s profits can be further segmented into the Clip Art and Computer Games product lines. Finally, the Computer Games product line’s profits (within the Consumer Products Division) can be segmented into the Online and Retail Stores sales channels. Levels of Segmented Income Statements Exhibit 6–8, on page 248, contains the controller’s segmented income statements for the segments depicted in Exhibit 6–7. The contribution format income statement for the entire company appears at the very top of the exhibit under the column labeled Total Company. Notice, the net operating income shown in this column ($13,500) is the same as the net operating income shown in Exhibit 6–6. Immediately to the right of the Total Company column are two columns—one for each of the two divisions. We can see that the Business Products Division’s traceable fixed expenses are $90,000 and the Consumer Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management EXHIBIT 6–6 ProphetMax, Inc. Variable Costing Income Statement ProphetMax, Inc. Variable Costing Income Statement Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses: Variable cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $500,000 180,000 50,000 230,000 270,000 256,500 $ 13,500 EXHIBIT 6–7 ProphetMax, Inc.: Examples of Business Segments ProphetMax, Inc. Divisions Business Products Division Product Lines Sales Channels Consumer Products Division Computer Games Online Sales 247 Clip Art Retail Stores Products Division’s are $81,000. These $171,000 of traceable fixed expenses (as shown in the Total Company column) plus the $85,500 of common fixed expenses not traceable to individual divisions equals ProphetMax’s total fixed expenses ($256,500) as shown in Exhibit 6–6. We can also see that the Business Products Division’s segment margin is $60,000 and the Consumer Products Division’s is $39,000. These segment margins show the company’s divisional managers how much each of their divisions is contributing to the company’s profits. The middle portion of Exhibit 6–8 further segments the Consumer Products Division into its two product lines, Clip Art and Computer Games. The dual nature of some fixed costs can be seen in this portion of the exhibit. Notice, in the top portion of Exhibit 6–8 when segments are defined as divisions, the Consumer Products Division has $81,000 in traceable fixed expenses. However, when we drill down to the product lines (in the 248 EXHIBIT 6–8 ProphetMax, Inc.—Segmented Income Statements in the Contribution Format Chapter 6 Segments Defined as Divisions Divisions Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses: Variable cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . Other variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . Total variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traceable fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divisional segment margin . . . . . . . . . . . . Common fixed expenses not traceable to individual divisions . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total Company Business Products Division Consumer Products Division $500,000 $300,000 $200,000 180,000 50,000 230,000 270,000 171,000 99,000 120,000 30,000 150,000 150,000 90,000 $ 60,000 60,000 20,000 80,000 120,000 81,000 $ 39,000 85,500 $ 13,500 Segments Defined as Product Lines of the Consumer Products Division Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses: Variable cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . Other variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . Total variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traceable fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product-line segment margin . . . . . . . . . . Common fixed expenses not traceable to individual product lines . . . Divisional segment margin . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Line Consumer Products Division Clip Art Computer Games $200,000 $75,000 $125,000 60,000 20,000 80,000 120,000 70,000 50,000 20,000 5,000 25,000 50,000 30,000 $20,000 40,000 15,000 55,000 70,000 40,000 $ 30,000 11,000 $ 39,000 Segments Defined as Sales Channels for One Product Line, Computer Games, of the Consumer Products Division Sales Channels Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses: Variable cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . Other variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . Total variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traceable fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales-channel segment margin . . . . . . . . . Common fixed expenses not traceable to individual sales channels . . . Product-line segment margin . . . . . . . . . . Computer Games Online Sales Retail Stores $125,000 $100,000 $25,000 40,000 15,000 55,000 70,000 25,000 45,000 32,000 5,000 37,000 63,000 15,000 $ 48,000 8,000 10,000 18,000 7,000 10,000 $ (3,000) 15,000 $ 30,000 Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management middle portion of the exhibit), only $70,000 of the $81,000 cost that was traceable to the Consumer Products Division is traceable to the product lines. The other $11,000 becomes a common fixed cost of the two product lines of the Consumer Products Division. Why would $11,000 of traceable fixed costs become a common fixed cost when the division is divided into product lines? The $11,000 is the monthly depreciation expense on a machine that is used to encase products in tamper-proof packages for the consumer market. The depreciation expense is a traceable cost of the Consumer Products Division as a whole, but it is a common cost of the division’s two product lines. Even if one of the product lines were discontinued entirely, the machine would still be used to wrap the remaining products. Therefore, none of the depreciation expense can really be traced to individual products. Conversely, the $70,000 traceable fixed cost can be traced to the individual product lines because it consists of the costs of product-specific advertising. A total of $30,000 was spent on advertising clip art and $40,000 was spent on advertising computer programs. The bottom portion of Exhibit 6–8 further segments the Computer Games product line into two sales channels, Online Sales and Retail Stores. The dual nature of some fixed costs can also be seen in this portion of the exhibit. In the middle portion of Exhibit 6–8 when segments are defined as product lines, the Computer Games product line has $40,000 in traceable fixed expenses. However, when we look at the sales channels in the bottom portion of the exhibit, only $25,000 of the $40,000 that was traceable to Computer Games is traceable to the sales channels. The other $15,000 becomes a common fixed cost of the two sales channels for the Computer Games product line. Segmented Income Statements—Decision Making and Break-Even Analysis Once a company prepares contribution format segmented income statements, it can use those statements to make decisions and perform break-even analysis. Decision Making Let’s refer again to the bottom portion of Exhibit 6–8 to illustrate how segmented income statements support decision making. Notice that the Online Sales segment has a segment margin of $48,000 and the Retail Stores segment has a segment margin of $(3,000). Let’s assume that ProphetMax wants to know the profit impact of discontinuing the sale of computer games through its Retail Stores sales channel. The company believes that online sales of its computer games will increase 10% if it discontinues the Retail Stores sales channel. It also believes that the Business Products Division and Clip Art product line will be unaffected by this decision. How would you compute the profit impact of this decision? The first step is to calculate the profit impact of the Retail Stores sales channel disappearing. If this sales channel disappears, we assume its sales, variable expenses, and traceable fixed expenses would all disappear. The quickest way to summarize these financial impacts is to focus on the Retail Stores’ segment margin. In other words, if the Retail Stores sales channel disappears, then its negative segment margin of $3,000 would also disappear. This would increase ProphetMax’s net operating income by $3,000. The second step is to calculate the profit impact of increasing online sales of computer games by 10%. To perform this calculation, we assume that the Online Sales total traceable fixed expenses ($15,000) remain constant and its contribution margin ratio remains constant at 63% (5 $63,000 4 $100,000). If online sales increase $10,000 (5 $100,000 3 10%), then the Online Sales segment’s contribution margin will increase by $6,300 (5 $10,000 3 63%). The overall profit impact of discontinuing the Retail Stores sales channel can be summarized as follows: Avoidance of the retail segment’s loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Online Sales additional contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . Increase in ProphetMax’s net operating income . . . . . . . . $3,000 6,300 $9,300 249 250 LO6–5 Compute companywide and segment break-even points for a company with traceable fixed costs. Chapter 6 Break-Even Analysis In Chapter 5, we learned how to compute a companywide break-even point for a multiproduct company with no traceable fixed expenses. Now we are going to use the ProphetMax, Inc., data in Exhibit 6–8 to explain how to compute companywide and segment break-even points for a company with traceable fixed expenses. The formula for computing a companywide break-even point is as follows: Dollar sales for company ___________________________________________ Traceable fixed expenses 1 Common fixed expenses 5 to break even Overall CM ratio In the case of ProphetMax, we should begin by reviewing the information in the Total Company column in the top portion of Exhibit 6–8. This column of data indicates that ProphetMax’s total traceable fixed expenses are $171,000 and its total common fixed expenses are $85,500. Furthermore, the company’s overall contribution margin of $270,000 divided by its total sales of $500,000 equals its overall CM ratio of 0.54. Given this information, ProphetMax’s companywide break-even point is computed as follows: Dollar sales for company ___________________________________________ Traceable fixed expenses 1 Common fixed expenses 5 to break even Overall CM ratio $171,000 1 $85,500 5 _________________ 0.54 $256,500 5 ________ 0.54 5 $475,000 It is important to emphasize that this computation assumes a constant sales mix. In other words, in the ProphetMax example, it assumes that 60% of the total sales ($300,000 4 $500,000) will always come from the Business Products Division and 40% of the total sales ($200,000 4 $500,000) will always come from the Consumer Products Division. To compute the break-even point for a business segment, the formula is as follows: Dollar sales for a segment ____________________________ Segment traceable fixed expenses 5 to break even Segment CM ratio In the case of ProphetMax’s Business Products Division, we should begin by reviewing the information in the Business Products Division column in the top portion of Exhibit 6–8. This column of data indicates that the Business Products Division’s traceable fixed expenses are $90,000 and its CM ratio is 0.50 ($150,000 4 $300,000). Given this information, the Business Products Division’s break-even point is computed as follows: Segment traceable fixed expenses Dollar sales for a segment ____________________________ 5 to break even Segment CM ratio $90,000 5 _______ 0.50 5 $180,000 The same calculation can be performed for the Consumer Products Division using data from the Consumer Products Division column in the top portion of Exhibit 6–8. Given that the Consumer Products Division’s traceable fixed expenses are $81,000 and its CM ratio is 0.60 ($120,000 4 $200,000), its break-even point is computed as follows: Segment traceable fixed expenses Dollar sales for a segment ____________________________ 5 to break even Segment CM ratio $81,000 5 _______ 0.60 5 $135,000 Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management Notice that the sum of the segment break-even sales figures of $315,000 ($180,000 1 $135,000) is less than the companywide break-even point of $475,000. This occurs because the segment break-even calculations do not include the company’s common fixed expenses. The exclusion of the company’s common fixed expenses can be verified by preparing income statements based on each segment’s break-even dollar sales as follows: Total Company Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traceable fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . Segment margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . Net operating loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $315,000 144,000 171,000 171,000 0 85,500 $ (85,500) Business Products Division Consumer Products Division $180,000 90,000 90,000 90,000 $ 0 $135,000 54,000 81,000 81,000 $ 0 When each segment achieves its break-even point, the company’s overall net operating loss of $85,500 equals its common fixed expenses of $85,500. This reality can often lead managers astray when making decisions. In an attempt to “cover the company’s common fixed expenses,” managers will often allocate common fixed expenses to business segments when performing break-even calculations and making decisions. This is a mistake! Allocating common fixed expenses to business segments artificially inflates each segment’s break-even point. This may cause managers to erroneously discontinue business segments where the inflated break-even point appears unobtainable. The decision to retain or discontinue a business segment should be based on the sales and expenses that would disappear if the segment were dropped. Because common fixed expenses will persist even if a business segment is dropped, they should not be allocated to business segments when making decisions. Segmented Income Statements—Common Mistakes All of the costs attributable to a segment—and only those costs—should be assigned to the segment. Unfortunately, companies often make mistakes when assigning costs to segments. They omit some costs, inappropriately assign traceable fixed costs, and arbitrarily allocate common fixed costs. Omission of Costs The costs assigned to a segment should include all costs attributable to that segment from the company’s entire value chain. All of these functions, from research and development, through product design, manufacturing, marketing, distribution, and customer service, are required to bring a product or service to the customer and generate revenues. However, only manufacturing costs are included in product costs under absorption costing, which is widely regarded as required for external financial reporting. To avoid having to maintain two costing systems and to provide consistency between internal and external reports, many companies also use absorption costing for their internal reports such as segmented income statements. As a result, such companies omit from their profitability analysis part or all of the “upstream” costs in the value chain, which consist of research and development and product design, and the “downstream” costs, which consist of marketing, distribution, and customer service. Yet these nonmanufacturing costs are just as essential in determining product profitability as are the manufacturing costs. These upstream and downstream costs, which are usually included in selling and 251 252 Chapter 6 administrative expenses on absorption costing income statements, can represent half or more of the total costs of an organization. If either the upstream or downstream costs are omitted in profitability analysis, then the product is undercosted and management may unwittingly develop and maintain products that in the long run result in losses. Inappropriate Methods for Assigning Traceable Costs among Segments In addition to omitting costs, many companies do not correctly handle traceable fixed expenses on segmented income statements. First, they do not trace fixed expenses to segments even when it is feasible to do so. Second, they use inappropriate allocation bases to allocate traceable fixed expenses to segments. Failure to Trace Costs Directly Costs that can be traced directly to a specific segment should be charged directly to that segment and should not be allocated to other segments. For example, the rent for a branch office of an insurance company should be charged directly to the branch office rather than included in a companywide overhead pool and then spread throughout the company. Inappropriate Allocation Base Some companies use arbitrary allocation bases to allocate costs to segments. For example, some companies allocate selling and administrative expenses on the basis of sales revenues. Thus, if a segment generates 20% of total company sales, it would be allocated 20% of the company’s selling and administrative expenses as its “fair share.” This same basic procedure is followed if cost of goods sold or some other measure is used as the allocation base. Costs should be allocated to segments for internal decision-making purposes only when the allocation base actually drives the cost being allocated (or is very highly correlated with the real cost driver). For example, sales should be used to allocate selling and administrative expenses only if a 10% increase in sales will result in a 10% increase in selling and administrative expenses. To the extent that selling and administrative expenses are not driven by sales volume, these expenses will be improperly allocated—with a disproportionately high percentage of the selling and administrative expenses assigned to the segments with the largest sales. Arbitrarily Dividing Common Costs among Segments The third business practice that leads to distorted segment costs is the practice of assigning nontraceable costs to segments. For example, some companies allocate the common costs of the corporate headquarters building to products on segment reports. However, in a multiproduct company, no single product is likely to be responsible for any significant amount of this cost. Even if a product were eliminated entirely, there would usually be no significant effect on any of the costs of the corporate headquarters building. In short, there is no cause-and-effect relation between the cost of the corporate headquarters building and the existence of any one product. As a consequence, any allocation of the cost of the corporate headquarters building to the products must be arbitrary. Common costs like the costs of the corporate headquarters building are necessary, of course, to have a functioning organization. The practice of arbitrarily allocating common costs to segments is often justified on the grounds that “someone” has to “cover the common costs.” While it is undeniably true that a company must cover its common costs to earn a profit, arbitrarily allocating common costs to segments does not ensure that this will happen. In fact, adding a share of common costs to the real costs of a segment may make an otherwise profitable segment appear to be unprofitable. If a manager eliminates the apparently unprofitable segment, the real traceable costs of the segment will be saved, but its revenues will be lost. And what happens to the common fixed costs that were allocated to the segment? They don’t disappear; they are reallocated to the remaining segments of the company. That makes all of the remaining segments appear to be less profitable—possibly Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management resulting in dropping other segments. The net effect will be to reduce the overall profits of the company and make it even more difficult to “cover the common costs.” Additionally, common fixed costs are not manageable by the manager to whom they are arbitrarily allocated; they are the responsibility of higher-level managers. When common fixed costs are allocated to managers, they are held responsible for those costs even though they cannot control them. Income Statements—An External Reporting Perspective Companywide Income Statements Practically speaking, absorption costing is required for external reports according to U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP).3 Furthermore, International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) explicitly require companies to use absorption costing. Probably because of the cost and possible confusion of maintaining two separate costing systems—one for external reporting and one for internal reporting—most companies use absorption costing for their external and internal reports. With all of the advantages of the contribution approach, you may wonder why the absorption approach is used at all. While the answer is partly due to adhering to tradition, absorption costing is also attractive to many accountants and managers because they believe it better matches costs with revenues. Advocates of absorption costing argue that all manufacturing costs must be assigned to products in order to properly match the costs of producing units of product with their revenues when they are sold. The fixed costs of depreciation, taxes, insurance, supervisory salaries, and so on, are just as essential to manufacturing products as are the variable costs. Advocates of variable costing argue that fixed manufacturing costs are not really the costs of any particular unit of product. These costs are incurred to have the capacity to make products during a particular period and will be incurred even if nothing is made during the period. Moreover, whether a unit is made or not, the fixed manufacturing costs will be exactly the same. Therefore, variable costing advocates argue that fixed manufacturing costs are not part of the costs of producing a particular unit of product, and thus, the matching principle dictates that fixed manufacturing costs should be charged to the current period. Segmented Financial Information U.S. GAAP and IFRS require that publicly traded companies include segmented financial and other data in their annual reports and that the segmented reports prepared for external users must use the same methods and definitions that the companies use in internal segmented reports that are prepared to aid in making operating decisions. This is a very unusual stipulation because companies are not ordinarily required to report the same data to external users that are used for internal decision-making purposes. This requirement creates incentives for publicly traded companies to avoid using the contribution format for internal segmented reports. Segmented contribution format income statements contain vital information that companies are often very reluctant to release to the public (and hence competitors). In addition, this requirement creates problems in reconciling internal and external reports. 3 The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) has created a single source of authoritative nongovernmental U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) called the FASB Accounting Standards Codification (FASB codification). Although the FASB codification does not explicitly disallow variable costing, it does explicitly prohibit companies from excluding all manufacturing overhead costs from product costs. It also provides an in-depth discussion of fixed overhead allocation to products, thereby implying that absorption costing is required for external reports. Although some companies expense significant elements of fixed manufacturing costs on their external reports, practically speaking, U.S. GAAP requires absorption costing for external reports. 253 254 Chapter 6 IN BUSINESS 3M REPORTS SEGMENTED PROFITABILITY TO SHAREHOLDERS In 2009, 3M Company reported segmented profitability to its shareholders by product lines and geographic areas. A portion of the company’s segmented information is summarized below (all numbers are in millions): Net Sales Net Operating Income Product Lines: Industrial and transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Health care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consumer and office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety, security, and protection services . . . . . . . . . Display and graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electro and communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $7,116 $4,294 $3,471 $3,180 $3,132 $2,276 $1,238 $1,350 $748 $745 $590 $322 Geographic Areas: United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Asia Pacific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Europe, Middle East and Africa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Latin America and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $8,509 $6,120 $5,972 $2,516 $1,640 $1,528 $1,003 $631 3M’s annual report does not report the gross margins or contribution margins for its business segments. Why do you think this is the case? Source: 3M Company, 2009 Annual Report. Summary Variable and absorption costing are alternative methods of determining unit product costs. Under variable costing, only those manufacturing costs that vary with output are treated as product costs. This includes direct materials, variable overhead, and ordinarily direct labor. Fixed manufacturing overhead is treated as a period cost and it is expensed on the income statement as incurred. By contrast, absorption costing treats fixed manufacturing overhead as a product cost, along with direct materials, direct labor, and variable overhead. Under both costing methods, selling and administrative expenses are treated as period costs and they are expensed on the income statement as incurred. Because absorption costing treats fixed manufacturing overhead as a product cost, a portion of fixed manufacturing overhead is assigned to each unit as it is produced. If units of product are unsold at the end of a period, then the fixed manufacturing overhead cost attached to those units is carried with them into the inventory account and deferred to a future period. When these units are later sold, the fixed manufacturing overhead cost attached to them is released from the inventory account and charged against income as part of cost of goods sold. Thus, under absorption costing, it is possible to defer a portion of the fixed manufacturing overhead cost from one period to a future period through the inventory account. Unfortunately, this shifting of fixed manufacturing overhead cost between periods can cause erratic fluctuations in net operating income and can result in confusion and unwise decisions. To guard against mistakes when they interpret income statement data, managers should be alert to changes in inventory levels or unit product costs during the period. Segmented income statements provide information for evaluating the profitability and performance of divisions, product lines, sales territories, and other segments of a company. Under the contribution approach, variable costs and fixed costs are clearly distinguished from each other and only those costs that are traceable to a segment are assigned to the segment. A cost is considered Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management traceable to a segment only if the cost is caused by the segment and could be avoided by eliminating the segment. Fixed common costs are not allocated to segments. The segment margin consists of revenues, less variable expenses, less traceable fixed expenses of the segment. The dollar sales required for a segment to break even is computed by dividing the segment’s traceable fixed expenses by its contribution margin ratio. A company’s common fixed expenses should not be allocated to segments when performing break-even calculations because they will not change in response to segment-level decisions. Review Problem 1: Contrasting Variable and Absorption Costing Dexter Corporation produces and sells a single product, a wooden hand loom for weaving small items such as scarves. Selected cost and operating data relating to the product for two years are given below: Selling price per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing costs: Variable per unit produced: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead per year . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses: Variable per unit sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed per year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units in beginning inventory . . . . . . . . . . . Units produced during the year . . . . . . . . Units sold during the year . . . . . . . . . . . . Units in ending inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . $50 $11 $6 $3 $120,000 $4 $70,000 Year 1 Year 2 0 10,000 8,000 2,000 2,000 6,000 8,000 0 Required: 1. 2. 3. Assume the company uses absorption costing. a. Compute the unit product cost in each year. b. Prepare an income statement for each year. Assume the company uses variable costing. a. Compute the unit product cost in each year. b. Prepare an income statement for each year. Reconcile the variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes. Solution to Review Problem 1 1. a. Under absorption costing, all manufacturing costs, variable and fixed, are included in unit product costs: Year 1 Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead ($120,000 4 10,000 units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . ($120,000 4 6,000 units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $11 6 3 Absorption costing unit product cost . . . . . . . $32 Year 2 $11 6 3 12 20 $40 255 256 Chapter 6 b. 2. The absorption costing income statements follow: Year 1 Year 2 Sales (8,000 units 3 $50 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold (8,000 units 3 $32 per unit); (2,000 units 3 $32 per unit) 1 (6,000 units 3 $40 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $400,000 $400,000 256,000 304,000 Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses (8,000 units 3 $4 per unit 1 $70,000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,000 96,000 102,000 102,000 Net operating income (loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 42,000 $ (6,000) a. b. Under variable costing, only the variable manufacturing costs are included in unit product costs: Year 1 Year 2 Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . $11 6 3 $11 6 3 Variable costing unit product cost . . . . . . . . . $20 $20 The variable costing income statements follow: Year 1 Sales (8,000 units 3 $50 per unit) . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses: Variable cost of goods sold (8,000 units 3 $20 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative expenses (8,000 units 3 $4 per unit) . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses: Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Year 2 $400,000 $160,000 32,000 $400,000 $160,000 192,000 32,000 208,000 120,000 70,000 192,000 208,000 120,000 190,000 70,000 $ 18,000 190,000 $ 18,000 The reconciliation of the variable and absorption costing net operating incomes follows: Year 1 Year 2 Fixed manufacturing overhead in ending inventories . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead in beginning inventories . . . $24,000 0 $ 0 24,000 Fixed manufacturing overhead deferred in (released from) inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $24,000 $(24,000) Year 1 Year 2 Variable costing net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add fixed manufacturing overhead costs deferred in inventory under absorption costing (2,000 units 3 $12 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deduct fixed manufacturing overhead costs released from inventory under absorption costing (2,000 units 3 $12 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $18,000 $18,000 Absorption costing net operating income (loss) . . . . . . . . . . . $42,000 24,000 (24,000) $ (6,000) Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management Review Problem 2: Segmented Income Statements The business staff of the law firm Frampton, Davis & Smythe has constructed the following report that breaks down the firm’s overall results for last month into two business segments—family law and commercial law: Company Total Family Law Commercial Law Revenues from clients . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,000,000 220,000 $400,000 100,000 $600,000 120,000 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . Traceable fixed expenses . . . . . . . 780,000 670,000 300,000 280,000 480,000 390,000 Segment margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common fixed expenses . . . . . . 110,000 60,000 20,000 24,000 90,000 36,000 50,000 $ (4,000) $ 54,000 Net operating income (loss) . . . . . $ However, this report is not quite correct. The common fixed expenses such as the managing partner’s salary, general administrative expenses, and general firm advertising have been allocated to the two segments based on revenues from clients. Required: 1. 2. 3. Redo the segment report, eliminating the allocation of common fixed expenses. Would the firm be better off financially if the family law segment were dropped? (Note: Many of the firm’s commercial law clients also use the firm for their family law requirements such as drawing up wills.) The firm’s advertising agency has proposed an ad campaign targeted at boosting the revenues of the family law segment. The ad campaign would cost $20,000, and the advertising agency claims that it would increase family law revenues by $100,000. The managing partner of Frampton, Davis & Smythe believes this increase in business could be accommodated without any increase in fixed expenses. Estimate the effect this ad campaign would have on the family law segment margin and on the firm’s overall net operating income. Compute the companywide break-even point in dollar sales and the dollar sales required for each business segment to break even. Solution to Review Problem 2 1. The corrected segmented income statement appears below: Company Total Family Law Commercial Law Revenues from clients . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,000,000 220,000 $400,000 100,000 $600,000 120,000 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . Traceable fixed expenses . . . . . . . 780,000 670,000 300,000 280,000 480,000 390,000 Segment margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110,000 $ 20,000 $ 90,000 Common fixed expenses . . . . . . 60,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . $ 50,000 No, the firm would not be financially better off if the family law practice were dropped. The family law segment is covering all of its own costs and is contributing $20,000 per month to covering the common fixed expenses of the firm. While the segment margin for family law 257 258 Chapter 6 2. is much lower than for commercial law, it is still profitable. Moreover, family law may be a service that the firm must provide to its commercial clients in order to remain competitive. The ad campaign would increase the family law segment margin by $55,000 as follows: Increased revenues from clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Family law contribution margin ratio ($300,000 4 $400,000) . . . . . . . $100,000 3 75% Increased contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Less cost of the ad campaign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 75,000 20,000 Increased segment margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 55,000 Because there would be no increase in fixed expenses (including common fixed expenses), the increase in overall net operating income is also $55,000. 3. The companywide break-even point is computed as follows: Dollar sales for company ___________________________________________ Traceable fixed expenses 1 Common fixed expenses 5 to break even Overall CM ratio $670,000 1 $60,000 5 _________________ 0.78 $730,000 5 ________ 0.78 5 $935,897 (rounded) The break-even point for the family law segment is computed as follows: Segment traceable fixed expenses Dollar sales for a segment ____________________________ 5 to break even Segment CM ratio $280,000 5 ________ 0.75 5 $373,333 (rounded) The break-even point for the commercial law segment is computed as follows: Segment traceable fixed expenses Dollar sales for a segment ____________________________ 5 to break even Segment CM ratio $390,000 5 ________ 0.80 5 $487,500 Glossary Absorption costing A costing method that includes all manufacturing costs—direct materials, direct labor, and both variable and fixed manufacturing overhead—in unit product costs. (p. 234) Common fixed cost A fixed cost that supports more than one business segment, but is not traceable in whole or in part to any one of the business segments. (p. 244) Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management 259 Segment Any part or activity of an organization about which managers seek cost, revenue, or profit data. (p. 234) Segment margin A segment’s contribution margin less its traceable fixed costs. It represents the margin available after a segment has covered all of its own traceable costs. (p. 244) Traceable fixed cost A fixed cost that is incurred because of the existence of a particular business segment and that would be eliminated if the segment were eliminated. (p. 244) Variable costing A costing method that includes only variable manufacturing costs—direct materials, direct labor, and variable manufacturing overhead—in unit product costs. (p. 234) Questions 6–1 6–2 6–3 6–4 6–5 6–6 6–7 6–8 6–9 6–10 6–11 6–12 6–13 6–14 6–15 6–16 6–17 What is the basic difference between absorption costing and variable costing? Are selling and administrative expenses treated as product costs or as period costs under variable costing? Explain how fixed manufacturing overhead costs are shifted from one period to another under absorption costing. What are the arguments in favor of treating fixed manufacturing overhead costs as product costs? What are the arguments in favor of treating fixed manufacturing overhead costs as period costs? If the units produced and unit sales are equal, which method would you expect to show the higher net operating income, variable costing or absorption costing? Why? If the units produced exceed unit sales, which method would you expect to show the higher net operating income, variable costing or absorption costing? Why? If fixed manufacturing overhead costs are released from inventory under absorption costing, what does this tell you about the level of production in relation to the level of sales? Under absorption costing, how is it possible to increase net operating income without increasing sales? How does Lean Production reduce or eliminate the difference in reported net operating income between absorption and variable costing? What is a segment of an organization? Give several examples of segments. What costs are assigned to a segment under the contribution approach? Distinguish between a traceable cost and a common cost. Give several examples of each. Explain how the segment margin differs from the contribution margin. Why aren’t common costs allocated to segments under the contribution approach? How is it possible for a cost that is traceable to a segment to become a common cost if the segment is divided into further segments? Should a company allocate its common fixed expenses to business segments when computing the break-even point for those segments? Why? Multiple-choice questions are provided on the text website at www.mhhe.com/garrison15e. Applying Excel Available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. The Excel worksheet form that appears on the next page is to be used to recreate portions of Review Problem 1 on pages 255–256. Download the workbook containing this form from the Online Learning Center at www.mhhe.com/garrison15e. On the website you will also receive instructions about how to use this worksheet form. LO6–2 260 Chapter 6 You should proceed to the requirements below only after completing your worksheet. The LIFO inventory flow assumption is used throughout this problem. Required: 1. Check your worksheet by changing the units sold in the Data to 6,000 for Year 2. The cost of goods sold under absorption costing for Year 2 should now be $240,000. If it isn’t, check cell C41. The formula in this cell should be 5IF(C26,C27,C26*C361(C27-C26)*B36,C27*C36). If your worksheet is operating properly, the net operating income under both absorption costing and variable costing should be $(34,000) for Year 2. That is, the loss in Year 2 is $34,000 under both systems. If you do not get these answers, find the errors in your worksheet and correct them. Why is the absorption costing net operating income now equal to the variable costing net operating income in Year 2? Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management 2. 261 Enter the following data from a different company into your worksheet: Data Selling price per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing costs: Variable per unit produced: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead per year . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses: Variable per unit sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed per year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units in beginning inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units produced during the year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units sold during the year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. $75 $12 $5 $7 $150,000 $1 $60,000 Year 1 Year 2 0 15,000 12,000 10,000 12,000 Is the net operating income under variable costing different in Year 1 and Year 2? Why or why not? Explain the relation between the net operating income under absorption costing and variable costing in Year 1. Explain the relation between the net operating income under absorption costing and variable costing in Year 2. At the end of Year 1, the company’s board of directors set a target for Year 2 of net operating income of $500,000 under absorption costing. If this target is met, a hefty bonus would be paid to the CEO of the company. Keeping everything else the same from part (2) above, change the units produced in Year 2 to 50,000 units. Would this change result in a bonus being paid to the CEO? Do you think this change would be in the best interests of the company? What is likely to happen in Year 3 to the absorption costing net operating income if sales remain constant at 12,000 units per year? The Foundational 15 Available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. Diego Company manufactures one product that is sold for $80 per unit in two geographic regions— the East and West regions. The following information pertains to the company’s first year of operations in which it produced 40,000 units and sold 35,000 units. Variable costs per unit: Manufacturing: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed costs per year: Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . $24 $14 $2 $4 $800,000 $496,000 The company sold 25,000 units in the East region and 10,000 units in the West region. It determined that $250,000 of its fixed selling and administrative expenses is traceable to the West region, $150,000 is traceable to the East region, and the remaining $96,000 is a common fixed cost. The company will continue to incur the total amount of its fixed manufacturing overhead costs as long as it continues to produce any amount of its only product. LO6–1, LO6–2, LO6–3, LO6–4 262 Chapter 6 Required: Answer each question independently based on the original data unless instructed otherwise. You do not need to prepare a segmented income statement until question 13. 1. What is the unit product cost under variable costing? 2. What is the unit product cost under absorption costing? 3. What is the company’s total contribution margin under variable costing? 4. What is the company’s net operating income under variable costing? 5. What is the company’s total gross margin under absorption costing? 6. What is the company’s net operating income under absorption costing? 7. What is the amount of the difference between the variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes? What is the cause of this difference? 8. What is the company’s break-even point in unit sales? Is it above or below the actual sales volume? Compare the break-even sales volume to your answer for question 6 and comment. 9. If the sales volumes in the East and West regions had been reversed, what would be the company’s overall break-even point in unit sales? 10. What would have been the company’s variable costing net operating income if it had produced and sold 35,000 units? You do not need to perform any calculations to answer this question. 11. What would have been the company’s absorption costing net operating income if it had produced and sold 35,000 units? You do not need to perform any calculations to answer this question. 12. If the company produces 5,000 fewer units than it sells in its second year of operations, will absorption costing net operating income be higher or lower than variable costing net operating income in Year 2? Why? No calculations are necessary. 13. Prepare a contribution format segmented income statement that includes a Total column and columns for the East and West regions. 14. Diego is considering eliminating the West region because an internally generated report suggests the region’s total gross margin in the first year of operations was $50,000 less than its traceable fixed selling and administrative expenses. Diego believes that if it drops the West region, the East region’s sales will grow by 5% in Year 2. Using the contribution approach for analyzing segment profitability and assuming all else remains constant in Year 2, what would be the profit impact of dropping the West region in Year 2? 15. Assume the West region invests $30,000 in a new advertising campaign in Year 2 that increases its unit sales by 20%. If all else remains constant, what would be the profit impact of pursuing the advertising campaign? Exercises All applicable exercises are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. EXERCISE 6–1 Variable and Absorption Costing Unit Product Costs [LO6–1] Ida Sidha Karya Company is a family-owned company located in the village of Gianyar on the island of Bali in Indonesia. The company produces a handcrafted Balinese musical instrument called a gamelan that is similar to a xylophone. The gamelans are sold for $850. Selected data for the company’s operations last year follow: Units in beginning inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units produced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units in ending inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable costs per unit: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed costs: Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 250 225 25 $100 $320 $40 $20 $60,000 $20,000 Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management Required: 1. 2. Assume that the company uses absorption costing. Compute the unit product cost for one gamelan. Assume that the company uses variable costing. Compute the unit product cost for one gamelan. EXERCISE 6–2 Variable Costing Income Statement; Explanation of Difference in Net Operating Income [LO6–2] Refer to the data in Exercise 6–1 for Ida Sidha Karya Company. The absorption costing income statement prepared by the company’s accountant for last year appears below: Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $191,250 157,500 Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,750 24,500 $ Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,250 Required: 1. 2. Determine how much of the ending inventory consists of fixed manufacturing overhead cost deferred in inventory to the next period. Prepare an income statement for the year using variable costing. Explain the difference in net operating income between the two costing methods. EXERCISE 6–3 Reconciliation of Absorption and Variable Costing Net Operating Incomes [LO6–3] Jorgansen Lighting, Inc., manufactures heavy-duty street lighting systems for municipalities. The company uses variable costing for internal management reports and absorption costing for external reports to shareholders, creditors, and the government. The company has provided the following data: Inventories: Beginning (units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending (units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable costing net operating income . . . . . . Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 200 170 $1,080,400 170 180 $1,032,400 180 220 $996,400 The company’s fixed manufacturing overhead per unit was constant at $560 for all three years. Required: 1. 2. Determine each year’s absorption costing net operating income. Present your answer in the form of a reconciliation report. In Year 4, the company’s variable costing net operating income was $984,400 and its absorption costing net operating income was $1,012,400. Did inventories increase or decrease during Year 4? How much fixed manufacturing overhead cost was deferred or released from inventory during Year 4? EXERCISE 6–4 Basic Segmented Income Statement [LO6–4] Royal Lawncare Company produces and sells two packaged products, Weedban and Greengrow. Revenue and cost information relating to the products follow: Product Selling price per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traceable fixed expenses per year . . . . . . . . . . . Weedban Greengrow $6.00 $2.40 $45,000 $7.50 $5.25 $21,000 Common fixed expenses in the company total $33,000 annually. Last year the company produced and sold 15,000 units of Weedban and 28,000 units of Greengrow. Required: Prepare a contribution format income statement segmented by product lines. 263 264 Chapter 6 EXERCISE 6–5 Companywide and Segment Break-Even Analysis [LO6–5] Piedmont Company segments its business into two regions—North and South. The company prepared the contribution format segmented income statement shown below: Total Company North South Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $600,000 360,000 $400,000 280,000 $200,000 80,000 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traceable fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . 240,000 120,000 120,000 60,000 120,000 60,000 Segment margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . 120,000 50,000 $ 60,000 $ 60,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 70,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. Compute the companywide break-even point in dollar sales. Compute the break-even point in dollar sales for the North region. Compute the break-even point in dollar sales for the South region. EXERCISE 6–6 Variable and Absorption Costing Unit Product Costs and Income Statements [LO6–1, LO6–2] Lynch Company manufactures and sells a single product. The following costs were incurred during the company’s first year of operations: Variable costs per unit: Manufacturing: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $6 $9 $3 $4 Fixed costs per year: Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $300,000 $190,000 During the year, the company produced 25,000 units and sold 20,000 units. The selling price of the company’s product is $50 per unit. Required: 1. 2. Assume that the company uses absorption costing: a. Compute the unit product cost. b. Prepare an income statement for the year. Assume that the company uses variable costing: a. Compute the unit product cost. b. Prepare an income statement for the year. EXERCISE 6–7 Segmented Income Statement [LO6–4] Shannon Company segments its income statement into its North and South Divisions. The company’s overall sales, contribution margin ratio, and net operating income are $500,000, 46%, and $10,000, respectively. The North Division’s contribution margin and contribution margin ratio are $150,000 and 50%, respectively. The South Division’s segment margin is $30,000. The company has $90,000 of common fixed expenses that cannot be traced to either division. Required: Prepare an income statement for Shannon Company that uses the contribution format and is segmented by divisions. In addition, for the company as a whole and for each segment, show each item on the segmented income statements as a percent of sales. EXERCISE 6–8 Deducing Changes in Inventories [LO6–3] Parker Products Inc, a manufacturer, reported $123 million in sales and a loss of $18 million in its annual report to shareholders. According to a CVP analysis prepared for management, the company’s break-even point is $115 million in sales. Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management Required: Assuming that the CVP analysis is correct, is it likely that the company’s inventory level increased, decreased, or remained unchanged during the year? Explain. EXERCISE 6–9 Variable and Absorption Costing Unit Product Costs and Income Statements [LO6–1, LO6–2, LO6–3] Walsh Company manufactures and sells one product. The following information pertains to each of the company’s first two years of operations: Variable costs per unit: Manufacturing: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed costs per year: Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . $25 $15 $5 $2 $250,000 $80,000 During its first year of operations, Walsh produced 50,000 units and sold 40,000 units. During its second year of operations, it produced 40,000 units and sold 50,000 units. The selling price of the company’s product is $60 per unit. Required: 1. 2. 3. Assume the company uses variable costing: a. Compute the unit product cost for Year 1 and Year 2. b. Prepare an income statement for Year 1 and Year 2. Assume the company uses absorption costing: a. Compute the unit product cost for Year 1 and Year 2. b. Prepare an income statement for Year 1 and Year 2. Explain the difference between variable costing and absorption costing net operating income in Year 1. Also, explain why the two net operating income figures differ in Year 2. EXERCISE 6–10 Companywide and Segment Break-Even Analysis [LO6–5] Crossfire Company segments its business into two regions—East and West. The company prepared the contribution format segmented income statement shown below: Total Company East West Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $900,000 675,000 $600,000 480,000 $300,000 195,000 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traceable fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . 225,000 141,000 120,000 50,000 105,000 91,000 Segment margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . 84,000 59,000 $ 70,000 $ 14,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 25,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Compute the companywide break-even point dollar in sales. Compute the break-even point in dollar sales for the East region. Compute the break-even point in dollar sales for the West region. Prepare a new segmented income statement based on the break-even dollar sales that you computed in requirements 2 and 3. Use the same format as shown above. What is Crossfire’s net operating income in your new segmented income statement? Do you think that Crossfire should allocate its common fixed expenses to the East and West regions when computing the break-even points for each region? Why? 265 266 Chapter 6 EXERCISE 6–11 Segmented Income Statement [LO6–4] Wingate Company, a wholesale distributor of electronic equipment, has been experiencing losses for some time, as shown by its most recent monthly contribution format income statement, which follows: Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,000,000 390,000 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610,000 625,000 Net operating income (loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (15,000) In an effort to isolate the problem, the president has asked for an income statement segmented by division. Accordingly, the Accounting Department has developed the following information: Division Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses as a percentage of sales . . . . . . . . . . Traceable fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . East Central West $250,000 52% $160,000 $400,000 30% $200,000 $350,000 40% $175,000 Required: 1. 2. Prepare a contribution format income statement segmented by divisions, as desired by the president. As a result of a marketing study, the president believes that sales in the West Division could be increased by 20% if monthly advertising in that division were increased by $15,000. Would you recommend the increased advertising? Show computations to support your answer. EXERCISE 6–12 Variable Costing Income Statement; Reconciliation [LO6–2, LO6–3] Whitman Company has just completed its first year of operations. The company’s absorption costing income statement for the year appears below: Whitman Company Income Statement Sales (35,000 units 3 $25 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold (35,000 units 3 $16 per unit) . . . . . . . . . $875,000 560,000 Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315,000 280,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 35,000 The company’s selling and administrative expenses consist of $210,000 per year in fixed expenses and $2 per unit sold in variable expenses. The $16 per unit product cost given above is computed as follows: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead ($160,000 4 40,000 units) . . . . . . . $ 5 6 1 4 Absorption costing unit product cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $16 Required: 1. 2. Redo the company’s income statement in the contribution format using variable costing. Reconcile any difference between the net operating income on your variable costing income statement and the net operating income on the absorption costing income statement above. Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management EXERCISE 6–13 Inferring Costing Method; Unit Product Cost [LO6–1] Sierra Company incurs the following costs to produce and sell a single product. Variable costs per unit: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . $9 $10 $5 $3 Fixed costs per year: Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . $150,000 $400,000 During the last year, 25,000 units were produced and 22,000 units were sold. The Finished Goods inventory account at the end of the year shows a balance of $72,000 for the 3,000 unsold units. Required: 1. 2. Is the company using absorption costing or variable costing to cost units in the Finished Goods inventory account? Show computations to support your answer. Assume that the company wishes to prepare financial statements for the year to issue to its stockholders. a. Is the $72,000 figure for Finished Goods inventory the correct amount to use on these statements for external reporting purposes? Explain. b. At what dollar amount should the 3,000 units be carried in the inventory for external reporting purposes? EXERCISE 6–14 Variable Costing Unit Product Cost and Income Statement; Break-Even [LO6–1, LO6–2] Chuck Wagon Grills, Inc., makes a single product—a handmade specialty barbecue grill that it sells for $210. Data for last year’s operations follow: Units in beginning inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units produced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units in ending inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 20,000 19,000 1,000 Variable costs per unit: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 50 80 20 10 Total variable cost per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $160 Fixed costs: Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $700,000 285,000 Total fixed costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $985,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. Assume that the company uses variable costing. Compute the unit product cost for one barbecue grill. Assume that the company uses variable costing. Prepare a contribution format income statement for the year. What is the company’s break-even point in terms of the number of barbecue grills sold? EXERCISE 6–15 Absorption Costing Unit Product Cost and Income Statement [LO6–1, LO6–2] Refer to the data in Exercise 6–14 for Chuck Wagon Grills. Assume in this exercise that the company uses absorption costing. Required: 1. 2. Compute the unit product cost for one barbecue grill. Prepare an income statement. 267 268 Chapter 6 EXERCISE 6–16 Working with a Segmented Income Statement; Break-Even Analysis [LO6–4, LO6–5] Raner, Harris, & Chan is a consulting firm that specializes in information systems for medical and dental clinics. The firm has two offices—one in Chicago and one in Minneapolis. The firm classifies the direct costs of consulting jobs as variable costs. A contribution format segmented income statement for the company’s most recent year is given below: Office Total Company Chicago Minneapolis Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $450,000 225,000 100% 50% $150,000 45,000 100% 30% $300,000 180,000 100% 60% Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traceable fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225,000 126,000 50% 28% 105,000 78,000 70% 52% 120,000 48,000 40% 16% Office segment margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common fixed expenses not traceable to offices . . . . . . . 99,000 63,000 22% 14% $ 27,000 18% $ 72,000 24% Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 36,000 8% Required: 1. 2. 3. Compute the companywide break-even point in dollar sales. Also, compute the break-even point for the Chicago office and for the Minneapolis office. Is the companywide breakeven point greater than, less than, or equal to the sum of the Chicago and Minneapolis break-even points? Why? By how much would the company’s net operating income increase if Minneapolis increased its sales by $75,000 per year? Assume no change in cost behavior patterns. Refer to the original data. Assume that sales in Chicago increase by $50,000 next year and that sales in Minneapolis remain unchanged. Assume no change in fixed costs. a. Prepare a new segmented income statement for the company using the above format. Show both amounts and percentages. b. Observe from the income statement you have prepared that the contribution margin ratio for Chicago has remained unchanged at 70% (the same as in the above data) but that the segment margin ratio has changed. How do you explain the change in the segment margin ratio? EXERCISE 6–17 Working with a Segmented Income Statement [LO6–4] Refer to the data in Exercise 6–16. Assume that Minneapolis’ sales by major market are: Market Minneapolis Medical Dental Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $300,000 180,000 100% 60% $200,000 128,000 100% 64% $100,000 52,000 100% 52% Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traceable fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,000 33,000 40% 11% 72,000 12,000 36% 6% 48,000 21,000 48% 21% Market segment margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common fixed expenses not traceable to markets . . . . . . . 87,000 15,000 29% 5% $ 60,000 30% $ 27,000 27% Office segment margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 72,000 24% The company would like to initiate an intensive advertising campaign in one of the two market segments during the next month. The campaign would cost $5,000. Marketing studies indicate that such a campaign would increase sales in the Medical market by $40,000 or increase sales in the Dental market by $35,000. Required: 1. 2. In which of the markets would you recommend that the company focus its advertising campaign? Show computations to support your answer. In Exercise 6–16, Minneapolis shows $48,000 in traceable fixed expenses. What happened to the $48,000 in this exercise? Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management 269 Problems All applicable problems are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. PROBLEM 6–18 Variable and Absorption Costing Unit Product Costs and Income Statements [LO6–1, LO6–2] Haas Company manufactures and sells one product. The following information pertains to each of the company’s first three years of operations: Variable costs per unit: Manufacturing: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed costs per year: Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . $20 $12 $4 $2 $960,000 $240,000 During its first year of operations, Haas produced 60,000 units and sold 60,000 units. During its second year of operations, it produced 75,000 units and sold 50,000 units. In its third year, Haas produced 40,000 units and sold 65,000 units. The selling price of the company’s product is $58 per unit. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Compute the company’s break-even point in units sold. Assume the company uses variable costing: a. Compute the unit product cost for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. b. Prepare an income statement for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. Assume the company uses absorption costing: a. Compute the unit product cost for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. b. Prepare an income statement for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. Compare the net operating income figures that you computed in requirements 2 and 3 to the break-even point that you computed in requirement 1. Which net operating income figures seem counterintuitive? Why? PROBLEM 6–19 Variable Costing Income Statement; Reconciliation [LO6–2, LO6–3] During Heaton Company’s first two years of operations, the company reported absorption costing net operating income as follows: Year 1 Year 2 Sales (@ $25 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold (@ $18 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,000,000 720,000 $1,250,000 900,000 Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280,000 210,000 350,000 230,000 70,000 $ 120,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ *$2 per unit variable; $130,000 fixed each year. The company’s $18 unit product cost is computed as follows: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead ($270,000 4 45,000 units) . . . . . . . $ 4 7 1 6 Absorption costing unit product cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $18 Forty percent of fixed manufacturing overhead consists of wages and salaries; the remainder consists of depreciation charges on production equipment and buildings. 270 Chapter 6 Production and cost data for the two years are: Units produced . . . . . . . . . . Units sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . Year 1 Year 2 45,000 40,000 45,000 50,000 Required: 1. 2. Prepare a variable costing contribution format income statement for each year. Reconcile the absorption costing and the variable costing net operating income figures for each year. PROBLEM 6–20 Variable and Absorption Costing Unit Product Costs and Income Statements; Explanation of Difference in Net Operating Income [LO6–1, LO6–2, LO6–3] High Country, Inc., produces and sells many recreational products. The company has just opened a new plant to produce a folding camp cot that will be marketed throughout the United States. The following cost and revenue data relate to May, the first month of the plant’s operation: Beginning inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units produced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling price per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses: Variable per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed (per month) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing costs: Direct materials cost per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor cost per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead cost per unit . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead cost (per month) . . . . . . . 0 10,000 8,000 $75 $6 $200,000 $20 $8 $2 $100,000 Management is anxious to see how profitable the new camp cot will be and has asked that an income statement be prepared for May. Required: 1. 2. 3. Assume that the company uses absorption costing. a. Determine the unit product cost. b. Prepare an income statement for May. Assume that the company uses variable costing. a. Determine the unit product cost. b. Prepare a contribution format income statement for May. Explain the reason for any difference in the ending inventory balances under the two costing methods and the impact of this difference on reported net operating income. PROBLEM 6–21 Segment Reporting and Decision-Making [LO6–4] Vulcan Company’s contribution format income statement for June is given below: Vulcan Company Income Statement For the Month Ended June 30 Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $750,000 336,000 Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414,000 378,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 36,000 Management is disappointed with the company’s performance and is wondering what can be done to improve profits. By examining sales and cost records, you have determined the following: a. The company is divided into two sales territories—Northern and Southern. The Northern territory recorded $300,000 in sales and $156,000 in variable expenses during June; the remaining sales and variable expenses were recorded in the Southern territory. Fixed expenses of $120,000 and $108,000 are traceable to the Northern and Southern territories, respectively. The rest of the fixed expenses are common to the two territories. Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management b. The company is the exclusive distributor for two products—Paks and Tibs. Sales of Paks and Tibs totaled $50,000 and $250,000, respectively, in the Northern territory during June. Variable expenses are 22% of the selling price for Paks and 58% for Tibs. Cost records show that $30,000 of the Northern territory’s fixed expenses are traceable to Paks and $40,000 to Tibs, with the remainder common to the two products. Required: 1. 2. 3. Prepare contribution format segmented income statements first showing the total company broken down between sales territories and then showing the Northern territory broken down by product line. In addition, for the company as a whole and for each segment, show each item on the segmented income statements as a percent of sales. Look at the statement you have prepared showing the total company segmented by sales territory. What insights revealed by this statement should be brought to the attention of management? Look at the statement you have prepared showing the Northern territory segmented by product lines. What insights revealed by this statement should be brought to the attention of management? PROBLEM 6–22 Prepare and Reconcile Variable Costing Statements [LO6–1, LO6–2, LO6–3] Denton Company manufactures and sells a single product. Cost data for the product are given below: Variable costs per unit: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . $ 7 10 5 3 Total variable cost per unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $25 Fixed costs per month: Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . $315,000 245,000 Total fixed cost per month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $560,000 The product sells for $60 per unit. Production and sales data for July and August, the first two months of operations, follow: July . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . August . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units Produced Units Sold 17,500 17,500 15,000 20,000 The company’s Accounting Department has prepared absorption costing income statements for July and August as presented below: Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . July August $900,000 600,000 300,000 290,000 $ 10,000 $1,200,000 800,000 400,000 305,000 $ 95,000 Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Determine the unit product cost under: a. Absorption costing. b. Variable costing. Prepare contribution format variable costing income statements for July and August. Reconcile the variable costing and absorption costing net operating income figures. The company’s Accounting Department has determined the company’s break-even point to be 16,000 units per month, computed as follows: Fixed cost per month $560,000 _____________________ 5 __________ 5 16,000 units Unit contribution margin $35 per unit 271 272 Chapter 6 “I’m confused,” said the president. “The accounting people say that our break-even point is 16,000 units per month, but we sold only 15,000 units in July, and the income statement they prepared shows a $10,000 profit for that month. Either the income statement is wrong or the break-even point is wrong.” Prepare a brief memo for the president, explaining what happened on the July absorption costing income statement. PROBLEM 6–23 Absorption and Variable Costing; Production Constant, Sales Fluctuate [LO6–1, LO6–2, LO6–3] Tami Tyler opened Tami’s Creations, Inc., a small manufacturing company, at the beginning of the year. Getting the company through its first quarter of operations placed a considerable strain on Ms. Tyler’s personal finances. The following income statement for the first quarter was prepared by a friend who has just completed a course in managerial accounting at State University. Tami’s Creations, Inc. Income Statement For the Quarter Ended March 31 Sales (28,000 units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable expenses: Variable cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses: Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . $1,120,000 $462,000 168,000 630,000 490,000 300,000 200,000 Net operating loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500,000 $ (10,000) Ms. Tyler is discouraged over the loss shown for the quarter, particularly because she had planned to use the statement as support for a bank loan. Another friend, a CPA, insists that the company should be using absorption costing rather than variable costing and argues that if absorption costing had been used the company probably would have reported at least some profit for the quarter. At this point, Ms. Tyler is manufacturing only one product, a swimsuit. Production and cost data relating to the swimsuit for the first quarter follow: Units produced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,000 28,000 Variable costs per unit: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . $3.50 $12.00 $1.00 $6.00 Required: 1. 2. 3. Complete the following: a. Compute the unit product cost under absorption costing. b. Redo the company’s income statement for the quarter using absorption costing. c. Reconcile the variable and absorption costing net operating income (loss) figures. Was the CPA correct in suggesting that the company really earned a “profit” for the quarter? Explain. During the second quarter of operations, the company again produced 30,000 units but sold 32,000 units. (Assume no change in total fixed costs.) a. Prepare a contribution format income statement for the quarter using variable costing. b. Prepare an income statement for the quarter using absorption costing. c. Reconcile the variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes. PROBLEM 6–24 Companywide and Segment Break-Even Analysis; Decision Making [LO6–4, LO6–5] Toxaway Company is a merchandiser that segments its business into two divisions—Commercial and Residential. The company’s accounting intern was asked to prepare segmented income statements that the company’s divisional managers could use to calculate their break-even points and Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management make decisions. She took the prior month’s companywide income statement and prepared the absorption format segmented income statement shown below: Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total Company Commercial Residential $750,000 500,000 250,000 240,000 $ 10,000 $250,000 140,000 110,000 104,000 $ 6,000 $500,000 360,000 140,000 136,000 $ 4,000 In preparing these statements, the intern determined that Toxaway’s only variable selling and administrative expense is a 10% sales commission on all sales. The company’s total fixed expenses include $72,000 of common fixed expenses that would continue to be incurred even if the Commercial or Residential segments are discontinued, $38,000 of fixed expenses that would be avoided if the Residential segment is dropped, and $55,000 of fixed expenses that would be avoided if the Commericial segment is dropped. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Do you agree with the intern’s decision to use an absorption format for her segmented income statement? Why? Based on the intern’s segmented income statement, can you determine how she allocated the company’s common fixed expenses to the Commercial and Residential segments? Do you agree with her decision to allocate the common fixed expenses to the Commercial and Residential segments? Redo the intern’s segmented income statement using the contribution format. Compute the companywide break-even point in dollar sales. Compute the break-even point in dollar sales for the Commercial Division and for the Residential Division. Assume the company decided to pay its sales representatives in the Commercial and Residential Divisions a total monthly salary of $15,000 and $30,000, respectively, and to lower its companywide sales commission percentage from 10% to 5%. Calculate the new break-even point in dollar sales for the Commercial Division and the Residential Division. PROBLEM 6–25 Prepare and Interpret Income Statements; Changes in Both Sales and Production; Lean Production [LO6–1, LO6–2, LO6–3] Starfax, Inc., manufactures a small part that is widely used in various electronic products such as home computers. Operating results for the first three years of activity were as follows (absorption costing basis): Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income (loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 $800,000 580,000 220,000 190,000 $ 30,000 $640,000 400,000 240,000 180,000 $ 60,000 $800,000 620,000 180,000 190,000 $ (10,000) In the latter part of Year 2, a competitor went out of business and in the process dumped a large number of units on the market. As a result, Starfax’s sales dropped by 20% during Year 2 even though production increased during the year. Management had expected sales to remain constant at 50,000 units; the increased production was designed to provide the company with a buffer of protection against unexpected spurts in demand. By the start of Year 3, management could see that inventory was excessive and that spurts in demand were unlikely. To reduce the excessive inventories, Starfax cut back production during Year 3, as shown below: Production in units . . . . . . . . Sales in units . . . . . . . . . . . . Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 50,000 50,000 60,000 40,000 40,000 50,000 273 274 Chapter 6 a. b. c. d. Additional information about the company follows: The company’s plant is highly automated. Variable manufacturing expenses (direct materials, direct labor, and variable manufacturing overhead) total only $2 per unit, and fixed manufacturing overhead expenses total $480,000 per year. Fixed manufacturing overhead costs are applied to units of product on the basis of each year’s production. That is, a new fixed manufacturing overhead rate is computed each year. Variable selling and administrative expenses were $1 per unit sold in each year. Fixed selling and administrative expenses totaled $140,000 per year. The company uses a FIFO inventory flow assumption. Starfax’s management can’t understand why profits doubled during Year 2 when sales dropped by 20% and why a loss was incurred during Year 3 when sales recovered to previous levels. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Prepare a contribution format variable costing income statement for each year. Refer to the absorption costing income statements above. a. Compute the unit product cost in each year under absorption costing. (Show how much of this cost is variable and how much is fixed.) b. Reconcile the variable costing and absorption costing net operating income figures for each year. Refer again to the absorption costing income statements. Explain why net operating income was higher in Year 2 than it was in Year 1 under the absorption approach, in light of the fact that fewer units were sold in Year 2 than in Year 1. Refer again to the absorption costing income statements. Explain why the company suffered a loss in Year 3 but reported a profit in Year 1 although the same number of units was sold in each year. a. Explain how operations would have differed in Year 2 and Year 3 if the company had been using Lean Production, with the result that ending inventory was zero. b. If Lean Production had been used during Year 2 and Year 3 and the predetermined overhead rate is based on 50,000 units per year, what would the company’s net operating income (or loss) have been in each year under absorption costing? Explain the reason for any differences between these income figures and the figures reported by the company in the statements above. PROBLEM 6–26 Restructuring a Segmented Income Statement [LO6–4] Losses have been incurred at Millard Corporation for some time. In an effort to isolate the problem and improve the company’s performance, management has requested that the monthly income statement be segmented by sales region. The company’s first effort at preparing a segmented statement is given below. This statement is for May, the most recent month of activity. Sales Region West Central East Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $450,000 $800,000 $ 750,000 Regional expenses (traceable): Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advertising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Salaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162,900 108,000 90,000 13,500 27,000 17,100 280,000 200,000 88,000 12,000 28,000 32,000 376,500 210,000 135,000 15,000 30,000 28,500 Total regional expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418,500 640,000 795,000 Regional income (loss) before corporate expenses . . . . 31,500 160,000 (45,000) Corporate expenses: Advertising (general) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General administrative expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,000 50,000 32,000 50,000 30,000 50,000 Total corporate expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,000 82,000 80,000 Net operating income (loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (36,500) $ 78,000 $(125,000) Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management Cost of goods sold and shipping expense are both variable; other costs are all fixed. Millard Corporation is a wholesale distributor of office products. It purchases office products from manufacturers and distributes them in the three regions given above. The three regions are about the same size, and each has its own manager and sales staff. The products that the company distributes vary widely in profitability. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. List any disadvantages or weaknesses that you see to the statement format illustrated on the previous page. Explain the basis that is apparently being used to allocate the corporate expenses to the regions. Do you agree with these allocations? Explain. Prepare a new contribution format segmented income statement for May. Show a Total column as well as data for each region. In addition, for the company as a whole and for each sales region, show each item on the segmented income statement as a percent of sales. Analyze the statement that you prepared in part (3) above. What points that might help to improve the company’s performance would you bring to management’s attention? PROBLEM 6–27 Incentives Created by Absorption Costing; Ethics and the Manager [LO6–2] Carlos Cavalas, the manager of Echo Products’ Brazilian Division, is trying to set the production schedule for the last quarter of the year. The Brazilian Division had planned to sell 3,600 units during the year, but by September 30 only the following activity had been reported: Units Inventory, January 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inventory, September 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2,400 2,000 400 The division can rent warehouse space to store up to 1,000 units. The minimum inventory level that the division should carry is 50 units. Mr. Cavalas is aware that production must be at least 200 units per quarter in order to retain a nucleus of key employees. Maximum production capacity is 1,500 units per quarter. Demand has been soft, and the sales forecast for the last quarter is only 600 units. Due to the nature of the division’s operations, fixed manufacturing overhead is a major element of product cost. Required: 1. 2. 3. Assume that the division is using variable costing. How many units should be scheduled for production during the last quarter of the year? (The basic formula for computing the required production for a period in a company is: Expected sales 1 Desired ending inventory 2 Beginning inventory 5 Required production.) Show computations and explain your answer. Will the number of units scheduled for production affect the division’s reported income or loss for the year? Explain. Assume that the division is using absorption costing and that the divisional manager is given an annual bonus based on divisional operating income. If Mr. Cavalas wants to maximize his division’s operating income for the year, how many units should be scheduled for production during the last quarter? [See the formula in (1) above.] Explain. Identify the ethical issues involved in the decision Mr. Cavalas must make about the level of production for the last quarter of the year. PROBLEM 6–28 Basic Segment Reporting; Activity-Based Cost Assignment [LO6–4] Diversified Products, Inc., has recently acquired a small publishing company that offers three books for sale—a cookbook, a travel guide, and a handy speller. Each book sells for $10. The publishing company’s most recent monthly income statement is given on the next page: 275 276 Chapter 6 Product Line Total Company Cookbook Travel Guide Handy Speller Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $300,000 $90,000 $150,000 $60,000 Expenses: Printing costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advertising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Salaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment depreciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales commissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warehouse rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depreciation—office facilities . . . . . . . . . 102,000 36,000 18,000 33,000 9,000 30,000 42,000 12,000 3,000 27,000 13,500 5,400 18,000 3,000 9,000 14,000 3,600 1,000 63,000 19,500 9,000 9,000 3,000 15,000 14,000 6,000 1,000 12,000 3,000 3,600 6,000 3,000 6,000 14,000 2,400 1,000 Total expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,000 94,500 139,500 51,000 Net operating income (loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 15,000 $ (4,500) $ 10,500 $ 9,000 The following additional information is available about the company: Only printing costs and sales commissions are variable; all other costs are fixed. The printing costs (which include materials, labor, and variable overhead) are traceable to the three product lines as shown in the statement above. Sales commissions are 10% of sales for any product. b. The same equipment is used to produce all three books, so the equipment depreciation cost has been allocated equally among the three product lines. An analysis of the company’s activities indicates that the equipment is used 30% of the time to produce cookbooks, 50% of the time to produce travel guides, and 20% of the time to produce handy spellers. c. The warehouse is used to store finished units of product, so the rental cost has been allocated to the product lines on the basis of sales dollars. The warehouse rental cost is $3 per square foot per year. The warehouse contains 48,000 square feet of space, of which 7,200 square feet is used by the cookbook line, 24,000 square feet by the travel guide line, and 16,800 square feet by the handy speller line. d. The general sales cost above includes the salary of the sales manager and other sales costs not traceable to any specific product line. This cost has been allocated to the product lines on the basis of sales dollars. e. The general administration cost and depreciation of office facilities both relate to administration of the company as a whole. These costs have been allocated equally to the three product lines. f. All other costs are traceable to the three product lines in the amounts shown on the statement above. The management of Diversified Products, Inc., is anxious to improve the publishing company’s 5% return on sales. a. Required: 1. 2. Prepare a new contribution format segmented income statement for the month. Adjust allocations of equipment depreciation and of warehouse rent as indicated by the additional information provided. After seeing the income statement in the main body of the problem, management has decided to eliminate the cookbook because it is not returning a profit, and to focus all available resources on promoting the travel guide. a. Based on the statement you have prepared, do you agree with the decision to eliminate the cookbook? Explain. b. Based on the statement you have prepared, do you agree with the decision to focus all available resources on promoting the travel guide? Assume that an ample market is available for all three product lines. (Hint: Compute the contribution margin ratio for each product.) Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management 277 Cases All applicable cases are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. CASE 6–29 Variable and Absorption Costing Unit Product Costs and Income Statements [LO6–1, LO6–2] O’Brien Company manufactures and sells one product. The following information pertains to each of the company’s first three years of operations: Variable costs per unit: Manufacturing: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . Variable selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed costs per year: Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expenses . . . . . $32 $20 $4 $3 $660,000 $120,000 During its first year of operations, O’Brien produced 100,000 units and sold 80,000 units. During its second year of operations, it produced 75,000 units and sold 90,000 units. In its third year, O’Brien produced 80,000 units and sold 75,000 units. The selling price of the company’s product is $75 per unit. Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Assume the company uses variable costing and a FIFO inventory flow assumption (FIFO means first-in first-out. In other words, it assumes that the oldest units in inventory are sold first): a. Compute the unit product cost for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. b. Prepare an income statement for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. Assume the company uses variable costing and a LIFO inventory flow assumption (LIFO means last-in first-out. In other words, it assumes that the newest units in inventory are sold first): a. Compute the unit product cost for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. b. Prepare an income statement for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. Assume the company uses absorption costing and a FIFO inventory flow assumption (FIFO means first-in first-out. In other words, it assumes that the oldest units in inventory are sold first): a. Compute the unit product cost for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. b. Prepare an income statement for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. Assume the company uses absorption costing and a LIFO inventory flow assumption (LIFO means last-in first-out. In other words, it assumes that the newest units in inventory are sold first): a. Compute the unit product cost for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. b. Prepare an income statement for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. CASE 6–30 Service Organization; Segment Reporting [LO6–4] Music Teachers, Inc., is an educational association for music teachers that has 20,000 members. The association operates from a central headquarters but has local membership chapters throughout the United States. Monthly meetings are held by the local chapters to discuss recent developments on topics of interest to music teachers. The association’s journal, Teachers’ Forum, is issued monthly with features about recent developments in the field. The association publishes books and reports and also sponsors professional courses that qualify for continuing 278 Chapter 6 professional education credit. The association’s statement of revenues and expenses for the current year is presented below. Music Teachers, Inc. Statement of Revenues and Expenses For the Year Ended November 30 Revenues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $3,275,000 Expenses: Salaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personnel costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Occupancy costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reimbursement of member costs to local chapters . . . . . . Other membership services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing and paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Postage and shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instructors’ fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920,000 230,000 280,000 600,000 500,000 320,000 176,000 80,000 38,000 Total expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,144,000 Excess of revenues over expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 131,000 The board of directors of Music Teachers, Inc., has requested that a segmented income statement be prepared showing the contribution of each segment to the association. The association has four segments: Membership Division, Magazine Subscriptions Division, Books and Reports Division, and Continuing Education Division. Mike Doyle has been assigned responsibility for preparing the segmented income statement, and he has gathered the following data prior to its preparation. a. Membership dues are $100 per year, of which $20 is considered to cover a one-year subscription to the association’s journal. Other benefits include membership in the association and chapter affiliation. The portion of the dues covering the magazine subscription ($20) should be assigned to the Magazine Subscription Division. b. One-year subscriptions to Teachers’ Forum were sold to nonmembers and libraries at $30 per subscription. A total of 2,500 of these subscriptions were sold last year. In addition to subscriptions, the magazine generated $100,000 in advertising revenues. The costs per magazine subscription were $7 for printing and paper and $4 for postage and shipping. c. A total of 28,000 technical reports and professional texts were sold by the Books and Reports Division at an average unit selling price of $25. Average costs per publication were $4 for printing and paper and $2 for postage and shipping. d. The association offers a variety of continuing education courses to both members and nonmembers. The one-day courses had a tuition cost of $75 each and were attended by 2,400 students. A total of 1,760 students took two-day courses at a tuition cost of $125 for each student. Outside instructors were paid to teach some courses. e. Salary costs and space occupied by division follow: Salaries Space Occupied (square feet) Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magazine Subscriptions . . . . . . . Books and Reports . . . . . . . . . . Continuing Education . . . . . . . . . Corporate staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . $210,000 150,000 300,000 180,000 80,000 2,000 2,000 3,000 2,000 1,000 Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $920,000 10,000 Personnel costs are 25% of salaries in the separate divisions as well as for the corporate staff. The $280,000 in occupancy costs includes $50,000 in rental cost for a warehouse used by the Books and Reports Division for storage purposes. Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management 279 f. Printing and paper costs other than for magazine subscriptions and for books and reports relate to the Continuing Education Division. g. General and administrative expenses include costs relating to overall administration of the association as a whole. The company’s corporate staff does some mailing of materials for general administrative purposes. The expenses that can be traced or assigned to the corporate staff, as well as any other expenses that are not traceable to the segments, will be treated as common costs. It is not necessary to distinguish between variable and fixed costs. Required: 1. 2. Prepare a contribution format segmented income statement for Music Teachers, Inc. This statement should show the segment margin for each division as well as results for the association as a whole. Give arguments for and against allocating all costs of the association to the four divisions. (CMA, adapted) Appendix 6A: Super-Variable Costing In the discussion of variable costing in this chapter we have assumed that direct labor and a portion of manufacturing overhead are variable costs that should be attached to products. However, these assumptions about cost behavior may not be true. For example, it may be easier and more accurate to assume that all manufacturing overhead costs are fixed costs because the variable portion of these costs is insignificant or too difficult to estimate. Furthermore, many companies’ labor costs (including direct and indirect labor) are more fixed than variable due to labor regulations, labor contracts, or management policy. In countries such as France, Germany, Spain, and Japan, management often has little flexibility in adjusting the labor force to changes in business activity. Even in countries such as the United States and the United Kingdom, where management usually has greater latitude to adjust the size of its labor force, many managers choose to view labor as a fixed cost. They make this choice because the cost savings from terminating or laying off employees during a short-term business downturn may be swamped by the negative effects on employee morale and by the costs of later finding and training suitable replacements. Moreover, treating employees as variable costs subtly fosters the attitude that employees are expendable and replaceable like materials rather than unique, difficult-to-replace assets. Super-variable costing is a variation on variable costing in which direct labor and manufacturing overhead costs are considered to be fixed. Super-variable costing classifies all direct labor and manufacturing overhead costs as fixed period costs and only direct materials as a variable product cost. To simplify, in this appendix we also assume that selling and administrative expenses are entirely fixed. Super-Variable Costing and Variable Costing—An Example To illustrate the difference between treating direct labor as a fixed cost (as in supervariable costing) and treating direct labor as a variable cost (as in variable costing), we will use a modified version of the Weber Light Aircraft example from the main body of the chapter. Data concerning the company’s operations appear below: Per Aircraft Selling price . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expense . . . Per Month $100,000 $19,000 $20,000 $74,000 $40,000 LO6–6 Prepare an income statement using super-variable costing and reconcile this approach with variable costing. 280 Chapter 6 Beginning inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units produced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . January February March 0 2 2 0 0 2 1 1 1 2 3 0 The key thing to notice here is that direct labor is a fixed cost—$20,000 per month. Also, notice that Weber Light Aircraft has no variable manufacturing overhead costs and no variable selling and administrative expenses. For the months of January, February, and March, the company’s selling price per aircraft, variable cost per aircraft, monthly production in units, and total monthly fixed expenses never change. The only thing that changes in this example is the number of units sold (January 5 2 units sold; February 5 1 unit sold; March 5 3 units sold). We will first construct the company’s super-variable costing income statements for January, February, and March. Then we will show how the company’s net operating income would be determined for the same months using variable costing if it were incorrectly assumed that direct labor is a variable cost. As you’ll see, both income statements rely on the contribution format. Super-Variable Costing Income Statements To prepare the company’s super-variable costing income statements for each month we follow four steps. First, we compute sales by multiplying the number of units sold by the selling price per unit, which in this example is $100,000 per unit. Second, we compute the variable cost of goods sold by multiplying the number of units sold by the unit product cost, which in this example is the direct materials cost of $19,000 per unit. Third, we compute the contribution margin by subtracting the variable cost of goods sold from sales. Fourth, we compute net operating income by subtracting all fixed expenses from the contribution margin. Using these four steps, Weber’s super-variable costing income statements for each month would appear as shown in Exhibit 6A–1. Notice that the only variable expense is variable cost of goods sold, which is the $19,000 of direct materials per unit sold. For example, in March, the unit product cost of $19,000 is multiplied by three units sold to obtain the variable cost of goods sold of $57,000. The total monthly fixed manufacturing expenses of $94,000 include $20,000 of direct labor and $74,000 of fixed manufacturing overhead. EXHIBIT 6A–1 Super-Variable Costing Income Statements Sales (@ $100,000 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable cost of goods sold (@ $19,000 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses: Fixed manufacturing expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expenses . . . Total fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income (loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . January February March $200,000 $100,000 $300,000 38,000 162,000 19,000 81,000 57,000 243,000 94,000 40,000 134,000 $ 28,000 94,000 40,000 134,000 $ (53,000) 94,000 40,000 134,000 $109,000 Variable Costing Income Statements The variable costing income statements in this example differ from the super-variable costing income statements in one important respect—we will assume that direct labor is incorrectly classified as a variable cost and is included in unit product costs. Because the monthly direct labor cost is $20,000 and two aircraft are produced each month, if direct labor costs are included in unit product costs, then Weber Light Aircraft will assign Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management Sales (@ $100,000 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable cost of goods sold (@ $29,000 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contribution margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed expenses: Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expenses . . . Total fixed expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating income (loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . January February March $200,000 $100,000 $300,000 58,000 142,000 29,000 71,000 87,000 213,000 74,000 40,000 114,000 $ 28,000 74,000 40,000 114,000 $ (43,000) 74,000 40,000 114,000 $ 99,000 $10,000 of direct labor cost to each aircraft that it produces. Thus, the company’s unit product costs under variable costing would be computed as follows: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit product cost . . . . . . . . . . . January February March $19,000 10,000 $29,000 $19,000 10,000 $29,000 $19,000 10,000 $29,000 Given these unit product cost figures, the company’s variable costing income statements would be computed as shown in Exhibit 6A–2. For example, in March, the unit product cost of $29,000 is multiplied by three units sold to obtain the variable cost of goods sold of $87,000. The total fixed manufacturing overhead of $74,000 and total fixed selling and administrative expenses of $40,000 are both recorded as period expenses. Reconciliation of Super-Variable Costing and Variable Costing Income The super-variable costing and variable costing net operating incomes are both $28,000 in January. However, in February, the super-variable costing income is $10,000 lower than the variable costing income and the opposite holds true in March. In other words, the supervariable costing income in March is $10,000 higher than the variable costing income. Why do these two costing methods produce different net operating incomes? The answer can be found in the accounting for direct labor costs. Super-variable costing treats direct labor as a fixed period expense whereas variable costing treats direct labor as a variable product cost. In other words, super-variable costing records the entire direct labor cost of $20,000 as an expense on each month’s income statement. Conversely, variable costing assigns $10,000 of direct labor cost to each unit produced. The $10,000 assigned to each unit produced remains in inventory on the balance sheet until the unit is sold—at which point the $10,000 assigned to it is transferred to variable cost of goods sold on the income statement. Given this background, the super-variable costing and variable costing incomes for each month can be reconciled as follows: Direct labor cost in ending inventory (@ $10,000 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Direct labor cost in beginning inventory (@ $10,000 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Direct labor cost deferred in (released from) inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . January February $ 0 $10,000 0 0 10,000 0 $10,000 $(10,000) $ March $ 0 281 EXHIBIT 6A–2 Variable Costing Income Statements 282 Chapter 6 Super-variable costing net operating income (loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor deferred in (released from) inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable costing net operating income (loss) . . . January February March $28,000 $(53,000) $109,000 0 $28,000 10,000 $(43,000) (10,000) $ 99,000 In January, both costing methods report the same net operating income ($28,000). This occurs because each method expenses $20,000 of direct labor in the income statement. In February, super-variable costing income is $10,000 less than variable costing income. This difference arises because super-variable costing expenses $20,000 of direct labor in the income statement, whereas variable costing expenses only $10,000 of direct labor in the income statement ($10,000 per unit 3 1 unit sold) and defers $10,000 of direct labor on the balance sheet ($10,000 per unit 3 1 unit produced but not sold). In March, super-variable costing income is $10,000 greater than variable costing income. This difference arises because super-variable costing expenses $20,000 of direct labor on the income statement, whereas variable costing expenses $30,000 of direct labor on the income statement ($10,000 per unit 3 3 unit sold). Notice that one of the units sold in March was actually produced in February. Under variable costing, the $10,000 of direct labor attached to the unit produced in February is released from inventory and included in variable cost of goods sold for March. In summary, the key issue considered in this appendix is how a company treats direct labor costs. If a company treats direct labor as a variable cost, the cost system may encourage managers to treat labor costs as an expense to be minimized when sales decline and this may result in reduced morale and eventual problems when business picks up. Second, in practice management may have little ability to adjust the direct labor force even if they wanted to, resulting in a situation in which direct labor costs are in fact fixed. In either case, treating direct labor costs as variable can lead to bad decisions. The supervariable costing approach overcomes this problem by treating labor costs as fixed costs. Glossary (Appendix 6A) Super-variable costing A costing method that classifies all direct labor and manufacturing overhead costs as fixed period costs and only direct materials as a variable product cost. (p. 279) Appendix 6A Exercises and Problems All applicable exercises and problems are available with McGraw-Hill’s Connect® Accounting. EXERCISE 6A–1 Super-Variable Costing Income Statement [LO6–6] Zola Company manufactures and sells one product. The following information pertains to the company’s first year of operations: Variable cost per unit: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed costs per year: Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . $18 $200,000 $250,000 $80,000 Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management The company does not incur any variable manufacturing overhead costs or variable selling and administrative expenses. During its first year of operations, Zola produced 25,000 units and sold 20,000 units. The selling price of the company’s product is $50 per unit. Required: 1. Assume the company uses super-variable costing: a. Compute the unit product cost for the year. b. Prepare an income statement for the year. EXERCISE 6A–2 Super-Variable Costing and Variable Costing Unit Product Costs and Income Statements [LO6–2, LO6–6] Lyons Company manufactures and sells one product. The following information pertains to the company’s first year of operations: Variable cost per unit: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed costs per year: Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . $13 $750,000 $420,000 $110,000 The company does not incur any variable manufacturing overhead costs or variable selling and administrative expenses. During its first year of operations, Lyons produced 60,000 units and sold 52,000 units. The selling price of the company’s product is $40 per unit. Required: 1. 2. 3. Assume the company uses super-variable costing: a. Compute the unit product cost for the year. b. Prepare an income statement for the year. Assume the company uses a variable costing system that assigns $12.50 of direct labor cost to each unit produced: a. Compute the unit product cost for the year. b. Prepare an income statement for the year. Prepare a reconciliation that explains the difference between the super-variable costing and variable costing net operating incomes. EXERCISE 6A–3 Super-Variable Costing and Variable Costing Unit Product Costs and Income Statements [LO6–2, LO6–6] Kelly Company manufactures and sells one product. The following information pertains to each of the company’s first two years of operations: Variable cost per unit: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed costs per year: Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . $12 $500,000 $450,000 $180,000 The company does not incur any variable manufacturing overhead costs or variable selling and administrative expenses. During its first year of operations, Kelly produced 50,000 units and sold 40,000 units. During its second year of operations, it produced 50,000 units and sold 60,000 units. The selling price of the company’s product is $50 per unit. Required: 1. Assume the company uses super-variable costing: a. Compute the unit product cost for Year 1 and Year 2. b. Prepare an income statement for Year 1 and Year 2. 283 284 Chapter 6 2. 3. Assume the company uses a variable costing system that assigns $10 of direct labor cost to each unit produced: a. Compute the unit product cost for Year 1 and Year 2. b. Prepare an income statement for Year 1 and Year 2. Prepare a reconciliation that explains the difference between the super-variable costing and variable costing net operating incomes in Years 1 and 2. PROBLEM 6A–4 Super-Variable Costing and Variable Costing Unit Product Costs and Income Statements [LO6–2, LO6–6] Ogilvy Company manufactures and sells one product. The following information pertains to each of the company’s first three years of operations: Variable cost per unit: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed costs per year: Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . $16 $540,000 $822,000 $370,000 The company does not incur any variable manufacturing overhead costs or variable selling and administrative expenses. During its first year of operations, Ogilvy produced 60,000 units and sold 60,000 units. During its second year of operations, it produced 60,000 units and sold 55,000 units. In its third year, Ogilvy produced 60,000 units and sold 65,000 units. The selling price of the company’s product is $45 per unit. Required: 1. 2. 3. Assume the company uses super-variable costing: a. Compute the unit product cost for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. b. Prepare an income statement for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. Assume the company uses a variable costing system that assigns $9 of direct labor cost to each unit produced: a. Compute the unit product cost for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. b. Prepare an income statement for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3. Prepare a reconciliation that explains the difference between the super-variable costing and variable costing net operating incomes in Years 1, 2, and 3. PROBLEM 6A–5 Super-Variable Costing, Variable Costing, and Absorption Costing Income Statements [LO6–2, LO6–6] Bracey Company manufactures and sells one product. The following information pertains to the company’s first year of operations: Variable cost per unit: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed costs per year: Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . $19 $250,000 $300,000 $90,000 The company does not incur any variable manufacturing overhead costs or variable selling and administrative expenses. During its first year of operations, Bracey produced 20,000 units and sold 18,000 units. The selling price of the company’s product is $55 per unit. Variable Costing and Segment Reporting: Tools for Management Required: 1. 2. 3. 4. Assume the company uses super-variable costing: a. Compute the unit product cost for the year. b. Prepare an income statement for the year. Assume the company uses a variable costing system that assigns $12.50 of direct labor cost to each unit produced: a. Compute the unit product cost for the year. b. Prepare an income statement for the year. Assume the company uses an absorption costing system that assigns $12.50 of direct labor cost and $15.00 of fixed manufacturing overhead cost to each unit produced: a. Compute the unit product cost for the year. b. Prepare an income statement for the year. Prepare a reconciliation that explains the difference between the super-variable costing and variable costing net operating incomes. Prepare another reconciliation that explains the difference between the super-variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes. 285 CHAPTER 7 Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making Managing Product Complexity BUSIN ESS FO CUS LEARNING OBJECTIVES After studying Chapter 7, you should be able to: Managers often understand that increasing the variety of raw material inputs used in their products increases costs. For example, General Mills studied its 50 varieties of Hamburger Helper and concluded that it could lower costs by discontinuing half of them without alienating customers. Seagate studied seven varieties of its computer hard drives and found that only 2% of their parts could be shared by more than one hard drive. The engineers fixed the problem by redesigning the hard drives so that they used more common component parts. Instead of using 61 types of screws to make the hard drives, the engineers reduced the number of screws needed to 19. Eventually all Seagate products were designed so that 75% of their component parts were shared with other product lines. Activity-based costing systems quantify the increase in costs, such as procurement costs, material handling costs, and assembly costs that are caused by inefficient product designs and other factors. ■ Sources: Mina Kimes, “Cereal Cost Cutters,” Fortune, November 10, 2008, p. 24; Erika Brown, “Drive Fast, Drive Hard,” Forbes, January 9, 2006, pp. 92–96. 286 LO7–1 Understand activity-based costing and how it differs from a traditional costing system. LO7–2 Assign costs to cost pools using a first-stage allocation. LO7–3 Compute activity rates for cost pools. LO7–4 Assign costs to a cost object using a second-stage allocation. LO7–5 Use activity-based costing to compute product and customer margins. LO7–6 (Appendix 7A) Prepare an action analysis report using activity-based costing data and interpret the report. Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making 287 his chapter introduces the concept of activity-based costing which has been embraced by a wide variety of organizations including Charles Schwab, Citigroup, Lowe’s, Coca-Cola, J&B Wholesale, Fairchild Semiconductor, Assan Aluminum, Sysco Foods, Fisher Scientific International, and Peregrine Outfitters. Activity-based costing (ABC) is a costing method that is designed to provide managers with cost information for strategic and other decisions that potentially affect capacity and therefore “fixed” as well as variable costs. Activity-based costing is ordinarily used as a supplement to, rather than as a replacement for, a company’s usual costing system. Most organizations that use activity-based costing have two costing systems—the official costing system that is used for preparing external financial reports and the activity-based costing system that is used for internal decision making and for managing activities. This chapter focuses primarily on ABC applications in manufacturing to provide a contrast with the material presented in earlier chapters. More specifically, Chapters 3 and 4 focused on traditional absorption costing systems used by manufacturing companies to calculate unit product costs for the purpose of valuing inventories and determining cost of goods sold for external financial reports. In contrast, this chapter explains how manufacturing companies can use activity-based costing rather than traditional methods to calculate unit product costs for the purposes of managing overhead and making decisions. Chapter 6 had a similar purpose. That chapter focused on how to use variable costing to aid decisions that do not affect fixed costs. This chapter extends that idea to show how activity-based costing can be used to aid decisions that potentially affect fixed costs as well as variable costs. T Activity-Based Costing: An Overview As stated above, traditional absorption costing is designed to provide data for external financial reports. In contrast, activity-based costing is designed to be used for internal decision making. As a consequence, activity-based costing differs from traditional absorption costing in three ways. In activity-based costing: 1. Nonmanufacturing as well as manufacturing costs may be assigned to products, but only on a cause-and-effect basis. 2. Some manufacturing costs may be excluded from product costs. 3. Numerous overhead cost pools are used, each of which is allocated to products and other cost objects using its own unique measure of activity. Each of these departures from traditional absorption costing will be discussed in turn. Nonmanufacturing Costs and Activity-Based Costing In traditional absorption costing, manufacturing costs are assigned to products and nonmanufacturing costs are not assigned to products. Conversely, in activity-based costing, we recognize that many nonmanufacturing costs relate to selling, distributing, and servicing specific products. Thus, ABC includes manufacturing and nonmanufacturing costs when calculating the entire cost of a product rather than just its manufacturing cost. There are two types of nonmanufacturing costs that ABC systems assign to products. First, ABC systems trace all direct nonmanufacturing costs to products. Commissions paid to salespersons, shipping costs, and warranty repair costs are examples of nonmanufacturing costs that can be directly traced to individual products. Second, ABC systems allocate indirect nonmanufacturing costs to products whenever the products have presumably caused the costs to be incurred. In fact, in this chapter, we emphasize this point by expanding the definition of overhead to include all indirect costs—manufacturing and nonmanufacturing. LO7–1 Understand activity-based costing and how it differs from a traditional costing system. 288 Chapter 7 In summary, ABC product cost calculations include all direct costs that can be traced to products and all indirect costs that are caused by products. The need to distinguish between manufacturing and nonmanufacturing costs disappears—which is very different from earlier chapters that focused solely on determining the manufacturing cost of a product. Manufacturing Costs and Activity-Based Costing In traditional absorption costing systems, all manufacturing costs are assigned to products—even manufacturing costs that are not caused by the products. For example, in Chapter 3 we learned that a predetermined plantwide overhead rate is computed by dividing all budgeted manufacturing overhead costs by a measure of budgeted activity such as direct labor-hours. This approach spreads all manufacturing overhead costs across products based on each product’s direct labor-hour usage. In contrast, activity-based costing systems purposely do not assign two types of manufacturing overhead costs to products. Manufacturing overhead includes costs such as the factory security guard’s wages, the plant controller’s salary, and the cost of supplies used by the plant manager’s secretary. These types of costs are assigned to products in a traditional absorption costing system even though they are totally unaffected by which products are made during a period. In contrast, activity-based costing systems do not arbitrarily assign these types of costs, which are called organization-sustaining costs, to products. Activity-based costing treats these types of costs as period expenses rather than product costs. Additionally, in a traditional absorption costing system, the costs of unused, or idle, capacity are assigned to products. If the budgeted level of activity declines, the overhead rate and unit product costs increase as the increasing costs of idle capacity are spread over a smaller base. In contrast, in activity-based costing, products are only charged for the costs of the capacity they use—not for the costs of capacity they don’t use. This provides more stable unit product costs and is consistent with the goal of assigning to products only the costs of the resources that they use.1 Exhibit 7–1 summarizies the two departures from traditional absorption costing that we have discussed thus far. The top portion of the exhibit shows that traditional absorption costing treats all manufacturing costs as product costs and all nonmanufacturing costs as period costs. The bottom portion of the exhibit shows that activity-based costing expands the definition of overhead to include all indirect costs—manufacturing and nonmanufacturing. The overhead costs that are caused by products are allocated to them, whereas any overhead costs that are not caused by products are treated as period costs. It also shows that ABC treats direct nonmanufacturing costs as product costs rather than period costs. Now we turn our attention to the third and final difference between traditional absorption costing and activity-based costing. Cost Pools, Allocation Bases, and Activity-Based Costing Throughout the 19th century and most of the 20th century, cost system designs were simple and satisfactory. Typically, either one plantwide overhead cost pool or a number of departmental overhead cost pools were used to assign overhead costs to products. The plantwide and departmental approaches always had one thing in common—they relied on allocation bases such as direct labor-hours and machine-hours for allocating overhead costs to products. In the labor-intensive production processes of many years ago, direct labor was the most common choice for an overhead allocation base because it represented a large component of product costs, direct labor-hours were closely tracked, and 1 Appendix 3B discusses how the costs of idle capacity can be accounted for as a period cost in an income statement. This treatment highlights the cost of idle capacity rather than burying it in inventory and cost of goods sold. The procedures laid out in this chapter for activity-based costing have the same end effect. Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making 289 EXHIBIT 7–1 Differences between Traditional Absorption Costing and Activity-Based Costing Traditional Absorption Costing: Manufacturing Costs Nonmanufacturing Costs Direct Costs Indirect Costs Indirect Costs Direct Costs Product Costs Product Costs Period Costs Period Costs Activity-Based Costing: Manufacturing Costs Direct Costs Product Costs Nonmanufacturing Costs Indirect Costs Indirect Costs Overhead Costs: Product or Period Costs many managers believed that direct labor-hours, the total volume of units produced, and overhead costs were highly correlated. (Three variables, such as direct labor-hours, the total volume of units produced, and overhead costs, are highly correlated if they tend to move together.) Given that most companies at the time were producing a very limited variety of products that required similar resources to produce, allocation bases such as direct labor-hours, or even machine-hours, worked fine because, in fact, there was probably little difference in the overhead costs attributable to different products. Then conditions began to change. As a percentage of total cost, direct labor began declining and overhead began increasing. Many tasks previously done by direct laborers were being performed by automated equipment—a component of overhead. Companies began creating new products and services at an ever-accelerating rate that differed in volume, batch size, and complexity. Managing and sustaining this product diversity required investing in many more overhead resources, such as production schedulers and product design engineers, that had no obvious connection to direct labor-hours or machine-hours. In this new environment, continuing to rely exclusively on a limited number of overhead cost pools and traditional allocation bases posed the risk that reported unit product costs would be distorted and, therefore, misleading when used for decision-making purposes. Direct Costs Product Costs 290 Chapter 7 Activity-based costing, thanks to advances in technology that make more complex cost systems feasible, provides an alternative to the traditional plantwide and departmental approaches to defining cost pools and selecting allocation bases. The activity-based approach has appeal in today’s business environment because it uses more cost pools and unique measures of activity to better understand the costs of managing and sustaining product diversity. In activity-based costing, an activity is any event that causes the consumption of overhead resources. An activity cost pool is a “bucket” in which costs are accumulated that relate to a single activity measure in the ABC system. An activity measure is an allocation base in an activity-based costing system. The term cost driver is also used to refer to an activity measure because the activity measure should “drive” the cost being allocated. The two most common types of activity measures are transaction drivers and duration drivers. Transaction drivers are simple counts of the number of times an activity occurs, such as the number of bills sent out to customers. Duration drivers measure the amount of time required to perform an activity, such as the time spent preparing individual bills for customers. In general, duration drivers are more accurate measures of resource consumption than transaction drivers, but they take more effort to record. For that reason, transaction drivers are often used in practice. IN BUSINESS A CRITICAL PERSPECTIVE OF ABC Marconi is a Portuguese telecommunications company that encountered problems with its ABC system. The company’s production managers felt that 23% of the costs included in the system were common costs that should not be allocated to products and that allocating these costs to products was not only inaccurate, but also irrelevant to their operational cost reduction efforts. Furthermore, Marconi’s front-line workers resisted the ABC system because they felt it might be used to weaken their autonomy and to justify downsizing, outsourcing, and work intensification. They believed that ABC created a “turkeys queuing for Christmas syndrome” because they were expected to volunteer information to help create a cost system that could eventually lead to their demise. These two complications created a third problem—the data necessary to build the ABC cost model was provided by disgruntled and distrustful employees. Consequently, the accuracy of the data was questionable at best. In short, Marconi’s experiences illustrate some of the challenges that complicate real-world ABC implementations. Source: Maria Major and Trevor Hopper, “Managers Divided: Implementing ABC in a Portuguese Telecommunications Company,” Management Accounting Research, June 2005, pp. 205–229. Traditional cost systems rely exclusively on allocation bases that are driven by the volume of production. On the other hand, activity-based costing defines five levels of activity— unit-level, batch-level, product-level, customer-level, and organization-sustaining—that largely do not relate to the volume of units produced. The costs and corresponding activity measures for unit-level activities do relate to the volume of units produced; however, the remaining categories do not. These levels are described as follows:2 1. Unit-level activities are performed each time a unit is produced. The costs of unitlevel activities should be proportional to the number of units produced. For example, providing power to run processing equipment would be a unit-level activity because power tends to be consumed in proportion to the number of units produced. 2. Batch-level activities are performed each time a batch is handled or processed, regardless of how many units are in the batch. For example, tasks such as placing 2 Robin Cooper, “Cost Classification in Unit-Based and Activity-Based Manufacturing Cost Systems,” Journal of Cost Management, Fall 1990, pp. 4–14. Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making 291 purchase orders, setting up equipment, and arranging for shipments to customers are batch-level activities. They are incurred once for each batch (or customer order). Costs at the batch level depend on the number of batches processed rather than on the number of units produced, the number of units sold, or other measures of volume. For example, the cost of setting up a machine for batch processing is the same regardless of whether the batch contains one or thousands of items. 3. Product-level activities relate to specific products and typically must be carried out regardless of how many batches are run or units of product are produced or sold. For example, activities such as designing a product, advertising a product, and maintaining a product manager and staff are all product-level activities. 4. Customer-level activities relate to specific customers and include activities such as sales calls, catalog mailings, and general technical support that are not tied to any specific product. 5. Organization-sustaining activities are carried out regardless of which customers are served, which products are produced, how many batches are run, or how many units are made. This category includes activities such as heating the factory, cleaning executive offices, providing a computer network, arranging for loans, preparing annual reports to shareholders, and so on. Many companies throughout the world continue to base overhead allocations on direct labor-hours or machine-hours. In situations where overhead costs and direct laborhours are highly correlated or in situations where the goal of the overhead allocation process is to prepare external financial reports, this practice makes sense. However, if plantwide overhead costs do not move in tandem with plantwide direct labor-hours or machine-hours, product costs will be distorted—with the potential of distorting decisions made within the company. DINING IN THE CANYON Western River Expeditions (www.westernriver.com) runs river rafting trips on the Colorado, Green, and Salmon rivers. One of its most popular trips is a six-day trip down the Grand Canyon, which features famous rapids such as Crystal and Lava Falls as well as the awesome scenery accessible only from the bottom of the Grand Canyon. The company runs trips of one or two rafts, each of which carries two guides and up to 18 guests. The company provides all meals on the trip, which are prepared by the guides. In terms of the hierarchy of activities, a guest can be considered as a unit and a raft as a batch. In that context, the wages paid to the guides are a batch-level cost because each raft requires two guides regardless of the number of guests in the raft. Each guest is given a mug to use during the trip and to take home at the end of the trip as a souvenir. The cost of the mug is a unit-level cost because the number of mugs given away is strictly proportional to the number of guests on a trip. What about the costs of food served to guests and guides—is this a unit-level cost, a batchlevel cost, a product-level cost, or an organization-sustaining cost? At first glance, it might be thought that food costs are a unit-level cost—the greater the number of guests, the higher the food costs. However, that is not quite correct. Standard menus have been created for each day of the trip. For example, the first night’s menu might consist of shrimp cocktail, steak, cornbread, salad, and cheesecake. The day before a trip begins, all of the food needed for the trip is taken from the central warehouse and packed in modular containers. It isn’t practical to finely adjust the amount of food for the actual number of guests planned to be on a trip—most of the food comes prepackaged in large lots. For example, the shrimp cocktail menu may call for two large bags of frozen shrimp per raft and that many bags will be packed regardless of how many guests are expected on the raft. Consequently, the costs of food are not a unit-level cost that varies with the number of guests actually on a trip. Instead, the costs of food are a batch-level cost. Source: Conversations with Western River Expeditions personnel. IN BUSINESS 292 Chapter 7 Designing an Activity-Based Costing (ABC) System There are three essential characteristics of a successful activity-based costing implementation. First, top managers must strongly support the ABC implementation because their leadership is instrumental in properly motivating all employees to embrace the need to change. Second, top managers should ensure that ABC data is linked to how people are evaluated and rewarded. If employees continue to be evaluated and rewarded using traditional (non-ABC) cost data, they will quickly get the message that ABC is not important and they will abandon it. Third, a cross-functional team should be created to design and implement the ABC system. The team should include representatives from each area that will use ABC data, such as the marketing, production, engineering, and accounting departments. These cross-functional employees possess intimate knowledge of many parts of an organization’s operations that is necessary for designing an effective ABC system. Furthermore, tapping the knowledge of cross-functional managers lessens their resistance to ABC because they feel included in the implementation process. Time after time, when accountants have attempted to implement an ABC system on their own without top-management support and cross-functional involvement, the results have been ignored. IN BUSINESS IMPLEMENTING ACTIVITY-BASED COSTING IN CHINA Xu Ji Electric Company is publicly traded on China’s Shen Zhen Stock Exchange. From 2001–2003, it successfully implemented an activity-based costing (ABC) system because top-level managers continuously supported the new system—particularly during a challenging phase when the ABC software encountered problems. The ABC adoption was also aided by Xu Ji’s decision to drive the implementation using a top-down approach, which is aligned with the company’s cultural norm of deferring to and supporting the hierarchical chain of command. Xu Ji’s experience is similar to Western ABC implementations that have consistently recognized the necessity of top-level management support. However, contrary to Xu Ji’s experience, many Western managers do not readily support the top-down implementation of new management innovations in their organizations. They prefer to be involved in the decision-making processes that introduce change into their organizations. Source: Lana Y.J. Liu and Fei Pan, “The Implementation of Activity-Based Costing in China: An Innovation Action Research Approach,” The British Accounting Review 39, 2007, pp. 249–264. MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING IN ACTION THE ISSUE Classic Brass, Inc., makes two main product lines for luxury yachts—standard stanchions and custom compass housings. The president of the company, John Towers, recently attended a management conference at which activity-based costing was discussed. Following the conference, he called a meeting of the company’s top managers to discuss what he had learned. Attending the meeting were production manager Susan Richter, the marketing manager Tom Olafson, and the accounting manager Mary Goodman. He began the conference by distributing the company’s income statement that Mary Goodman had prepared a few hours earlier (see Exhibit 7–2): John: Well, it’s official. Our company has sunk into the red for the first time in its history—a loss of $1,250. Tom: I don’t know what else we can do! Given our successful efforts to grow sales of the custom compass housings, I was expecting to see a boost to our bottom line, not a net loss. Granted, we have been losing even more bids than usual for standard stanchions because of our recent price increase, but . . . John: Do you think our prices for standard stanchions are too high? Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making EXHIBIT 7–2 Classic Brass Income Statement Classic Brass Income Statement Year Ended December 31, 2014 Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost of goods sold: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling and administrative expenses: Shipping expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . Marketing expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $3,200,000 $ 975,000 351,250 1,000,000 293 2,326,250 873,750 65,000 510,000 300,000 $ 875,000 (1,250) *The company’s traditional cost system allocates manufacturing overhead to products using a plantwide overhead rate and machine-hours as the allocation base. Inventory levels did not change during the year. Tom: No, I don’t think our prices are too high. I think our competitors’ prices are too low. In fact, I’ll bet they are pricing below their cost. Susan: Why would our competitors price below their cost? Tom: They are out to grab market share. Susan: What good is more market share if they are losing money on every unit sold? John: I think Susan has a point. Mary, what is your take on this? Mary: If our competitors are pricing standard stanchions below cost, shouldn’t they be losing money rather than us? If our company is the one using accurate information to make informed decisions while our competitors are supposedly clueless, then why is our “bottom line” taking a beating? Unfortunately, I think we may be the ones relying on distorted cost data, not our competitors. John: Based on what I heard at the conference that I just attended, I am inclined to agree. One of the presentations at the conference dealt with activity-based costing. As the speaker began describing the usual insights revealed by activity-based costing systems, I was sitting in the audience getting an ill feeling in my stomach. Mary: Honestly John, I have been claiming for years that our existing cost system is okay for external reporting, but it is dangerous to use it for internal decision making. It sounds like you are on board now, right? John: Yes. Mary: Well then, how about if all of you commit the time and energy to help me build a fairly simple activity-based costing system that may shed some light on the problems we are facing? John: Let’s do it. I want each of you to appoint one of your top people to a special “ABC team” to investigate how we cost products. Like most other ABC implementations, the ABC team decided that its new ABC system would supplement, rather than replace, the existing cost accounting system, which would continue to be used for external financial reports. The new ABC system would be used to prepare special reports for management decisions such as bidding on new business. The accounting manager drew the chart appearing in Exhibit 7–3 to explain the general structure of the ABC model to her team members. Cost objects such as products generate activities. For example, a customer order for a custom compass housing requires the activity of preparing a production order. Such an activity consumes resources. A production order uses a sheet of paper and takes time to fill out. And consumption of resources causes costs. The greater the number of sheets used to fill out production orders and 294 Chapter 7 EXHIBIT 7–3 The Activity-Based Costing Model Cost Objects (e.g., products and customers) Activities Consumption of Resources Cost the greater the amount of time devoted to filling out such orders, the greater the cost. Activity-based costing attempts to trace through these relationships to identify how products and customers affect costs. As in most other companies, the ABC team at Classic Brass felt that the company’s traditional cost accounting system adequately measured the direct materials and direct labor costs of products because these costs are directly traced to products. Therefore, the ABC study would be concerned solely with the other costs of the company— manufacturing overhead and selling and administrative costs. The team felt it was important to carefully plan how it would go about implementing the new ABC system at Classic Brass. Accordingly, it broke down the implementation process into five steps: Steps for Implementing Activity-Based Costing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Define activities, activity cost pools, and activity measures. Assign overhead costs to activity cost pools. Calculate activity rates. Assign overhead costs to cost objects using the activity rates and activity measures. Prepare management reports. Step 1: Define Activities, Activity Cost Pools, and Activity Measures The first major step in implementing an ABC system is to identify the activities that will form the foundation for the system. This can be difficult and time-consuming and involves a great deal of judgment. A common procedure is for the individuals on the ABC implementation team to interview people who work in overhead departments and ask them to describe their major activities. Ordinarily, this results in a very long list of activities. The length of such lists of activities poses a problem. On the one hand, the greater the number of activities tracked in the ABC system, the more accurate the costs are likely to be. On the other hand, a complex system involving large numbers of activities is costly to design, implement, maintain, and use. Consequently, the original lengthy list of activities is usually reduced to a handful by combining similar activities. For example, several actions may be involved in handling and moving raw materials—from receiving raw materials on the loading dock to sorting them into the appropriate bins in the storeroom. All of these activities might be combined into a single activity called material handling. When combining activities in an ABC system, activities should be grouped together at the appropriate level. Batch-level activities should not be combined with unit-level Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making 295 activities or product-level activities with batch-level activities and so on. In general, it is best to combine only those activities that are highly correlated with each other within a level. For example, the number of customer orders received is likely to be highly correlated with the number of completed customer orders shipped, so these two batch-level activities (receiving and shipping orders) can usually be combined with little loss of accuracy. At Classic Brass, the ABC team, in consultation with top managers, selected the following activity cost pools and activity measures: Activity Cost Pools at Classic Brass Activity Cost Pool Customer orders . . . . . . . . Product design . . . . . . . . . Order size . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer relations . . . . . . Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity Measure Number of customer orders Number of product designs Machine-hours Number of active customers Not applicable The Customer Orders cost pool will be assigned all costs of resources that are consumed by taking and processing customer orders, including costs of processing paperwork and any costs involved in setting up machines for specific orders. The activity measure for this cost pool is the number of customer orders received. This is a batch-level activity because each order generates work that occurs regardless of whether the order is for one unit or 1,000 units. The Product Design cost pool will be assigned all costs of resources consumed by designing products. The activity measure for this cost pool is the number of products designed. This is a product-level activity because the amount of design work on a new product does not depend on the number of units ultimately ordered or batches ultimately run. The Order Size cost pool will be assigned all costs of resources consumed as a consequence of the number of units produced, including the costs of miscellaneous factory supplies, power to run machines, and some equipment depreciation. This is a unit-level activity because each unit requires some of these resources. The activity measure for this cost pool is machine-hours. The Customer Relations cost pool will be assigned all costs associated with maintaining relations with customers, including the costs of sales calls and the costs of entertaining customers. The activity measure for this cost pool is the number of customers the company has on its active customer list. The Customer Relations cost pool represents a customer-level activity. The Other cost pool will be assigned all overhead costs that are not associated with customer orders, product design, the size of the orders, or customer relations. These costs mainly consist of organization-sustaining costs and the costs of unused, idle capacity. These costs will not be assigned to products because they represent resources that are not consumed by products. It is unlikely that any other company would use exactly the same activity cost pools and activity measures that were selected by Classic Brass. Because of the amount of judgment involved, the number and definitions of the activity cost pools and activity measures used by companies vary considerably. The Mechanics of Activity-Based Costing Step 2: Assign Overhead Costs to Activity Cost Pools Exhibit 7–4 shows the annual overhead costs (both manufacturing and nonmanufacturing) that Classic Brass intends to assign to its activity cost pools. Notice the data in the exhibit are organized by department (e.g., Production, General Administrative, and Marketing). This is because the data have been extracted from the company’s general ledger. General ledgers LO7–2 Assign costs to cost pools using a first-stage allocation. 296 EXHIBIT 7–4 Annual Overhead Costs (Both Manufacturing and Nonmanufacturing) at Classic Brass Chapter 7 Production Department: Indirect factory wages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory equipment depreciation . . . . . . . . . . Factory utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory building lease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Administrative Department: Administrative wages and salaries . . . . . . . . Office equipment depreciation . . . . . . . . . . . Administrative building lease . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marketing Department: Marketing wages and salaries . . . . . . . . . . . . Selling expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $500,000 300,000 120,000 80,000 $1,000,000 400,000 50,000 60,000 510,000 250,000 50,000 300,000 $1,810,000 usually classify costs within the departments where the costs are incurred. For example, salaries, supplies, rent, and so forth incurred in the marketing department are charged to that department. The functional orientation of the general ledger mirrors the presentation of costs in the absorption income statement in Exhibit 7–2. In fact, you’ll notice the total costs for the Production Department in Exhibit 7–4 ($1,000,000) equal the total manufacturing overhead costs from the income statement in Exhibit 7–2. Similarly, the total costs for the General Administrative and Marketing Departments in Exhibit 7–4 ($510,000 and $300,000) equal the marketing and general and administrative expenses shown in Exhibit 7–2. Three costs included in the income statement in Exhibit 7–2—direct materials, direct labor, and shipping—are excluded from the costs shown in Exhibit 7–4. The ABC team purposely excluded these costs from Exhibit 7–4 because the existing cost system can accurately trace direct materials, direct labor, and shipping costs to products. There is no need to incorporate these direct costs in the activity-based allocations of indirect costs. Classic Brass’s activity-based costing system will divide the nine types of overhead costs in Exhibit 7–4 among its activity cost pools via an allocation process called firststage allocation. The first-stage allocation in an ABC system is the process of assigning functionally organized overhead costs derived from a company’s general ledger to the activity cost pools. First-stage allocations are usually based on the results of interviews with employees who have first-hand knowledge of the activities. For example, Classic Brass needs to allocate $500,000 of indirect factory wages to its five activity cost pools. These allocations will be more accurate if the employees who are classified as indirect factory workers (e.g., supervisors, engineers, and quality inspectors) are asked to estimate what percentage of their time is spent dealing with customer orders, with product design, with processing units of product (i.e., order size), and with customer relations. These interviews are conducted with considerable care. Those who are interviewed must thoroughly understand what the activities encompass and what is expected of them in the interview. In addition, departmental managers are typically interviewed to determine how the nonpersonnel costs should be distributed across the activity cost pools. For example, the Classic Brass production manager would be interviewed to determine how the $300,000 of factory equipment depreciation (shown in Exhibit 7–4) should be allocated to the activity cost pools. The key question that the production manager would need to answer is “What percentage of the available machine capacity is consumed by each activity such as the number of customer orders or the number of units processed (i.e., size of orders)?” The results of the interviews at Classic Brass are displayed in Exhibit 7–5. For example, factory equipment depreciation is distributed 20% to Customer Orders, 60% to Order Size, and 20% to the Other cost pool. The resource in this instance is machine time. According to the estimates made by the production manager, 60% of the total available Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making EXHIBIT 7–5 Results of Interviews: Distribution of Resource Consumption across Activity Cost Pools EXHIBIT 7–6 First-Stage Allocations to Activity Cost Pools Exhibit 7–5 shows that Customer Orders consume 25% of the resources represented by the $500,000 of indirected factory wages. 25% 3 $500,000 5 $125,000 Other entries in the table are computed in a similar fashion. 297 298 IN BUSINESS Chapter 7 AN ABC APPLICATION IN THE CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY Researchers from the United States and the Republic of Korea studied how a Korean manufacturer assigned the indirect costs of supplying reinforced steel bars (also called rebar) to various construction projects. The company’s traditional cost system assigned all indirect costs to projects using rebar tonnage as the allocation base. Its ABC system had 10 activities that assigned indirect costs to projects using activity measures such as number of orders, number of sheets, number of distributing runs, number of production runs, and number of inspections. The traditional and ABC systems assigned the following overhead costs to three construction projects called Commercial, High-Rise Condo, and Heavy Civil: Commercial High-Rise Condo Heavy Civil Traditional cost system allocations . . . . . . . . ABC allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 64,587 90,466 $ 50,310 61,986 $91,102 53,548 Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $(25,879) $(11,676) $37,554 Notice that the traditional cost system was undercosting the Commercial and High-Rise Condo projects relative to the ABC system. It was also overcosting the Heavy Civil project by $37,554 when compared to the ABC system. Source: Yong-Woo Kim, Seungheon Han, “Sungwon Shin, and Kunhee Choi, “A Case Study of Activity-Based Costing in Allocation Rebar Fabrication Costs to Projects,” Construction Management and Economics, May 2010, pp. 449–461. machine time was used to actually process units to fill orders. This percentage is entered in the Order Size column. Each customer order requires setting up, which also requires machine time. This activity consumes 20% of the total available machine time and is entered under the Customer Orders column. The remaining 20% of available machine time represents idle time and is entered under the Other column. Exhibit 7–5 and many of the other exhibits in this chapter are presented in the form of Excel spreadsheets. All of the calculations required in activity-based costing can be done by hand. Nevertheless, setting up an activity-based costing system on a spreadsheet or using special ABC software can save a lot of work—particularly in situations involving many activity cost pools and in organizations that periodically update their ABC systems. We will not go into the details of how all of the percentages in Exhibit 7–5 were determined. However, note that 100% of the factory building lease has been assigned to the Other cost pool. Classic Brass has a single production facility. It has no plans to expand or to sublease any excess space. The cost of this production facility is treated as an organization-sustaining cost because there is no way to avoid even a portion of this cost if a particular product or customer were to be dropped. (Remember that organizationsustaining costs are assigned to the Other cost pool and are not allocated to products.) In contrast, some companies have separate facilities for manufacturing specific products. The costs of these separate facilities could be directly traced to the specific products. Once the percentage distributions in Exhibit 7–5 have been established, it is easy to allocate costs to the activity cost pools. The results of this first-stage allocation are displayed in Exhibit 7–6. Each cost is allocated across the activity cost pools by multiplying it by the percentages in Exhibit 7–5. For example, the indirect factory wages of $500,000 are multiplied by the 25% entry under Customer Orders in Exhibit 7–5 to arrive at the $125,000 entry under Customer Orders in Exhibit 7–6. Similarly, the indirect factory wages of $500,000 are multiplied by the 40% entry under Product Design in Exhibit 7–5 to arrive at the $200,000 entry under Product Design in Exhibit 7–6. All of the entries in Exhibit 7–6 are computed in this way. Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making 299 Now that the first-stage allocations to the activity cost pools have been completed, the next step is to compute the activity rates. Step 3: Calculate Activity Rates The activity rates that will be used for assigning overhead costs to products and customers are computed in Exhibit 7–7. The ABC team determined the total activity for each cost pool that would be required to produce the company’s present product mix and to serve its present customers. These numbers are listed in Exhibit 7–7. For example, the ABC team found that 400 new product designs are required each year to serve the company’s present customers. The activity rates are computed by dividing the total cost for each activity by its total activity. For example, the $320,000 total annual cost for the Customer Orders cost pool (which was computed in Exhibit 7–6) is divided by the total of 1,000 customer orders per year to arrive at the activity rate of $320 per customer order. Similarly, the $252,000 total cost for the Product Design cost pool is divided by the total number of designs (i.e., 400 product designs) to determine the activity rate of $630 per design. Note that an activity rate is not computed for the Other category of costs. This is because the Other cost pool consists of organizationsustaining costs and costs of idle capacity that are not allocated to products and customers. The rates in Exhibit 7–7 indicate that on average a customer order consumes resources that cost $320; a product design consumes resources that cost $630; a unit of product consumes resources that cost $19 per machine-hour; and maintaining relations with a customer consumes resources that cost $1,470. Note that these are average figures. Some members of the ABC design team at Classic Brass argued that it would be unfair to charge all new products the same $630 product design cost regardless of how much design time they actually require. After discussing the pros and cons, the team concluded that it would not be worth the effort at the present time to keep track of actual design time spent on each new product. They felt that the benefits of increased accuracy would not be great enough to justify the higher cost of implementing and maintaining the more detailed costing system. Similarly, some team members were uncomfortable assigning the same $1,470 cost to each customer. Some customers are undemanding—ordering standard products well in advance of their needs. Others are very demanding and consume large amounts of marketing and administrative staff time. These are generally customers who order customized products, who tend to order at the last minute, and who change their minds. While everyone agreed with this observation, the data that would be required to measure individual customers’ demands on resources were not currently available. Rather than delay implementation of the ABC system, the team decided to defer such refinements to a later date. Before proceeding further, it would be helpful to get a better idea of the overall process of assigning costs to products and other cost objects in an ABC system. Exhibit 7–8 provides LO7–3 Compute activity rates for cost pools. EXHIBIT 7–7 Computation of Activity Rates 300 Chapter 7 EXHIBIT 7–8 The Activity-Based Costing Model at Classic Brass Direct Materials Direct Labor Overhead Costs (Manufacturing and Nonmanufacturing) $1,810,000 Shipping Costs First-Stage Allocations Traced Traced Traced Customer Orders $320,000 Product Design $252,000 Order Size $380,000 Customer Relations $367,500 Other $490,500 Second-Stage Allocations $320 per order $630 per design Cost Objects: Products, Customer Orders, Customers $19 per MH $1,470 per customer Unallocated a visual perspective of the ABC system at Classic Brass. We recommend that you carefully go over this exhibit. In particular, note that the Other category, which contains organizationsustaining costs and costs of idle capacity, is not allocated to products or customers. Step 4: Assign Overhead Costs to Cost Objects LO7–4 Assign costs to a cost object using a second-stage allocation. The fourth step in the implementation of activity-based costing is called second-stage allocation. In the second-stage allocation, activity rates are used to apply overhead costs to products and customers. First, we will illustrate how to assign costs to products followed by an example of how to assign costs to customers. The data needed by the ABC team to assign overhead costs to Classic Brass’s two products—standard stanchions and custom compass housings—are as follows: Standard Stanchions 1. 2. 3. This product line does not require any new design resources. 30,000 units were ordered during the year, comprising 600 separate orders. Each stanchion requires 35 minutes of machine time for a total of 17,500 machine-hours. Custom Compass Housings 1. 2. 3. 4. This is a custom product that requires new design resources. There were 400 orders for custom compass housings. Orders for this product are placed separately from orders for standard stanchions. There were 400 custom designs prepared. One custom design was prepared for each order. Because some orders were for more than one unit, a total of 1,250 custom compass housings were produced during the year. A custom compass housing requires an average of 2 machine-hours for a total of 2,500 machine-hours. Notice, 600 customer orders were placed for standard stanchions and 400 customer orders were placed for custom compass housings, for a total of 1,000 customer orders. All 400 product designs related to custom compass housings; none related to standard stanchions. Producing 30,000 standard stanchions required 17,500 machine-hours and Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making HOW MUCH DOES IT COST TO HANDLE A PIECE OF LUGGAGE? It costs an airline about $15 to carry a piece of checked luggage from one destination another. The activity “transporting luggage” consists of numerous sub-activities such as tagging bags, sorting them, placing them on carts, transporting bags planeside, loading them into the airplane, and delivering them to carousels and connecting flights. A variety of employees invest a portion of their labor hours “transporting luggage” including ground personnel, check-in agents, service clerks, baggage service managers, and maintenance workers. In total, labor costs comprise $9 per bag. Airlines also spend millions of dollars on baggage equipment, sorting systems, carts, tractors, and conveyors, as well as rental costs related to bag rooms, carousels, and offices. They also pay to deliver misplaced bags to customers’ homes and to compensate customers for lost bags that are never found. These expenses add up to about $4 per bag. The final expense related to transporting luggage is fuel costs, which average about $2 per bag. Many major airlines now charge fees for checked bags. United Airlines expects to collect $275 million annually for its first and second bag fees. Source: Scott McCartney, “What It Costs an Airline to Fly Your Luggage,” The Wall Street Journal, November 25, 2008, p. D1 and D8. producing 1,250 custom compass housings required 2,500 machine-hours, for a total of 20,000 machine-hours. Exhibit 7–9 illustrates how overhead costs are assigned to the standard stanchions and custom compass housings. For example, the exhibit shows that $192,000 of overhead costs are assigned from the Customer Orders activity cost pool to the standard stanchions ($320 per order 3 600 orders). Similarly, $128,000 of overhead costs are assigned from the Customer Orders activity cost pool to the custom compass housings EXHIBIT 7–9 Assigning Overhead Costs to Products 301 IN BUSINESS 302 Chapter 7 ($320 per order 3 400 orders). The Customer Orders cost pool contained a total of $320,000 (see Exhibit 7–6 or 7–7) and this total amount has been assigned to the two products ($192,000 1 $128,000 5 $320,000). Exhibit 7–9 shows that a total of $952,000 of overhead costs is assigned to Classic Brass’s two product lines—$524,500 to standard stanchions and $427,500 to custom compass housings. This amount is less than the $1,810,000 of overhead costs included in the ABC system. Why? The total amount of overhead assigned to products does not match the total amount of overhead cost in the ABC system because the ABC team purposely did not assign the $367,500 of Customer Relations and $490,500 of Other costs to products. The Customer Relations activity is a customerlevel activity and the Other activity is an organization-sustaining activity—neither activity is caused by products. As shown below, when the Customer Relations and Other activity costs are added to the $952,000 of overhead costs assigned to products, the total is $1,810,000. Overhead Costs Assigned to Products Customer orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Order size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtotal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead Costs not Assigned to Products Customer relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtotal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total overhead cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Stanchions Custom Compass Housings Total $192,000 0 332,500 $524,500 $128,000 252,000 47,500 $427,500 $ 320,000 252,000 380,000 952,000 367,500 490,500 858,000 $1,810,000 Next, we describe another example of second-stage allocation—assigning activity costs to customers. The data needed by Classic Brass to assign overhead costs to one of its customers—Windward Yachts—are as follows: Windward Yachts 1. The company placed a total of three orders. a. Two orders were for 150 standard stanchions per order. b. One order was for a single custom compass housing unit. 2. A total of 177 machine-hours were used to fulfill the three customer orders. a. The 300 standard stanchions required 175 machine-hours. b. The custom compass housing required 2 machine-hours. 3. Windward Yachts is one of 250 customers served by Classic Brass. Exhibit 7–10 illustrates how the ABC system assigns overhead costs to this customer. As shown in Exhibit 7–10, the ABC team calculated that $6,423 of overhead costs should be assigned to Windward Yachts. The exhibit shows that Windward Yachts is assigned $960 ($320 per order 3 3 orders) of overhead costs from the Customer Orders activity cost pool; $630 ($630 per design 3 1 design) from the Product Design cost pool; $3,363 ($19 per machine-hour 3 177 machine-hours) from the Order Size cost pool; and $1,470 ($1,470 per customer 3 1 customer) from the Customer Relations cost pool. Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making 303 EXHIBIT 7–10 Assigning Overhead Costs to Customers With second-stage allocations complete, the ABC design team was ready to turn its attention to creating reports that would help explain the company’s first ever net operating loss. Step 5: Prepare Management Reports The most common management reports prepared with ABC data are product and customer profitability reports. These reports help companies channel their resources to their most profitable growth opportunities while at the same time highlighting products and customers that drain profits. We begin by illustrating a product profitability report followed by a customer profitability report. The Classic Brass ABC team realized that the profit from a product, also called the product margin, is a function of the product’s sales and the direct and indirect costs that the product causes. The ABC cost allocations shown in Exhibit 7–9 only summarize each product’s indirect (i.e., overhead) costs. Therefore, to compute a product’s profit (i.e., product margin), the design team needed to gather each product’s sales and direct costs in addition to the overhead costs previously computed. The pertinent sales and direct cost data for each product are shown below. Notice the numbers in the total column agree with the income statement in Exhibit 7–2. Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct costs: Direct materials . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Stanchions Custom Compass Housings Total $2,660,000 $540,000 $3,200,000 $905,500 $263,750 $60,000 $69,500 $87,500 $5,000 $975,000 $351,250 $65,000 Having gathered the above data, the design team created the product profitability report shown in Exhibit 7–11. The report revealed that standard stanchions are profitable, with a positive product margin of $906,250, whereas the custom compass housings are unprofitable, with a negative product margin of $49,500. Keep in mind that the product profitability report purposely does not include the costs in the Customer Relations and Other activity cost pools. These costs, which total $858,000, were excluded from the LO7–5 Use activity-based costing to compute product and customer margins. 304 Chapter 7 EXHIBIT 7–11 Product Margins—Activity-Based Costing report because they are not caused by the products. Customer Relations costs are caused by customers, not products. The Other costs are organization-sustaining costs and unused capacity costs that are not caused by any particular product. The product margins can be reconciled with the company’s net operating loss as follows: Sales (See Exhibit 7–11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total costs (See Exhibit 7–11) . . . . . . . . . . . Product margins (See Exhibit 7–11) . . . . . . Overhead costs not assigned to products: Customer relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net operating loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Stanchions Custom Compass Housings Total $2,660,000 1,753,750 $ 906,250 $540,000 589,500 $ (49,500) $3,200,000 2,343,250 856,750 367,500 490,500 858,000 $ (1,250) Next, the design team created a customer profitability report for Windward Yachts. Similar to the product profitability report, the design team needed to gather data concerning sales to Windward Yachts and the direct material, direct labor, and shipping costs associated with those sales. Those data are presented below: Windward Yachts Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct costs: Direct material costs . . . . . . Direct labor costs . . . . . . . . . Shipping costs . . . . . . . . . . . $11,350 $2,123 $1,900 $205 Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making 305 IN BUSINESS IS ACTIVITY-BASED COSTING STILL BEING USED? Researchers surveyed 348 managers to determine which costing methods their companies use. The table below shows the percentage of respondents whose companies use the various costing methods to assign departmental costs to cost objects such as products. Departments Costing Method Activity-based Standard1 Normal2 Actual3 Other Not allocated Research and Development Product and Process Design Production Sales and Marketing Distribution Customer Service Shared Services 13.0% 17.6% 4.6% 23.1% 1.9% 39.8% 14.7% 20.7% 8.6% 25.0% 0.9% 30.2% 18.3% 42.0% 9.9% 23.7% 0.0% 6.1% 17.3% 18.1% 7.9% 23.6% 0.8% 32.3% 17.2% 28.4% 6.0% 26.7% 0.9% 20.7% 21.8% 18.5% 8.1% 16.9% 1.6% 33.1% 23.0% 23.0% 5.6% 15.9% 2.4% 30.2% 1 Standard costing is used for the variance computations in Chapter 10. Normal costing is used for the job-order costing computations in Chapter 3. 3 Actual costing is used to create the absorption and variable costing income statements in Chapter 6. 2 The results show that 18.3% of respondents use ABC to allocate production costs to cost objects and 42% use standard costing for the same purpose. ABC is used by at least 13% of respondents within all functional departments across the value chain. Many companies do not allocate nonproduction costs to cost objects. Source: William O. Stratton, Denis Desroches, Raef Lawson, and Toby Hatch, “Activity-Based Costing: Is It Still Relevant?” Management Accounting Quarterly, Spring 2009, pp. 31–40. Using these data and the data from Exhibit 7–10, the design team created the customer profitability report shown in Exhibit 7–12. The report revealed that the customer margin for Windward Yachts is $699. A similar report could be prepared for each of EXHIBIT 7–12 Customer Margin—Activity-Based Costing 306 Chapter 7 Classic Brass’s 250 customers, thereby enabling the company to cultivate relationships with its most profitable customers, while taking steps to reduce the negative impact of unprofitable customers. Comparison of Traditional and ABC Product Costs The ABC team used a two-step process to compare its traditional and ABC product costs. First, the team reviewed the product margins reported by the traditional cost system. Then, it contrasted the differences between the traditional and ABC product margins. Product Margins Computed Using the Traditional Cost System Classic Brass’s traditional cost system assigns only manufacturing costs to products— this includes direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead. Selling and administrative costs are not assigned to products. Exhibit 7–13 shows the product margins reported by Classic Brass’s traditional cost system. We will explain how these margins were calculated in three steps. First, the sales and direct materials and direct labor cost data are the same numbers used by the ABC team to prepare Exhibit 7–11. In other words, the traditional cost system and the ABC system treat these three pieces of revenue and cost data identically. Second, the traditional cost system uses a plantwide overhead rate to assign manufacturing overhead costs to products. The numerator for the plantwide overhead rate is $1,000,000, which is the total amount of manufacturing overhead shown on the income statement in Exhibit 7–2. The footnote in Exhibit 7–2 mentions that the traditional cost system uses machine-hours to assign manufacturing overhead costs to products. The Order Size activity in Exhibit 7–7 used 20,000 machine-hours as its level of activity. These same 20,000 machine-hours would be used in the denominator of the plantwide overhead rate, which is computed as follows: Plantwide overhead rate 5 5 Total estimated manufacturing overhead Total estimated machine-hours $1,000,000 20,000 machine-hours 5 $50 per machine-hour Because 17,500 machine-hours were worked on standard stanchions, this product line is assigned $875,000 (17,500 machine-hours 3 $50 per machine-hour) of manufacturing overhead cost. Similarly, the custom compass housings required 2,500 machine-hours, so this product line is assigned $125,000 (2,500 machine-hours 3 $50 per machine-hour) of manufacturing overhead cost. The sales of each product minus its cost of goods sold equals the product margin of $615,750 for standard stanchions and $258,000 for custom compass housings. Notice, the net operating loss of $1,250 shown in Exhibit 7–13 agrees with the loss reported in the income statement in Exhibit 7–2 and with the loss shown in the table beneath Exhibit 7–11. The company’s total sales, total costs, and its resulting net operating loss are the same regardless of whether you are looking at the absorption income statement in Exhibit 7–2, the ABC product profitability analysis depicted on page 304, or the traditional product profitability analysis in Exhibit 7–13. Although the “total pie” remains constant across the traditional and ABC systems, what differs is how the pie is divided between the two product lines. The traditional product margin calculations suggest that standard stanchions are generating a product margin of $615,750 and the custom compass housings a product margin of $258,000. However, these product margins differ Activity-Based Costing: A Tool to Aid Decision Making EXHIBIT 7–13 Product Margins—Traditional Costing System from the ABC product margins reported in Exhibit 7–11. Indeed, the traditional cost system is sending misleading signals to Classic Brass’s managers about each product’s profitability. Let’s explain why. The Differences between ABC and Traditional Product Costs The changes in product margins caused by switching from the traditional cost system to the activity-based costing system are shown below: Product margins—traditional . . . . . . . . . . . . Product margins—ABC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change in reported product margins . . . . . Standard Stanchions Custom Compass Housings $615,750 906,250 $290,500 $ 258,000 (49,500) $(307,500) The traditional cost system overcosts the standard stanchions and consequently reports an artificially low product margin for this product. The switch to an activity-based view of product profitability increases the product margin on standard stanchions by $290,500. In contrast, the traditional cost system undercosts the custom compass housings and reports an artificially high product margin for this product. The switch to activity-based costing decreases the product margin on custom compass housings by $307,500. The reasons for the change in reported product margins between the two costing methods are revealed in Exhibit 7–14. The top portion of the exhibit shows each product’s direct and indirect cost assignments as reported by the traditional cost system in Exhibit 7–13. For example, Exhibit 7–14 includes the following costs for standard stanchions: direct materials, $905,500; direct labor, $263,750; and manufacturing overhead, $875,000. Each of these costs corresponds with those reported in Exhibit 7–13. Notice, the selling and administrative costs of $875,000 are purposely not allocated to products because these costs are considered to be period costs when using traditional costing. Similarly, the bottom portion of Exhibit 7–14 summarizes the direct and indirect cost assignments as reported by the activity-based costing system in Exhibit 7–11. The only new information in Exhibit 7–14 is shown in the two columns of percentages. The first column of percentages shows the percentage of each cost assigned to standard stanchions. For example, the $905,500 of direct materials cost traced to standard stanchions is 92.9% of the company’s total direct materials cost of $975,000. The second column of percentages does the same thing for custom compass housings. 307 308 Chapter 7 EXHIBIT 7–14 A Comparison of Traditional and Activity-Based Cost Assignments Standard Stanchions (a) (a) 4 (c) Amount % Traditional Cost System Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 905,500 263,750 875,000 Total cost assigned to products . . . . . . $2,044,250 92.9% 75.1% 87.5% Custom Compass Housings (b) (b) 4 (c) Amount % $ 69,500 87,500 125,000 7.1% 24.9% 12.5% (c) Total $ 975,000 351,250 1,000,000 2,326,250 $282,000 Selling and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . 875,000 Total cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $3,201,250 Activity-Based Costing System Direct costs: Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indirect costs: Customer orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Order size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total cost assigned to products . . . . . . $ 905,500 263,750 60,000 92.9% 75.1% 92.3% $ 69,500 87,500 5,000 7.1% 24.9% 7.7% $ 975,000 351,250 65,000 192,000 0 332,500 60.0% 0.0% 87.5% 128,000 252,000 47,500 40.0% 100.0% 12.5% 320,000 252,000 380,000 $1,753,750 $589,500 2,343,250 Costs not assigned to products: Customer relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367,500 490,